Home

Avaya BCM50 Configuration Guide

Contents

1. Attribute Value Description Actions Add 1 Select the appropriate SPID 1 or 2 2 Under the Details for SPID table click Add Add Network DN 3 Enter a network DN 4 Click OK 5 Onthe table click in the Call Type field beside the DN you entered 6 Choose the call type for the DN Delete 1 Select the SPID that you want to delete 2 Click Delete 3 Click OK T loops D packet service The D Packet Service panel is the second tab of the loops panels Note D Packet service is only available if your service provider gt provides this Capability This panel enables you to configure D Packet Service to T loops You must have both T loops and S loops configured on the same module to allow this feature Figure 61 illustrates the D Packet Service panel Figure 61 D packet service T loops Details for Loop 703 Settings SPIDs D Packet Service TEls Enable D packet service o TEI Associated loop Add NN40020 603 Chapter 19 BRI ISDN BRI loop properties 193 Table 34 describes each section on the D Packet Service panel Table 34 D packet settings Attribute Value Description Associated loop X01 X04 T loop This is the loop on the BRI module that is configured as the T loop and is connected to the external trunk S loop This is the loop on the BRI module where the device is connected Enabled D packet Service
2. 353 To set up a satellite system for voice mail 354 To setup PRI connection on the System iicet et ette reta avra etu pua td ERR 356 Dialing plan Line pools and line pool codes 357 VOIP OVOIVIBW iis y 4REASAERERERAWAEAUSRTARVEITAERARAKAARRRRRAAAA 363 VOIP trunk galoWayS icisepisatus daentankxatunaniasitasuaezse 367 Configuring VoIP trunk gateways 0 0c eee eee eee 381 VoIP interoperability Gatekeeper configuration 389 Setting up VoIP trunks for fallback 0 000 eee eee eee 391 To add the PSTN route to other Syste innnan 392 To add the PSTN route to the local PSTN lines eseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeenene 392 esa Ue VOIP YOU G st casita Lore Eres Ed Oe XR Epi RE Lb LER FLA HR RC EN Fu De y PRI 392 To assign PSTN line pool to other System s ciasicscnsescisascaresedsdencceadscuceetecanaveineaassenets 392 To assign PSTN line pool to local PSTN lines re tr nr rre reni 393 poro uk deo eee 393 To create destination codes for your fallback route seeeseeeeeees 393 To configure the VoIP schedule for all fallback destination codes 394 To set up the VoIP schedule for routing services seseeseeeeeeeee 395 To activate the VoIP line from the control Set ccceesseeneeeeesseeeeeeeeseeeeeenenseeneetens 396 Toden daba SEIU T 396 Wed04AX E a te ER Rl RERERA GRE ods i
3. 0 000 eee eee eee 256 Using the MCDN access codes to tandem calls 0 00 cece eee 257 Chapter 26 Dialing plan Routing and destination codes 259 PS etic age RUTRUM REND LE RT 260 Destitalion GOUBE uucososes ceo o ti rosak orure RRS Pb E er dea epi 262 Alternate routes for routing schedules 00 20 cee eee eee eee eee 264 Peco Vial TONT cies choca PE UD LETT 265 Chapter 27 Dialing plan System settingS 0 00 cee eee eee eee 267 Common dialing plan setlings siiiiesoe o ahhh RR RERRERER RES 267 DN endih ontani ecco ud desc a penis SOR e dO c Pubs RES aay 270 Received number notes 26sec beds cu er RR X 3G Re beet eee ee ad 271 Tips abpULSDOBSS CONES Louise qup So as deniers We eS E AGRO Ce eti d 272 Call Pat GDEE oua dove bg d dann e aude qu daa dra p drap ub a Gd EARE 278 Chapter 28 Dialing plan Public network 22 2scecc0ccsc Rh rh Rr mun 275 Public dialing plan settings 22 60 zik noxa bor tace Ex ado ues Ra m de Seeds 275 Public Network Settings sccseusxesaucsckax RR 3 SAP ERE Shade 3G dea d 276 Publie network DN Indiis sssotsuo sek peers RARE RGRyC EE 9 hb teed 277 EUTRE MMC ae peg ce E AE T e EEEE 279 Chapter 29 Dialing plan Private network settingS seereeeese 281 Private Network dialing plan settings llli 281 Private Pero SOUINGS aa dec eus kr PPP ERRGER Gd RES T hub dr RR anes 282 Private Network MCDN network PRI SL 1 PRI ETSI VoIP
4. Attribute Value Module type Port Read only All modules These are the port numbers of the physical device Device type Read only All modules This is the type of module Line OOX XXX CTM CTM GATM4 GATM8 Combo DTM Ti1 DTM PRI BRI T The number of lines depends on the module type Call State or Idle State Active Deprovisioned All modules This field indicates whether a module line or DN is in use or even provisioned Version lt read only gt All modules This field indicates the version of firmware running on the module DN XXXX ASM GASM DSM Each port supports one telephone hence one DN record Addons All modules Indicates auxiliar Add on Type Version y items added to the telephony devices or trunks This is a list number This field indicates the type of add on such as a KIM module This field indicates the version of firmware running on the add on device Networking Configuration Guide 112 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources Provisioning module lines loops You can access three provisioning subpanels in Element Manager at by clicking Configuration Resources Telephony Resources The tabbed provisioning panel that appears depends on the type of module that is selected on the Telephony Resources table The provisioning subpanels are as follows e The Provision Line tab panel is used for all trunks except DPNSS and BRI loops e The DPNSS module displays the P
5. Choose the trunk protocol used by your service provider The supported protocols are PRI T1 NI NI 1 and NI 2 DMS 100 DMS 250 AT amp T4ESS SL 1 PRI E1 ETSI QSIG Euro SL 1 Note SL 1 and ETSI QSIG require an MCDN keycode to display BRI Protocol can also be selected on BRI T loops under Configuration Telephony Loops Note Always check the line protocol with the central office NSF Extension Protocol type None WATS ALL PRI The Network Specific Facilities NSF information element is used to request a particular service from the network Settings are based on the type of switch to which the line connects Suggested settings DMS 100 250 NONE Siemens ESWD Lucent 5ESS WATS GTD5 DMS 10 ALL When you select NONE the NSF extension bit is not set for any service When you select WATS the NSF extension bit is set for unbanded OUTWATS calls When you select ALL the NSF extension is always set for all CbC services Appears only for NI protocol User Network PRI When you select SL 1 protocol an additional setting Protocol type appears SL 1 protocol is a private networking protocol Use this protocol to designate a BCM node as a Network controller The default setting is User client In public network configurations the CO is generally considered the Network side or controller Applies to SL 1 protocol only B channel selection sequence Ascending Sequential Descending
6. 0 060 c eee 461 Configuring elatio FOEDE suo da bacca d ebd eu Rr m dd Ra bb CR Ron IG 463 Chapter 61 Data network prerequisites checklist selle 465 NOWO ener PP gaas wwe 4s 465 Dia OHCHpVIC BB veces dad d rdg ox eked MER e be Eu da pde Hees Dea Ri 466 Network ASSSSSIIGNE 14 1344 ERES EREXAXURARG PARURE SURES VERSE RES KR 466 ees qo Lean tedious EO daa bor ca FR dot epus eee oxen 467 System configuration for IP telephony functions 0000 0 eee eae 467 VOM OR uas so DRE a E URP ENTE A Ed SEARS CARP Y VESPPORI PET AP RSS 468 IF telephone TOCOS queses rorat ekia SES S E RERO RES RO Geers duce eee 468 Chapter 62 ee ge ee er RR Cu Ra E eaa Ed 469 ADSL and Ethernet configurations isssosaeue eR he he REL ERR Ex 469 POET DIUI cussarauexperieleeaxeoesp ege tpe Ra qe bdiea Puede d aqu 469 Chapter 63 Router Danal svsascaseddehtita yAeEARKRRAARRMRRARE RAE RAE PLA A 471 Accessia YOU FOUIBE cus p55 e CRPPCRII oder beT S45 658 de SP eT SERS G4 CE 471 Chapter 64 VLAN OVGIVIOW ssor E sees Ee Ra RE sm Ee eu REC ERES I Rn EE Eom 473 Choosing DACP for VLAN occ cesntcchs cmm RR RR S RR ER RR ER A 473 Specifying the site specific options for VLAN 000 cece eee 474 Chapter 65 DHCP OVelVIBW cc indcctcnieviveinterneaiess deetecwicninecnee 475 Understanding DACP Liuuoiosnaedesate Rh uem ERR RR Ra RE REC RR E reae ER nn 475 SECO I BONI iunc onus as tain no a me NER ERE A N S xe o ded 475 Router DR
7. Caution Select the Enable Dial Back Up check box to enable Dial Back up on the router Do not change the other Basic or Advanced Settings Management applications such as SNMP trap dial out Scheduled Log transfer Scheduled Backup and Scheduled CDR records transfer can use automatic dial out over an ISDN or Modem interface To configure the automatic data transfer the administrator must configure a static route with the auto dial out field selected and associate it with the application When data is sent to the destination address the network recognizes the address of the application and triggers the dial out to establish the connection The packets are then sent over the link to the destination Notes The dial out interface must be enabled to configure static routes The disconnect time for the interface must be greater than 60 seconds This is configured on the Link Parameters tab of the selected interface under Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces Auto dial out routes cannot be added if the interface is already manually connected unless the interface is already connected with auto dial out routes configured Networking Configuration Guide 522 Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel To add an automatic dial out interface 1 Create a Modem or ISDN interface See To add an ISDN interface on page 503 or To add the modem interface on page 508 Note If an interface is enabled and configure
8. Chapter 28 Dialing plan Public network The panel described in the following information defines the number planning required for calls exiting the system to the public telephone network The following paths indicate where to access the dialing plan for public network in Element Manager and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration Telephony Dialing Plan Public Network e Telset interface CONFIG gt System Prgrming gt Dialing Plan gt Public Network Panels Subpanels Tasks Feature notes Public dialing plan settings on page 275 Public Network Settings on page 276 Public network DN lengths Adding a DN Prefix for public Outgoing public calls routing on on page 277 dialing on page 278 page 279 Modifying a DN prefix on page 278 Deleting a DN prefix on page 279 Carrier Codes on page 279 Adding a carrier code on page 280 Modifying a carrier code on page 280 Deleting a carrier code on page 280 Configuration notes and tips on page 270 See also Dialing plan System settings on page 267 Dialing plan Private network settings on page 281 Public networking Setting up basic systems on page 289 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about dialing plans Public dialing plan settings The Dialing Plan Public Network panel displays the fields that determine dialing information specific to dialing in or out to a public network from t
9. Figure 72 Carrier code call numbering sequence 9 1 601 555 2222 1 601 555 2222 E 10222 1 601 555 2222 Tips The destination codes 9 and 91 used in the examples cannot be used together If you need the destination code 91 to direct long distance calls you must create a separate set of codes that use local calling routes These codes would be for example 90 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 and 99 You can also use 9 A A represents a wildcard Any Routing schedules and alternate routes It can be less expensive to use another long distance carrier at a different time of day Continuing with the example used in the previous flowchart the lines that supply local service in normal mode are also used for long distance service after 6 p m because that is when rates become competitive For the system to do this automatically you must build another route All the lines used by a route specified by a destination code are busy when a call is made you can program other routes that the system automatically flows the calls to or you can allow the call to overflow directly to the Normal route schedule usually the most expensive route However this only takes effect if an active routing schedule is applied to the line Overflow routing is not available in Normal mode You must create overflow routes for each destination code for which you want to allow overflow routing Networking Configuration Guide 24
10. 284 VoIP specific private network dialing 0 c eee eee ee 285 NN40020 603 Contents 9 ETSI specific network features uoc x sapeskRes RR REGE ERU RR EROR awe 286 Outgoing private calls round icc ichaseused tees ceeded ERG ERRtRRS A WEE 287 Chapter 30 Public networking Setting up basic systems 289 Public networks PBX system S6tUP isseeskeerkuex Rh e EORR RE wea ESEN Ro cae ds 289 Public network DID SysSl mM Lue daa y tortises dirid kunidi ceria 290 Chapter 31 Public networking Tandem calls from private node 293 Programming for tandem dialing 22 2 ma RERO eee toriste ES RE aoe 293 Caller access on a tandem network 0 eee eee eee ees 294 Chapter 32 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP 297 Using MCDN to network with a Meridian system 00000 cece eee 297 Meridian system requirements 000 cece eee te eee 297 Meridian MCDN call features over PRI SL 1 lines liliis else 299 MCDN networking checklist 2 02 icavcegeevi banat RR ER RR Ek en 303 UDPspeciic programming iua n cau xa E dos x Euer aa oce nk EEEN eked Be 304 COP Specie Programmi 55 adip ucpa RR CR Geee ee ti hiia tepki 305 VM programming with Meridian 1 llle 306 Meridian TRO programming x sies seu RR nmm m Romx hem km m Rx 307 An example of a private network with Meridian 1 sels 307 Configuring fallback
11. Local gateway settings include e fallback to circuit switched availability and scope e type of call signaling either directly to the far end system or through a network gatekeeper e if there is a gatekeeper the relevant IP information is noted e akKeepAlive signal timer the protocol the system will use for the gateway must be compatible with remote system or gatekeeper e allowing disallowing VoIP gateway tunnel H 245 messages within H 225 being able to identify unique call signaling and RAS ports Notes about NPI TON aliases for H 323 trunks NPI TON aliases store dialed number prefixes as well as information about the type of number A dialed number can be qualified according to its TON type of number as well as its NPI numbering plan identification Nortel recommends this format over the E 164 format for encoding dialed numbers and aliases registered with a gatekeeper When using a gatekeeper and attempting to place an outgoing VoIP trunk call ensure that the route and dialing plan configuration matches the NPI TON aliases registered by the destination with the gatekeeper These requirements are summarized in Table 79 Table 79 Route and Dialing Plan configurations for NPI TON Route DN Dialing Plan used by calling Alias configured for calling gateway type gateway alias name in Element Manager Public Public PUB lt dialedDigitsPrefix gt Private Private Type None PRI lt dialedDigit
12. Set up a route that contains the PRI fallback lines Route 774 Dialout N A PSTN Line Pool BlocA DN type Private Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan Routing Set up a route that contains the VoIP line pool Route 867 Dialout N A VoIP Line BlocF DN type Private Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Routing Create a destination code that matches the Destination Digit s Destination code 3 Destination code 2 Define the Normal and VoIP shedules Normal Route 774 Absorb 0 digits VoIP Route 867 Absorb 0 digits Configuration gt Telephony gt Scheduled Services Confirm or create a destination code for the PSTN Define Normal and VoIP schedules Destination code 9 Normal Route 009 absorb All digits VoIP Route 009 absorb All digits Activate the VoIP schedule from the control set 3321 2221 FEATURE 873 Making calls through a private VoIP network gateway From a telephone on BCM Ottawa a caller dialing to a telephone on BCM Santa Clara must dial the destination code which includes the destination digits for the BCM Santa Clara remote gateway and the DN of the telephone For example dialing 3322 would connect as follows e 31s the destination code If a suitable level of QoS is available the call is routed through the VoIP trunks and through the remote gateway with a destination digit of 3 The call is sent
13. e NSF Extension None DMS 100 250 switches WATS Siemens ESWD Lucent SESS switches ALL GTD5 and DMS 10 switches e B channel selection sequence choose how B channel resources are selected for call processing Clock Source Determine how the module functions for timing on the network Primary External Secondary External Internal Warning Changing the clock source may disconnect calls N If you change the clock source for your system you may cause your system DTM interface s to reset resulting in dropped calls Choose a suitable time to change the clock source and use the Page feature to inform users of possible service disruptions e Send Name Display select check box to activate outgoing name display OLD Remote Capability MWI SL 1 Select the check box only if connecting to a Meridian 1 or other compatible endpoint with the appropriate MWI package and RCAP set to MWI e Maximum transits SL 1 Default 31 Set the number of times a call will be transferred within the private network before being dropped e CO fail Use the carrier failure standard used by the service provider TIA 5474A TR62411 e Interface levels Choose the loss plan setting supported on the lines ISDN PSTN e Framing Choose the framing format supported by the service provider ESF SF e DSXI build Internal CSU set to OFF Set the distance between the system hardware and the external channel service unit 000 100 100 200
14. G 711 payload size ms 10 20 30 40 50 60 Default 30 the BCM 4 0 Telephony Device Installation Guide N0027269 Incremental payload size check box When enabled the system advertises a variable payload size 40 30 20 10 ms Enable T 38 fax check box Enabled The system supports T 38 fax over IP Disabled The system does not support T 38 fax over IP Caution Operations note Fax tones that broadcast through a telephone speaker may disrupt calls at other telephones using VoIP trunks in the vicinity of the fax machine Here are some suggestions to minimize the possibility of your VoIP calls being dropped because of fax tone interference Locate fax machine away from other telephones Turn the speaker volume on the fax machine to the lowest level or off if that option is available Force G 711 for 3 1k Audio lt check box gt When enabled the system forces the VoIP trunk to use the G 711 codec for 3 1k audio signals such as modem or TTY machines Note This setting can also be used for fax machines if T 38 fax is not enabled on the trunk NN40020 603 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources 125 SIP Settings Figure 32 SIP Settings tab Details for Module Internal Routing Table H323 Settings H323 Media Parameters SIP Settings SIP Media Parameters SIP URI Map Telephony Settings SIP Settings Fallback
15. NN40020 603 497 Chapter 69 Dial Up overview The dial out interfaces on the BCM offer three key services Remote Access allows users at a client station to connect to the BCM across a phone line using Point to Point Protocol PPP This allows a person working from home or from a remote location to connect to the BCM LAN through a modem and a phone line Automatic Dial Out automatically establish a PPP connection to a remote location through a phone line Automatic Dial out can be used for services such as SNMP Trap delivery service Log download Backup download CDR records push Software Updates pulls and the Key Codes file upload WAN Failover is used in conjunction with the Integrated Router The Integrated Router monitors the status of the primary WAN link When the primary WAN link is detected to have failed the Integrated Router will route the traffic to the WAN Failover dial up interface When the WAN link recovers the dialled failover WAN connection is terminated and the IP traffic is then routed over the primary WAN link The primary WAN link is located on the integrated router and the dialup links are located on the CSC card Refer to the following information on Remote Access Automatic Dial Out and WAN failover services Remote Access Service on page 498 Automatic Data Dial Out Service on page 499 To configure Dial In Modem Dial In Parameters panel on page 514 ISDN Dial In Parameters panel on
16. Since the VoIP trunks are configured into line pools you can assign line pool codes to users who have been assigned access to the VoIP trunks However if you intend to set up your system to use fallback so that calls can go out over PSTN if the VoIP trunks are not available you must use routes and destination codes to access the VoIP trunk line pools Local gateway programming The VoIP trunk access point at each system is called a gateway The gateway to your system the local gateway determines how incoming and outgoing calls will be handled The H323 and SIP Media Parameters tabs determine a number of system settings These values need to be coordinated with the other systems on the network to ensure that all features work consistently across the network Media parameters include setting e the order of preferred codecs voice activity detection e jitter buffer size e codec payload size e IP fax transmission availability on the network The local gateway parameters define how the BCM prefers call signaling information to be directed through VoIP trunks Call signaling establishes and disconnects a call If the network has a gatekeeper H 323 trunks only the BCM can request a method for call signaling but whether this request is granted depends on the configuration of the gatekeeper Ultimately the gatekeeper decides which call signaling method to use Networking Configuration Guide 370 Chapter 43 VoIP trunk gateways
17. Some of the settings on this panel also depend on the market profile of the system e Private Network Settings on page 282 Networking Configuration Guide 282 Chapter 29 Dialing plan Private network settings e Private Network MCDN network PRI SL 1 PRI ETSI VoIP on page 284 e ETSI specific network features on page 286 Private Network Settings The settings on the Private Network Settings panel describe the numbering that the system uses to assess an incoming call to determine if the call is destined for your system or needs to be routed elsewhere on the private or public network This panel is illustrated in Figure 88 Note When configuring a private network ensure the numbering plan does not conflict with the public telephone network For example in North America using 1 as an access code in a private network conflicts with the PSTN numbering plan for long distance calls Figure 88 Private Network Settings panel Dialing Plan Private Network Private Network Settings Private Received number length Private Auto DN Private DISA DN Private access code uM Private network type cpp w Private network ID 4 v Location code Private DN length 3 y Table 55 describes each field on this panel Table 55 Private Network Settings Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description Private Network Settings Private Received 2 3 4 5 6 7 number l
18. Call by Call Service Selection on page 108 and Provisioning module lines loops on page 112 If your module supports other types of trunks configure each line record Refer to Configuring lines on page 129 Module parameters list The following contains information about the module parameters that are specific to a module type Refer to Trunk Module Parameters on page 104 for detailed field descriptions Configuring digital and analog loop module parameters e Module mode The mode for the type of line being supported DS CLID Global Legacy e Disconnect Timer Enter the time delay for disconnect supervision for lines supplying supervised external lines This setting must match the CO setting Configuring DTM T1 E1 module parameters Clock Source Determine how the module functions for timing on the network Primary External Secondary External Internal Networking Configuration Guide 84 Chapter 6 Module configuration Trunk modules Warning Changing the clock source may disconnect calls N If you change the clock source for your system you may cause your system DTM interface s to reset resulting in dropped calls Choose a suitable time to change the clock source and use the Page feature to inform users of possible service disruptions e CO fail Use the carrier failure standard used by the service provider TIA 5474 TR62411 e Interface levels Choose the loss plan setting supported on the lin
19. Details for Application Current minimum assigned limit lt read only gt The current minimum assigned for an application Current maximum assigned limit lt read only gt The current maximum assigned for an application Note lt read only gt Indicates any pending changes NN40020 603 81 Chapter 6 Module configuration Trunk modules This following describes the Element Manager headings that define and control the settings for the trunk media bay modules installed on your system The following paths indicate where to access the trunk modules in Element Manager and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration Resources Telephony Resources e Telset interface CONFIG gt Hardware For an overview of the Telephony Resources panel refer to Configuring telephony resources on page 101 Task To confirm settings for the trunk media bay modules installed in the system e Confirm that all prerequisites are complete Refer to Configuring the trunk module parameters on page 83 e Confirm or set module parameters as follows e If your module supports T1 PRI or DASS2 refer to Call by Call Service Selection on page 108 and Provisioning module lines loops on page 112 e For other types of trunk modules configure each line record Refer to Configuring lines on page 129 e Provision modules and confirm auto entry information Refer
20. Fax Fax has a maximum of 2 Each fax uses three DSP resources so if you find that your system is always running low on resources you may want to limit fax to 1 Conf Parties The total number of parties across all simultaneous conferences cannot exceed 18 and a single conference can contain up to 18 parties Conf Mixers A conference mixer allows several conference parties to be mixed into a conference BCM supports up to 9 simultaneous conferences SIP Trunks Because there is no circumstance where the number of SIP trunks on the system would exceed the available resources there is generally no need to modify the resources for this application However if you want to limit the number of SIP trunk connections you can change the maximum value BCM supports a maximum of 12 SIP trunks Digital Trunks Because there is no circumstance where the number of digital trunks on the system would exceed the available resources there is generally no need to modify the resources for this application However if you want to limit the number of digital trunk connections you can change the maximum value BCM supports a maximum of 2 digital trunks Networking Configuration Guide 76 Chapter 4 Application Resources overview NN40020 603 77 Chapter 5 Application Resources panel The application resources panel allows you to modify resources allocated to applications on the BCM While the panel tracks four types of reso
21. Line Access tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 If the system is running with a UDP dialing plan you might want to add the LOC to the DN Refer to Outgoing private calls routing on page 287 The Public OLI is used for CLID over public networks and for tandem calls over private networks that terminate on the public network The number of digits for this field is determined by your local service provider Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt Line Access table Refer to Line Access tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Networking Configuration Guide 210 Chapter 22 Configuring CLID on your system Blocking outgoing name display at the trunks To block outgoing name display at the media bay module level you can configure module records to disable the Send Name display check box select Configuration Resources Telephony Resources Trunk Module Parameters not available for all trunk types Refer to Trunk Module Parameters on page 104 Trunk Module parameters in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Blocking outgoing name display at the telephone ONN is also enabled and disabled from a telephone on a per call basis using FEATURE 819 To allow FEATURE 819 to work correctly you may need to specify an ONN blocking service code The BCM alerts the CO by two methods The method used depends on the type of trunk involved in placing the outgoing call T
22. There are several areas in the interface where you need to configure Call by Call services and the PRI lines that support these services NN40020 603 Chapter 12 Configuring lines PRI 149 To configure Call by Call services and the PRI lines Set up the DTM module to support PRI 2 Setup the Call by Call services selection for the module Refer to Call by Call Service Selection on page 108 Provision the PRI lines Refer to Provisioning module lines loops on page 112 Configure the PRI lines Refer to Configuring lines PRI on page 145 Configure target lines if they are not already configured for your system Refer to Configuring lines Target lines on page 141 6 Assign the PRI line pools to telephones Refer to Line Access Line Pool Access tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 7 Assign the target lines to telephones Refer to Line Access Line Pool Access tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 and Line pools DNs tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Set up routing for the PRI pools Refer to Programming the PRI routing table on page 255 9 Setup call by call limits for the line pools Refer to Line pools Call by Call Limits tab PRI only on page 360 Set up routing scheduling for the PRI line pools Networking Configuration Guide 150 Chapter 12 Configuring lines PRI NN40020 603 151 Chapter 13 Configuring lines T1 E a
23. service code North American ONN blocking 210 service code ONN blocking 188 service selection 108 service setting manual 395 service type call by call network 344 services restriction filters 415 routing 344 set restrictions remote access CoS 444 SF superframe framing format 107 signaling dial mode 133 line programming 134 signaling method 383 silence suppression about 529 comfort noise 533 full duplex 531 half duplex 529 SIP fallback setting 125 Fallback to circuit switched 125 Trunks record jitter buffer 127 SL 1 ETSI QSIG networking 50 313 Gateway Protocol 119 gateway protocol 384 MCDN example 308 MCDN fallback 312 MCDN network 46 319 PRI protocol 262 private networking 38 315 SLR calling and connected name display 212 software update pull automatic 499 source gateway 533 special outgoing calls 223 279 special international access code 285 speech packets silence suppression 529 speed dial system codes 347 square system 33 SRG MCDN Zone ID 286 Virtual Private Network ID 286 Start DN overview 218 static routes automatic dial out 524 stuttered dial tone 425 447 Succession MCDN Zone ID 286 Virtual Private Network ID 286 superframe 107 supervised trunk mode 133 suppression bit 188 210 SWCA park prefix 269 switched digital SDS protocols 110 call by call services 236 switches call by call services support 237 synchronize clock source 544 system dial ton
24. 320 Chapter 34 Private networking MCDN and ETSI network features ISDN Call Connection Limitation The ICCL feature piggybacks on the call initiation request and acts as a check at transit PBX points to prevent misconfigured routes or calls with errors from blocking channels To configure ICCL Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Private Network Locate the Private Network MCDN subpanel Select the Network ICCL check box Click Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources From the Modules table select the required module Locate the Details for Module subpanel Click the Trunk Module Parameters tab o N Oa RAON Enter the Maximum transits in the Maximum transits field Trunk Route Optimization TRO TRO finds the most direct route through the network to send a call between nodes This function occurs during the initial alerting phase of a call To enable TRO 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan 2 Locate the MCDN subpanel 3 Select the TRO check box Trunk Anti tromboning TAT TAT is a call reroute feature that works to find better routes during a transfer of an active call This feature acts to prevent unnecessary tandeming and tromboning of trunks Note TAT is not applicable for alerting calls To enable TAT 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Private Network 2 Locate the MCDN subpanel NN40020 603 Chapter 34 Private
25. NN40020 603 535 Appendix C ISDN overview The following provides some general information about using ISDN lines on your BCM system Detailed information about ISDN is widely available through the internet Your service provider can also provide you with specific information to help you understand what suits your requirements Refer to the following e Welcome to ISDN on page 535 e Services and features for ISDN BRI and PRI on page 537 e ISDN hardware on page 542 e ISDN standards compatibility on page 545 Planning your ISDN network on page 545 e Supported ISDN protocols on page 547 Welcome to ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN technology provides a fast accurate and reliable means of sending and receiving voice data images text and other information through the telecom network ISDN uses existing analog telephone wires and multiplex it into separate digital channels which increases bandwidth ISDN uses a single transport to carry multiple information types What once required separate networks for voice data images or video conferencing is now combined onto one common high speed transport Refer to the following information e Types of ISDN service on page 536 e ISDN layers on page 536 e ISDN bearer capability on page 537 Networking Configuration Guide 536 Appendix C ISDN overview Analog versus ISDN ISDN offers significantly higher bandwidth a
26. Networking Configuration Guide BCMS50 2 0 Business Communications Manager Document Status Standard Document Number NN40020 603 Document Version 01 08 Date May 2008 NORTEL Copyright 2008 Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved All rights reserved The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks Trademarks Nortel the Nortel logo and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks Microsoft MS MS DOS Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Contents 3 Contents COMGING s cc ccs icdiee ccna ted eneeeedancds Gace en sede p aR suus als 3 List OF Procedures cc cocks AEREA ERE E EERETCARRERATA WATER PRAEC 19 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM 0 00 ee eee eee eee eee 25 ADODO QUIS 2 dat SERRE Seta Ea RR Lacks EE Radaaqx ses anne EP 25 PUGS C eet enews TE 25 RUROIOUDR C Era oes ce le ae oh oe dca GG d a cud alain each ek on Ake 25 Dy PC TEES 26 aA 3 5 co 55 S844 Ra EAQUE STORE Eee EX de RR
27. Part A NN40020 603 Chapter 16 Configuring lines T1 DID 171 Figure 53 DID line feature configuration process Part B E L E Subscreen tabs Networking Configuration Guide 172 Chapter 16 Configuring lines T1 DID Configuring DID line features The following procedure describes the fields that need to be confirmed or set for these lines For detailed field descriptions refer to Configuring lines on page 129 To configure DID line features 1 Confirm or change the settings on the Trunk Line Data main panel Trunk Type T 1 DID Name Identify the line or line function Control Set Identify a DN if you are using this line with scheduling Line Type Define as public if the line is shared or as Private To DN if the line is assigned to a specific telephone Prime Set If you want the line to be answered at another telephone if the line is not answered at the target telephone otherwise choose None Pub Received Not applicable Priv Received Not applicable Distinct Ring If you want this line to have a special ring indicate a pattern 2 3 or 4 Use remote package Not applicable 2 Configure the trunk line data Properties tab Dial mode The line service will dictate whether this needs to be set to Pulse or Tone DTMF dialing Loss package Define the appropriate loss gain and impedance settings for the line Signaling Match this choice wit
28. on page 475 e DHCP network scenarios on page 476 e Default configurations on page 478 Understanding DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is a protocol used to assign IP addresses to devices on an IP network dynamically With DHCP each device obtains a new IP address every time it connects to the network DHCP allows a server to keep track of the IP addresses for all IP devices on the network On the BCM DHCP reduces the complexity of configuring IP devices particularly IP phones Not only do IP phones receive an IP address through DHCP they also receive additional information such as gateway and port information DHCP on the BCM The BCM uses DHCP in a variety of ways The core of the BCM has a DHCP server In addition to providing IP addresses to devices on the LAN this DHCP server also provides a DHCP address to the OAM port and to the DSP LAN If you have a BCM with a router the router also has a DHCP server that provides addresses to devices on the LAN If the DHCP server on the embedded router is enabled you will not be able to configure the DHCP settings on the BCM This prevents situations where the two DHCP servers might conflict with one another In addition to these two DHCP components the BCM is also designed to work with other DHCP devices that may already be on the network Router DHCP Server Both the BCM50a and the BCM50e have a DHCP server Networking Configuration Guide 476 Chapter
29. 1 To determine the name to display you add a system speed dial for the number entering a display name Refer to Configuring system speed dial numbers in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Note You can increase the default number of system speed dials from 70 to 255 if you gt want to provide an extensive CLID list 2 To determine how many digits of the dialed number and the system speed dial must match before a name is displayed you set the Clid match length setting to the required number 1 to 8 Networking Configuration Guide 208 Chapter 22 Configuring CLID on your system 3 Inorder for the telephone to display the name it must have Caller ID set for the line assigned to the telephone Refer to Line Access Line Assignment tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 4 Set First display to Name Refer to Capabilities and Preferences main tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Programming line name display incoming Answered calls can display the name incoming number and line name number for calls coming in over lines that allow full CLID Lines are named by their number as a default However you can provide a more descriptive identifier The Name field is located on the main table under Configuration Telephony Lines Trunk Line Data main panel in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 On the Hunt group record Configuration gt Telephony gt
30. 432 services and features 537 SL 1 networking 46 target line busy tone 137 prime line direct dial telephone 270 prime telephone lines 132 Privacy changing status 98 private access code 283 DPNSS 60 335 private auto DN 282 DN received number lengths 232 272 private DISA DN received number lengths 232 272 Private DN length numbering overview 219 private DN length UDP dialing plan 283 private DN route programming 261 private IP address 466 Private length received 276 privateline 131 Private name 212 private network advice of charge end of call AOCE feature 52 321 callers 37 294 calls originating in tandem network 326 dialing plan type 283 DPNSS 1 features 53 DPNSS 1 three party service 54 ETSI QSIG 50 313 services 51 321 MCDN 297 camp on feature 301 ISDN call connection limitation ICCL 47 message waiting indication MWI 299 network call redirection information NCRI 46 319 routing information 310 trunk anti tromboning TAT 49 320 trunk route optimization TRO 48 320 MCDN Meridian Customer Defined Networking break in 301 MCDN ISDN call connection limitation ICCL 320 Meridian MCDN requirements 297 private DN length 283 private network ID 283 remote access 38 316 422 432 UDP location code 283 private network ID numbering overview 219 private network ID dialing plan 283 private network MCDN Zone ID 286 private network virtual ID 286 private networking
31. 552 Index port settings 377 signaling method 383 system configuration prerequisites 467 networking 294 tandem networking 36 using agatekeeper 378 firewalls 377 break in MCDN 301 BRI Basic Rate Interface Answer with DISA 136 auto privacy 135 clock source 106 544 full autohold 135 integrated 187 ISDN 536 mapping to target lines 132 module function 542 overlap receiving 189 programming 92 services and features 537 use auxiliary ringer 135 buffers VoIP trunks 124 127 busy tone fast 425 448 line settings 137 button programming system speed dials 347 bypass call diversion 55 331 C call display services 214 call diversion bypass 55 331 DPNSS 1 55 331 follow me 55 332 immediate 55 331 on busy 55 331 on no reply 55 331 call forward DPNSS Embark switch 53 332 maximum transits 106 call information displaying information 214 call offer DPNSS 58 334 call park analog telephones 231 273 initiating 74 230 273 prefix 230 273 call routing tandem networks 44 call routing See also ARS automatic route selection 234 call signaling local gateway 120 call by call routing 238 call by call services foreign exchange FX 236 International INWATS 236 INWATS 236 Nine hundred 900 236 OUTWATS 236 PRI 540 private 236 public calls 236 routing table 238 service selection 108 238 supporting protocols 148 235 supporting switches 237 switched digital 236 Tie lines 236 calling o
32. Call Diversion On No Reply Bypass Call Diversion and Follow me Diversion These variations are described below Diversion Immediate diverts all calls to an alternate telephone This function is programmed by the user at their telephone Diversion On Busy diverts all calls to an alternate telephone when a telephone is busy This feature is programmed in the Element Manager Diversion On No Reply diverts calls that go unanswered after a specified amount of time This feature is programmed in the Element Manager Bypass Call Diversion overrides all call forward features active on a telephone over a DPNSS line An incoming call to the telephone will not be forwarded instead the telephone will continue to ring as if call forward were not active This feature is used to force a call to be answered at that location Bypass Call Diversion is a receive only feature on BCM and cannot be used from a BCM telephone Networking Configuration Guide 332 Chapter 36 Private networking DPNSS network services UK only Follow me Diversion is also a receive only feature It allows the call forwarded destination to remotely change the BCM call forwarding programming Call Forward All Calls CFAC feature to a different telephone Note BCM CFAC must be active and the destination set PB X system must support the feature For example user A forwards all calls to telephone B a temporary office Later user A moves on to location C
33. CbC services available by switch protocol Table 16 lists the applicable services for the protocol defined on the Module record Table 16 Services available for each PRI protocol Services Available Foreign Switched Nine Hundred Protocol Exchg Inwats 800 Intl 800 Digital SDS 900 NI SID or All By number or All N A N A N A DMS 100 SID or All SID By number or All N A N A N A DMS 250 SID or All SID By number or All N A N A SID or By number or All 4ESS N A By number or All By number By number or All By number or All or All Port details Both trunk and analog modules show port details Ports settings are directly related to the physical ports into which the PSTN lines or telephony devices connect on the media bay modules The station module Port Details panel is illustrated in Figure 25 The trunk module Port Details panel is illustrated in Figure 26 Figure 25 Station module Port Details panel Set Port Details Ports on Module Port DN 0401 Details for Module Internal Device type Version NN40020 603 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources 111 Figure 26 Trunk module Port Details panel Ports on Module Details for Module Internal Trunk Module Parameters Trunk Port Details Table 17 describes the fields shown on the Port Values tab panel Table 17 Port Values tab
34. Dialing Plan gt Private Network e Telset interface CONFIG gt System Prgrming gt Dialing Plan gt Private Network Panels Subpanels Tasks Features Private Network dialing plan settings on page 281 Private Network Settings on page 282 Outgoing private calls routing on page 287 Private Network MCDN network PRI SL 1 PRI ETSI VoIP on page 284 ETSI specific network features on page 286 Configuration notes and tips on page 270 Also refer to e Dialing plan System settings on page 267 e Dialing plan Public network on page 275 Private networking Basic parameters on page 315 Private networking Using destination codes on page 339 Private networking PRI Call by Call services on page 343 Private networking PRI and VoIP tandem networks on page 323 e Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP on page 297 Private networking MCDN and ETSI network features on page 319 Private networking DPNSS network services UK only on page 331 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about dialing plans Private Network dialing plan settings The boxes on the Private Network Settings panel have fields that apply specifically to private network configurations Network configurations can be set up between BCM systems between BCM systems and other call servers such as the Business Communications Manager Meridian 1 or Succession 1000
35. Disabled Enabled module is installed and working Unequipped Disabled module is installed but has been disabled or is down for another reason Unequipped there is no module installed on this bus Devices Set Lists the type of device configured on the bus Lines Low lt digits gt This field indicates the lowest setting for one of the following The range of lines the module VoIP supports The range of loops the module supports BRI The range of DNs the module IP telephony supports High digits This field indicates the highest setting for one of the following The range of lines the module VoIP supports The range of loops the module supports BRI The range of DNs the module IP telephony supports Total XX Lines This field indicates the total number of lines loops or DNs loops or Sets that the module supports Networking Configuration Guide 104 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources Table 13 Telephony Resources table fields Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description Busy 1 X This field indicates the current activity for the devices or lines attached to the module Media bay module panels The following panel tabs appear when you select a module table entry on the Telephony Resources panel Trunk Module Parameters e Port details on page 110 Note that the four trunks connected to the core module are also indicated in the table when they are active These trunks a
36. Displays the user that is currently dialed in Local IP Address lt read only gt Displays the local IP address assigned to the dial in connection Remote IP Address lt read only gt Displays the remote IP address of the dial in connection Callback lt read only gt Displays if callback is enabled for this dial in connection Status lt read only gt The status of the dial in connection ISDN Callback Settings Callback retries lt 1 10 gt The number of attempts made by the BCM to dial out to the remote end during callback Default 3 Callback retry lt 0 360 gt Interval for successive connection attempts for dial out during callback Default 60 seconds PPP Configuration These parameters are passed to PPP stack to manage the PPP connection Idle timeout s lt numeric Idle time period after which PPP will terminate the PPP string gt connection Default 1800 seconds Maximum receive unit 128 1500 The maximum size of the packets that can be received Default 500 Maximum Transmit Unit 128 1500 The maximum size of the packets that will be sent Default 500 Authentication support PAP Supported PPP authentication CHAP Default CHAP Dial In Settings Assigned Lines Assign target lines for ISDN dial in Local IP Address Specification Remote assigned lt check box gt When selected BCM obtains its IP address from the remote end Cleared the BCM will use the addresses specifie
37. H323 Settings on page 118 H323 Media Parameters on page 122 SIP Settings on page 125 SIP Media Parameters on page 126 SIP URI Map on page 127 Tasks Managing modules on page 87 Configuring the trunk module parameters on page 83 Dialing plan Private network settings on page 281 Call security Remote access packages on page 439 Registering Nortel IP telephones in the Telephony Device Installation Guide NN40020 309 Configuring VoIP trunk gateways on page 381 VolP interoperability Gatekeeper configuration on page 389 Setting up VoIP trunks for fallback on page 391 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about user management Networking Configuration Guide 102 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources The top frame of this panel displays a table showing each type of module and the VoIP trunks that are assigned to the system either through connections to a media bay module or by applying the required keycodes VoIP trunks Selecting a table listing provides access to the special settings for each type of resource in tabbed panels that appear in the lower window Telephony Resources table The top level panel shows a list of active modules and VoIP gateways and IP telephone IP network information Click the line for the resource you want to view or configure Figure 22 Telephony Resources table Telephony Resources 4 Enabled Expansion 1 4x1
38. Hunt Groups gt Hunt Groups table you can change the Hunt group Name field from the Hunt group DN to a more logical label for the group Note that only eight characters display Refer to Hunt Groups system setup in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Programming outgoing CLID Telephones can transmit a business name telephone name and number outgoing line identifier for outgoing calls over trunks to switches that support outgoing name and number ONN display or between telephones within the system This following describes the different areas where these capabilities are configured Programming Business name display outgoing Nortel recommends that you use a blank space for the last character of the Business name to act as a separator between the Business name and telephone name Note that if you leave this field blank no name appears To program the Business Name select Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings To program the Business Name Click the field beside Business Name 2 Type a maximum of eight characters for a name Leave a blank space for the last character of the Business name to act as a separator between the Business name and telephone name 3 Other areas that you must program include NN40020 603 Chapter 22 Configuring CLID on your system 209 The OLI number Refer to Line Access tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 The Au
39. ISDN Dial Out Line Assign a Line Pool for ISDN dial out Pool Access WAN failover The Integrated Router monitors the status of the primary WAN link When the primary WAN link is detected to have failed the Integrated Router will route the traffic to the WAN Failover dial up interface if one is configured Refer to WAN Failover Service on page 500 Networking Configuration Guide 514 Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel e Caution Router Settings The following settings must be configured on the router for WAN failover to function Port Speed 115200 Enable Dial Back Up check box selected Do not change any other Basic or Advanced router settings gt Note The WAN failover feature operates only on BCM50a BCM50e BCM50ba or BCM50be Release 2 To assign a modem interface for WAN failover Create and enable a modem interface See To add the modem interface on page 508 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces gt Global Settings From the Failover interface drop down list select the interface to configure as a WAN backup To assign an ISDN interface for WAN failover 1 Create and enable an ISDN interface See To add an ISDN interface on page 503 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces gt Global Settings From the Failover interface drop down list select the interface to configure as a WAN backup Click Add on the ISDN Dial Out Line Poo
40. LD 87 REQ PRT CUST 0 FEAT CDP TYPE DSC Distant Steering Code DSC press enter lists all DSC programmed Check RLI Route Line Index Overlay 86 LD 86 REQ PRT CUST 0 FEAT RLB PLI press enter displays all the RLIs Program new CDP value to route Overlay 87 LD 87 REQ CHG CUST 0 FEAT CDP TYPE DSP DSC enter number enter common BCM system number for example if DNs are 4XX enter 4 RLI enter the RLI that corresponds to the route Networking Configuration Guide 306 Chapter 32 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP VM programming with Meridian 1 If you are using the centralized voice message system from a Meridian 1 system you require the following programming on the M1 M1 programming in LD 17 NASA selected e NCFD selected Verifying NASA is Active e Overlay 22 LD 22 e REQ PRT TYPE ADAN DCH slot number e NASA should be selected If NASA is not on Disable the D Disable the loop Program the D channel channel e Overlay 60 LD Overlay 17 LD 17 e Overlay 96 LD 60 e REQ CHG 96 e REQ CHG e TYPE ADAN REQ CHG e TYPE DISL slot e ADAN CHG DCH slot e TYPE DISDCH number number Keep pressing enter until you get to NASA e TYPE yes TYPE end Verifying NCRD If NCRD is set to no e Overlay 20 LD 20 e Overlay 16 LD 16 e REQ PRT e REQ CHG TYPE TIE e TYPE RDB e CUST 0 e CUST 0 Route Enter the route defin
41. Line pools DNs tab The DNs tab shows you which DNs have this line pool assigned Programming note A line pool must be assigned to a telephone before the user can use the line pool access code or destination code to make a call Figure 110 illustrates the DNs tab Figure 110 DN access to line pools Details for Line Pool Bloc DNs Call by Call Limits DNs with Access to Line Pool s Add Line Pool Access to DN ed Add Table 77 describes the fields on the DNs tab Table 77 Line Pools DN access to line pools fields Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description DNs lt read only gt The telephones assigned to the line pool Also refer to Line Access Line Pool Access tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Actions Add 1 On the Line Pools table select the line pool you want to modify 2 Under the DNs tab table click Add 3 Enter the DN you want to assign to the line pool 4 Click OK to save Networking Configuration Guide 360 Chapter 41 Dialing plan Line pools and line pool codes Table 77 Line Pools DN access to line pools fields Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description Delete 1 On the Line Pools table select the line pool you want to modify 2 On the DNs tab table select the DN you want to delete 3 Under the DNs tab table click Delete 4 Click OK Line pools Call by Call Limits tab PRI only For PRI
42. Line pools and line pool codes The Line Pools panels allow you to assign access codes to line pools e add lines to line pools assign lines pools to telephones and view which telephones have line pool assigned e set Call by Call limits for PRI service types The following paths indicate where to access line pools settings in Element Manager and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Line Pools e Telset interface CONFIG gt System Prgrming gt Access Codes gt Line pool codes Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view Panels Tasks Features and notes Line pools and access codes on Line pool access code notes page 357 on page 358 Line pools DNs tab on page 359 Line pools Call by Call Limits tab PRI only on page 360 Also refer to Configuring lines on page 129 e Dialing plan Routing and destination codes on page 259 e Line Access Line Pool Access tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about DN records Line pools and access codes The panel in the top frame displays settings that are configured on other panels The only setting you can modify on this table is the access code number Figure 109 illustrates this panel Networking Configuration Guide 358 Chapter 41 Dialing
43. Location Code DN length gt Example if dialing string is 6 393 2222 then set private DN to 8 e Program the DestCodes for AccessCode plus the ESN absorb the AccessCode the other nodes Example For AccessCode 6 DestCode 6393 Absorb 1 M1 UDP programming e Private Access Code Overlay 86 LD 86 To change Private Access REQ PRT Code CUST 0 Overlay 86 LD 86 FEAT ESN REQ CHG CUST 0 FEAT ESN keep pressing until you reach the AC1 prompt At the AC1 prompt make your choice e Check UDP programming Overlay 90 LD 90 REQ PRT CUST 0 FEAT NET TYPE LOC LOC press enter all the programmed location codes are listed HLOC is the home location of the M1 e Program UDP values to Overlay 90 LD 90 route REQ CHG CUST 0 FEAT NET TYPE AC1 LOC enter a number RLI enter the RLI corresponding to the route NN40020 603 Chapter 32 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP 305 CDP specific programming BCM CDP programming Private Dialing Plan Private Access Code unique code Type CDP Private DN length lt system DN length gt PNI lt number assigned from M1 1 127 gt Program the DestCodes for the other nodes use Steering code as part of dial string M1 CDP programming PNI LD 16 RDB PNI in M1 programming LD 15 Net PNI in M1 programming set to PNI of Switch Distant Steering Codes Overlay 87
44. MCDN private access code 283 special calls 257 Networking Configuration Guide 564 Index MCDN Meridian Customer Defined Networking specialcalls 232 MCDN special route codes 261 outgoing calls 287 private services call 540 private call by call services 236 process map access headings 427 439 programming ISDN BRI 92 lines 90 protocol ISDN supported 547 loop programming 188 PRI lines 105 remote gateway 385 protocols T 38 401 PSTN public switched telephone network analog access lines AAL settings 108 PSTN fallback 373 384 activating VoIP schedule 395 configuring 373 destination codes 393 dialed digits 391 MCDN networking 312 PRI line 398 scheduling 395 public auto DN 276 DN received number lengths 232 272 public data network see PDN 525 public DISA DN received number lengths 232 272 public DN length setting 221 Public DN lengths numbering overview 219 Public DN route programming 261 public IP address 466 public length received 276 public line 131 public network callers 37 294 code 277 dialing plan 254 dialing plan programming 221 public DN lengths 221 public network code 277 public network plan 277 to tandem network 325 public network dialing plan 277 public networking outgoing calls 223 279 public service calls 540 Public call by call services 236 Q QoS MCDN networking 312 QoS monitor enabled 398 remote gateway 385 QSIG loop programming protocol 188 private net
45. NN40020 603 Chapter 28 Dialing plan Public network 279 Deleting a DN prefix Note Dialing prefixes are used system wide for users to make calls Delete gt prefixes with caution 1 On the Public Network DN Lengths panel click the DN prefix you want to delete 2 Click Delete 3 Click OK on the confirmation dialog Outgoing public calls routing Outgoing public calls from within the system typically have the routes set to Public Refer to Setting up a destination for local calling on page 249 The NPI TON gets sent as Unknown Unknown The public called number length is based on the Public DN lengths table in the Public networks dialing plan MCDN trunks also allow public call types when tandeming calls from another system on the private network Some of these systems use specific call types that the BCM needs to recognize to pass on correctly Also refer to Using the MCDN access codes to tandem calls on page 257 Type of call NPI TON BCM prepend access code BCM monitor display Local E164 Local Local access code 9 E 164 Subscriber National E164 National National access code X1 E 164 National Special calls Private Special Special access code 9 international 911 etc Carrier Codes The Carrier Codes table allows you to enter a maximum of five carrier code prefixes e You can define up to five carrier codes Entries may be predefined for a specific country profile but you can remove these defau
46. Part B es Yes Configuring DPNSS line features The following procedure describes the fields that need to be confirmed or set for these lines For detailed field descriptions refer to Configuring lines on page 129 1 Confirm or change the settings on the Trunk Line Data main panel e Trunk type DPNSS e Name Identify the line or line function e Control Set Identify a DN if you are using this line with scheduling e Line type Define how the line will be used If you are using routing ensure it is put into line pool A to O Networking Configuration Guide 184 Chapter 18 Configuring lines DPNSS lines Prime Set If you want the line to be answered at another telephone if the line is not answered at the target telephone otherwise choose None Pub Received Not applicable Priv Received Not applicable Distinct ring If you want this line to have a special ring indicate a pattern 2 3 4 or None Use remote package If this line is used for remote call ins or is part of a private network ensure you specify a valid package 2 Configure the trunk line data Properties tab Answer mode If this line is used for remote call ins determine how you want the line to answer automatically or requiring more user input Use auxiliary ringer If your system is equipped with an external ringer you can enable this setting to allow this line to ring at the external ringer Full autohold
47. QoS Quality of Service is technology that determines the maximum acceptable amount of latency and balances that with the quality of the VoIP connection BCM and network routers use QoS to ensure that real time critical IP packets such as voice packets are given higher routing and handling priority than other types of data packets Silence suppression Silence suppression technology identifies the periods of silence in a conversation and stops sending IP speech packets during those periods Telco studies show that in a typical telephone conversation only about 36 to 40 of a full duplex conversation is active When one party in the conversation is quiet for more than a few hundredths of a second voice packet transmission is suppressed until the party starts talking again This is half duplex There are important periods of silence during speaker pauses between words and phrases By applying silence suppression average bandwidth use is reduced by the same amount This reduction in average bandwidth requirements develops over a 20 to 30 second period as the conversation switches from one direction to another Refer to Silence suppression on page 529 Codecs The algorithm used to compress and decompress voice over IP networks and VoIP trunks is embedded in a software entity called a codec COde DECcode Refer to Codec rates on page 549 for a listing of the supported codes and their transmission rates The G 711 Codec samples
48. Telephony Dialing Plan The public private Auto DN is cleared if the corresponding Received Number Length is changed e Public Private DISA DN The length of the DISA DNs are the same as the Public or Private Received number length specified under Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan The public private DISA DN is cleared if the corresponding Received number length is changed Using the MCDN access codes tandem calls Three special codes exist specifically for programming over PRI and VoIP trunks that are using the MCDN protocol and which connect to a call server systems that use specific call codes for special call types such as the Meridian 1 M1 The purpose of the codes is to allow easier programming of the call server systems when calls are tandemed through a BCM to the local PSTN NN40020 603 Chapter 24 Dialing plans 233 Calls tandeming to the public network through the private network need to retain their dialing protocol throughout the private network This means that the BCM node receives a call from an MI node tagged as a local call and recognizes the call intended for the public network but also recognizes the call that needs to maintain the local call tag until it gets to the BCM node that is directly connected to the PSTN This is accomplished by ensuring that the destination code which starts with this access code passes the call on using the route designated with the correct call type Figure 70 chart
49. The embedded router supplies DHCP information as well as the vendor information for IP sets If the reserved IP address for the BCM matches the S1 or S2 address and is changed the VoIP information changes as well If the S1 or S2 IP address have been set manually and are different from the BCM address these addresses are not updated For example a system has a BCM LAN IP address of 47 166 50 108 an S1 IP address of 47 50 22 34 and an S2 IP address of 47 166 50 108 If the BCM LAN IP address is changed the S2 IP address changes as well because it had matched the BCM LAN IP address The S1 IP address does not change because it had been set manually Whenever the BCM LAN IP address changes the IP sets eventually detect this and reset themselves if they are using DHCP If they are manually configured then each set must be re configured to point to the new BCM IP address They will get the new VoIP information from the embedded router which provides them with the new IP address for the BCM Default configurations The DHCP component is designed with an automatic configuration that should work in most environments If the BCM includes a router the router is by default the DHCP Server The core module is by default a DHCP client It attempts to obtain its IP address over DHCP The core module DHCP Server setting is by default set to automatic The result of the DHCP client s request determines the functionality of the DHCP Server
50. This allows telephones to put a line on hold if the user picks up another line or starts to dial out on another line Voice Message Center If the system is using a remote voice mail select the center configured with the contact number 3 Setthe restriction and remote package scheduling Restrictions tab Line restrictions Enter a valid restriction filter for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of outgoing calls Remote Packages Enter a valid remote access package for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of incoming calls from remote users or private networks 4 Assign the lines to DNs Assigned DNs tab If you have configured the DNs and know to which telephones the line needs to be assigned you can enter those DNs here The DN record also can be used to assign lines and line pools for these lines Appearance type Choose Appr or Appr amp ring if the telephone has an available button otherwise choose Ring only Model 7000 and 7100 telephones have no programmable buttons so this must be set to Ring only Model 7000 phones supported in Europe only VMsg set When activated an indicator on the telephone appears when a message from a remote voice mail system is waiting Check with your system administrator for the system voice mail setup before changing this parameter 5 Suggested next steps Dialing plan Dialing plan System setti
51. To add the modem interface Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces 2 On the Dial out Interfaces tab click Add The Add Dial Up Interface dialog box appears 3 Select Modem from the Interface type drop down list NN40020 603 Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel 509 Enter a logical name in the Interface name field Select the Automatic dialout check box to use this interface for scheduled service Refer to Creating an automatic dial out interface on page 521 6 Click OK The interface appears in the Dial out Interfaces table Enabling the modem interface An interface must be enabled to function as a backup connection If the BCM experiences a primary connection failure it will dial out using the dial up interface configured as the backup See WAN failover on page 513 To enable the modem interface Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces On the Dial out Interfaces tab select the modem On the Link Parameters tab enter the Dial out number for the modem A OO N LR On the Dial out Interfaces table select the Enable check box for the modem The interface is now enabled To disable the modem interface 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces 2 On the Dial out Interfaces tab select the modem to disable 3 Onthe Dial out Interfaces tab clear the Enable check box next to the modem Connecting a modem interface Interfaces can be connect
52. VoIP trunks which connect through the LAN or WAN Target lines which are internal channels that provide direct dial capability Name maximum of seven Identify the line in a way that is meaningful to your system alphanumeric characters such as by the type of line and line pool or the DN it is attached to in the case of target lines Control Set DN control telephone DN Enter a telephone DN for a telephone that you want to use Default 221 default Start DN to turn service off or on for other telephones using this line The control telephone must have the line assigned or must be assigned to the line pool the line is in Refer to Line Access Line Pool Access tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Tips External lines and telephones must be programmed to use one of the Scheduled Services Ringing Restriction and Routing Services For maximum flexibility Nortel recommends that you create two different control telephones one for the lines and one for the telephones You can turn on a service manually or automatically for all external lines from an assigned control telephone However you cannot combine schedules A service can only be active as normal service or one of the six schedules at any one time Several schedules can be active at one time but they must use different services Line Type Public Private to Pool A to O BlocA to BlocF Define how the line is used in relatio
53. and Redirection Customizing the DPNSS routing service You can customize the routing service using the following restrictions e Direct Inward Access DIA lines allow incoming calls on private circuits to be directed to telephones without going through the normal call reception Each DIA line is assigned to one or more extensions and is given a distinct Private Received number When someone on another system on the network dials the Private Received number on a DPNSS line the BCM system checks all received digits compares the digits to an internal table and routes the call to the appropriate DIA line All extensions programmed to have access to that DIA line will then alert for the incoming call e Dialing restrictions can be added to lines in line pools Filters can restrict the use of the line to specific area codes e You can use host system signaling codes External call codes in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 as part of the dial out for a route Routing can also be used as an alternate method for a direct dial digit For example create a destination code 0 and program the number of the internal or external destination as the dial out Digit absorption should be set to 1 Because overflow routing directs calls using alternate line pools a call may be affected by different line restrictions when it is handled by overflow routing NN40020 603 339 Chapter 37 Private networking Using destination codes
54. call display MCDN 261 name and number blocking 210 private network calls 287 public network calls 223 279 outgoing calls 385 Outwats PRI 540 OUTWATS call by call services 236 overflow routing 243 252 VoIP fallback routing 244 253 overflow setting 395 overlap receiving 189 overrides dialing restrictions 416 P page remote 422 431 park prefix numbering overview 220 SWCA 269 park prefix access codes 269 parked call retrieving 269 password calls answered with DISA 276 283 CoS 423 443 CoS programming 444 using DISA 420 427 pause insert into dialing sequence F78 261 PBX NN40020 603 563 DPNSS 1 networking 52 system diagram 33 289 port disable enable 87 port settings 377 ports firewalls 377 legacy networks 377 preferred codec 123 126 prerequisites IP telephones 468 keycodes 467 MI IPT MCDN 312 network devices 466 system configuration 467 PRI private networking 37 297 SL 1 networking 319 PRI Primary Rate Interface 911 dialing 541 available services per protocol 110 B channel selection sequence 105 call by call service selection 108 call by call services 148 235 clock source 106 dialing plan routing table 255 ETSI QSIG hardware settings 51 314 hardware 542 ISDN 536 MCDN fallback 312 MCDN network dialing 283 MWI remote capability MCDN 300 NSF extension 105 private networking 315 protocol 105 protocol type 105 remote access 431 remote access Auto DN or DISA DN 422
55. in between is transparent to the end nodes which behave as if they are interacting through a router Typically the edge devices connecting the branches of a corporation to the ISP use VPN in this mode BCM is compatible with the Nortel Services Edge Router formerly known as Shasta 5000 and the following versions of the Contivity VPN Client e V_05_01 e V05 1I e V 0601 e V 0602 e V07 0I The following describes configuring the tunnel portion of BCM using IPSec Networking Configuration Guide 526 Appendix A VPN overview IPsec offers the following features e Branch Office support that allows you to configure an IPSec tunnel connection between two private networks e Support for IP address translation over encapsulation packet by packet authentication e Strong encryption and token codes NN40020 603 Appendix A VPN overview 527 IPSec Nortel and other third party vendors support the IPsec tunneling protocol IPsec is an emerging standard that offers a strong level of encryption DES and Triple DES integrity protection MD5 and SHA and the IETF commended Internet Security Association amp Key Management Protocol ISAKMP and Oakley Key Determination Protocols Encryption All of the following encryption methods ensure that the packets have come from the original source at the secure end of the tunnel Note that some of the encryption types will not appear on some non US models that are restricted by US
56. line pool access code constraints 358 programming 234 network example 398 numbering overview 220 plan overview 218 setting line type 131 VoIP trunk routing 391 line programming ANI number 136 answer mode 136 answer with DISA 136 auto privacy 135 control set 131 dial mode 133 DNIS number 136 full autohold 135 ifbusy 137 line type 131 link atCO 134 loss packages 97 133 name 131 prime set 132 private line 131 public line 131 received 132 redirect to 137 restrictions 93 signaling 134 telco features 94 trunk mode 133 use auxiliary ringer 135 use remote package 138 line type 131 line set restrictions remote access CoS 444 lines changing the name 213 identifying 90 numbering 39 programming overview 98 voice message center 137 link at CO loop start analog lines 134 code F71 261 signal 134 link parameters ISDN 506 507 modem 510 511 local access code MCDN 285 calling routing 249 calls destination codes 249 e 164 outgoing calls 223 279 local access code 285 local gateway Call Signaling 120 gatekeeper IP 384 Gatekeeper IP 120 Gateway Protocol 119 gateway protocol 384 Registration TTL 121 384 location code numbering overview 219 UDP dialing plan 283 long distance call routes 250 using CoS password 447 dedicated trunks 250 long tones dialing code F808 261 loop disconnect timer 106 loop programming blocking state 188 overlap receiving 189 protocol 188 sampling 188 Loop start
57. redirect to 137 loop start Networking Configuration Guide 560 Index analog auto privacy 135 digital auto privacy 135 loop start analog answer with DISA 136 dial mode 133 full autohold 135 link atCO 134 loss packages 133 trunk mode 133 use auxiliary ringer 135 loop start digital answer with DISA 136 dial mode 133 full autohold 135 trunk mode 133 use auxiliary ringer 135 loop start trunk disconnect supervision remote access 421 430 remote access from public network 421 430 loops MWI PRI MCDN loops 106 loss packages line programming 133 loss gain settings 97 M MI PRI loops for MWI 106 MI Host node 106 MI IPT gateway type 311 maintaining security 424 446 maintenance enabling the module 87 making calls VoIP trunks 399 malicious call identification ETSI network 322 maximum CLI per line 212 maximum length dialing restrictions 416 maximum transits transits maximum 106 MCDN break in 301 PRI protocol 239 protocol 37 MCDN Meridian Customer Defined Networking camp on feature 301 CDP programming specifics 303 creating SL 1 or VoIP networks 356 DN types routing 261 gateway type 311 ISDN call connection limitation ICCL 47 320 local access code 285 MI IPT requirements 312 media bay module settings 309 Meridian system requirements 297 message waiting indication MWI 299 national access code 285 network 46 319 checklist 303 example 308 features 299 network call redi
58. select the interface to disconnect Click Disconnect A confirmation dialog box will appear 4 Click Yes To delete an ISDN interface Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces Clear the Enable check box Click the ISDN interface you want to delete Click Delete Click Yes The interface is deleted a A O N NN40020 603 Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel 505 ISDN Dial out Channel Characteristics Figure 137 ISDN Dial out Interface Channel Characteristics tab Details for Interface isdn2 Channel Characteristics Channel Characteristics Link Parameters IP Address Specification ISDN2 3456789 Channel Dial out Number Alternate Number Line Type Negotiate Line Type B4K Table 110 ISDN Dial out Interface Channel Characteristics fields Attribute Value Description Channel lt read only gt There are two ISDN channels available for dial out ISDN1 and ISDN2 These channels are assigned automatically Dial out Number lt numeric string gt Enter the primary phone number to use to make an ISDN connection If needed include area codes and all necessary digits to dial an external number The phone number must contain only numerical digits no alphabetical or other characters are allowed Default blank Alternate Number lt numeric string gt Alternate phone number if the Primary Phone number is unreachable
59. to reset resulting in dropped calls Choose a suitable time to change the clock source and use the Page feature to inform users of possible service disruptions Send Name Select or clear PRI BRI Display QSIG When you select this check box the system sends a specified outgoing name display OLI from the calling telephone Appears only for Protocols SL 1 NI DMS 100 DMS 250 or PRI QSIG Remote Select or clear PRI Capability MWI Use this setting to indicate MWI compatibility on the specific loop s that you are using to connect to the central voice mail system on a Meridian 1 that has the MWI package installed with the RCAP setting set to MWI Appears only for SL 1 protocol Host node M1 Embark IDPX DNPSS DSM DPNSS cards connected to Embark switches have a different way of handling call diversion therefore when you provision a DTM for DPNSS you must indicate what type of switch the lines are connected to When you select the Embark switch calls are diverted using the Call Forwarding feature instead of call diversion Local Number Length DPNSS This number allows the system to determine how many digits to read on an incoming call to determine that the call is meant for this system Maximum Transits Default 31 PRI Indicate the maximum number of times that a call will be transferred within the SL 1 network before the call is dropped Protocol must be set
60. while one speaker is talking the other speaker is listening a half duplex conversation The following figure shows the peak bandwidth requirements for one call on a half duplex link with silence suppression enabled Because the sender and receiver alternate the use of the shared channel the peak bandwidth requirement is equal to the full transmission rate Only one media path is present on the channel at one time Figure 147 One call on a half duplex link with silence suppression Tx Ax S 5g 3 2 cz ir ea Conversation Hello Fred this is Susan Do you have a minute C NNSRSSNSSSNSRNNNSRRENSNNSNRSNSRNNNR M S Fred Here SSS SNS Hi Sure Corve eT Bandwidth used i Channel Link max Voice frames sent even when speaker is silent NN40020 603 Appendix B Silence suppression 531 The effect of silence suppression on half duplex links is therefore to reduce the peak and average bandwidth requirements by approximately 50 of the full transmission rate Because the sender and receiver are sharing the same bandwidth this effect can be aggregated for a number of calls The following figure shows the peak bandwidth requirements for two calls on a half duplex link with silence suppression enabled The peak bandwidth for all calls is equal to the sum of the peak bandwidth for each individual call In this case that 1s twice the full transmission rate for the two calls Figure 148 Two calls on
61. 16 To configure the Modem IP Address Specification 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces Click the Modem interface to configure Click the IP Address Specification tab The IP Address Specification panel appears See Figure 141 4 Configure the IP Address Parameters Refer to the information in Table 114 Global Settings panel The Global Settings panel contains the specification of the Failover Interface This is a drop down list of the Dial out interfaces that do not have Automatic dial out selected Refer to WAN failover on page 513 The Global settings panel is shown in Figure 142 NN40020 603 Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel 513 Figure 142 Global Settings panel Dial Up Interfaces Dial out Interfaces Global Settings Modem Dial In Parameters ISDN Dial In Parameters Automatic WAN Failover Failover interface None w ISDN Dial Out Line Pool Acce Line Pools Pool Add Table 115 Global Settings field Attribute Value Description Automatic WAN Failover Failover interface drop down list Select one of the existing dial out interfaces that is not selected for Automatic dialout Dial out interfaces are provisioned from the Dial out Interfaces tab in this same section Default None Note This parameter will not be displayed if the particular BCM does not have the hardware to provide Failover support
62. 2 System telephony networking overview 47 Figure 6 Network call redirection path Meridian 1 with Meridian Mail SL 1 MCDN Elephone A m ie Original call m e Call forwarded to Meridian Mail Blephone B ISDN Call Connection Limitation The ICCL ISDN Call Connection Limitation feature piggybacks on the call initiation request and acts as a check at transit PBX points to prevent misconfigured routes or calls with errors from blocking channels Also refer to ISDN overview on page 535 This feature adds a transit tandem counter to a call setup message This counter is compared at each transit PBX with a value programmed into the transit PBX in a range from 0 to 31 If the call setup counter is higher than the PBX value the call will be blocked at the PBX system and cleared back to the network This prevents calls from creating loops that tie up lines Figure 7 demonstrates how a call might loop through a network if the system is not set up with ICCL Networking Configuration Guide 48 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview Figure 7 Call loop on system without ICCL Meridian 1 Meridian 1 Telephone A bd Trunk Route Optimization Trunk Route Optimization TRO finds the most direct route through the network to send a call between nodes This function occurs during the initial alerting phase of a call To set BCM configurations Select Configuration
63. 20 30 3 58 88 23467 193 33 30 40 4 58 98 19600 145 00 40 50 5 58 108 17280 116 00 50 60 6 58 118 15733 96 67 60 70 7 58 128 14629 82 86 70 80 8 58 138 13800 72 50 80 90 9 58 148 13156 64 44 90 100 10 58 158 12640 58 00 100 G 711 80 1 58 138 110400 72 50 10 160 2 58 218 87200 36 25 20 240 3 58 298 79467 24 17 30 320 4 58 378 75600 18 13 40 400 5 58 458 73280 14 50 50 480 6 58 538 71733 12 08 60 560 7 58 618 70629 10 36 70 640 8 58 698 69800 9 06 80 720 9 58 778 69156 8 06 90 Networking Configuration Guide 550 Appendix D Codec rates Table 120 RTP over IP Sheet 2 of 2 Payload Overhead Latency bytes Packets frame bytes Total bytes bytes s Overhead msec 800 10 58 858 68640 7 25 100 G 723 24 3 58 82 21867 173 33 30 20 3 58 78 20800 160 00 30 Note These are the default values NN40020 603 551 Index Numerics 2 way DID PRI 541 4ESS available services 110 call by call services support 237 PRI protocol 239 262 7100 external code 269 A absorbed length 242 394 395 access remote public network 447 access codes default table 230 line pool 234 local access code 285 national access code 285 numbering plan overview 218 private access code 283 programming 276 282 special international access code 285 adaptive sampling 188 add automatic dial out interface 522 ISDN interfa
64. 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600 or 600 700 feet Configuring BRI Loop module parameters Clock Source Determine how the module functions for timing on the network Primary External Secondary External Internal When the BRI module is configured as a T loop this parameter is configured under Configuration Telephony Loops Warning Changing the clock source may disconnect calls N If you change the clock source for your system you may cause your system BRI S T interface s to reset resulting in dropped calls Choose a suitable time to change the clock source and use the Page feature to inform users of possible service disruptions Send Name Display BRI QSIG select check box to activate outgoing name display OLD When the BRI module is configured as a T loop this parameter is configured under Configuration gt Telephony gt Loops Networking Configuration Guide 86 Chapter 6 Module configuration Trunk modules Configuring DASS2 module parameters Clock Source Determine how the module functions for timing on the network Primary External Secondary External Internal Warning Changing the clock source may disconnect calls N If you change the clock source for your system you may cause your system DTM interface s to reset resulting in dropped calls Choose a suitable time to change the clock source and use the Page feature to inform users of possible service disruptions Configuring Eur
65. 272 Call Park codes on page 273 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about dialing plans Common dialing plan settings The fields on the Dialing Plan General panel allow you to set some general system dialing features Figure 85 illustrates the Dialing Plan General panel Networking Configuration Guide 268 Chapter 27 Dialing plan System settings Figure 85 Dialing Plan General settings and Direct Dial devices Dialing Plan General Global Settings Change DN DN length intercom 3 x Change DN Dialing timeout 4 y Access Codes Park prefix 1 R Extemalcode Mone v Direct Dial Direct Dial digit 0 v Direct Dial Sets Set Type Internal DN External No Facility 1 Internal 221 N A 2 None N N None N A N N 4 None NZA None N N N Table 51 describes each field on this panel Table 51 Private and Public received numbers Sheet 1 of 3 Attribute Value Description Global Settings DN length 3 to 7 This is the length of the locally dialed telephones This field is set intercom when the system is first configured Warning If this system is part of a private network ensure that this value is compatible with the network requirements This value is mirrored in the Private Received Number Length field for target lines Refer to Configuring lines Target lines on page 141 Note If the DN length
66. 272 before choosing a number Change DN Change DN button Click to reidentify a DN Note This method is faster than reidentifying the DNs under Configuration Telephony Dialing Plan DNs Direct Dial Direct Dial digit None The Direct dial digit setting allows you to specify a single one digit system wide digit to call a direct dial telephone number Define Direct Dial S ets Refer to To define a direct dial set on page 270 Set 1 5 This tags the telephone to the system Type Internal This is the type of number for the direct dial set External None Internal DN DN The DN number of the telephone to be designated as the direct dial set Internal sets External No external dial The actual phone number including destination codes of the string direct dial set External sets Networking Configuration Guide 270 Chapter 27 Dialing plan System settings Table 51 Private and Public received numbers Sheet 3 of 3 Attribute Value Description Facility Line The facility to be used to route the call to a direct dial set that you Pool A O define with an external number Use prime line Note If you choose Use prime line ensure that prime line is not E routing assigned to the intercom buttons for your telephones When able prime line is assigned as an intercom button it chooses the first available line pool assigned to the telephone to make a call
67. 541 enable abus 87 ISDN interface 503 media bay module port 87 modem 509 encapsulating security payload See ESP 528 encryption DES 527 IPSec 527 levels 527 methods 527 Equal Access Identifier Code CAC See carrier codes 234 ESF extended superframe framing format 107 ESP encapsulating security payload encryption protocol 528 ETSI name and number blocking 210 ETSI Euro PRI protocol 239 262 ETSI QSIG advice of charge end of call AOCE 52 321 malicious call identification MCID 322 network diversion 322 services 51 321 networking 50 313 PRI protocol 239 262 private networking 37 315 private outgoing calls 287 exception See dialing restriction 416 extended superframe See ESF 107 external 394 395 direct dial digit 269 E amp M networking 340 route programming 261 external code access codes 269 numbering overview 220 external lines access code conflicts 232 272 external routing feature codes 261 external voice mail access programming 94 F facility direct dial programming 270 failover dial up settings 512 ISDN interface 514 modem interface 514 WAN _ 500 513 514 fallback activating VoIP schedule 395 configuring for PSTN 373 destination codes 393 MCDN 311 MCDN networking 312 scheduling 395 using PRI line 398 Fallback to circuit switched 118 125 fast busy tone 425 448 fax over IP See FoIP 379 NN40020 603 557 feature 68 Class of Service CoS
68. 555 2222 Deciding on a code Note When configuring a private network ensure the numbering plan does not conflict with the public telephone network For example in North America using 1 as an access code in a private network conflicts with the PSTN numbering plan for long distance calls When deciding on which digits to use to start your destination codes consider the following Ensure that the digit or digits you want to start your destination codes with do not match any of the access codes including the line pool codes that already exist in your system You may find that you need to delete line pool codes and create a route and destination code instead This could occur if you want to set up fallback to a public line for instance If the public line is accessed by a line pool code you would have to change access to a route so you could create a fallback schedule with the destination code used for the primary line or lines if you have more than one outgoing line pool that requires fallback Decide how much of the common part of a dial string you want your users to have to dial and how much you can put in the dial string If you want specific dial strings to use specific routes map these out first For instance if you want users to dial between BCMs over VoIP lines you create destination codes specific to those systems that use the VoIP line pool using the digits with which the users are familiar You can the
69. 5623 555 3 0162 237 6253 5624 555 3 0162 237 6254 5625 555 3 0162 237 6255 5626 555 3 0162 237 6256 5627 565 All 0173 133 2211 5628 555 3 0162 237 6258 5629 555 3 0162 237 6259 If you use the wild card character A ANY you can reduce the number of destination codes you require to two as shown in Table 46 Table 46 Destination codes using the ANY character Destination codes Route Absorb Length Dial Out 562A 555 3 0162 237 625X where X is the last digit of the destination code dialed out from 1 to 9 but not 7 5627 565 All 0173 133 2211 Networking Configuration Guide 252 Chapter 25 Dialing plan Routing configurations Tips To minimize the effort involved in preparing destination codes set the digit absorption to 0 When digital absorption is set to 0 the actual digits dialed by a caller are preserved in the dial out sequence The need to program a dial out sequence as part of the route depends on the required dialout Programming for least cost routing It can be less expensive to use another long distance carrier at a different time of day Continuing with the example used in Figure 74 the lines that supply local service in normal mode are also used for long distance service after 6 p m because that is when rates become competitive For the system to do this automatically you must build another route To build a route for a secondary carrier 1 Create a route for the trunks and assign it to
70. 65 DHCP overview If you intend to use the BCM50a or BCM50e as a DHCP server configure the router to be the DHCP server as described in the BCM 4 0a Integrated Router Configuration Guide NN40020 500 or the BCM 4 0e Integrated Router Configuration Guide NN40020 501 The main module disables its own DHCP server if the route embedded DHCP server is active Main Module DHCP client The main module can act as a DHCP client As a DHCP client the Core Module gets an IP address from another DHCP server on the network If no other DHCP server is available the Main Module uses a static IP address if one is provided Main Module DHCP server The main module has a DHCP server that provides DHCP and vendor specific information to IP sets It also provides DHCP information to other devices on the LAN in the event that no other DHCP Server such as a router is available DHCP network scenarios These network scenarios explain the BCM DHCP functionality No external DHCP server With the DHCP Status set to Enabled Automatic which is the default the BCM first attempts to get a dynamic IP address from a DHCP server When it does not get a response it uses the IP address 192 168 1 2 255 255 255 0 The system goes through the process of looking for a dynamic IP address each time it reboots By default the DHCP server is setup to give out an address range of 192 168 1 200 192 168 1 254 The BCM DHCP server services all devices requesting
71. 89 Restriction filters and exceptions fields Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description Filters table Filter lt 00 99 gt This is the list number for the filter This is the number that you will use on the configuration panels that require restriction filter entries Restrictions table Digits lt dialstring digit s gt For each filter enter the restriction digit dial string based on what the restriction is for The dial string is the number that is restricted from being dialed on the system Also refer to Default filters on page 436 Note The wildcard A Any can be used as part of the dialstring Actions Add Refer to Adding a restriction filter and exceptions on page 435 NN40020 603 Chapter 54 Call security Restriction filters 435 Table 89 Restriction filters and exceptions fields Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description Delete 1 On the Filters table select the filter where you want to delete information 2 On the Restrictions table select one or more restrictions to delete 3 Click Delete 4 Click OK Exceptions table Digits lt dialstring digit s gt For each restriction digit enter any numbers that should dial out despite the restriction Note The wildcard A Any can be used as part of the dialstring Actions Add Refer to Adding a restriction filter and exceptions on page 435 Delete 1 On the Filters table
72. Also refer to Line Access Line Pool Access tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Dialing plan Routing and destination codes on page 259 Dialing plan Private network settings on page 281 Networking Configuration Guide 388 Chapter 44 Configuring VoIP trunk gateways NN40020 603 389 Chapter 45 VoIP interoperability Gatekeeper configuration The following describes the use of a gatekeeper for your H 323 VoIP trunks Refer to the gatekeeper software documentation for information about changing IP addresses Gatekeeper notes The BCM has been tested by Nortel to be compliant with CS 1000 gatekeeper applications e A gatekeeper may help to simplify IP configuration or the BCM dialing plan however it does not simplify the network dialing plan Using CS 1000 as a gatekeeper Both the BCM and the CS 1000 must be set to the parameters described in the following information for the gatekeeper to work effectively Refer to IP Peer Networking Installation and Configuration 553 3001 213 for detailed information on configuring a CS 1000 gateway For CS 1000 the Network Routing Service NRS can be configured and maintained through a web interface called NRS Manager NRS Manager replaces the CS 1000 GK admin tool Review the following information before attempting to use the CS 1000 as a gatekeeper e Before a Gateway Endpoint registers with the CS 1000 gatekeeper it must first be added t
73. Call Security Configuring Direct Inward System Access DISA on page 427 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about user management Networking Configuration Guide 130 Chapter 10 Configuring lines Trunk Line data main panel The top level Table View panel shows line records for all lines active on the system and the common assigned parameters Figure 35 shows the Trunk Line Data lines panel Figure 35 Trunk Line Data lines panel All Lines Trunk Type Control Set Prime A Pub Received Rec Distinct Ring Line001 Pool Bloc N Line002 Pool BlocA N LineOO3 Pool BlocA N LineQ04 Pool BlocA N Line005 Pool Bloc LineOO6 Pool Bloc LineOO7 Pool Bloc Line008 Pool Bloc Line009 Pool BlocA Line 10 Pool BlocA D olP olP folP folP VoIP olP olP olP olP NN40020 603 Chapter 10 Configuring lines 131 Table 27 describes the fields found on the Trunk Line Data main panel Table 27 Trunk Line Data main panel Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description Line This list contains all the Configure only those lines that are active on the system possible line numbers for Click the Active check box and ensure that the Inactive the system including target check box is empty lines Trunk Type Loop PRI VoIP Target There are three main categories of lines PSTN based lines analog T1 PRI BRI Voice over IP
74. Calling Name Receiving Redirected Name and or Receiving Connected Name Refer to Receiving and sending calling party name on page 212 If only a number is available for CLI on an incoming call you can program a system speed dial in such a way that a name displays when that number calls in Refer to Alpha tagging for name display on page 212 Name and number information are also transmitted with outgoing calls This can be blocked by the user FEATURE 819 on a per call basis As well you can block this information on a per trunk basis This is important if the connecting system cannot process name and number information Some service providers also may have different codes that need to be mapped so that the blocking feature works Table 37 provides a list of the name number display features and the list of ISDN interfaces that support each feature Table 37 Call features interface list Interface Feature NI PRI DMS SL 1 NI BRI ETSI ETSI QSIG Custom MCDN Euro PRI PRI BRI Receiving Calling Name Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Receiving Redirected Supported Supported Supported Name Receiving Connected Supported Supported Supported Name Sending Calling Party Supported Supported Supported Supported Name Sending Connected Name Supported Supported Supported Note Name Display is an optional feature that is available based on the interface to wh
75. DN type 261 Tie services 540 TimeToLive 384 tone IP trunks remote access 425 448 remote access tones 425 447 trademarks 2 Transmit Threshold 385 398 transport mode IPSec 525 trunk DTM 39 mode 133 numbering 39 types 39 trunk anti tromboning TAT MCDN 49 320 trunk modules line type 83 trunk route optimization TRO MCDN 48 320 trunk line data call by call services network 344 MCDN network 310 TTL TimeToLive 121 tunnel mode IPSec 525 tunneling encryption methods 527 IPSec 527 type direct dial 269 U UDP universal dialing plan dialing plan 283 dialing plan location code 283 port ranges 377 private DN lengths 283 private network ID 283 private network MCDN 312 Unified Messaging 327 universal dialing planSee UDP and dialing plan 283 Unknown name 212 unsupervised trunk mode 133 Use pool routing 261 use remote package 138 user filter restrictions 444 using your system remotely 447 V VAD Voice Activity Detection silence suppression 529 Vertical Service Code VSC 210 Networking Configuration Guide 568 Index Virtual Private Network ID 286 virtual private networks see VPN 525 VLAN i series telephones 468 Voice Activity Detection See VAD 529 Voice Activity Detection See VAD 529 voice jitter buffer 124 127 voice mail DN length change 224 271 setting remote access for lines 137 voice message center line setting 137 programming 94 VoIP auto p
76. Default blank Line Type drop down list gt Select either 64K Digital or 56K Digital line BCM ISDN supports two types of Unrestricted Digital Information UDI bit streams UDI and UDI 56 With UDI data is transmitted at 64kbps 64K Digital With UDI 56 a 1 bit is inserted in the eighth bit position of each B channel time slot while the other 7 bits form the 56kbps channel 56K Digital Default 64K Digital Negotiate Line Type lt check box gt Select whether the system will select a line with a slower speed if unable to connect at the previously set speed Default enabled Networking Configuration Guide 506 Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel To modify the characteristics of an existing ISDN channel Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces Click the ISDN interface to configure Select the Channel Characteristics tab Double click the field to modify a A OO N Make the necessary changes ISDN Dial out Link Parameters Figure 138 SDN Dial out Interface Link Parameters tab Details for Interface isdn2 Channel Characteristics Link Parameters P Address Specification PPP Settings Idle timeout s 90 IP header compression Maximum receive unit 1500 E Maximum transmission unit 1500 Access Settings Software compression o Authentication CHAP Username pnadmin v Table 111 ISDN Dial out Interface Link Parameters fie
77. Dial in liliis 522 Using a dial up interface as a primary connection 00 eee eee 522 Static Routes for Automatic Dial out Interfaces lille 524 Appendix A VPN DVOPIVIEM 665 0206 cae nen ee bhai nee seen ee en eae ee Reena ee 525 IP SEE THCIRIBIS uunc ate owed chen apu doc duc qoa desc Aone ens usd 525 lu rfr rrr 527 ENO O Gigas de or IDE dade qo qo ethos Dopod qn a case dd Ule Roi te coi be dea 527 Appendix B Silence suppression cl clr l eerllleeerr rmn 529 Silence suppression on half duplexlinks 0000 cee eee 529 Silence suppression on full duplex links llllllllselsrense 531 CON NOES E A E TOO TO TIE TTET 533 Appendix C ISUN QUBIVIEN LuouuosbcLisbrebn RES UEeaER ERIRERL REF SEI ERE EE 535 wWekome To ISON uua sub adem doxpp d apd doe s dO qood iod e es dba RR CR ADR 535 Services and features for ISDN BRI and PRI 20020 eee eee eaee 537 PRI services and features iilis uua pr m rh ARR GARE X RREYCERAR CERE 538 BHI services and features 2 0 cen lesus RR ARRA RR XA 538 Service provider features 0 0c lle 539 Neiwwork hame display aed xc a CREE ERI RERRRARERRGASUXE RI qES EE Te nade tans 539 Name and number blocking ONN 2000 0 cece eee ee 540 Call by Call Service Selection for PRI 000 0c eee eee eee ee 540 Emergency S11 CIN oes erac c Ger EE SERO retro de da ve depo Rogat dont 541 QUI DIE cctacetguneewaccuwaseeare L
78. Domestic export laws Table 119 shows a comparison of the security provided by the available encryption and authentication methods Table 119 Comparing Encryption and Authentication Methods Method Encryption of IP Authentication Authentication strongest to weakest Packet Payload of IP Packet of Entire IP Payload Packet ESP Triple DES SHA1 Yes Yes No ESP Triple DES MD5 Yes Yes No ESP 56 bit DES SHA1 Yes Yes No ESP 56 bit DES MD5 Yes Yes No ESP 40 bit DES SHA1 Yes Yes No ESP 40 bit DES MD5 Yes Yes No AH HMAC SHA1 No No Yes AH HMAC MD5 No No Yes Note Using higher level encryption such as Triple DES requires more system resources and increases packet latency You must consider this when designing your overall network Note If two devices have different encryption settings the two devices will negotiate downward until they agree on a compatible encryption capability For example if Switch A attempts to negotiate Triple DES encryption with Switch B that is using 56 bit DES then the Switch B will reject Triple DES encryption in favor of the 56 bit DES Each of the systems must have at least one encryption setting in common If they do not a tunnel is not negotiated In the example above both systems must have 56 bit DES enabled Networking Configuration Guide 528 Appendix A VPN overview The encryption level you choose is made of three components the
79. ETSI network features Table 64 ETSI network values Attribute Values Description Netwrk Diversion check box Allows calls to be redirected to an outside network MCID MCID note check box Malicious Call Identification When selected the called party can use FEATURE 897 to request the network to record the identity of an incoming call including called party number calling party number local time and date of the activity calling party sub address if provided by the calling user The feature code must be entered within 25 seconds of the caller hanging up A 25 second busy tone occurs If the called party hangs up first there is no opportunity to use the feature Note The call identification comes from your service provider not the BCM You must have the service activated by the CO before the feature is active for the user regardless of the setting in this field NN40020 603 323 Chapter 35 Private networking PRI and VoIP tandem networks You can use PRI trunks and VoIP trunks to create a private network between other BCMs This tandem network provides you with the benefits of end to end name display and toll free calling over the PRI or VoIP private link Each BCM becomes a node in the network Refer to the following information about tandem networks e Routing for tandem networks on page 323 e Routing calls through a tandem network on page 3
80. Figure 144 Typical dial in configuration BCM50a e Customer LAN CSC 192 168 1 2 PC1 Router 192 168 1 1 DIALIN_PC 192 168 1 50 10 10 14 2 Networking Configuration Guide 518 Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel If you want DIALIN PC to access PC1 192 168 1 50 on the customer LAN then you must configure a static route on the integrated router to route all traffic for the dial in IP address to the CSC card on the BCM50 192 168 1 2 The static route is configured as shown in Table 117 Table 117 Static route configuration Parameter Value Active Selected Destination IP Address 10 10 14 0 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway IP Address 192 168 1 2 Metric 1 You must also configure the firewall on the integrated router to Bypass Triangle Route Using the same example if there is a ping request from DIALIN PC 10 10 14 2 to PC1 192 168 1 50 e The CSC receives the ping request at 10 10 14 1 and forwards the packet through the customer LAN 192 168 1 2 to PC1 192 168 1 50 e PCI sends the ping reply to the integrated router 192 168 1 2 since this is the default gateway for PC1 PC1 does not have a route to 10 10 14 2 e f Bypass Triangle Route is not selected the firewall blocks the ping reply and generates the error message out of order ICMP This occurs because the integrated router does n
81. Groundstart E amp M Loop or DID Target lines are virtual communication paths between trunks and telephones on the BCM system They are incoming lines only and cannot be selected for outgoing calls or networking applications With target lines you can concentrate incoming calls on fewer trunks This type of concentration is an advantage of DID lines BCM target lines allow you to direct each DID number to one or more telephones VoIP trunks also require target lines to direct incoming traffic Target lines are numbered 125 to 268 Telephones can be configured to have an appearance of analog lines or multiple appearances of target lines Note PRI B channels cannot be assigned as line appearances PRI B channels or trunks can only be configured into PRI line pools for inbound routing through target lines with receive digits or outbound routing through destination codes Types of private networks There are several ways you can create private networks Configuration can be based on such things as cost of trunks proximity of network nodes size of the private network and business requirements for communications VoIP based networking also requires an understanding of IP features such as codecs jitter buffers Quality of Service QoS function and silence compression The services provided within networks is based on the type of trunks and the protocols assigned to the trunks All trunks within the network should be running t
82. Guide NN40010 301 Table 100 Keycodes Prerequisites Yes No 4 a Complete this question only if you are using VoIP trunks Do you have enough VoIP keycodes H 323 trunks use VoIP keycodes 4 b Complete this question only if you are using IP telephones Do you have enough IP client keycodes Note IP clients and IP telephones are a 1 1 ratio As soon as an IP telephone is registered it occupies an IP client whether it is active or not 4 c If you are using VoIP trunks do you need to activate MCDN features Note If MCDN is already configured on your system for private networking over PRI lines you do not need a separate MCDN keycode for VoIP trunks System configuration for IP telephony functions Several sections of the BCM must be properly configured prior to IP telephony activation Connect the BCM to the network before completing this checklist Answer the questions in Table 101 to determine if your BCM has been correctly configured Table 101 BCM system configuration Prerequisites Yes No 5 a Is the LAN functioning correctly with the BCM You can test this by pinging other addresses around the network from the BCM 5 b Is the WAN functioning correctly with the BCM50a BCM50e 5 c Have you determined the published IP address for the system 5 d Have the necessary media gateway IP client and IP trunks resources been set 5 e Has a dialing plan been created taking into acco
83. H323 Media parameters record Sheet 2 of 2 Field Value Description Settings Enable Voice check box The voice activity detection also known as silence suppression Activity Detection identifies periods of silence in a conversation and stops sending IP speech packets during those periods In a typical telephone conversation most of the conversation is half duplex meaning that one person is speaking while the other is listening For more information refer to Silence suppression on page 529 If voice activity detection is enabled no voice packets are sent from the listener end This greatly reduces bandwidth requirements G 723 1 and G 729 support voice activity detection G 711 does not support voice activity detection Performance note Voice activity detection on all networked BCMs and IPT systems VAD setting on IPT systems must be consistent to ensure that interacting features such as Transfer and Conference work correctly As well the Payload size on the IPT must be set to 30ms Default Disabled Jitter buffer Auto Select the size of jitter buffer you want to allow for your system None Default Auto Small Medium Large G 729 payload size 10 20 30 40 50 60 Set the maximum required payload size per codec for the VoIP ms Default 30 calls sent over H 323 trunks i t for Nortel IP teleph G 723 payload size 30 Note Payload size can also be set for Norte elephones See ms
84. If this line pool does not have the correct lines for routing the call the direct dial call will fail Refer to Line Access tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 To define a direct dial set 1 On the Direct Dial table click the fields beside the set number you want to configure and enter the appropriate values Press Tab on your keyboard to save the values Go to the DN records of the telephones where you want the direct dial set assigned and assign the set under Preferences tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Note The BCM cannot verify that the number you assign as an external direct dial set is valid Check the number before assigning it as a direct dial set by calling the direct dial you have assigned Configuration notes and tips The following information expands on some of the fields on the tabs on the Dialing Plan General panel DN length constraints DN length constraints on page 270 Received number notes on page 271 Tips about access codes on page 272 Call Park codes on page 273 Warning Do not change DN length immediately after a system startup You must wait until the system is operational with two solid green status LEDs NN40020 603 Chapter 27 Dialing plan System settings 271 Warning Increasing the DN length affects other areas of the system If the DN length change creates a conflict with the Park prefix external l
85. If manual dial must be used then the user should wait until the call is answered before starting the fax session If manual dial must be used then the user should enter the digit 8 before initiating the fax session This ensures that the fax session is initiated by CallPilot before the fax machine s timer is started The call duration can be increased by adding a timed pause to the end of dialing string for example 758 5428 This allows the call to ring at the destination before the fax machine call duration timer starts Since the problem is related to the delay in initiating the fax session the number of rings for fax mailboxes Call Forward No Answer CENA should be minimized Table 80 is a list of restrictions and requirements for the T 38 fax protocol Table 80 T 38 restrictions and requirements Supported Not supported only UDP transport TCP only UDP redundancy Forward Error Correction FEC T 38 version 0 Fill removal on H 323 VolP trunks between BCMs between MMR transcoding BCMs and legacy BCMs or between BCM and JBIGt di Meridian 1 IPT and CS 1000 M ranscoding NN40020 603 381 Chapter 44 Configuring VoIP trunk gateways The following explains how to configure voice over IP VoIP trunks on a BCM system for incoming traffic A VoIP trunk allows you to establish communications between a BCM and a remote system across an IP network The following path indicates where to where to configure VoIP trunks
86. MR SOR PRSE AME NERA S 488 DHCP configuration with router 00 0 eee eee eee 491 To configure the BUM with a DACP addtess iaceo tarta nti netos 491 NN40020 603 List of procedures 23 To contigure the BOM DHCP COITfpOoTnapniuesietec nie peras nane kata thx Stade bot SERE Fea ntu 491 To disable tho DAOP SIVE susiseski acci paa tai ESEN HR ERE EE ERC DIRE HR EXE E TEN 493 Firewall configuration resources cee eee eee 495 Dial Up OVErIVIOW i is4 4 EFRARRARARAREARARASARRARRRRERAARARRRRAR ARA 497 Dial Up Interfaces panel Lleleeessleereeeesse 501 Tadd an DON WAS e 503 To ehable an ISDN IBEeITAGE siti on ter es ta Eee tina e de pce Pen Pati Heb tg bd 503 To Giselle an ODON raro ee LEE 503 To manually connect an ISDN interface esssseseseseeeeeeeeneenenneennn 504 Te disconneot an ISON IOIGITSER eii pre cit prp Et rb PD ase bs Gud xb toda dd bes ase ob et Reed 504 To delete an SON Merac Sii recte Gat pne t eee is re ERO e REO Feed 504 To modify the characteristics of an existing ISDN channel esses 506 To contigure the ISDN Link Palramelgels ocn tirer t Rt erased Lek tbe rtu nas 507 Toadd he modem oue m c 508 To e able the modem IDE BOE e ueri erit eere pP EE er Pet ated Pane be EE epe RN 509 To disable the modem IMmerlaCe TIE 509 To manually connect the modem interface esee 509 To disconnect a modem TAGS eem e nm 510 Upis ru a m
87. OVOIVIOW u luaasesesaescRa s aRRAR ar RE a ER ERR AREA 497 Remote Access Service 2 decca dese eee sees Eee Eure ee LANE E Rx ES 498 Automatic Data Dial Out Service 0000 c ccs 499 WAN Failover Service sic acecncue hake ee eRE adeeb DRE A KCRCE E SER ER REE 500 Modom COMPANY 44 aca xo eder vex FER ROO pL YO RODA RR ORES ORE eR OP 500 Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel 6 ccs esac atur ay RR ER ERR nnn 501 Dial out Interfaces panel uus saco Rao RE RAO RO RACE SRGR CARO da RE Rk CR p con 501 IGON III TA OBS 25 5 esa eco PARERE RH ARRA RRPGZgPRIaq ERR CREE RR 502 ISDN Dial out Channel Characteristics llle 505 ISDN Dial out Link Parameters 00 0 0c 506 ISDN Dia GUEIP Address corio L4 43 QeiskeserixSeed rese da 9d 508 Modem MUSINGS aae ede dades qud RAS ORR aee die p d Re Wh dua Ee ae 508 Modem Dial out Link Parameters 0 0000 c eee ee eee 510 Modem Dial out IP Address ul noad Rea ER Showa cheers ba we ees 512 Global Settings PANG iccccus vade EIQXSPCEe RPG REA S REA DERE RE cen 512 Wall SUAVE 442654 iG rains MC QUERY BOO ACRI eeu KR RU BORA CIR Y 513 Modem Dial In Parameters panel 00 00 cece eee 514 Additional configuration to allow network access functionality 517 ISDN Dial In Parameters panel 0 000 cece eh 518 Networking Configuration Guide 16 Contents Creating an automatic dial out interface llle 521 Guidelines for using remote
88. Settings e IP telephone set details on page 114 NN40020 603 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources 113 IP Terminal Global Settings The parameters on the IP Terminal Global Settings subpanel affect all Nortel 1120 1140 20XX IP telephones This is also the panel you use to allow these telephones to register to the system and to turn off registration once you have registered all the telephones Figure 27 IP Terminal Global Settings subpanel Details for Module 1 IP Terminal Global Settings IP Terminal Details Set Port Details Enable registration Default codec Auto v Enable global registration password o Default jitter buffer Auto E Global password G 729 payload size ms 30 v Auto assign DNs G 723 payload size ms 30 w Advertisement Logo Nortel G 711 payload size ms 30 v Table 19 defines the fields on this panel and indicates the lines Table 19 IP terminal Global panel fields Sheet 1 of 2 Field Value Description Enable registration check box Select this check box to allow new IP clients to register with the system Warning Remember to clear this check box when you finish registering the new telephones Enable global check box If selected the installer will be prompted for the global registration registration password password when registering a new IP client If cleared the installer will be prompted for a user ID and password combination that has I
89. Static IP Route you want to delete Click Delete A confirmation dialog box appears Click Yes Networking Configuration Guide 464 Chapter 60 IP Subsystem NN40020 603 465 Chapter 61 Data network prerequisites checklist Before you set up voice over IP VoIP trunks or IP telephones on a BCM complete the following checklists to ensure the system is correctly set up for IP telephony Some items in the checklist do not apply to all installations Network diagram on page 465 Network devices on page 466 Network assessment on page 466 Keycodes on page 467 System configuration for IP telephony functions on page 467 VoIP trunks on page 468 IP telephone records on page 468 Network diagram To aid in installation a network diagram provides a basic understanding of how the network is configured Before you configure IP functionality create a network diagram that captures all of the information described in Table 97 If you are configuring IP telephones but not VoIP trunks you do not need to answer the last two questions Table 97 Network diagram prerequisites Prerequisites Yes 1 a Are you using the BCM50a or BCM50e and has a network diagram been developed If you are not using the BCM50a or BCM50e it is assumed that the BCM is being installed on an existing network 1 b Does the network diagram contain any routers switches or bridges with corresponding IP address
90. Switched Telephone Network PSTN State and local requirements for support of Emergency 911 dialing service by Customer Premises Equipment vary Consult your local telecommunications service provider regarding compliance with applicable laws and regulations For most installations the following configuration rules should be followed unless local regulations require a modification All PSTN connections must be over PRI e norder for all sets to be reached from a Public Safety Answering Position PSAP the system must be configured for DID access to all sets In order to reduce confusion the dial digits for each set should be configured to correspond to the set extension number e The OLI digits for each set should be identical to the DID dialed digits for the set e The routing table should route 911 to a PRI line pool e If attendant notification is required the routing table must be set up for all 911 calls to use a dedicated line which has an appearance on the attendant console e The actual digit string 911 is not hard coded into the system More than one emergency number can be supported If transmission of internal extension numbers is not required or desired Nortel recommends that the person in charge of the system maintain a site map or location directory so that emergency personnel can rapidly locate a BCM set given its DID number Keep this list up to date and readily available IP telephony note Ensure that you do not app
91. TIE TIE SDN software defined network INWATS INWATS INWATS Eight Hundred Toll Free MEGACOM International Same as INWATS Same as Same as International Toll Free INWATS INWATS INWATS Service OUTWATS IntraLATA OUTWATS PRISM MEGACOM OUTWATS OUTWATS with bands InterLATA OUTWATS Private DMS Private VNET virtual N A network Switched Digital N A N A N A ACCUNET4 Nine Hundred N A N A Nine Hundred MultiQuest Public Public Public Public N A 1 N A indicates that the protocol does not support the service 2 DMS 250 Sprint and UCS support incoming FX only that is Network to BCM DMS 250 MCI does not support FX 3 NI 2 allows two TIE operating modes senderized and cut through BCM supports only senderized mode 4 Rates greater than 64 kbps are not supported 5 Bell Canada VNET 6 Not all service types may be supported by a switch type For information contact your service provider Networking Configuration Guide 238 Chapter 24 Dialing plans Provisioning for Call by Call limits with PRI To program the system for Call by Call Limits with a PRI interface you must e provision a DTM as PRI if one is not already configured as part of the system Select a protocol e program incoming call routing program routes that use the PRI pools see Configuring call routing on page 234 Other required programming in the Element Manager Programming Call by Call on PRI requires these settings e Select Conf
92. Taken too long while entering a CoS password Your call disconnects after five seconds Tried to use a line pool or feature not permitted by your Class of Service You hear system dial tone again after five seconds e Dialed a number in the system which does not exist Your call disconnects after five seconds IP trunk lines do not produce tones when accessed from a remote location NN40020 603 449 Chapter 57 LAN overview On the BCM main unit the LAN configuration determines how the Core Module of the BCM communicates with other devices on the LAN For the BCM with Router the LAN configuration also includes Router LAN configuration which determines how the router communicates with devices on the LAN The following explains the concepts of the LAN on the BCM It contains the following topics e What is a LAN on page 449 LAN settings on page 449 e DHCP configuration on page 449 For information on Configuring LAN settings see IP Subsystem on page 455 What is a LAN The LAN Local Area Network is a group of IP devices that can all communicate directly with each other over an IP network Generally all of these devices are in a small geographic range such as a single office or building The BCM allows you to connect several IP devices together on a LAN and then connect to the Internet or other LANs over a router LAN settings LAN settings include determining IP and DNS settings and subnet s
93. Telephony gt Lines e Telset interface CONFIG gt Lines The top panel provides a table of lines and the current or default settings The bottom frame contains three tabs The contents of the tabs may vary depending on the line selected in the top table e The Properties tabbed panel provides the settings for individual line characteristics e The Restrictions tabbed panel allows you to define which restrictions will be active for individual lines Note that lines that are assigned to the same line pool will automatically assign the same restrictions e The Assigned DNs tabbed panel provides a quick way to assign lines to telephones You must use the DN records panels to assign line pools to telephones Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view Panel tabs Tasks Trunk Line data main panel on page 130 Configuring lines T1 Loop start on page 157 Properties on page 132 Configuring lines T1 Digital Ground Start on page 163 Restrictions Line and Remote on Configuring lines T1 E amp M on page 151 page 137 Assigned DNs on page 138 Configuring lines T1 DID on page 169 See also Line Access Line Assignment tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Configuring lines PRI on page 145 Configuring lines DPNSS lines on page 181 Configuring lines Target lines on page 141 Configuring BRI lines on page 197 Configuring VoIP lines on page 385
94. To access the system over a public TiBtWOIK ooa ertt nne 447 To bypass the restriction filters on a telephone eeseeeeeeeeeee 447 LAN OVOIVIEW saa RAEREARRRAAALISATARARRARRARAARRRATARAAASRAARAAA RA 449 Configuring the BCM with a DHCP address 451 To configure the BCM with a DHCP address sessseeeeeeneeenn 451 Data networking overview eeeee I RII 453 IP SUBSYSION coiiaiodesich reset ender RAaRRARERRRRRRIERIRRR E 455 To Modi an UF coo RITE 456 TRI E UD Oe Ou D eee ee 459 Todd anew IP Static FIO ci aiite es adt racine n den as dbi ca ad ER cus pee 463 To modify an existing IP Static ROUTE u s eee risen iaaa 463 To delete an existing IP Static ROUTE icone rtm been rr tei pte reni Ear 463 Data network prerequisites checklist Lees 465 Router OVEIVIBW iiassasaRARARRRARARRARARAARRRERTEARAARRRAAARAA 469 Router panel ii scius a e REIR SAERREREAdEX RE RRERE E ERE REFER RE 471 pni 10g 471 VLAN OVGIVIGW Lueasnassseesedasuucorue e aa rasa an RR RAE A 473 DHCP OVCO acapara RR sai c PePAStaUPSEESEN EE AES 475 DHCP Server Settings panel sseessss 481 To add e new Included Address Range iuc etr tr rta tm ntn rr tena recte 488 To delete an Included Address Range sseseseeseeeeeee enne 488 TOadd a Reserved oi e 488 T6 delete e Reserved Beds uis cima nent ripe capies cepa NNE
95. Type selected 1 On the routes table select the route you want to change 2 Click the field you want to change for that route and enter the new value 3 Press Tab on your keyboard to save the change PRI route types Table 48 lists the service DN type choices available for PRI lines Table 48 PRI Service type DN type values PRI Protocol Type Values SL 1 DN Public Private Local National Special ETSI Euro DN None Overlap ETSI QSIG N A NI Service Public TIE Foreign Exchange FX OUTWATS DMS 100 Service Public Private TIE Foreign Exchange FX OUTWATS DMS 250 Service Public Private TIE Foreign Exchange FX OUTWATS 4ESS Service TIE OUTWATS Switched Digital SDS Destination codes Once you have the routes configured set up the dialing plan destination codes that allow users to access the routes You can use a route for more than one destination code as you may require different codes for the same route to define restrictions or special call designators Figure 82 illustrates the Destination codes panel NN40020 603 Chapter 26 Dialing plan Routing and destination codes 263 Figure 82 Destination codes table panel Dialing Plan Routing Routes Destination Codes Destination Codes Destination Code Normal Route Absorbed Length Wild Card 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 Add Destination Code Add Destination code Table 49 describes the fields on the destina
96. a memory key This can also include numbers the system adds to a dial string when a call goes through call routing This process also includes how the receiving system reads the sequence All of which means that coordination is required at both ends of the call to ensure that calls are routed correctly This is especially important if calls need to be routed through your system or through a remote system to reach another node on the network Basic numbering The first numbering that you set is your DN length Start DN length and Start DN and Public and Private Received length DN length and Start DN information is entered when the system is initially set up These numbers can be changed after the system has been set up but only at the risk of compromising other numbering in the system If your system is part of a network these numbers must be coordinated with the other nodes in the network to ensure that the network dialing plans are consistent The Public and Private Received Number lengths take their sequence from the initial DN length but this can be changed to accommodate local dialing requirements the Private length should mirror the DN length except in special circumstances Refer to Incoming call routing on page 224 Variable Example settings Start DN 2 221 DN length Received length Private length 3 Public length max 12 North America Remote access When you set up lines that do not offer DISA directl
97. a 64 bit message through a complex process of 16 steps 40 bit DES 40 bit DES is an encryption block cipher algorithm that uses a 40 bit key with 8 bits of parity over a 64 bit block The 40 bits of the key are transformed and combined with a 64 bit message through a complex process of 16 steps Both 40 and 56 bit DES require the same processing demands so you should use 56 bit DES unless local encryption laws prohibit doing so NN40020 603 529 Appendix B Silence suppression The following describes using silence suppression on half duplex and full duplex links Silence suppression also known as voice activity detection reduces bandwidth requirements by as much as 50 percent The following explains how silence suppression functions on a Business Communications Manager network G 711 and G 729 support Silence suppression A key to VoIP Gateways in business applications is reducing WAN bandwidth use Beyond speech compression the best bandwidth reducing technology is silence suppression also known as Voice Activity Detection VAD Silence suppression technology identifies the periods of silence in a conversation and stops sending IP speech packets during those periods Telco studies show that in a typical telephone conversation only about 36 to 40 of a full duplex conversation is active When one person talks the other listens This is half duplex There are important periods of silence during speaker pauses between
98. a half duplex link with silence suppression Conversation I Tx Buenos noches Juan Muy bien y tu Rx WG N N SS A LZ Hola Isabella Como esta Tx Hello Fred This is Susan Do you have a minute Ax UUW Ul SS e T Yip e red here Hil ure 2 NOM 4 5 Bandwidth used AA Os l oec o s s e EG S AR AL a Peak channel bandwidth is n average Bandwidth shared by half duplex calls bandwidth per call Silence suppression on full duplex links On full duplex links the transmit path and the receive path are separate channels with bandwidths usually quoted in terms of individual channels The following figure shows the peak bandwidth requirements for one call on a full duplex link without silence suppression Voice packets are transmitted even when a speaker is silent Therefore the peak bandwidth and the average bandwidth used equals the full transmission rate for both the transmit and the receive channel Networking Configuration Guide 532 Appendix B Silence suppression Figure 149 One call on a full duplex link without silence suppression Conversation Hello Fred This is Susan Do you have a minute Tx a KW WWW T Kd Rix Conversation BARI uses Channel Link max S 2 os SS SS ww SS SS SS F i Channel Link max Time Tx Channel Bandwidth Voice frames sent even when speaker is silent When silence suppression is enabled voice packe
99. a private network select an outgoing line to access features that are available on the private network NN40020 603 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview 37 Select an outgoing central office line to access the public network use all of the BCM features Callers in the public network These callers use the public lines to e call directly to one or more BCM DNs e call into BCM and select an outgoing TIE line to access a private network e call into BCM and select an outgoing central office line to access the public network e call into BCM and use remote features Callers in the private network node These callers use the private lines to e call directly to one or more BCM DNs e call into BCM and select an outgoing TIE line to access other nodes in a private network e call into BCM and select an outgoing central office line to access the public network e call into BCM and use remote features System numbering and dialing plans All systems on a private network must coordinate dialing plans to ensure that calls get directed to the correct network node As well routing becomes more complex especially if the system is not an end node and must be configured to relay calls to nodes not directly connected to the system The type of dialing plan supported by the network determines whether each node also requires unique DNs Private network parameters The following provides an overview of the system values that
100. a special ring indicate a pattern 2 3 or 4 Subpanel under Restrictions tab Use remote package If this line is used for remote call ins or is part of a private network ensure you specify a valid package 2 Configure the trunk line data Properties tab Auto privacy If you activate this feature the line is available only to the telephone that answers the call Answer mode Answer with DISA If this line is used for remote call ins determine how you want the line to answer automatically or requiring more user input If the answer mode is set to Automatic decide whether the caller will be immediately connected to the system or whether a stuttered dial tone will require the caller to enter a CoS password Aux ringer If your system is equipped with an external ringer you can enable this setting to allow this line to ring at the external ringer Full autohold This allows telephones to put a line on hold if the user picks up another line or starts to dial out on another line Voice Message Center If the system is using a remote voice mail select the center configured with the contact number NN40020 603 Chapter 20 BRI ISDN BRI T loops 199 3 Setthe restriction and remote package scheduling Restrictions tab Line restrictions Enter a valid restriction filter for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of outgoing calls Remote Packages Enter a valid remote access pac
101. across the PDN using the IP address of the Santa Clara BCM e 3322 is linked to the target line associated with DN 3322 e The call arrives at the phone with the DN 3322 Networking Configuration Guide 400 Chapter 46 Setting up VoIP trunks for fallback If a user in Santa Clara wanted to make a local call in Ottawa they would dial 29 followed by the local Ottawa number The digit 2 accesses the remote gateway for the VoIP line The digit 9 accesses an Ottawa outside line NN40020 603 401 Chapter 47 T 38 fax If you are using the T 38 fax protocol it is assumed that you have already configured IP trunks and gateways and that they are functional For more information on configuring VoIP trunks see Configuring lines on page 129 T 38 fax is a Fax over IP FoIP gateway protocol that allows standard T 30 or Group3 fax machines to make calls over IP based networks The T 38 fax protocol functions transparently with standard fax machines because it emulates a normal T 30 fax connection Each endpoint of the IP trunk becomes a T 38 gateway To use FoIP you must have two or four MS PEC III cards installed in your MSC card Both endpoints must support the T 38 fax protocol and have this feature enabled Enabling T 38 fax Complete these procedures to enable the T 38 fax protocol To verify codecs in Element Manager 1 Click Configuration Telephony Resources 2 Inthe Telephony Resources panel select the row fo
102. affect private networking Private networking protocols The BCM supports the following protocols for private networking e PRI ETSI QSIG Nortel Voice Networking MCDN Networking Configuration Guide 38 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview e DPNSS BRE ETSI QSIG TI E amp M e VoIP trunks with optional MDCN Note MCDN is referred to as SL 1 in Element Manager BCM systems can be networked together using T 1 PRI or VoIP trunks PRI SL 1 lines and VoIP trunks also offer the opportunity to use the MCDN protocol which provides enhanced trunking features and end to end user identification If a Meridian 1 is part of the MCDN network the network can also provide centralized voice mail and auto attendant off the Meridian MCDN note MCDN networking requires all nodes on the network to use a common Universal Dialing Plan UDP or a Coordinated Dialing Plan CDP Keycode requirements Keycodes are required to activate the protocols that are used to create private networking including e VoIP Gateway keycodes e an MCDN DPNSS or Q Sig keycode if you want to use a networking protocol between the systems You must purchase and install these keycodes before you can create any of the networks described in this chapter Consult with your Nortel distributor to ensure you order the correct keycodes for the type of network you want to create Remote access to the network Authorized users can access TIE
103. all DPNSS lines as auto answer lines The Page feature is available to both remote callers and callers within the system A remote caller must have DTMF capability to access the Page feature Networking Configuration Guide 432 Chapter 53 Call Security Configuring Direct Inward System Access DISA The line redirection feature allows the originating party to redirect a call that is waiting a connection or re connection to an alternate destination after a time out period Failed calls can be redirected Priority calls cannot be redirected Refer to Private networking DPNSS network services UK only on page 331 Remote access on a private network Systems connected to the private network deliver the last dialed digits to the destination BCM system for interpretation The destination BCM system matches the digits to a target line or interprets the digits as a remote feature request BCM then routes the call to the specified target line or activates the remote feature By default T1 E amp M trunks are set to answer with DISA For auto answer T1 E amp M trunks connected to a private network change the default so that the trunks are not answered with DISA If an auto answer T1 E amp M trunk is configured to answer with DISA the system tries to interpret any received digits as a CoS password The DISA DN and the Auto DN allow auto answer private network and DID calls in the same way that calls on auto answer loop start and auto a
104. an unsupported product The RTP over UDP table has two settings Figure 120 illustrates the Port Ranges panel Networking Configuration Guide 408 Chapter 49 Port Ranges panel Figure 120 Port Ranges panel Port Ranges RTP over UDP UDP Signalling Begin End Begin End Begin End 28000 28255 20000 20255 0 10 171 Add Add Table 82 RTP over UDP Attribute Value Description Begin lt numeric string gt The first port in the port range End lt numeric string gt The last port in the port range Adding new RTP over UDP Port Ranges You can add up to ten port ranges To add new port ranges in the RTP over UDP table 1 On the RTP over UDP table click Add The Add RTP Port Range dialog appears In the Begin field type the first port in the range In the End field type the last port in the range 4 Click OK The new RTP port range appears in the table Deleting RTP over UDP Port Ranges You cannot delete all port ranges from the table You must keep at least one port range at all times To delete port ranges from the RTP over UDP table 1 On the RTP over UDP table select the range to delete by clicking the appropriate row in either column 2 Click Delete The range disappears from the table NN40020 603 Chapter 49 Port Ranges panel 409 Modifying RTP over UDP Port Ranges To modify an entry on the RTP over UDP table 1 Onthe RTP over UDP table select
105. and Ethernet configurations The BCM with router is available in two versions BCM50a The BCM with an ADSL modem This version connects to external networks over an ADSL modem within the router e BCM50e The BCM with Ethernet This version connects to external networks over an Ethernet connection Router features The router offers a wide range of features ranging from DHCP Firewall NAT and VPN For more information see the BCM 4 0a Integrated Router Configuration Guide NN40020 500 and the BCM 4 0e Integrated Router Configuration Guide NN40020 501 Networking Configuration Guide 470 Chapter 62 Router overview NN40020 603 471 Chapter 63 Router panel Use the router panel to launch the router on your BCM50a BCM50e For information about configuring the router consult the router documentation Note The Launch Router button will appear only if you have a BCM50a BCM50e Figure 131 Router panel display Router Router Launch Router WebGUI Tool A Integrated router not present Accessing your router To access your router 1 Click Launch Router WebGUI Tool The Contivity Router interface appears in a new window Note The BCM uses the default gateway setting as your router IP address to launch the router WebGUI tool from Element Manager If the default gateway is not set to the router IP address you must access the router WebGUI directly from a web browser
106. and destination codes ensure that the Routing Service schedule allows fallback Overflow and allows you to activate the service from a control set You will note that the Routing Service does not have a Normal schedule This is because the Normal schedule is the schedule that runs when no routing services are active To set up the VoIP schedule for routing services 1 Double click Sched 4 and rename it VoIP Configuration Telephony Scheduled Service Schedule Column 2 Click VoIP The VoIP schedule panel appears in the right frame Change the Routing Svc to Manual Select the Overflow check box Next steps The following describes some further actions you may need to take to ensure that fallback is working Activating the VoIP schedule for fallback on page 395 Deactivating the VoIP schedule on page 396 Activating the VoIP schedule for fallback Before activating the VoIP schedule calls using the destination code are routed over the PSTN This is because the system is set to use the Normal schedule which routes the call over the PSTN Once the VoIP schedule is activated calls made with the VoIP destination code are routed over the VoIP trunk The VoIP line must be activated FEATURE 873 from the control set for the VoIP trunk which is specified when the trunk is created Configuration Telephony Lines Active VoIP Lines Networking Configuration Guide 396 Chapter 46 Setting up VoIP trunks
107. and routing is used within the system to direct calls from a telephone in one system to a telephone in another system Figure 69 Line management diagram l Normal Oth r Access Code call 6 2290 Normal routing call Access Code Intercom 9 409 2290 dialing 2280 Cal 5 2280 LD call 1 403 2280 Other routing call 911 409 2290 sip psi NN40020 603 Chapter 24 Dialing plans 229 Understanding access codes The system uses access codes to direct calls to the correct lines and destinations Refer to Creating dialing plans on page 218 for a general overview about using access codes within the system dialing plan Task Set up access codes for internal features e park prefix e direct dial digit e Private Auto DN e Public Auto DN e Private DISA DN e Public DISA DN e Private access code e Local access code e National access code e Special access code e Line pool access codes e Destination codes e Carrier codes Set up access codes that affect users dialing in from remote locations Set up access codes that affect calls coming in over the private network Set up access codes that affect calls leaving the system e External code ATA and analog devices Networking Configuration Guide 230 Chapter 24 Dialing plans The default settings shown in Table 38 can help you plan your access codes so there are no conflicts Table 38 Default cod
108. any entry in this field Refer to Line Access tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Public network DN lengths The Public network DN length tells the system how long dialing strings will be when entering the network For example if you dial 18005551212 the public network DN length for 1 which is 11 tells the system to wait until 11 digits are entered before processing the call gt Note If the values for Public Network DN length are set too short digits will be stripped from the dialing string Conversely if the values are set too large the dialing will take longer to process The Public Network DN Lengths Carrier Codes panel allows you to define DN prefixes and define the length of the prefixes for public dialing Figure 87 illustrates this panel Figure 87 Public Network DN Lengths Carrier Codes panels Public Network DN Lengths Carrier Codes DN Prefix DN Length 17 Code Prefix ID Length 1 11 10 3 18 101 4 Add Add Networking Configuration Guide 278 Chapter 28 Dialing plan Public network Table 53 describes each field on this panel Table 53 Public network DN values Attribute Values Description DN Prefix lt XXXX gt This is the number that must precede a dial string exiting the system to the public network Each prefix defines a specific destination or type of call DN Length lt 1 25 gt This number indicates how many number
109. are also variations of each sequence that you want users to be able to dial these are called overrides Overrides are defined within each restriction package for each filter Once you create the filters you can assign the restrictions to a telephone to a line to a particular line on a telephone and to remote callers Note Filter 00 cannot be changed Filter 01 has a set of defaults Filters ew 02 to 99 can be set to suit your special requirements See Default filters North America on page 417 e Each programmable filter can have up to 48 restrictions e There is no limit on the number of overrides that can be allocated to a restriction However there is a maximum total of 400 restrictions and overrides allocated to the 100 programmable filters The maximum length of a restriction is 15 digits The maximum length of an override is 16 digits Entering the letter A in a dialing sequence indicates a wild card and represents any digit from 0 to 9 e You can use and in a sequence of numbers in either a restriction or an override These characters are often used as part of feature codes for other systems or for features provided by the central office the public network e When restricting the dialing of a central office feature code do not forget to create separate restrictions for the codes used for DTMF and pulse lines for example 67 and 1167 e Do not string together a central office feature code and a
110. are pooled and the line pool is assigned to all telephones As well there is a designated attendant with a telephone that has all lines individually assigned Figure 92 illustrates an example of a PBX system Figure 92 PBX system Lines are assigned to a line pool CO line 1 CO line 2 CO line 3 CO line 4 All telephones are assigned access to the line pool for outgoing calls Receptionist deu E a US Assigned all lines CS ISSUES appearance and rs a SAS ring Networking Configuration Guide 290 Chapter 30 Public networking Setting up basic systems Programming Lines Set lines to manual answer e Configure into a line pool Telephones Line pools are assigned to general office telephones e The Prime line is set to the line pool Lines are assigned individually and as a line pool to the central answer position set to appear and ring Public network DID system Direct Inward Dialing DID A call is received over the DID circuit for example PRI and is preceded by a packet of information Receive Digits containing the number that was dialed The BCM decodes this information and routes the call to the extension that has been programmed with the designated Target Line The benefit to the customer is a pooled access group for incoming calls so that dedicated lines are not required to be terminated on the system
111. based on various schedules The service types that may be available depending on your service provider are described below e Public Public service calls connect your BCM set with a Central Office CO DID and DOD calls are supported e Private Private service calls connect your BCM set with a Virtual Private Network DID and DOD calls are supported A private dialing plan may be used e TIE TIE services are private incoming and outgoing services that connect Private Branch Exchanges PBX such as BCM e FX Foreign Exchange FX service calls logically connect your BCM telephone to a remote CO It provides the equivalent of local service at the distant exchange e OUTWATS OUTWATS is for outgoing calls This allows you to originate calls to telephones in a specific geographical area called a zone or band Typically a flat monthly fee is charged for this service e Inwats Inwats is a type of long distance service which allows you to receive calls originating within specified areas without a charge to the caller A toll free number is assigned to allow for reversed billing Consult your customer service representative to determine whether or not this feature is compatible with your provider NN40020 603 Appendix C ISDN overview 541 Emergency 911 dialing North America only The ISDN PRI feature is capable of transmitting the telephone number and internal extension number of a calling station dialing 911 to the Public
112. bind doe pool Sd 331 Using the Redirection feature 222 i600ssecceenee see neaese ei ver TER Rd 333 Executive intrusion Intrusion protection level 000 0c eee eee 333 EG BITE sauce rede SobESUDP RO E nnd wer RE Seda pm dd a en gas 334 Ronie OPUIMIZANON uaa 2e xt ace RUE HoLERCRI USO RERV EE RR LR FREE 335 ouo i ipo MR CT RIT 335 Private networking with DPNSS sisusu e m RR x RR RR RR REX 335 Chapter 37 Private networking Using destination codes 339 Chapter 38 Private networking PRI Call by Call services sese 343 Chapter 39 Configuring voice messaging leeeseeeeeeeeernnse 347 Centralized Voice Messaging external voice mail 2 0000 ee eee 347 Programming MWI and MWC strings 20 000 eee see 348 Local voice messaging access CallPilot Manager 0000ee eee 349 Chapter 40 Configuring centralized voice mail 000 cece eens 351 Local Systerm a NGS xus dictu Sedo b RUE S PR Ra Eo ER quad d S adobe ade 351 Median system aS NOSI fac cscrsvekaes RR REA XO X EERESRARCZVRALAW ARE RAS 352 System set up for host system 0 c ccc eee een eens 352 System set up for satellite systems 0 00 cee 353 Configuring the system for centralized voice mail 00000e eee eee 355 Chapter 41 Dialing plan Line pools and line pool codes 357 Ling pools and access codes acocsesu dg ese RE Rx xac R
113. callers hear a stuttered dial tone and must then enter a CoS password that determines what they are allowed to do in the system e Auto answer T1 loop start and T1 E amp M trunks are configured to answer with DISA by default e T1 DID trunks You cannot configure T1 DID trunks to answer with DISA If you want incoming T1 DID calls to be answered with DISA configure the system with a DISA DN Incoming T1 DID calls that map onto the DISA DN are then routed to a line that has DISA Networking Configuration Guide 428 Chapter 53 Call Security Configuring Direct Inward System Access DISA e You cannot program a DISA DN or Auto DN to VoIP trunks because they act as auto answer lines for private networks However you still need to assign remote access packages to the VoIP trunks to ensure that remote access restrictions are properly applied to incoming calls trying to access the system or the system network For specific line programming refer to Setting up remote access on lines on page 430 Figure 124 provides an overview of the remote access configuration process NN40020 603 Chapter 53 Call Security Configuring Direct Inward System Access DISA 429 Figure 124 Remote access task overview Yes dedicated DISA Per call DISA no CoS password Per call DISA no CoS password p gt i Yes 1 i Yes Per call DISA CoS password required Networking Configuration Guide 430 Chapter
114. calls for that system to route In each Gatekeeper Routed no RAS system the Nortel IP Terminals and H 323 Terminals records map IP addresses to specific telephones Gatekeeper Resolved all call signaling occurs directly between H 323 endpoints This means that the gatekeeper resolves the phone numbers into IP addresses but the gatekeeper is not involved in call signaling Gatekeeper Routed uses a gatekeeper for call setup and control In this method call signaling is directed through the gatekeeper Gatekeeper Routed no RAS Use this setting for a NetCentrex gatekeeper With this setting the system routes all calls through the gatekeeper but does not use any of the gatekeeper Registration and Admission Services RAS Enable H245 tunneling check box If Enabled the VoIP Gateway tunnels H 245 messages within H 225 The VoIP Gateway service must be restarted for a change to take effect Default Disabled Primary Gatekeeper IP IP address If Gatekeeper Routed Gatekeeper Resolved or Gatekeeper Routed no RAS are selected under Call Signaling type the IP address of the machine that is running the gatekeeper Backup Gatekeeper s IP address gt NetCentrex gatekeeper does not support RAS therefore IP address gt any backup gatekeepers must be entered in this field Note Gatekeepers that use RAS can provide a list of backup gatekeepers for the end point to use in the event of the primary gatekeeper failu
115. calls to the public network In addition employees at each office often have to call colleagues in the other office Refer to Private networking PRI Call by Call services on page 343 for more information Networking Configuration Guide 42 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview Figure 5 PRI networking using Call by Call Services Toronto office New York office Network 2221 Network 6221 Received 2221 Received 6221 Internal 2221 Internal 6221 DID 763 222 DID 562 6221 TIE Connection Public Network Central Central Office Office To reduce long distance costs and to allow for a coordinated dialing plan between the offices private lines are used to handle inter office traffic If call by call services were not used each BCM system might have to be equipped with the following trunks e 12 T1 DID lines needed to handle peak incoming call traffic e eight TI E amp M lines needed to handle inter office calls e eight lines needed to handle outgoing public calls PRI SL 1 Q Sig DPNSS and VoIP trunk networking You can use PRI SL 1 trunks and VoIP trunks to create private networks between BCM systems or between BCM systems and larger call servers such as Meridian 1 Succession 1000 M DMS 100 250 and CSE ETSI QSIG and DPNSS private networking is configured very similarly although network features may be supported slightly differently due to local l
116. check box Enable this service only if you are installing devices that require this type of service TEI digits These entries identify up to eight terminal identifiers for the devices assigned to the S loops Your BRI service provider supplies these numbers if they are required Actions Add 20 m In the top frame click the loop where you want to define D Packet Service In the bottom frame Ensure Enable D packet service check box is selected In the Associated loop field enter a defined S loop Under the TEIs table click Add Add TEI Enter a TEI Click OK Repeat for all the TEls you want to assign Delete PONFIND 0 In the top frame click the loop where you want to delete TEI assignments In the bottom frame click the TEI you want to delete Click Delete Click OK S loops assigned DNs The Details for Loop panel for S loops allows you to view which device records are assigned to a loop and to add or delete a record from the loop Figure 62 illustrates the Details for Loop panel Networking Configuration Guide 194 Chapter 19 BRI ISDN BRI loop properties Figure 62 Assigned DNs S loops Settings Details for Loop 501 LoopDN 457 Assigned DNs Add Table 35 defines the fields on the Details for Loop panel Table 35 Loop settings Attribute Value Description Loop DN syste
117. dialing sequence that you want to restrict Create a separate restriction for each e You can copy restrictions and overrides from one filter to another You can use a restriction or override in any number of filters Each time you use a restriction or override it counts as one entry For example if restriction 411 exists in filters 01 02 and 03 it uses up three entries of the 400 entries available NN40020 603 Chapter 52 Call security and remote access 417 e Removing a restriction from a filter has no effect on the contents of other filters even if the restriction was copied to them e You cannot delete a filter Removing the restrictions programmed on a filter makes it an unrestricted filter but the filter itself is not removed Default filters North America Filter 00 permits unrestricted dialing and cannot be changed Filter 01 is pre programmed with 10 restrictions and some associated overrides In Filter 01 Restriction 02 and Override 001 allow long distance toll free calls The dialing string 911 which is the number for emergency assistance in North America is included as both a restriction and an override in Filter 01 This arrangement prevents anyone from blocking calls for emergency assistance on lines or sets using the default filter Table 86 Default restriction filters Filter Restrictions denied Overrides 00 Unrestricted dialing 01 01 0 02 1 001 1800 002 1877
118. eee eee 187 BRI ISDN BRI TJ00pS cccsescccatcuchuscss E Pea RR RRTEREe TES 195 To configure BRI T loop parameters es icer rom ERE Sox ER Fb Yer ecd vs a p 197 To configure provisioned BRI ling fealUfes iiec iese inset din Sen Rate ree ta b tnn tendi 198 Programming BRI S loops lines and ISDN devices 201 To set BRI properties for ISDN device connections eessssseeseeeeenee 202 Configuring CLID on your system 200 e eee eee eee 205 To set up alpha tagging on your SYStOM cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeceaaeeeeeeeeeees 207 We program the Business Name ecce tudo P EE EI Et dosans iaeiiai aara iE 208 LID Name display ioasieboencoquIiSeRienI i RRDIR RR ER PRSEPRA S 211 Dialing pans eee 217 Dialing plan Routing configurations eee eee 247 Tse build route to allow local CANE ee 249 To setup a route through a dedicated TRIFIC siii eee enin titre annaa 250 To build a route for a secondary carrier eeessssssesseeeeeeeennnnnenn 252 To set up the multiple routing overflow feature ssssssssssseeeeeseeee 253 TO pr gram the PRI rovning table sisendas ekran iniae Aisake 255 To program a long distance carrier access code into a destination code 256 Dialing plan Routing and destination codes 259 Dialing plan System settings 0 0c eee eee eee eee 267 Dialing plan Public net
119. fields Table 84 Signaling Attribute Value Description Begin lt read only numeric string gt The first port in the port range End lt read only numeric string gt The last port in the port range NN40020 603 411 Chapter 50 Media gateways overview Certain types of IP communications pass through Media Gateways on the BCM You can control the performance of these communications by adjusting the parameters for echo cancellation and UDP Redundancy For detailed information on configuring the Media Gateways see Media Gateways panel on page 413 Networking Configuration Guide 412 Chapter 50 Media gateways overview NN40020 603 413 Chapter 51 Media Gateways panel The Media Gateways panel allows you to set basic parameters that control IP telephony The Media Gateways panel contains only two fields Figure 121 Media Gateviays Echo cancellation T 38 UDP redundancy 2 Table 85 General Settings Enabled w NLP v Media Gateways panel Attribute Value Description Echo drop down menu Enable or disable echo cancellation for your system Cancellation Enabled w NLP Default Enabled w NLP check with your internet system Enabled administrator before changing this Disabled Echo Cancellation selects what type of echo cancellation is used on calls that go through a Media Gateway NLP refers to Non Linear Processing T 38 UDP lt numeric charact
120. lines central office lines and features from outside the system Remote users accessing a private network configured over a large geographical area can avoid toll charges Note You cannot program a DISA DN or Auto DN to a VoIP trunk as they act as auto answer trunks from one private network to the next However you can configure VoIP line pools with remote access packages so that callers can access telephones or the local PSTN on remote nodes on a tandemed network that use VoIP trunks between systems NN40020 603 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview 39 Lines used for networking External trunk lines provide the physical connection between BCM and other systems in a private or public network The BCM50 numbers physical lines from 061 to 124 Default numbering depends on the type and connection to the BCM EXPI1 EXP2 VoIP trunks Although a VoIP gateway does not use physical lines it is easier to think of them that way Therefore in the BCM lines 001 to 012 are used for VoIP trunk functionality BCM networking configurations that use PRI and T1 lines require specific DTM modules e DTMsconfigured for PRI are used for incoming and outgoing calls two way DID Incoming calls are routed directly to a BCM DN that has a properly configured and assigned target line All outgoing calls made through PRI are initiated using the destination codes e DTMs configured for T1 can have digital lines configured as
121. lines the received number should be the same as the Network DN supplied by your service provider The call will be directed to the prime telephone for the incoming line if the Network DN is not used Priv Received Target lines only digits associated with a specific target line Specify the digits the system will use to identify a call from the private network to this target line Areceived number cannot be the same as or be the start digits of a line pool access code a destination code the DISA DN or the Auto DN e f you are configuring auto answer BRI trunks to map to target lines the received number should be the same as the Network DN supplied by your service provider The call will be directed to the prime telephone for the incoming line if the Network DN is not used Distinct ring None Choose the distinctive ring pattern that you want to assign Pattern 2 to the line This allows you to provide selective service to Pattern 3 calls with differing answer priorities Pattern 4 When more than one line with the distinct ring settings rings at a telephone the line with the highest priority rings first e Pattern 4 has the highest ring priority e Pattern 3 has second highest ring priority e Pattern 2 has third highest ring priority None has the lowest ring priority By default all telephones and lines are set to None Properties The Properties tab shows basic line properties Not all fields
122. loops require configuration and provisioning before the BRI lines can be configured e The BCM50 does not support the DDIM Digital Drop Insert MBM Networking Configuration Guide 90 Chapter 8 Lines overview Understanding how the system identifies lines On a new system lines and loops are numbered and assigned defaults based on the type of media bay modules that have been connected to the system The exception are the VoIP trunks which require a keycode to activate These panels allow you to easily view which lines have been enabled through a media bay module From this heading you can access each line record and assign attributes as you require Determining which lines you need to program Under Lines note that line types are divided into five headings The fifth heading contains all line numbers e Active physical lines e Active VoIP lines require keycode e Target lines on page 91 e Inactive Lines e All Lines Active physical lines Lines 061 124 are reserved for physical lines Active VoIP lines require keycode Voice over IP VoIP lines are signaling channels that simulate how CO lines work However VoIP lines transmit data to the IP network over a LAN or IP network rather than over physical lines Once the VoIP trunks are set up you can assign them to line pools and program their behavior in the same way you would PRI lines VoIP lines use line numbers 001 to 012 These line recor
123. loss plan uses an SLR of 11 dB and an RLR of 3 dB If you choose the wrong setting the voice signal can be too loud or too soft Internal CSU Internal CSU allows you to turn the internal T1 channel service unit on or off The channel service unit gathers performance statistics for your T1 lines or PRI with public interface Contact your service provider for the correct settings You can view the performance statistics for your T1 lines in Maintenance under the CSU stats heading Before you set the internal CSU to off you must ensure there is an external CSU connected to your T1 lines Call by Call Service Selection This following provides information about how to configure the PRI Call by call Service Selection which is region specific to North America for a DTM set to a PRI Module type By default incoming calls on a PRI are routed based on the Called Party Number information within the call request The last number of digits of the called party number that match the Received Number Length setting are used as Receive Digits to find a target line In North American PRI the Call by Call services allows alternate routing maps to be defined in various ways depending on the protocol defined for this PRI NN40020 603 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources 109 Figure 24 Call by Call Service Selection subpanel Details for Module Expansion 1 eee Trunk Module Parameters Call by Call Service Selection Provision
124. multifrequency Tone DTMF or pulse signaling on the trunk Tone does not appear if Signaling is set to Immediate T1 DID amp T1 E amp M trunk types only Loss package Loop analog only Short CO Medium CO Long CO Short PBX Long PBX Select the appropriate loss gain and impedance settings for each line see Table 12 Impedance Ohms Loop analog only 600 ohm 900 ohm The GATM can be set to a specific impedance level Networking Configuration Guide 134 Chapter 10 Configuring lines Table 28 Properties line settings Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description Legend Loop analog digital loop GS ground start DID DID E amp M E amp M BRI BRI DPNSS DPNSS VoIP VoIP TL Target Note PRI fields are all included under the main table Line Tuning Digit Loop analog only only lt drop down If the Line Tuning Digit dropdown list is cleared line tuning is menu gt disabled Otherwise line tuning is enabled By default the digit none used to remove dial tone is 1 In most configurations the digit 1 0 9 is sufficient to remove dial tone so that line tuning can execute In the rare case where the central office requires an alternate digit the technician can choose a digit other than 1 Signaling DID E amp M WinkStart Select the signal type for the line The immediate setting does I
125. networking MCDN and ETSI network features 321 3 Select the TAT check box Configuring ETSI Euro network services If your system has ETSI ISDN BRI PRI lines you can activate the malicious call identification MCID and Network Diversion features Advice of Charge End of Call AOCE is active if your service provider has activated that service on the line When the features are activated users can e display a call charge e redirect calls over the ETSI ISDN BRI PRI line to the outside network tag malicious calls Advice of Charge End of Call AOCE AOCE is a supplementary service available from your service provider on ETSI ISDN BRI PRI links With this feature the BCM user can view the charges for an outgoing call once the call completes This information is also reported to the Call Detail Reporting Application The information can be provided in currency or charging units depending on how the feature is set up by your service provider To invoke the feature the user presses FEATURE 818 To enable MCID and network diversion 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Private Network 2 Locate the ETSI subpanel Select the check boxes of the required options Table 64 lists the possible values for ETSI The Description column of the table describes the feature and how the user activates each feature from their telephone Networking Configuration Guide 322 Chapter 34 Private networking MCDN and
126. of a direct dial set is a telephone for an operator a receptionist or an attendant You can program a maximum of five direct dial sets on the system however you can only specify one direct dial number for the system Networking Configuration Guide 232 Chapter 24 Dialing plans Tips about access codes Here are some pointers to assist you in planning the access codes for your system Note The following codes digits must not conflict park prefix external code direct dial digit private access code Public Private Auto DN Public Private DISA DN line pool code destination code telephone DN Note When configuring a private network ensure the numbering plan does not conflict with the public telephone network For example in North America using 1 as an access code in a private network conflicts with the PSTN numbering plan for long distance calls e External line access code If the DN length is changed and the changed DNs conflict with the external line access code the setting changes to None Direct dial telephone Another direct dial telephone an extra dial telephone can be assigned for each schedule in Services programming If the DN length is changed and the changed DNs conflict with the Direct dial digit the setting changes to None e Public Private Auto DN The length of the Auto DNs are the same as the Public or Private Received Number Lengths specified under Configuration
127. on page 267 Dialing plan Public network on page 275 Dialing plan Routing and destination codes on page 259 Networking Public networking Setting up basic systems on page 289 Public networking Tandem calls from private node on page 293 Private networking Using destination codes on page 339 Networking Configuration Guide 168 Chapter 15 Configuring lines T1 Digital Ground Start NN40020 603 169 Chapter 16 Configuring lines T1 DID DID Direct Inward Dial are lines on a digital trunk module on a T1 Inbound DID lines are mapped through target lines The following paths indicate where to access the DID lines in Element Manager and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines e Telset interface CONFIG gt Lines Task Configure the properties for DID Direct Inward Dial lines Configuring DID line features on page 172 Prerequisites Complete the following prerequisites checklist before configuring the modules DTM module is installed and configured Refer to Trunk Module Parameters on page 104 Lines are provisioned Refer to Provisioning module lines loops on page 112 Process map Figure 52 and Figure 53 provide an overview of the DID line features configuration process Networking Configuration Guide 170 Chapter 16 Configuring lines T1 DID Figure 52 DID line feature configuration process
128. on the BCM is set to enabled automatic This means that it will automatically detect whether there is already a DHCP server on the network This feature covers all of the following scenarios e The network is already using DHCP from another server but the network contains devices that require the BCM DHCP server such as Nortel IP Phones e The network is already using DHCP from another server and the network does not contain any devices that require the BCM DHCP server e The network does not have a DHCP server and the BCM DHCP server is required to provide IP addresses to all DHCP clients If your network matches one of these configuration scenarios ensure that the DHCP status is set to enabled automatic If the network configuration does not match any of these scenarios you can either disable the DHCP server set the DHCP server to respond to requests from IP phones only or set the DHCP server to respond to requests from all DHCP clients Using the BCM as a standalone DHCP server If there is no DHCP server on the network the BCM will use the following as a default IP configuration P Address 192 168 1 2 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 192 168 1 1 The DHCP server on the BCM will provide all necessary information to DHCP clients on the networks DHCP for IP sets In addition to IP address information IP sets require additional information if they are set to Full DHCP mode This information includes the IP addr
129. page 518 To configure Dial Out Dial out Interfaces panel on page 501 To configure WAN failover WAN failover on page 513 Networking Configuration Guide 498 Chapter 69 Dial Up overview Remote Access Service Remote Access Service RAS allows a client system to dial a telephone number and establish an IP link with a BCM This link is a connection across a telephone network over an ISDN line or between a modem on the client system and a modem on the BCM Once this link is established the client can run IP applications to access the BCM system s OAM server Web Page Server or BCM Monitor A user must provide credentials to establish the PPP connection The credentials used must match the ones of a BCM account which has the PPPLogin privilege Note The modem or ISDN interface must be enabled for a connection to take place The BCM can be configured with callback users along with their callback numbers In this scenario the user can ask BCM to callback before establishing the PPP connection The BCM will validate the user name and use the callback number associated with the account where the user name was found The authentication will be made using the user name and password associated with the account where the callback user name was found The modem will try to call a configurable amount of time with a configurable delay between attempts The BCM modem or ISDN interface will automatically disconnect if ther
130. pass on correctly Also refer to Using the MCDN access codes tandem calls on page 232 Type of call NPI TON BCM prepend access BCM monitor display code Local E164 Local Local access code 9 E 164 Subscriber National E164 National National access code X1 E 164 National Special calls Private Special Special access code 9 international 911 etc Incoming call routing Incoming call routing also depends on the call type The system also uses the Public and Private DN length settings to determine call routing Defining DN length The DN lengths setting allows you to change the number of digits for the Received number length and the DN length which are used by the system to determine if an incoming call is valid for the system Each increase in length repeats the first digit in front of any existing DN For example if DN 234 was increased to a length of four the new DN would be 2234 A Warning Do not change DN length immediately after a system start up You must wait until the system is operational with two solid green status LEDs A Warning Increasing the DN length affects other areas of the system If the DN length change creates a conflict with the Park prefix external line access code direct dial digit or any line pool access code the setting for the prefix or code changes to None and the corresponding feature is disabled Optional applications affected by DN length changes V
131. proper routing information Voice Message Center If the system is using a remote voice mail select the center configured with the contact number 3 Set the restriction and remote package scheduling Restrictions tab Line restrictions Enter a valid restriction filter for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of outgoing calls NN40020 603 Chapter 15 Configuring lines T1 Digital Ground Start 167 Remote Packages Enter a valid remote access package for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of incoming calls from remote users or private networks 4 Assign the lines to DNs Assigned DNs tab If you have configured the DNs and know to which telephones the line needs to be assigned you can enter those DNs here The DN record also can be used to assign lines and line pools for these lines Appearance Type Choose Appr only or Appr amp Ring if the telephone has an available button otherwise choose Ring only Model 7000 and 7100 telephones have no programmable buttons so this must be set to Ring only Model 7000 phones supported in Europe only VMsg set When activated an indicator on the telephone appears when a message from a remote voice mail system is waiting Check with your system administrator for the system voice mail setup before changing this parameter 5 Suggested next steps Dialing plan Dialing plan System settings
132. protocol the encryption method the authentication method Protocol The protocol can be ESP or AH ESP Encapsulating Security Payload ESP provides data integrity source authentication and confidentiality for IP datagrams by encrypting the payload data to be protected ESP uses the Data Encryption Standard DES and Triple DES algorithms AH Authentication Header AH provides data integrity and source authentication The AH method does not encrypt data Note The use of a NAT device in the IPSec tunnel path can sometimes cause the AH method to report a security violation This occurs because the NAT device changes the IP Address of an AH authenticated packet causing the authentication of this packet to fail Encryption method The encryption method can be Triple DES 56 bit DES or 40 bit DES Triple DES is the strongest encryption and 40 bit DES is the weakest encryption Triple DES Triple DES is an encryption block cipher algorithm that uses a 168 bit key It uses the DES encryption algorithm three times The first 56 bits of the key is used to encrypt the data then the second 56 bits is used to decrypt the data Finally the data is encrypted once again with the third 56 bits These three steps triple the complexity of the algorithm 56 bit DES 56 bit DES is an encryption block cipher algorithm that uses a 56 bit key with 8 bits of parity over a 64 bit block The 56 bits of the key are transformed and combined with
133. routing VoIP trunks call definition and multiple routing least cost routing Routing also allows you to minimize the dialout for the user especially to systems on the same private network Outgoing calls can be either public or private which is defined by the route The public or private designation determines which dialing plan is used to determine the validity of the call Normally public calls are routed over PSTN trunks and private calls are routed over a private network However MCDN trunks can also pass calls designated as public to allow remote nodes on the network to call out of the PSTN of a local node This is called tandem dialing e If the outgoing call is designated as private the system checks the beginning of the string for a destination code that routes to a private network It also checks that the dial string is the correct length The destination code routing determines what the final dial string will be adding or removing digits as required NN40020 603 Chapter 24 Dialing plans 223 e Ifthe outgoing call is designated as public the system checks the beginning of the string for a destination code that routes to a PSTN or an MCDN trunk If the call routes to a public route the system checks the public dialing table to ensure that the dialout string has legitimate leading digits and is the correct length If the call routes to an MCDN trunk the call is passed as dialed minus the private networking codes The c
134. rrian r Hews Hee Mode dba dapk Oa GRE Cao 402 1 38 Fax FestHeliOliS iuouussnzeockem cre Crk eseese em RR RE NR aa 403 Operational notes and restrictions liliis 403 Chapter 48 Port ranges overview 6 5 cess dees iis ER ERR Ry eee dene RE ra a 405 RTP over UDP 6 oo eter seed cieie eRe WER ORSSER CEES SRE ERROR Ree EES 405 PEE kph ds dacs a E cine corte c a a Bd de as dea areal ah Re 405 ialiig FOE usq ubsewatedd sud EAE dd RR a bl iti a hb bed eae nes 405 Chapter 49 Por Ranges pan l curcancubaRecrrshrd uc RA nena REA E Eia a 407 RIP over UDP Pont Rangos scorn subdi adg ads pdodeqie dme uad o quida ark ee 407 Adding new RTP over UDP Port Ranges cxssecascse er dened awe e n s 408 Deleting RTP over UDP Port Ranges 00 eee eee eee 408 Modifying RTP over UDP Port Ranges cc eee eee eee 409 UDP Port Ranges auecoenescnkeceme cede tages SS Rene Rege exei Rd key oan 409 signaling Port PUB uos ch wasdeokrrudeLbee a REX rk dC RE peas hess 410 Chapter 50 Media gateways overvieW 02 ce eee eee eee eee 411 Chapter 51 Media Gateways panel 200 c cece ee eee eee eee eee 413 Chapter 52 Call security and remote access 0 cee eee eee 415 Los Peel EOD WETS 25 uade hacia d Rack P Rep de UR mp d cit OR SOR eeu Re 415 Notes about restriction filters losses Run 416 Default filters North America 000 0c cee 417 Default filters Ohl iocioceasietk emere dehetenieeeesd SA
135. specific codec ask your network G 729 VAD administrator for guidance G 723 VAD Default jitter buffer None Choose one of these settings to change the default jitter buffer size Auto None Minimal latency best for short haul networks with good Small bandwidth Medium Auto The system dynamically adjusts the size Large Small The system adjusts the buffer size depending on CODEC type and number of frames per packet to introduce a 60 millisecond delay Medium 120 millisecond delay Large 180 millisecond delay G 729 payload size ms 10 20 30 40 50 60 Default 30 G 723 payload size ms 30 G 711 payload size ms 10 20 30 40 50 60 Default 20 Set the maximum required payload size per codec for the IP telephone calls sent over H 323 trunks Note Payload size can also be set for Nortel IP trunks Refer to Configuring VolP trunk media parameters on page 382 IP telephone set details After a Nortel 1120 1140 or 20XX IP telephone registers with the system this panel displays the terminal parameters The telephone is identified to the system by its IP address so this cannot be changed If you need to change the IP address of a telephone you need to deregister the telephone and then register it again with the new IP address NN40020 603 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources 115 Figure 28 IP Terminal Details Telephony Resources subpanel Details for
136. tab e Use remote package If this line is used for remote call ins or is part of a private network ensure you specify a valid package These lines cannot be assigned to DNs as line assignments They are assigned only as line pools Instead configure target lines for each telephone and assign the target line to the telephones For more information refer to the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 2 Suggested next steps e Dialing plan Dialing plan System settings on page 267 Dialing plan Public network on page 275 Dialing plan Private network settings on page 281 Dialing plan Routing and destination codes on page 259 e Networking Public networking Tandem calls from private node on page 293 Private networking Using destination codes on page 339 Private networking PRI Call by Call services on page 343 Private networking PRI and VoIP tandem networks on page 323 Private networking MCDN and ETSI network features on page 319 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP on page 297 Configuring PRI Call by Call services Call by Call service selection CbC allows you to access services or private facilities over a PRI line without the need for dedicated facilities The different services represent different types of access to the network The following protocols support Call by Call limits e National ISDN 2 NI 2 e DMS 100 custom e DMS 250 AT amp T 4ESS custom
137. that use service type Private or service type TIE with DN Type specified as Private This table allows the BCM to determine the length of a DN based on the initial digits dialed Networking Configuration Guide 222 Chapter 24 Dialing plans A set of default Public DN lengths is included with the default template In most cases it is not necessary to change the default values About the Public DN lengths table In the public DN lengths table You can define up to 30 entries e Each entry consists of a DN prefix string 1 to 10 digits and a length value two digits 1 to 25 e Several entries are predefined in the North America profile These defaults can handle most regions in North America without the need for additional programming If required you can remove or modify these entries e The table always contains one default entry You cannot remove this entry You can only modify the length parameter associated with this entry The default entry specifies the length of any dialing string that does not match one of the other table entries Outgoing call routing Outgoing calls require line pool access codes or destination code with defined routes to leave the system e Access codes provide direct unscheduled access to an analog digital T1 e Destination codes also provide access to line pools but they also allow more flexibility in dialing which allows for more complex routing options such as scheduling fallback
138. the call is going over the VoIP trunk or the PSTN In many cases this involves configuring the system to add and or absorb digits Networking Configuration Guide 246 Chapter 24 Dialing plans NN40020 603 247 Chapter 25 Dialing plan Routing configurations This following describes how you can configure the lines and loops to allow system users to dial out of the system over a public or private network The following paths indicate where to access the route lines and loops in Element Manager and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Routing Telset interface CONFIG gt Services gt Routing Service gt Routes Task Set up routing for various call scenarios Destination code numbering in a network on page 249 Setting up a destination for local calling on page 249 Setting up a route through a dedicated trunk on page 250 Grouping destination codes using a wild card on page 251 Programming for least cost routing on page 252 Using multiple routes and overflow routing on page 252 Using the MCDN access codes to tandem calls on page 257 Prerequisites Complete the following prerequisites checklist before configuring the modules Media bay modules VoIP trunks are installed and configured Create an access code route map to understand how the numbering works for the system Routing wo
139. the entry to modify 2 Type the new value UDP Port Ranges UDP User Datagram Protocol ports are necessary for certain types of network communications The UDP table has two settings as shown in Table 83 Table 83 UDP Attribute Value Description Begin lt numeric string gt The first port in the port range End lt numeric string gt The last port in the port range Adding new UDP Port Ranges You can add up to ten port ranges To add new port ranges in the UDP table 1 On the UDP table click Add The Add UDP Port Range dialog appears In the Begin field type the first port in the range In the End field type the last port in the range 4 Click OK The new RTP port range appears in the table Deleting UDP Port Ranges You cannot delete all port ranges from the table You must keep at least one port range at all times To delete port ranges from the RTP over UDP table 1 On the UDP table select the range to delete by clicking the appropriate row in either column 2 Click Delete The range disappears from the table Networking Configuration Guide 410 Chapter 49 Port Ranges panel Modifying UDP Port Ranges To modify an entry on the UDP table 1 Onthe UDP table select the entry to modify 2 Type the new value Signaling Port Ranges Table 84 displays port ranges used for signaling These port ranges cannot be modified The Signaling Port Ranges table consists of two
140. the previous section To assign PSTN line pool to other system Click the route you created between the PSTN line and the other system In the Use Pool box type the letter of the line pool for the PSTN lines to the other system In the External Number field If this is a public PSTN line enter the dial numbers that access the other system through the PSTN For example 1 area code gt lt local code NN40020 603 Chapter 46 Setting up VoIP trunks for fallback 393 4 Inthe DN Type box choose Public To assign PSTN line pool to local PSTN lines Click the route you created for your local PSTN line In the Use Pool box type the letter of the line pool for the PSTN line In the External Number field leave this field blank In the DN Type box choose Public A OO N 2 To assign VolP line pool 1 Click the route you created for the VoIP lines In the Use Pool field type the letter of the line pool for the VoIP lines Leave the External Number field blank unless the destination digit you are using for the remote gateway is different than the number you want to use for the destination code 4 Inthe DN Type box choose Private Go to the next section Adding the destination code for the fallback route on page 393 Adding the destination code for the fallback route Create a destination code that includes the VoIP and PSTN routes that you created in Adding routes for fallback on page 392 to respond to the same a
141. the subnet is currently set to are A in use elsewhere on the network To modify a subnet 1 Click Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem gt Internal Subnets tab Select the Subnet to modify Click Modify The Modify Internal Subnet Settings dialog box appears Change the settings Click OK Internal Subnet Details The Internal Subnet Details panel contains a table showing the OAM LAN Subnet Details The details panel displays the DHCP lease of any PC that connects to the OAM port This table is read only Networking Configuration Guide 460 Chapter 60 IP Subsystem Figure 129 Internal Subnets tab IP Subsystem Internal Subnet Settings iT General Settings Internal Subnets Dial Dut Static Routes A These settings should not be changed unless the IP addresses below are already in use in your network Internal Subnets 10 10 11 1 00 15 C 41 7D 12 Nicro Name IP Address Subnet Mask MTU Size Intemal LAN 10 10 99 1 255 255 255 252 1500 0AM LAN 10 10 111 255 255 255 1500 Internal Subnet Details OAM LAN Subnet Details IP Address MAC Address Client Name Lease Start Lease Expiration NIC Static Static Table 95 Internal Subnets panel Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description Name lt alphanumeric gt The subnet name IP Address lt IP address gt The IP address for the subnet Subnet Mask lt IP address gt The mask for the subnet MT
142. the version of the satellite system 16 Repeat for each center you want to identify TIPS e A telephone does not show that external voice messages are waiting unless you enable VMSG set for the lines assigned to each telephone under Line Assignment Refer to Capabilities tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 e Analog telephones connected to an GASM can receive message waiting indicators if the analog line supports CLID MWI indicator settings for analog telephones or for analog telephones attached to ATA2s are set under the ATA heading Configuring an analog telephone in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Youcan program up to five voice message center numbers but many systems require only one Configuring the system for centralized voice mail MCDN is supported over a PRI SL 1 line or VoIP trunks between your BCM and other systems such as Meridian 1 or Business Communications Manager systems The following describes the specific programming for remote voice mail over PRI lines Networking Configuration Guide 356 Chapter 40 Configuring centralized voice mail Apart from line configuration MCDN over VoIP has the same system configuration To set up a PRI connection on the system 1 10 11 12 13 14 Ensure that the remote voice mail system is set up to accommodate your system on the network Ensure that your dialing plan coordinates with what the other nodes on the network are u
143. this box can be left empty Optional entries in the dial string P 1 5 second pause counts as one digit in the dialing string F78 telset DT wait for dial tone counts as two digits in the dialing string F804 telset Use Pool Pool Ato PoolOor Selecta line pool for the route BlocA to BlocF The Bloc pools only display if you have PRI or VoIP trunks DN Type Public This setting tells the system what type of line protocol the route Private uses to process the dial string Refer to PRI route types on Local Subscriber Hes Ee f National MCDN private networks Local National and Special are special f designators used to route calls from Meridian 1 systems through Special International BCM systems out to the public network Select Configuration Telephony Dialing plan Private Networks tab to define the codes for these settings Also refer to Using the MCDN access codes to tandem calls on page 257 When the BCM receives outgoing calls from the Meridian 1 it recognizes the call type and appends the appropriate access code to the Meridian dial string This code then matches to a route that uses the same DN type passing the call along either to another node the route would have the same DN type or to the public network the route would have a Public DN type depending on the routing information Service Public This setting tells the system what type of line protocol the route Type Private uses to process the dial str
144. to Provisioning module lines loops on page 112 Prerequisites Complete the following prerequisites checklist before configuring the modules System hardware is installed and operating correctly All relevant central office service provider information for the trunk type has been obtained Keycodes have been activated for core module trunks Expansion modules are installed and operating and LEDs are correct Networking Configuration Guide 82 Chapter 6 Module configuration Trunk modules Figure 20 Fitting the procedure into the overall picture Dialing plans and telephony configuration NN40020 603 Chapter 6 Module configuration Trunk modules 83 Configuring the trunk module parameters Modules automatically configure to a free bus when they are connected to the system e That bus determines what line numbers are supported by the module e Module programming determines the type of line e Trunk configuration determines the line properties for the system To define the modules to the system On the Modules panel click the trunk module entry that you want to view 2 Onthe Module Parameters tab panel review the settings to ensure they support the type of line function provided from the Central Office CO For details of the configurable parameters for a trunk type refer to Module parameters list on page 83 3 If your module supports T1 PRI or DASS2 refer to
145. to SL 1 to display this field NN40020 603 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources 107 Table 14 Module parameters values Sheet 4 of 4 Attribute T1 parameters CO fail Interface levels Value Module line type T1 PRI Specify a carrier failure standard T1A 5474 TR62411 ISDN PSTN Define a loss plan sett T1 PRI ing For more information see Interface levels on page 107 Framing ESF SF T1 PRI Select the framing format used by your T1 or PRI service provider Extended Superframe ESF or Superframe SF Contact your T1 or PRI service provider for the proper setting SF or Superframe is sometimes known as D4 Line coding B8ZS AMI T1 PRI Define the encoding signals on a T1 line Select the standard used by your T1 service provider Contact your T1 service provider for the proper setting Internal CSU check box Ti PRI Turn the internal T1 channel service unit CSU on or off For more information see Internal CSU on page 108 CSU line build 0 7 5 or 15 dB Ti PRI Set the gain level of the transmitted signal This setting appears only when the Internal CSU is Enabled DSX1 build 000 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600 or 600 700 feet T1 PRI Set the distance between BCM and an external channel service unit This setting appears only when the Internal CSU is Disabled Contact your service provider for the proper sett
146. to circuit switched E nabled All v Domain Name Call signaling port 5060 Outgoing Transport Proxy Support Proxy Status Table 24 SIP Settings fields Field Value Description Telephony Settings Fallback to circuit switched Enabled All Your choice determines how the system will handle calls if the Enabled TDM IP network cannot be used Disabled e Enabled All All calls will be rerouted over specified PSTN trunks lines e Enabled TDM All TDM digital telephones voice calls will be rerouted over specified PSTN trunks lines e Disabled Calls will not be rerouted Default Enabled All SIP Settings Domain Name Domain of the SIP network Call signaling port This is the listening port for the BCM Note FEPS Functional Endpoint Proxy Server must be restarted if this values is changed Default 5060 Outgoing Transport UDP The outgoing transport protocol for the gateway Note UDP is the only transport supported by the SIP enabled data services Default UDP Proxy Support Proxy lt IP address gt Specify the IP address of the SIP proxy server Status lt read only gt Indicates the status of the gateway Networking Configuration Guide 126 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources SIP Media Parameters SIP trunks are administered separately from H 323 trunks Both H 323 and SIP trunks commonly h exist on the same system however each has different network settings Figure 33 SIP Media Parameters tab Deta
147. uU IO PEE E pE 418 Restricion iiiter examples asceosrau der pen E RRRERGQC LET TRIS X RR 418 Remote callin programmid 2 23 34 9 Bie ar S S RRCRO RS icr due dd deoa Qe 419 Creating Direct Inward System Access DISA 000 000 leues 420 Defining remote access packages 000 e eee eee eee 422 Defining CoS passwords esxaxenkar ek ad ERROR ROGA eee bares bsiemee saws 423 Exiomalac oss ONOS ane sopa qa e RERO CPP ER HORSE RES rds 425 NN40020 603 Contents 13 Chapter 53 Call Security Configuring Direct Inward System Access DISA 427 Remote access overview scie ellus RR a Re NUR AC 427 Setting up remote access on lines liliis 430 Remote access on loop start trunks 00 c eee ee eee 430 Remote access on T1 DID Yunks xis RR RR E RR xGCRRR nee 430 Chapter 54 Call security Restriction filters cece eee eee eee 433 Figs ction IEIS 252 reas cieie e CRI ERE OCHO o es REAL LEASE ESD E ER 433 Adding a restriction filter and exceptions 0 2c eee eee eee 435 Default NIES uuo ects ese Coen i we ba HARE SERENE ROR w eee ES AG doe SER REGE 436 Chapter 55 Call security Remote access packages sleese 439 Configuring remote access packages sllslelseleeelele ees 439 Chapter 56 Configuring CoS passwords for remote access 443 Class or Service table Loa cues da EEXU CER TREO REPE CER X OH EO CR 443 Addi
148. use In the External Number column type a dialout number up to 24 digits Under Use Pool select a PRI line pool The Bloc pools that are displayed depend on how you allocate PRI lines into pools in the line programming It is possible to have only pool BlocA or only pool BlocB even if there are two DTMs configured as PRI in the system Choose a Service Type or DN type DN type displays for PRI lines with protocol set to SL 1 MCDN ETSI Euro e Service type displays for PRI lines with protocol set to NI DMS 100 DMS 250 4ESS Service ID N A appears where the service requires an ID Networking Configuration Guide 256 Chapter 25 Dialing plan Routing configurations Adding Carrier access codes to destination codes In some cases long distance service uses the same lines as local service but is switched to a specific carrier using an access number which is sometimes referred to as an carrier access code CAC Route programming can include the access number so the users do not have to dial it every time they make a long distance call Figure 79 shows an example of how the system interprets what the user dials into a valid outgoing call Note Carrier code service must be supported from the Central Office Figure 79 Carrier code call numbering sequence 9 1 601 555 2222 1 601 555 2222 ES 10222 1 601 555 2222 To program a long distance carrier access code into a destination
149. which you want this package to be PRI and VoIP available Actions Add line pool Package 00 is the default package and cannot be deleted It provides no access to any line pools 1 On the Packages table select the remote package number that you want to configure Under the Line Pool Access table click Add In the Add dialog enter a line pool Click OK to save the pool Next steps Add remote access packages to lines and CoS passwords op oN NN40020 603 Chapter 55 Call security Remote access packages 441 Table 91 Remote Access Packages Sheet 2 of 2 Delete line pool 1 On the Packages table select the remote package number where you want to delete line pools 2 On the Line Pool Access table select one or more line pools to delete Click Delete 4 Click OK e The following is an example of how a remote access package works e Inbound PRI calls are on line pool BlocA e Outbound calls are on analog lines using Pool A If users coming in on the PRI are to be able to access outbound trunks on Pool A then the lines in BlocA must be in a remote package that allows access to Pool A Networking Configuration Guide 442 Chapter 55 Call security Remote access packages NN40020 603 443 Chapter 56 Configuring CoS passwords for remote access The Class of Service panel allows you to configure passwords for system users who will be dialing int
150. words and phrases By applying silence suppression average bandwidth use is reduced by the same amount This reduction in average bandwidth requirements develops over a 20 to 30 second period as the conversation switches from one direction to another When a voice is being transmitted it uses the full rate or continuous transmission rate The effects of silence suppression on peak bandwidth requirements differ depending on whether the link is half duplex or full duplex Silence suppression on half duplex links The following figure shows the bandwidth requirement for one call on a half duplex link without silence suppression Since the sender and receiver share the same channel the peak bandwidth is double the full transmission rate Because voice packets are transmitted even when a speaker is silent the average bandwidth used is equal to the full transmission rate Networking Configuration Guide 530 Appendix B Silence suppression Figure 146 One call on a half duplex link without silence suppression Tx Fix Tx Rx Chan Bandwidth Corversation Hello Fred this is Susan Do you have a minute Fred Here Hil Sure TT Pa Ta Ta o Conversation Bandwidth used A Channel Link max Time Voice frames sent even when speaker is silent When silence suppression is enabled voice packets are only sent when a speaker is talking In a typical voice conversation
151. you need to be careful with the routing to ensure that the codes you choose are unique to the route This will also affect the number of digits that have to be added or absorbed It is helpful to use the Programming Records to plan network routing so you can determine if there will be any conflicts with the destination codes you want to use Configuring the schedules for the destination codes Under the destination code heading you created in the previous section click the Schedules key then choose the appropriate schedules To configure the VoIP schedule for all fallback destination codes 1 Change First Route to the route you configured for your VoIP line 2 Setthe Absorbed length to absorb the amount of the destination code that is not part of the dialout for the trunk Normal schedule for all fallback destination codes 1 Change Use Route to the route you configured for your PSTN fallback line the line to the other system 2 Setthe Absorbed length to absorb the amount of the destination code that is not part of the DN for the other system Examples Absorbed length VoIP schedule If the remote gateway destination digit is 2 which is part of the remote system DN structure CDP network and you specified a destination code of 82 set this field to 1 so that the 2 is still part of the dialout If the destination code is different from the remote gateway destination digits and you entered an External into the route record
152. 0 xp Mq ccc 132 Fiole eode qaseuaseoiod eu Eee PIT e RIEF REP P PES S PIE ded ada 134 Restrictions Line and Remote illlllllelsselel ees 137 eee e e cuu a boves pau oda eE Seeks Shee end cud 138 Chapter 11 Configuring lines Target lineS 000 0 cece eee 141 Configuring Target line settings stented sicnnareeievedsobens IER 144 Chapter 12 bantinurinu ines PRI occ oss desesaecasccceGce ns SG ERRORS TO 145 Configuring PRI line faturas usce rper REESE AMUESOR Peers PESOS ROCK a es 147 Configuring PRI Call by Call services 0 00000 tee 148 Networking Configuration Guide 6 Contents Chapter 13 Configuring lines TI E amp M soe 2osr o a rte 151 Configuring E amp M line features 0 0 0 0 cee 155 Chapter 14 Configuring lines T1 Loop start 00 00 eee eee eee 157 Configuring digital T1 E1 loop start lines llle 161 Chapter 15 Configuring lines T1 Digital Ground Start L Le 163 Configuring digital ground start line features liliis 166 Chapter 16 Contiguring lines TT DID eesosu eue o Rr RR ELE ERR RETE 169 Configuring DID lire Tealleg uuu nias uua dre bead ma uemhe debe x those 172 Chapter 17 Configuring lines DASS2 lines eese 175 Configuring DASS2 line features 0 0 000 c ee 177 Chapter 18 Configuring lines DPNSS lines 200 e eee eee eee eee 181 Configuring DPNSS line features 0
153. 0 10 gt clients address WINS server lt IP Address format The address of the Windows Internet Server which resolves address 10 10 10 10 gt IP addresses on a DHCP network NN40020 603 Chapter 66 DHCP Server Settings panel 483 Table 104 General Settings Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description WINS node type drop down menu The type of WINS node e B node The BCM first checks the HMHOSTS cache then uses broadcast for name registration and resolution e P node The BCM registers with a NetBIOS Name server at startup e M node Mixes B and P node The BCM uses the B node method and if that fails uses the P node method e H node Uses both B and P node methods B node is used only as a last resort Default H node Default gateway IP Address format 10 10 10 10 The gateway through which DHCP clients connect to an external network Generally this is the IP address of the BCM router Lease time s numeric string The amount of time before a DHCP lease expires and the device must request a new IP address Default 604800 seconds Main panel tabs IP Terminal DHCP Options The IP Terminal DHCP Options settings must be enabled for the IP Phones to function properly If the system does not use IP Phones or if partial DHCP is enabled this tab does not need to be configured The IP Terminal DHCP Options tab has three subpanels Primary Terminal
154. 0 B BCM50 A Public or Private PSTN line Public or Private PSTN line In a network configured for PSTN fallback there are two connections between a BCM and a remote system e One connection is a VoIP trunk connection through the IP network e The fallback line is a PSTN line which can be the public lines or a dedicated T1 BRI PRI or analog line to the other system When a user dials the destination code the system checks first to see if the connection between the two systems can support an appropriate level of QoS if enabled If it can the call proceeds as normal over the VoIP trunk If the minimum acceptable level of QoS is not met the call is routed over the second route through the PSTN line In many cases this involves configuring the system to add and or absorb digits For detailed information about inserting and absorbing digits see Dialing plans on page 217 NN40020 603 Chapter 43 VoIP trunk gateways 375 How fallback routing works CDP network User dials 2233 remote system DN 2233 remote identifier destination digit 2 The system absorbs the 8 no other digits are absorbed and the system dials out 2233 If the call falls back to PSTN line the system still only absorbs the 8 If the PSTN line is on a private network the system dials out 2233 If the PSTN line is a public line the system dials out the public access number to the remote system in front of the 2233 Refer to Fi
155. 00 0 cece eee 183 Chapter 19 BRI ISDN BRI loop properties 000 cece eee eee eee 187 Configure loop type and general parameters 0020 cece eee ee 188 T loop general SeHINGS i i c esses hse RR tents ch Rex ero xm Rep n 189 T loop SPIDS and network DNS isses ateskirec kdo REA RR EG R3 APR CURES 190 T oops Dpasket Soio ius sae we baa usq Wade ded a pud aep dae bs 192 S Inops assigned DNS cesccccsee se sr x RUE ERERE RU RE RR RR RE E 193 Chapter 20 BRIISDN BHI T loO0DS 604606064 aea a RREAARHELERATAXAERRARRAEAR AAA RA 195 Configuring BRI T loop paramblers 2cc cackkateeces nint aed wns eo DERE RE Rs 197 Configuring BRI Ies cues RR Eu RERE GR REOR n RR ee eee EGR BREA 197 Chapter 21 Programming BRI S loops lines and ISDN devices 201 Setting BRI properties for ISDN device connections 000e eee eee 201 DN records ISDN devige issuer eR RLEx P RIDERE EROR uera qa 202 Configuring an ISDN telephone DN record 00 0c eee eee 204 NN40020 603 Contents 7 Chapter 22 Configuring CLID on your system 200 e eee eee eee 205 Programming incoming CUID is scudo edm Egon exe BOR oce e eee wae 207 Using alpha tagging for name display incoming llle 207 Programming oulgoing GCUID 2 ia isses ppesttaeu dba E RA x PEY ERRer Era xe 208 Chapter 23 DUD Name display s sce e Ser ce bci e bei Ex Time a 211 Business name display sc ccc sux e aa ERR es Sede x RR dd NE KE R
156. 003 1888 03 911 001 911 04 411 05 976 06 1976 07 1AAA976 01 08 1900 09 1AAA900 10 5551212 02 99 No restrictions or exceptions programmed Note Default filters are loaded when the system is initialized A cold start restores the default filters Filters 02 03 and 04 although not preset with restrictions and overrides are the default filters in these programming headings Networking Configuration Guide 418 Chapter 52 Call security and remote access Table 87 Default filters for program headings Filter Heading Sub heading 02 System DNs Set restrictions 03 Lines Line restriction 04 Lines Remote restriction Default filters other Two profiles have global overrides which do not appear in Element Manager restriction programming and cannot be changed Australia 000 13144A UK 999 112 Restriction filter examples Line and set restrictions are shown in Figure 122 and Figure 123 In Figure 122 a caller using line 001 could only dial long distance numbers to area codes 212 and 718 A caller using line 003 could not dial any long distance numbers A caller using line 005 could dial long distance numbers to area codes 212 718 and 415 Tips To restrict dialing from outside the system once a caller gains remote access apply restriction filters to incoming external lines as remote restrictions NN40020 603 Chapter 52 Call security and remote access 419 Figure 12
157. 106 I ICL intrusion capability level defined 57 ID length carrier access codes 280 idle line search for 97 IDPX host node 106 if busy 137 impedance lines 97 increasing DN length 224 271 integrated BRI 187 Integrated Services Digital Network See ISDN 537 intercom calls within the system 70 99 prime line and direct dial telephones 270 interface dial out 501 ISDN 501 modem 501 interface levels 107 internal CSU 108 direct dial digit 269 Networking Configuration Guide 558 Index target line calls 91 Internal External direct dial programming 269 international special access code 285 International INWATS call by call services 236 Internet Security Association and Key Management Protocol ISAKMP IPSec 527 Intl 800 protocols 110 intranet networking multiple BCMs 327 intrusion DPNSS networking 57 Intrusion Capability Level See ICL 57 Intrusion Protection Level See IPL 57 INWATS 800 protocols 110 call by call services 236 PRI 540 IP address gatekeeper 383 ISDN 508 modem 512 network prerequisites 465 remote gateway 385 IP speech packets 124 127 IP telephones prerequisites 468 VLAN service 468 IP trunking MWI remote capability 300 IP trunks network prerequisites 465 IPL intrusion protection level defined 57 IPSec encryption protocols ESP or AH 528 modes 525 NAT restriction 528 overview 527 ISDN integrated services digital network 911 dial
158. 116 Modem Dial In Parameters fields Sheet 3 of 3 Attribute Value Description Auto disable timer 0 30 Time after which the Dial in for the modem is disabled after minutes use Default 0 Directory Number lt read only gt Read only number assigned to the analog modem Used for manual transfer of call or by auto attendant Local IP Address Specification Remote assigned check box If selected the BCM obtains its IP address from the remote end Default disabled IP Address lt IP Address Use this IP Address as the local IP address for the PPP connection This value is used when Remote assigned is disabled Default 10 10 14 1 Remote IP Address Specification Assign IP address to checkbox Ifselected the BCM will assign the IP address specified in the remote IP Address field of this section to the remote end of the connection Default selected IP Address IP Address When the Assign IP address to remote is enabled BCM will assign to the remote end of the connection the IP address specified in this field Default 10 10 14 2 Additional configuration to allow network access functionality If the BCM50 has an integrated router BCM50a or BCM50e then you must e Configure a static route on the integrated router e Configure the firewall on the integrated router to Bypass Triangle Route For example consider the network configuration shown in Figure 144
159. 1604 3 Node B 0 91403762 Node B 4 PSTN 1 9140376 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 914037 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 91408 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 9 not internal network This wild card represents a single digit Table 66 Node A destination code table internal termination Route Absorb length Destination code private DNs 3 Node B 0 392 Node B 5 Node C 0 393 Node C Table 67 Node C destination code table external termination Route Absorb length Destination code Public DNs 3 Node B 0 91613764 Node D 3 Node B 0 91613766 Node F 4 PSTN 1 9161376 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 916137 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 91613 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 9161 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 916 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 91 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 9 not internal network Table 68 Node C destination code table internal termination Route Absorb length Destination code Private DNs 5 Node A 0 391 Node A 5 Node A 0 392 Node B Routing calls through a tandem network The following provides a step by step description of how calls network through a tandem network NN40020 603 Chapter 35 Private networking PRI and VoIP tandem networks 325 Calls originating from the public network on page 325 Calls originating in the private network on page 326 Calls originating from th
160. 197 Configuring BRI T loop parameters To configure BRI T loop parameters 1 Identify the loop as a T loop refer to Configure loop type and general parameters on page 188 e Protocol ETSI and ETSI QSIG loops only e ONN block state e Overlap receiving e Overlap length e Send name display ETSI QSIG only Enter the details for the loop refer to T loop SPIDS and network DNs on page 190 North American systems only e SPID e B channel e Network DN e Call type ETSI and ETSI QSIG T loops UK profile e Clock source If applicable configure D packet service for the loop refer to T loops D packet service on page 192 Provision the loop and the loop lines refer to Provisioning module lines loops on page 112 Program the BRI lines refer to Configuring BRI lines on page 197 If the lines are set to auto answer put the lines into line pools A to O and configure target lines Assign the lines line pools and target lines to the telephones Refer to Line Access Line Assignment tab and Line Access Line Pool Access tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Configuring BRI lines There are two lines for every ISDN BRI loop that is designated as a T loop Unlike PRI lines these lines can be set to either manual or automatic answer when using for remote call ins The following paths indicate where to access the line configuration menu through Element Manag
161. 2 Line restriction example Line restriction ne leng Line 1 Set restriction distance except Line 1 area code 212 no long 718 214 713 distance except Line 3 area codes 212 718 Line 3 no long distance Se Line 5 restriction no long distance no long distance except area Line Set Line 5 codes 212 718 Figure 123 dialed digits must pass both the remote restriction and the line restriction A remote caller can override these filters by dialing the DISA DN and entering a CoS password Figure 123 Remote line restriction example Line restrictions Remote restrictions Line 001 Remote caller Line 003 CoS restrictions CoS password Line 082 Remote call in programming There are three aspects to remote call ins Networking Configuration Guide 420 Chapter 52 Call security and remote access e Setting up lines to allow users access to the system Creating Direct Inward System Access DISA on page 420 e Setting up Remote Access Packages that determine what services the remote users can access e Setting up CoS passwords for users calling in through the PSTN on lines programmed with DISA Defining CoS passwords on page 423 Creating Direct Inward System Access DISA To control access from the public or private network you can configure auto answer trunks to answer with DISA Remote callers hear a stuttered dia
162. 24 e Using VoIP to tandem systems on page 327 Figure 101 demonstrates a tandem configuration Figure 101 Private tandem network of BCMs Ottawa network routes all area Calgary network routes only NT area codes 403 and 604 codes except 403 and 604 Local PSTN Calgary PRlor VolPline Otawa Eon Public Node A Node C joe 403 761 XXXX jigi 613 763 XXXX PRI or VolP line PRI or VolP line Also refer to Using VoIP to tandem systems on page 327 for other examples of tandem systems using VoIP trunks Routing for tandem networks In this type of network each Business system node is set up to route calls internally as well as to other nodes on the system Each node must have a unique identification number which is determined by the type of dialing plan chosen for the network VoIP trunks require local gateway configuration and either remote gateway or Gatekeeper configurations that identify the other nodes in the network If the node is also connected to the public network the usual routing is required for that connection Networking Configuration Guide 324 Chapter 35 Private networking PRI and VoIP tandem networks The following tables show the routing tables for Node A and Node C for external and internal terminating calls Table 65 Node A destination code table external termination Route Absorb length Destination code public DNs 4 PSTN 1 9
163. 303 MCDN features 299 MCDN network example 308 MCDN over VoIP 311 MCDN routing 310 MCDN Zone ID for SRG 286 MCDN break in 301 MCDN camp on feature 301 MCDN ISDN call connection limitation ICCL 47 320 MCDN message waiting indication MWI 299 MCDN network call redirection NCRI 46 319 MCDN trunk anti tromboning TAT 49 320 MCDN trunk route optimization TRO 48 320 media bay module settings 309 Meridian MCDN system requirements 297 multiple BCMs 327 network 4 40 339 network diversion 322 node 43 323 programming MCDN 356 protocols 37 315 PSTN fallback 373 received 40 339 restriction filters 41 342 signaling method 383 system callers 36 294 tandem network 325 tandem network originating calls 326 tandem network routing 44 UDP and CDP programming 303 using TI E amp M lines 40 Virtual Private Network ID 286 networks DPNSS 1 53 MCDN 46 319 VLAN ports 468 NI call by call services support 237 loop programming protocol 188 PRI protocol 239 262 NI 2 available services 110 Nine hundred 900 call by call services 236 protocols 110 node tandem network 43 323 terminating DPNSS 1 52 NSF Extension 105 NTI network termination type 1 544 numbering plans overview 218 O Oakley Key Determination Protocols 527 OLI changing DN length 225 271 ONN outgoing name and number blocking feature 819 540 ONN blocking state 188 open switch interval OSI 133 outgoing call configuration 385
164. 33 About the BCM VoIP capability The BCM provides VoIP functionality both within a LAN Local Area Network and across a WAN It can contain IP telephones which act similar to a traditional phone but send their signals across data networks in the form of IP packets The BCM can also contain IP trunks which connect offices together across an IP network For more information about VoIP see VoIP overview on page 363 Network routing The BCM is available with and without an internal router With the router it can handle all external connections necessary for a data network as well as control security on these connections The standalone version of the BCM does not handle routing but is suitable for IP networks where a router is already in place For information on the BCM router see Router overview on page 469 Configuring the BCM with data networks To configure the BCM to work with a data network complete the following steps Networking Configuration Guide 454 Chapter 59 Data networking overview e Complete the pre installation checklist This will make sure that you ve made all necessary preparations for connecting the BCM For information on completing the pre installation checklist Data network prerequisites checklist on page 465 e Configure your router If you already have a router on your system you must make some modifications to its configuration for use with the BCM If you have the BCM50a or BCM50e yo
165. 4 Chapter 24 Dialing plans When a user dials and the telephone cannot capture the preferred line First Route the system tries each successive defined route Second Route then Third Route If none of these routes have available lines the call reverts to the Normal mode When the call switches from the preferred routing mode First Route Second Route Third Route to Normal mode the telephone display flashes an expensive route warning VoIP trunking uses a similar process for setting up fallback from the VoIP trunk to a PSTN line Note Overflow routing directs calls using alternate line pools A call can be affected by different line filters when it is handled by overflow routing Setting up VoIP trunks for fallback Fallback is a feature that allows a call to progress when a VoIP trunk is unavailable or is not providing adequate quality of service QoS Refer to Setting up VoIP trunks for fallback on page 391 for details about setting up fallback for VoIP trunks By enabling Fallback to circuit switched on the H323 Settings panel you allow the system to check the availability of suitable bandwidth for a VoIP call then switch the call to a PSTN line if the VoIP trunk is not available or cannot produce the expected quality The Local Gateway IP Interface panel is accessed at Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources gt IP Trunks gt H323 Settings You use scheduling and destination codes to allow t
166. 403 when you send and receive fax messages over VoIP trunks For more information see VoIP trunk gateways on page 367 Operational notes and restrictions Some fax machines cannot send faxes successfully over VoIP T 38 trunks to the following destinations e CallPilot mailboxes e CallPilot mailboxes accessed through auto attendant e Fax Transfer calls transferred to a system fax device through the auto attendant Use the following tips to avoid this problem e Avoid using manual dial on the originating fax machine In some fax machines dialing manually results in a much shorter call time out Networking Configuration Guide 404 Chapter 47 T 38 fax e Ifyou must dial manually wait until the call is answered before you start the fax session e For Mailbox Call Answering only if you must dial manually enter the digit 8 as soon as you hear the mailbox greeting This ensures that CallPilot initiates the fax session before the fax machine timer starts Note Enter the digit 8 for Norstar Voice Mail User Interface NVMUI only To enable fax call answering when using CallPilot User Interface CPUD enter 707 e Increase the call duration by adding a timed pause to the end of the dialing string This addition allows the call to ring at the destination before the fax machine call duration timer starts Refer to your fax machine documentation for more information on how to insert pauses into dial strings e Because
167. 447 74 call park 230 273 78 1 5 second pause 261 811 calldisplay 214 811 call information 214 819 outgoing name and number ONN blocking 540 features link code 71 261 long tones 808 261 wait for dial tone code 804 261 firewalls configuring 377 network prerequisites 466 ports 377 first display 212 fixed sampling 188 FoIP T 38 401 FoIP fax over IP 379 follow me diversion 55 332 foreign exchange See FX 540 framing format 107 full autohold 135 full duplex link silence suppression examples 531 FX foreign exchange call by call services 236 service protocols 110 G gatekeeper defined 364 network prerequisites 465 signaling method 383 Gatekeeper IP Local Gateway 120 gatekeeper IP local gateway 384 GateKeeperResolved 120 GateKeeperRouted 120 gateway destination digits 394 395 network prerequisites 465 protocol 385 protocol local gateway 384 remote configuring 385 type 385 Gateway Protocol Local Gateway 119 GATM global analog trunk module module mode 104 global analog trunk module See GATM 104 ground start answer with DISA 136 auto privacy 135 dial mode 133 redirect to 137 use auxiliary ringer 135 GWProtocol 119 384 H H 323 endpoints 378 fallback setting 118 Fallback to circuit switched 118 Trunks record jitter buffer 124 trunks record remote gateway 385 half duplex links silence suppression example 529 home location code DPNSS 60 335 host node DPNSS
168. 53 Call Security Configuring Direct Inward System Access DISA Setting up remote access on lines Setting up remote access on different types of trunks requires you to understand the trunk properties and how you want the system to answer the dial in calls Refer to the following information e Remote access on loop start trunks on page 430 e Remote access on T1 DID trunks on page 430 e Remote access on PRI on page 431 e Remote access on DPNSS lines on page 431 e Remote access on a private network on page 432 e Other programming on page 432 Remote access on loop start trunks Loop start trunks provide remote access to BCM from the public network The trunks must be configured to be auto answer to provide remote system access Refer to Configuring lines T1 Loop start on page 157 A loop start trunk must have disconnect supervision if it is to operate in the auto answer mode T1 E amp M trunks always operate in disconnect supervised mode When a caller dials into the system on a line that has auto answer without DISA the system answers with system dial tone and no CoS password is required In this case the restriction filters assigned to the line control system capabilities available to the caller When a caller dials in on a line that has auto answer with DISA the system answers with stuttered dial tone This is the prompt to enter a CoS password that determines which system capabilities are availab
169. 6 Combo NA N A Expansion 1 CTMAJGATMA 5 Enabled DSM16 B Enabled Disable Enable NN40020 603 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources 103 The Telephony Resources table fields are described in Table 13 Table 13 Telephony Resources table fields Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description Location lt read only gt Module type lt read only gt This field indicates the type of module assigned to each DIDA location DID8 DID4 ASM ASM DID8 GATM4 ASM GASM Analog and Global Analog Station Modules DSM16 provide four connections for four analog telephones GATMB Global Analog Trunk Module with four trunk line DSM32 connections DSM32 4X16 Comb DSM16 or DSM32 DSM32 Digital Station Module with 16 6 Combo and 32 telephone connections respectively 8X16 Combo 4X16 Combo A module with 4 analog trunks and 16 digital DTM T1 stations DTM PRI 8X16 Combo A module with 8 analog trunks and 16 digital CTM4 GATM4 stations CTM8 GATM8 BRI ST BRIM DTM T1 Empty No module is currently connected Bus lt read only gt This number indicates the virtual bus to which the module is 1 XX assigned For trunk modules this position determines the default line numbers available to the trunks attached to the module For station modules this position determines the DN range that will automatically be assigned to telephones plugged into the module State Enabled Indicates the state of the module or bus
170. 9 Private networking Using destination codes on page 339 Private networking PRI Call by Call services on page 343 Private networking PRI and VoIP tandem networks on page 323 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP on page 297 Private networking DPNSS network services UK only on page 331 Configuring centralized voice mail on page 351 Dialing plan configuration Networking Configuration Guide 66 Chapter 3 Telephony programming Configuring call traffic Figure 13 Dialing plan configuration Call control and telephony programming MBMs Lines and loops Dialing plan System settings on page 267 Dialing plan Public network on page 275 Dialing plan Line pools and line pool codes on page 357 Dialing plan Routing and destination codes on page 259 Dialing plan Routing configurations on page 247 Configuring CLID on your system on page 205 Call security Restriction filters on page 433 outgoing calls Call security Remote access packages on page 439 incoming calls Incoming calls For incoming calls you can have a central reception point or you can specify target lines to one or more telephones to receive directed calling You can arrange your telephones in Hunt groups ringing groups or call groups that use system wide call appearance SWCA ass
171. A destination code table internal termination Route Absorb length Destination code private DNs 3 Node B 0 392 Node B 3 Node B 0 395 Node E 5 Node C 0 393 Node C 5 Node C 0 394 Node D 5 Node C 0 396 Node F Table 3 Node C destination code table external termination Route Absorb length Destination code Public DNs 3 Node B 0 91613764 Node D 3 Node B 0 91613766 Node F 4 PSTN 1 9161376 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 916137 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 91613 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 9161 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 916 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 91 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 9 not internal network This wild card represents a single digit Networking Configuration Guide 46 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview Table 4 Node C destination code table internal termination Route Absorb length Destination code Private DNs 3 Node D 0 394 Node D 3 Node D 0 396 Node F 5 Node A 0 391 Node A 5 Node A 0 392 Node B 5 Node A 0 395 Node E Understanding Nortel Voice Networking MCDN network features When you connect your BCM systems through PRI SL 1 ETSI QSIG DPNSS or VoIP trunks and activate the MCDN protocol your network provides a number of network call features You can use this protocol to network other BCM systems such as the tandem system shown in C
172. After the BCM is unable to get a dynamic IP address from a server it uses the IP address saved from the previous lease The VoIP information remains unchanged since the IP address for the BCM LAN has not changed The BCM still attempts to renew it s dynamic IP address each time it reboots so if the external DHCP server becomes available again it will get a new dynamic IP address BCM using a dynamic address is changed to a static address If a BCM had been using a dynamic IP address and is manually changed to use a static IP address the VoIP information for the BCM LAN changes as well Networking Configuration Guide 478 Chapter 65 DHCP overview For example the BCM LAN IP address S1 and S2 IP address were all set to 47 166 50 80 When the BCM LAN IP address is changed to a static IP address 47 166 50 114 the S1 and S2 IP addresses also change to 46 166 50 114 If the S1 or S2 IP addresses was set manually and is different from the BCM customer LAN address these addresses will not be updated DHCP server on BCM50a and BCM50e The BCM50a and BCM50e include a router with a DHCP server By default this DHCP server will provide a dynamic IP address to the BCM Customer LAN The embedded router will recognize the MAC address of the BCM and reserve an IP address 192 168 1 2 is the default address When the BCM requests a dynamic IP address the embedded router sends the reserved IP address and disables the DHCP server on the BCM
173. All Table 50 describes the fields on the Destination codes frame NN40020 603 Chapter 26 Dialing plan Routing and destination codes 265 Table 50 Destination codes schedules Attribute Value Description Schedule Defaults Night If you use a different carrier at different times of the day or Evening Lunch Week you can set the destination code to use that route Weekend Sched 5 and provide two more backup routes The user does not Sched 6 experience any difference in dialing sequence First Route configured route 4 This is the route that the system will use during the indicated schedule when the destination code is added to the dial string Absorbed Length All None 1 X This indicates how much of the destination code gets removed before the system sends the dial string to the network Second Route configured route gt This is the route the system will use if the first route is unavailable Absorbed Length All None 1 X This indicates how much of the destination code gets removed before the system sends the dial string to the network Third Route configured route gt This is the route the system will use if the first and second route are unavailable Absorbed Length All None 1 X This indicates how much of the destination code gets removed before the system sends the dial string to the network Second Dial Tone This fe
174. BCM system and helps to lift the network processing load It is a receive only capability on BCM incoming calls are initiated at another PBX system on the DPNSS 1 network An example of Call Offer in use is an operator or attendant who has a number of calls coming in at once The operator can call offer one call and move to the next without waiting for the first call to be answered Call Offer Displays When a Call Offer is made by the originating exchange the target telephone displays a message and a tone is heard When an offered call arrives on telephones with line display the user sees XX X wtng if the calling party ID is available and CLID is enabled If CLID is not available or CLID is disabled Line XXX waiting appears the line name associated with the call If there are more than 11 digits in the incoming number only the last 10 will display If Call Queuing is programmed for the system the display shows Release Line XXX This is the line name of the highest priority queued call if it is an offered call Restrictions by telephone type e model 7000 telephone associated LED or LCD flashes and a tone is heard model 7000 phones supported in Europe only e ATA2 ASM8 Call Offer is supported as a Camp On feature and a tone is heard e SDN not supported Note the following general conditions and restrictions e Clear the DND on busy check box DN Capabilities for a telephone to accept Call Offer e f CF on
175. By properly planning and programming routing tables and destination codes an installer can create a dialing plan where VoIP lines between BCM are available to other systems in the network Figure 106 shows a network of three BCMs Two remote systems connect to a central system Figure 106 Dialing plan for VoIP routing network New York Toronto Network 2221 Network 6221 Received 2221 Received 6221 Internal 2221 Internal 6221 Santa Clara Network 4221 Received 4221 Internal 4221 Each system must be running BCM software Each system must be equipped with target lines and a VoIP keycodes with at least one IP Trunk line Programming information for this network is shown in Table 72 Table 72 VoIP routing for a BCM network Sheet 1 of 3 New York office Parameter Setting Line Programming Network line external Line 001 004 VoIP Line type BlocA Target line internal Line 125 Target line Networking Configuration Guide 340 Chapter 37 Private networking Using destination codes Table 72 VoIP routing for a BCM network Sheet 2 of 3 Private Received Line Access set Set 2221 2221 L125 Ring only Line pool access Line BlocA Routing service Route 001 Use BlocA External None Routing Destinations Office 1 Office 2 Routing to Santa Clara Toronto Destination Code 4 6 Normal route 001 001 Absorb N
176. C 668 DN 2229 Extension 2222 LOC 848 Table 105 shows examples of the routing required to set up the network shown in Figure 104 Note that 6 is the Private Access code Figure 105 Routing for DPNSS network Private Network for each branch BCM Routing service to Private network Public network Route 001 002 Dial out No number No number Use Pool N Pool N DN type none public private access code 6 is programmed Destination Code 6 9 Normal route 001 002 Absorb 1 1 Guidelines for creating a private dialing plan with DPNSS Use the following guidelines when creating a private dialing plan with DPNSS Networking Configuration Guide 338 Chapter 36 Private networking DPNSS network services UK only e When creating HLCs for the nodes in your system avoid numbering conflicts between network nodes and internal DNs Hunt group DNs e Program a Private Access Code into your destination routing tables to avoid conflicts with your internal HLC and dest code dialing plan For example if a dialout HLC is 848 but this number already exists in the BCM system for an extension the routing tables should add a Private Access Code to the dest code If the code is programmed as 6 the dest code becomes 6848 6848 uses a route to dial out 848 using the DPNSS line pool allowing the call to be placed Note that a Private Access Code is required only for specific DPNSS features such as Diversion Route Optimization
177. Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM http www nortel com callus When you speak to the telephone agent you can reference an Express Routing Code ERC to more quickly route your call to the appropriate support specialist To locate the ERC for your product or service go to http www nortel com erc Getting Help through a Nortel distributor or reseller If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or authorized reseller you can contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller NN40020 603 33 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview The system supports both public and private networking for telephony traffic e The public network is created by PSTN trunk connections from a Central Office terminating on a telephone system such as the BCM e A private network is created when the system is connected through dedicated PSTN lines or VoIP trunks to other systems This system may take several forms At the simplest level your system may be behind a private PBX which connects directly to the Central Office A more complicated system may be a node in a network of systems of various types where calls not only terminate at the system but calls may need to be passed through the system to other nodes unconnected to the originating node Refer to the following information Basic system configurations e Private network parameters on page 37 Basic system c
178. Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel 523 The following tasks can be configured to use dial up as a primary connection SNMP auto trap dial out modem user secure callback CDR records retrieval backup to a remote destination log collection to a remote destination software upgrades The basic steps to set dial up as the primary connection are 1 2 4 Create or assign an account with remote access privileges Create a dial up interface and enter the username of the account with remote access privileges as the dial out username Create a static route for the dial up interface or assign a dial out number depending on the type of device selected Tell the application to use the route The following example demonstrates how to configure the dial up interface Example To configure SNMP auto trap dialout Assign an account remote access privileges 1 Click Configuration Administrator Access Accounts and Privileges View by Accounts tab Click Add The Add Account dialog box appears Refer to the Administration Guide NN40020 600 for information on configuring an account Select the account to which you want to assign remote access privileges The details panel appears Select the Group Membership tab Click Add The Add Account To Group dialog box appears Select Remote Access group Click OK Networking Configuration Guide 524 Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel Create a dial up inte
179. DHCP Server E General Settings IP Terminal DHCP Options Address Ranges jLease Info Customer LAN Lease Info IP Address MAC Address Client Name Lease Start Lease Expiration Table 107 Lease Info Attribute Value Description IP Address lt read only gt The IP address currently supplied to the client MAC Address lt read only gt The MAC address of the client Client Name lt read only gt The client name if the client was given a name in the Reserved Addresses table Otherwise this field is blank Client lt read only gt Specify the description that will help to identify the client to Description which this IP address is assigned Lease Start read only date format The date and time the lease began yyyy mm dd hh mm ss Lease read only date format The date and time the lease is set to expire Expiration yyyy mm dd hh mm ss Networking Configuration Guide 490 Chapter 66 DHCP Server Settings panel NN40020 603 491 Chapter 67 DHCP configuration with router If you have a BCM with an embedded router BCM50a or BCM50e the BCM requests its IP configuration from the router By default the IP address of the integrated router is 192 168 1 1 By default it always reserves 192 168 1 2 for the BCM LAN If the IP address of the router is changed the IP address of the BCM LAN also changes Changing the default router DHCP configuration The DHCP Server also suppli
180. DHCP information such as NortelIP phones and PCs This is equivalent to setting the DHCP Status to Enabled All Devices In this situation the default VoIP settings are e S1 IP address 192 168 1 2 e SI Port number 7000 e SI Action 1 e S1 Retry count 1 e 2 IP address 192 168 1 2 e S2 Port 7000 e S2 Action 1 NN40020 603 Chapter 65 DHCP overview 477 e S2 Retry count 1 With external DHCP server With the DHCP Status set to Enabled Automatic which is the default the BCM first attempts to get a dynamic IP address from a DHCP server The external DHCP server responds with an IP address for example 47 166 50 108 255 255 255 192 as well as domain information such as europe nortel com If the BCM receives an address assignment from a DHCP server the BCM DHCP Server services only Nortel IP Phones requesting DHCP information It does not service PCs This is equivalent to setting the DHCP Status to Enabled IP Phones Only The VoIP settings allow any Nortel IP telephone using DHCP to get the BCM address and connect to the system e S1 IP address 47 166 50 108 e SI Port 7000 e SI Action 1 e S1 Retry count 1 e S2 IP address 47 166 50 108 e 2 Port 7000 e 2 Action 1 e S2 Retry count 1 BCM is unable to reach external DHCP server In an instance where a BCM is unable to connect the DHCP server it had previously been using it uses configuration information that exists from the previous lease
181. DN network when the following situations are valid the target telephone rings busy when the attendant calls no free keys on target telephone DND regular feature is inactive DND on busy feature is inactive The target user sees that there is a call camped on the telephone The called user can then clear a busy lines and take the call or the user can choose to reject the call using F814 or the user can indicate Do Not Disturb using F85 Figure 96 demonstrates the call path for a Meridian attendant to camp a call on a telephone in the system Figure 96 Camping a call Meridian 1 __ Line XXX J Call forwarded Incoming call for Telephone A Attendant m ie Telephone A and camped on f Telephone A Irings busy Break in The Meridian attendant can use the break in feature to interrupt an ongoing call from a telephone in the system Figure 97 demonstrates the call path for a Meridian attendant to break into a call between telephones in the system Networking Configuration Guide 302 Chapter 32 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP Figure 97 Breaking into a local system call path BCM Telephone B Incoming call for Telephone A Meridian 1 pu oum um Attendant m m m m s Breakin path Break in can occur when these situations are valid Target system telephone is busy but still has a free intercom or line key T
182. Direct Dial Inward DDD for incoming calls e Originating Line Identification OLI for incoming and outgoing calls For incoming calls the Calling Line Identification CLI CLID information is displayed to the user on telephones with line display This must be configured in programming For outgoing calls the directory number of the originating party is sent out as OLI Terminal Line Identification TLD for incoming and outgoing calls Referred to as Called Line Identification e Selective Line Redirect SLR and External Call Forward ECF implemented on calls between DPNSS 1 and BRI PRI DASS2 and analog lines e These remote access features are supported on DPNSS DDI line pool access code destination codes and remote page feature codes Keycodes are required to enable DPNSS 1 DPNSS to Embark connections DPNSS lines connected to an Embark switch perform call redirection diversion using the Call Forward feature to create a tandem link back to the switch Since this is different from other switches you must select the type of switch DPNSS will be connecting to when you do module programming Before you program Call Forwarding ensure that e Both real channels and virtual channels are provisioned Destination or line pool codes are programmed for the DPNSS to Embark link Also during programming for Call Forward No Answer and Call Forward on Busy when you enter the Forward to digits the system does a vali
183. G TI E amp M e VoIP MCDN BCM systems can be networked together using TIE lines or E amp M connections Larger networks or networks that are geographically spread out can be chained together through faster PRI SL 1 connections or with voice over IP VoIP trunk lines SL 1 lines and VoIP trunks also offer the opportunity to use the MCDN protocol which provides enhanced trunking features and end to end user identification If a Meridian 1 is part of the MCDN network the network can also provide centralized voice mail and auto attendant off the Meridian MCDN note MCDN networking requires all nodes on the network to use a common Universal Dialing plan UDP or a Coordinated Dialing Plan CDP Refer to Dialing plan Public network on page 275 and Dialing plan Private network settings on page 281 Keycode requirements Keycodes are required to activate the protocols that are used to create private networking including e P trunks if you want additional IP trunks e anMCDN keycode if you want to use the MCDN protocol between the systems Networking Configuration Guide 316 Chapter 33 Private networking Basic parameters You must purchase and install these keycodes before you can create any of the networks described in this chapter Consult with your Nortel distributor to ensure you order the correct keycodes for the type of network you want to create Remote access to the network Authorized users can acc
184. Global Settings Modem Dial In Parameters ISDN DiaHn Parameters d Callback Status Disconnected Disconnected Dial In Settings Assigned Lines Line Dial in Number Add Remote IP Address Specification Assign IP address to remote oO First dial in IP address 1010 18 10 Second dial in IP address 1010182 Table 118 ISDN Dial In Parameters fields Sheet 1 of 3 Second dial in IP address 10 10 18 11 Attribute Value Description Enable ISDN dial in Allow network access check box check box Enable or disable ISDN dial in access to the entire network Enable or disable ISDN dial in Default disabled Default disabled Networking Configuration Guide 520 Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel Table 118 ISDN Dial In Parameters fields Sheet 2 of 3 Attribute Value Description appear in this table Connection State This is a table that shows the current dial in state if connected Note There is a maximum of two entries in this table as there are two ISDN channels This table will display the ISDN channels that are available for ISDN dial in If any channels are being used for ISDN dial out either Automatic or manual then this channel will not be available for ISDN dial in and will not interval s Channel lt read only gt The ISDN channel used User lt read only gt
185. IA 464 Long 2 dB BCM to PBX A loss of 4 dB corresponds to a cable length of approximately 2700 m 9000 ft Note Loss packages are not supported on the 4X16 combo Networking Configuration Guide 98 Chapter 8 Lines overview Turn Privacy on or off for a call You can configure lines in your system to have automatic privacy With a line not programmed with privacy anyone with the line assigned to their telephone can join your call by pressing the line button With a line programmed with privacy one person at a time can use the line Use FEATURE 83 to turn the Privacy feature off and on Privacy control cannot be used for internal or conference calls When another telephone joins a call the participants on the call hear a tone and a message appears on the telephone display It is not possible to join a call without everyone hearing this tone Note The Auto privacy setting does not apply to target lines PRI lines or VoIP trunking lines Programming line access There are a number of ways you can configure your lines You can assign each line to one telephone or several telephones or a specific line to a specific telephone You can also pool your lines so that a number of telephones have access to several lines See the following information e Making lines available on page 98 e Incoming calls on page 99 e Outgoing calls on page 99 Making lines available e You can determine whether a lin
186. IP telephones T b If DHCP is not being used has all telephone configuration been documented and made available for telephone installers Hint Use the Programming Record form 7 c If DHCP is not being used or if you want to enter the port manually has the VLAN port number been supplied if one is being used on the switch 7 d Have telephone power and connectors been provisioned 7 e Do computers that will be using the Nortel Software Phone IP softphone 2050 meet the minimum system requirements including headset Note Additional details available on client page for BCM 7 f Have DN records been programmed for the corresponding IP clients Use when manually assigning DNs to the telephones NN40020 603 469 Chapter 62 Router overview The following introduces the router available with the BCM and explains the two different types of routers available As well it introduces the key features you must configure on your router For more information on the router see your router documentation The router is a fully functional and powerful device that connects your LAN to an external data network In addition to configuring and connecting your LAN and WAN it provides a wide range of data services including Network Address Translation NAT Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP firewalls and Virtual Private Networks VPN See VPN overview on page 525 for more information ADSL
187. If it is successful in obtaining an IP address the BCM turns on its DHCP Server to supply addresses to IP sets only It will ignore DHCP requests from other IP devices allowing those requests to be handled by the other DHCP Server on the network If it is unsuccessful in obtaining an IP address the BCM turns off its DHCP client and turns on its DHCP Server to supply addresses to all devices that request IP addresses NN40020 603 Chapter 65 DHCP overview 479 Additional settings to configure In addition to these default settings you must also configure several other settings including DNS and WINS server settings and IP set information Networking Configuration Guide 480 Chapter 65 DHCP overview NN40020 603 481 Chapter 66 DHCP Server Settings panel The DHCP Server Settings contains fields for configuring the BCM core as a DHCP server Note The DHCP settings panel is unavailable for the BCM50a or BCM50e if DHCP is enabled on the embedded router In that case the DHCP Server Settings panel is replaced by a single button that opens the GUI for the embedded router The DHCP Server Settings panel is a multi layered multi tabbed panel The panel tabs links provide a general description of each panel and definitions of each panel field Click one of the following links Panel tabs Main panel tabs General Settings on page 481 Main panel tabs IP Terminal DHCP Options on page 483 Ma
188. In addition it manages the maintenance messages travelling between the network and the NT1 and between the NT1 and the BCM system The NT1 from Nortel is packaged two ways e a stand alone package which contains one NT1 card NTBX80XX and a power supply NTBX81XX amodular package which contains up to 12 NT1 cards NTBX83XX and a power supply NTBX86AA ISDN standards compatibility In North America BCM ISDN equipment supports National ISDN standards for basic call and calling line identification services BCM BRI is compliant with National ISDN 1 and PRI is compliant with National ISDN 2 BCM does not support EKTS Electronic Key Telephone System on PRI In Europe BCM supports ETSI Euro and ETSI QSIG standards and PRI SL 1 protocol Planning your ISDN network Consult theBCM50 2 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide NN40020 302 to determine a configuration of ISDN trunks and terminal equipment TE for the BCM system and then order the appropriate ISDN capability package from your ISDN service provider For ISDN BRI service your service provider supplies service profile identifiers SPIDs network directory numbers Network DNs terminal endpoint identifiers TEIs and other information as required to program your BCM TE and other ISDN equipment BCM does not support any package with EKTS or CACH EKTS is a package of features provided by the service provider and may include features such as Call Forwarding Link Thre
189. Lines Service Selection Parameters Service Type Translation Mode Translate All Calls To Foreign Exchange FX By SID l Table 15 describes the fields shown on the Call by Call Service Selection tab panel Table 15 Call by Call Service selection panel fields Attribute Value Description Service Type Foreign Exchange Refer to CbC services available by switch protocol on Inwats 1 800 page 110 Intl 800 Digital SDS 900 Translation Mode None Define how the incoming digits get mapped to line numbers All target lines or DISA AUTO DNs within the system By SID By Number Translate All Calls To Enter the appropriate information for the mode chosen Actions Add 1 On the Modules table select the PRI module you want to configure 2 Select the Service Type record to which you want to add Digit translations 3 Under the Translate table click Add 4 Enter the appropriate information in the From and To fields on the dialog box 5 Click OK on the dialog to save the translation range Delete 1 On the Modules table select the PRI module record you want to delete 2 Select the Service Type record from which you want to delete Digit translations 3 On the Translate table select one or more ranges to delete 4 Click Delete 5 Click OK on the confirmation dialog to delete the digit translation range Networking Configuration Guide 110 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources
190. Meridian 1 the Meridian system manages several aspects of the network including voice mail auto attendant services and system timing Programming note For information about networking voice over IP VoIP trunks which also can be set to use MCDN For networks running BCM 1 0 software or newer the trunk protocol for Meridian 1 IPT connection should be set to CSE The following information includes how to set up an MCDN network e Meridian system requirements e MCDN networking checklist on page 303 For an example of an MCDN system and the BCM programming to support it refer to An example of a private network with Meridian 1 on page 307 Meridian system requirements When setting up networking with Meridian the Meridian systems must provide the following e provide the correct software version to allow MCDN features If your Meridian system administrator cannot confirm this call your technical support center TSC or 1 800 ANORTEL Networking Configuration Guide 298 Chapter 32 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP The Meridian must provide the following end to end signaling option 10 message center option 46 and an IVMS link option 35 Meridian Mail link options 77 and 85 basic Attendant Console Directory features options 40 45 and 83 ISDN PRI or ISDN Signaling link options 145 and 146 or 145 and 147 advanced ISDN features option 148 network message services
191. Module Internal IP Terminal Global Settings IP Terminal Details Set Port Details IP Terminals IP Address 168 249 Device Type State Fw Version Codec Jitter Buffer Online 0604D 4B Auta Auto Table 20 describes the fields on this panel Table 20 IP terminal fields Field Value Description IP Address lt read only gt If the telephone is using DHCP or partial DHCP this may vary DN lt DN gt This is the DN record that defines the system parameters for the telephone Device Type lt read only gt This is the type of IP telephone State lt read only gt Indicates if the device is online FW Version lt read only gt Current version of telephone software Codec Default Specifying a non default Codec for a telephone allows you to G 711 aLaw override the general setting You might for example want to specify G 711 uLaw a low bandwidth Codec G 729 for a telephone that is on a remote or G 711 VAD busy sub net G 729 Note You can change the codec on a configured IP telephone only if G 729 VAD it is online to the system or if Keep DN Alive is enabled for an offline G 723 telephone Jitter Buffer Auto Increase the jitter buffer size for any telephone that has poor network Default connectivity to the system None Note You can only change the jitter buffer on a configured IP Small telephone if it is online to the system or if Keep DN Alive is enabled Medium for an offli
192. NFIG gt Lines Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view Panels Tasks Feature notes Restriction filters on Adding a restriction filter and Default filters on page 436 page 433 exceptions on page 435 Using restriction filters Restrictions Line and Remote on page 137 Class of Service table on page 443 Configuring scheduled service in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Hospitality General in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about restriction filters Restriction filters Restrictions are used to restrict outbound dialing For example restrictions can be applied to restrict dialing 1 900 numbers The restriction filters panel contains three list boxes You progress from left to right as you populate the information Networking Configuration Guide 434 Chapter 54 Call security Restriction filters Figure 125 Restriction Filters panels Restriction Filters Filter 0 Filters Restricted Digits for Filter 01 Restrictions Digits 1 Select a restriction filter Exceptions for Restriction 1 Exceptions Digits 4 Add exceptions 3 If restricted digits have exceptions select the digit 2 Add restricted digits to the Restriction filter Table 89 provides a description of the fields on the Restriction filters panel Table
193. NPI TON Private called number length based on MCDN trunks send private calls in this way None Private Subscriber Private DN length set on Private Network panel UDP Private UDP private access code home location code LOC private received digits CDP Private CDP private received digit DMS 100 DMS 250 ETSI QSIG trunks send private calls in this way None Private Subscriber Private DN length set on Private Network panel UDP Private Subscriber private access code home location code LOC private received digits CDP Private Subscriber private received digit Networking Configuration Guide 288 Chapter 29 Dialing plan Private network settings NN40020 603 289 Chapter 30 Public networking Setting up basic systems Public networks are the connection between the BCM and the public network PSTN network This following provides examples of two basic types of systems e Public networks PBX system setup on page 289 e Public network DID system on page 290 Public networks PBX system setup PBX is Short for Private Branch Exchange a private telephone network used within an enterprise Users of the PBX share a certain number of outside lines for making telephone calls external to the PBX Dialing within the PBX is typically 3 to 4 digit dialing between local and remote networked nodes This setup is for a larger offices which have fewer CO lines than there are telephones In this case the lines
194. Networking Configuration Guide 472 Chapter 63 Router panel NN40020 603 473 Chapter 64 VLAN overview A virtual LAN VLAN is a logical grouping of ports controlled by a switch and end stations such as IP telephones configured so that all ports and end stations in the VLAN appear to be on the same physical or extended LAN segment even though they may be geographically separated VLAN IDs are determined by how the VLAN switch is configured If you are not the network administrator you must ask whoever manages the switch what the VLAN ID range is for your system VLANs aim to offer the following benefits e VLANs are supported over all IEEE 802 LAN MAC protocols and over shared media LANs as well as point to point LANs e VLANs facilitate easy administration of logical groups of stations that can communicate as if they were on the same LAN They also facilitate easier administration of move add and change in members of these groups e Traffic between VLANs is restricted Bridges forward unicast multicast and broadcast traffic only on LAN segments that serve the VLAN to which the traffic belongs e For IP telephony VLANs provide a useful technique to separate and prioritize the telephony traffic for L2 switches e VLAN also provides a shield from malicious traffic that may be targeted at the IP phone in order to steal or disrupt service e Reuse IP addresses in different VLANs e As far as possible VLANs mai
195. No Reply feature takes precedence over Redirection Hestrictions by telephone type e For telephones with a single line display the number key acts as MORE and the star key acts as VIEW e ISDN all variations supported on ISDN telephones NN40020 603 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview 57 Setting redirection The timer used for the network Callback feature is also used for redirection Executive intrusion Executive Intrusion EI is a DPNSS 1 feature that allows an operator or other calling party to intrude on a line when it is busy An example of the use of this feature is to make an important announcement when the recipient is on another call EI is similar in functionality to BCM Priority Call but it is a receive only feature on BCM telephones EI cannot be initiated from a BCM telephone The person using this feature must be on another PBX system on the DPNSS 1 network When EI is used to intrude on a call in progress a three way connection is established between the originating party and the two parties on the call The result is very much like a conference call When one of the three parties clears the line the other two remain connected and EI is terminated Hestrictions by telephone type e ATA2 ASM8 supported e SDN not supported The telephone receiving the intrusion displays Intrusion Call A warning indication tone will sound after intrusion has taken place and the standard con
196. Node B recognizes it as being the responsibility of Node A and routes the call over the private trunk to A Incoming interface Intercom Destination Remote node Node A receives it and identifies it as being for C Uses IP trunk to route call to C Incoming interface Private Destination Remote node Node C receives the call and identifies it as terminating locally Uses target line to route call Private received Incoming interface Private Destination Local target line Using VoIP to tandem systems You can connect multiple offices with BCMs across your company intranet With this installation CallPilot directs calls throughout the system or for one system to support voice mail for the network Full toll bypass occurs through the tandem setup meaning that any user can call any DN without long distance charges being applied Users have full access to system users PSTN connections Figure 102 demonstrates a multiple BCM50 network The network diagram shows two BCMs but additional base units can be added Networking Configuration Guide 328 Chapter 35 Private networking PRI and VoIP tandem networks Figure 102 Multiple BCMs network diagram Head Office Warehouse System System telephone telephone server Company PSTN fallback route router Intranet VoIP trunk e j remote 71 7777 AN 36 Y 2004 IP phone To se
197. Normal schedule for the destination code enter the route you specified in step 1 NN40020 603 Chapter 25 Dialing plan Routing configurations 251 Grouping destination codes using a wild card If you have a number of destinations that have the same route and digit absorb length you can group these codes under one destination code to maximize your destination code table In this case the start digits will be the same but the last character will be the wild card and indicates any digit between 0 and 9 However if a conflict exists with other digits already programmed or used by other destination codes an error message appears For instance you might use the same route 555 to a number of remote sites Each site is accessed with the same external dial out string except for the last digit which is unique to each site The exception to this is a site with a totally different access number and line pool requirement route 565 This example is shown in Table 44 Table 44 Establishing routes and dialout requirements Route Dial Out external Line Pool 555 0162 237 625 unique number from 0 to 9 Line Pool C 565 0173 133 2211 Line Pool A If you do not use wild cards you would need to create a separate destination code for each unique dialout as shown in Table 45 Table 45 Destination codes not using a wild card Destination codes Route Absorb Length Dial Out 5621 555 3 0162 237 6251 5622 555 3 0162 237 6252
198. OP Sever iuoescatixs doadce Yon ed quus dud du Nada d Ses le 475 Main Module DHCP client sssi sacha cee bbe Pho Shoe ARRA a rotano xd 476 Main Module DHCP servet 1 6 cia sess ccu e occ DR Rc i 476 DHCP network SCOnall S 4 c2c6 44sec Grav idee iR RE RR RR gees ouneeas ee 476 BEAU CONLIN 6 cass oL dr ERR HERE SERRE SE YR SAREE SERS SEE 478 NN40020 603 Contents 15 Chapter 66 DHCP Server Settings panel eeueeee es 481 Main panel tabs General Settings 0 0c e eee eee 481 Main panel tabs IP Terminal DHCP Options 00 02 cee eee 483 Main panel tabs Address Ranges icisss seo RR RR RES 486 DHCP Bulls odes ss es veces becca UE d MERE PEE Redde ade dad dre d 486 Main panel tabs Lease INIO cusocosssu se IRR xam RR oka Ed Rn Rs 489 Chapter 67 DHCP configuration with router llselleeeeeeeeeerne 491 Changing the default router DHCP configuration 00000 491 Configuring the BCM with a DHCP address sls 491 Configuring the BCM to act as a DHCP server 0 0c eee eee eee 491 Determining the status for the DHCP server 00000 cence 492 Using the BCM as a standalone DHCP server 00 cece eee eee ees 492 DACRIS IPSE ci teat iawes coed ceeds Wee Chua erbe ausus an eed 492 Disabling the DHCP server si cn lt cceek 9 Fe re xU ERR RE eee 493 Chapter 68 Firewall configuration resources llle 495 Chapter 69 Dial Up
199. Other compatible versions of H 323 BCMS5 for BCMs running 3 5 software IPT Meridian 1 system running IP software GW Protocol SL1 Select the gateway protocol that the trunk expects to use CSE None No special features None SL1 Use for BCM 2 5 systems only that require MCDN over VoIP trunks CSE MCDN protocol for gateways that provide VoIP service through Meridian 1 IPT BCM 3 6 and newer software or CSE1000 gateways BCM 3 0 and newer software VoIP Protocol H323 Select the routing protocol for your network SIP QoS Monitor lt check box gt If you intend to use a fallback PSTN line for this gateway ensure that this check box is selected Ensure that QoS Monitor is also enabled on the remote system Otherwise leave the check box empty Tx Threshold lt 0 5 gt Indicate the level of transmission at which the signal must be maintained If the signal falls below this level the call falls back to PSTN Default 0 Actions Add 1 On the Remote Gateways panel click Add 2 On the Add dialog 3 Name Enter a short descriptive title for the remote system 4 Destination IP Enter the public IP address of the remote system 5 Click OK 6 On the Remote Gateways panel click in the fields to set any other parameters that you require Delete 1 On the Remote Gateways panel select the gateway you want to delete m Click Delete 3 Click OK on the confirmation dialog box Networking Configuration Guide 118 Chapt
200. Other programmable settings may affect what numbers appear in the window during programming Although the numbers 0 to 9 are valid Park prefix settings some may already be assigned elsewhere by default or by programming changes If the DN length changes and the changed DNs conflict with the Park prefix the setting changes to None The system assigns Call Park codes to calls in sequence from the lowest to the highest until all the codes are used A round robin method means the use of different of codes ensures a call reaches the right person especially when more than one incoming call is parked The highest call number the Call Park prefix followed by 25 is used by model 7000 and 7100 telephones analog telephones or devices connected to the system using an ATA2 Analog telephones or devices cannot use the other Call Park codes Note Model 7000 phones are supported in Europe only Networking Configuration Guide 274 Chapter 27 Dialing plan System settings Calls are retrieved by pressing the intercom button and dialing the retrieval code On model 7000 and analog telephones pick up the receiver and then dial lt parkcode gt 25 You also need to program the delay timer that determines when external parked calls that are not answered return to the originating telephone Refer to Timers in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 You can disable Call Park by setting the Park Code to None NN40020 603 275
201. P server on the BCM must configure a range of IP addresses to supply the IP sets It defaults to use the top 20 percent of a subnet For example if an external DHCP server supplies the following IP address to the BCM 177 218 21 45 255 255 255 0 then the BCM DHCP server configures itself to reserve the following range 177 218 21 200 177 218 21 254 You can use Element Manager to check and change this default The Reserved Addresses table lists IP addresses that are reserved for specific clients These IP addresses can fall within an Included Address Range or they can be outside any Included Address Ranges NN40020 603 Chapter 66 DHCP Server Settings panel 487 Figure 134 Address Ranges tab DHCP Server Included Address Ranges General Settings IP Terminal DHCP Options Address Ranges Lease Info 192 168 249 11 From IP Address To IP Address 192 168 243 15 192 168 249 200 192 168 249 254 192 168 249 3 192 168 4 242 4 Reserved Addresses IP Address 192 168 249 28 192 168 249 33 MAC Address 12 34 56 78 90 48 12 34 56 78 90 AC Client Name Devicel Table 106 Address Ranges Client Description Attribute Value Included Address Ranges Description From IP Address lt IP Address format An IP address specifying the lowest IP address ina 10 10 10 10 gt range To IP Address lt IP Address format An IP address specifyin
202. PNSS 1 52 digital station module See DSM 106 Digital Trunk Interface See DTI and DTM 39 direct dial digit Internal External 4 DN 269 numbering overview 220 NN40020 603 555 programming 269 type 269 digit facility 270 prime line 270 direct dial telephones 231 Direct Inward System Access See DISA 283 420 427 DISA direct inward system access DID trunk 421 430 DN constraints 232 273 overview 218 lines in anetwork 338 PRI trunks 431 private DISA DN programming 283 public DISA DN programming 276 remote access 420 427 Tl DID trunks DISA DN 420 427 E amp M trunks 422 432 VoIP trunks 367 381 disable abus 87 ISDN interface 503 media bay module port 87 disabling modem 509 disconnect automatic dial out interface 522 ISDN interface 504 modem 510 disconnect supervision disconnect timer 106 loop start trunks 421 430 display network name 539 symbols 28 distinct ring See DRP 132 distinctive ring pattern See DRP 132 diversion bypass call 55 331 DPNSS 1 55 331 follow me 55 332 immediate 55 331 on busy 55 331 on no reply 55 331 DMS private outgoing calls 287 DMS 100 available services 110 call by call services support 237 PRI protocol 239 262 DMS 250 available services 110 call by call services support 237 PRI protocol 239 262 DN auto assign 467 changing the length 225 271 disable enable module port 87 hunting See multi line hunt 539 increasing length 224 271 length c
203. PRI hardware e PRI hardware on page 542 BRI hardware on page 542 PRI hardware The Digital Trunk Media Bay Module DTM is configured for PRI In most PRI network configurations you need one DTM configured as PRI to act as the primary clock reference The only time when you may not have a DTM designated as the PRI primary clock reference is in a network where your BCM system is connected back to back with another switch using a PRI link If the other switch is loop timed to your BCM system your DTM PRI can be designated as a timing master If your BCM has more than one DTM configured as PRI you must assign the first DTM as the primary external the second DTM as the secondary reference BRI hardware The loops on the BRI module can be programmed to support either network or terminal connections This allows you to customize your arrangement of lines voice terminals data terminals and other ISDN equipment The following describes some basic hardware configurations for network and terminal connections for each loop type A BRI module provides four loops Each loop can be individually programmed as e an S reference point connection S loop to ISDN terminal equipment TE or aTorS reference point connection T loop or S loop to an ISDN network using an external NT1 NN40020 603 Appendix C ISDN overview 543 S Reference Point The S reference point connection provides either a point to point or point to multip
204. PSTN 6 Click OK Configuring VoIP lines VoIP lines require a keycode to activate You also need to set gateway parameters and system IP parameters to enable the trunks Networking Configuration Guide 386 Chapter 44 Configuring VoIP trunk gateways You must also set up target lines when you use these trunks The following path indicates where to set up target lines in Element Manager e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Target Lines Prerequisites Complete the following prerequisites checklist before configuring the modules The gateway and IP network is set up correctly Refer to the following procedures e Configuring VoIP trunk media parameters on page 382 e Setting up the local gateway on page 383 e Setting up remote gateways on page 385 e VoIP interoperability Gatekeeper configuration on page 389 Obtain all relevant central office service provider information for the type of trunk Configuring VoIP line features The following procedure describes the fields that need to be confirmed or set for these lines For detailed field descriptions refer to Configuring lines on page 129 1 Confirm or change the settings on the Line Trunk main panel Line Unique number Trunk type VoIP Name identify the line or line function Control Set identify a DN if you are using this line with scheduling Line Type define how the line will be used If you ar
205. Plan Private Network in the Element Manager The ID is a number between 1 and 27 and is defined by the Meridian system administrator Also refer to System set up for satellite systems on page 353 for specific call features available from a Meridian 1 based voice mail system System set up for host system The system that hosts the voice mail needs to ensure that incoming calls are directed to the voice mail service Process assumptions e Private network is set up with MCDN between any nodes that need to access voice mail on this system e All systems are using the CDP dialing plan and you have set up the correct routing to these systems NN40020 603 Chapter 40 Configuring centralized voice mail 353 e CallPilot or auto attendant is set up and is running for the local system e You have obtained a list of DNs from the remote systems that require mailboxes To configure the host system 1 Obtain the voice mail DN by pressing FEATURE 985 on a system telephone 2 If this setting matches the DN scheme for your system dialing plan go to step 3 If this setting does not match the DN scheme for your system dialing plan a To access the DNs panel select Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan b Inthe AII DNs table locate the DN to be changed C Double click the number in the DN column d Enter the number obtained in step 1 To access the Target Lines panel select Configuration Telephony Lines In the T
206. Proxy Server S1 Secondary Terminal Proxy Server S2 and VLAN Primary Terminal Proxy Server options The Primary Terminal Proxy Server settings specify information that is sent with the DHCP lease giving additional information to IP telephones Secondary Terminal Proxy Server options The Secondary Terminal Proxy Server settings control a fallback option in the event that an IP phone is unable to connect with the Primary Terminal Proxy Server The settings for the Secondary Terminal Proxy Server are the same as those for the Primary Terminal Proxy Server VLAN options If you are using a router that supports VLAN you can configure the BCM as a VLAN member by entering a VLAN string into this field This identifier is sent out to all IP terminals along with their DHCP information Networking Configuration Guide 484 Chapter 66 DHCP Server Settings panel Figure 133 P Terminal DHCP Options DHCP Server General Settings IP Terminal DHCP Options Address Ranges Lease Info Primary Terminal Proxy Server 51 IP address Pot BCM v Port number Action E Retry count i Secondary Terminal Proxy Server 52 IPaddress 192168 249 25 Pot pce m Port number Action Retry count 1 VLAN VLAN identifiers comma delimited Table 105 IP Terminal DHCP Options Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description Primary Terminal Proxy Server S1 IP A
207. Public networking Setting up basic systems on page 289 Public networking Tandem calls from private node on page 293 Private networking Using destination codes on page 339 NN40020 603 157 Chapter 14 Configuring lines T1 Loop start Loop start trunks provide remote access to the BCM from the public network They must be configured to auto answer to provide remote system access A loop start trunk must have disconnect supervision if it is to operate in the auto answer mode The following paths indicate where to access the loop start trunks information through Element Manager and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines e Telset interface CONFIG gt Lines Task Configure the analog or digital loop start lines connected to the system Configuring digital T1 E1 loop start lines on page 161 Prerequisites Complete the following prerequisites checklist before configuring the modules Analog or DTM module is installed and configured Refer to Trunk Module Parameters on page 104 Lines are provisioned Refer to Provisioning module lines loops on page 112 Process map Figure 47 Figure 48 and Figure 49 provide an overview of the configuration process for T1 Loop start lines Networking Configuration Guide 158 Chapter 14 Configuring lines T1 Loop start Figure 47 T1 Loop start line configuration
208. R CE desc sexa Re 357 Lineas DNS TIE a6 cu yak teks Ss bas CV EROR RD EOS OV ee Heese RRS 359 Line pools Call by Call Limits tab PRI only sssele leen 360 NN40020 603 Contents 11 Chapter 42 VOIP QVETVIEW Lisui 3A RR EERER E Er REXdERPREPEEERSERPC ETE ERES 363 luizie c PCR TC MEC E 363 VOIP MUNKS ccacc sunm e reme tear ieser p ERG RO RERA EEren En 363 Creating an IP telephony network ssslseesesese eh 363 TOIBDO E dub d ped dem ieee Re VC e bi REP Rede du 364 DutoReppelS cco fen eed wy Se eee ERE E XVOIRQEE aS oe Eee USES ERE RET OS 364 Cibus oie cine cota ET E I TR LT ETIN 364 E MOORE cau mut Sauce Vade PR Ease QR ER Co Rd Kt edad 364 Key VOIP COCOS accctaccoticeikos clades Gddaeeha te Saewbeni aides ened 365 Chapter 43 VoIP THUNK gat WayS iiuszeasssssaesessceseUraerdasdade s i ma ya Ru mos 367 Pre installation system requirements sseeseele esee 367 How VolP trunks make a DOlWOIK cssseisse kh RD ARR RE CORR RCRERTERG 368 Local gateway programming x iue uude du es cae ee hate ora EREA 369 Rouling Table 2 2 ketecee ek e RR nikte en rE Enea RS dari c Rd E Ra 370 PSTN calio remota Ode cuu orbirlodae adxeistbru4 vuRhegex 44x dhe eee 371 Fallback to PSTN from VoIP tr nKe xcsaxase Rura RUP RERa KR E ARRA ER 373 Describing a fallback network 0 0 c eee IR 374 How fallback routing WOKS 24 Lau auam mra ee be rae bees e Rob SER RR 375 Optional VolP trunk configurations usse sees gu
209. Resources Signalling channels VDI channels Media channels DSP resources Reserved Resources Signalling channels VDI channels Media channels DSP resources Application Resource Reservations IP Sets IP Trunks Media Gateway Voice Mail CC Fax Conf Parties Conf Mixers SIP Trunk Digital Trunks Details for Application IP Sets Current minimum assigned limit Current maximum assigned limit Note Modify Restore Defaults m System Max Change Pending Table 8 Application Resources panel Sheet 1 of 3 Attribute Value Description Total Resources Signalling channels lt read only gt The total number of signalling channels on the system VDI channels lt read only gt The total number of VDI channels on the system Media channels lt read only gt The total number of media channels on the system DSP resources lt read only gt The total number of DSP resources on the system Reserved Resources Signalling channels lt read only gt The number of signalling channels in use on the system This number can change based on the values entered for applications and on the those applications currently in use NN40020 603 Chapter 5 Application Resources panel 79 Table 8 Application Resources panel Sheet 2 of 3 Attribute Value Description VDI ch
210. Route 774 PRI d oute ine Public fallback li Y i i Destination code 2 a same S m Route 867 absorb O Dialout Dialout Route 867 absorb O Route 774 absorb 0 16135552244 a PE ud 14085553322 Route 774 absorb O Destination code 9 Se oca Destination code 9 Route G09 absorb 1 Route 009 absorb 1 BCM Santa Clara BCM Ottawa P address 47 62 84 1 P address 47 62 54 1 e DNs 3000 3999 e From this system dial 9 to get onto e DNs 2000 2999 e From this system dial 9 to get onto PSTN PSTN Dialing plan CDP Dialing plan CDP destination code is part of DN Routing Routing e Target DN 2244 first digit is unique Target DN 3322 first digit is unique to to system system Remote gateway destination digit 2 Remote gateway destination digit 3 Destination code 2 e Destination code 3 e VolP private network dialout no external user dials 2244 no absorbed digits e VoIP private network dialout no external user dials 3322 no absorbed digits Networking Configuration Guide 398 Chapter 46 Setting up VoIP trunks for fallback The systems already communicate through a PRI line which will be configured to be used for fallback Both systems already have all keycodes installed for eight VoIP lines and resources properly allocated for VoIP trunking For information about keycodes see the Keycode Instal
211. S 212 Alpha tagging for name display issues er RR RR RR ERE RE bes 212 DIETO UL SDN cua aed ddp 9 EE cb E X DOE V OR Read e adueu agii x aes 213 incoming and outgoing call display 020000600 RR Rm m mmm 214 Chapter 24 Dialing plas isaas ae 606 066060 064606000004009000 0040000000008 217 Posh SD ANE cad csdadeennta d FEQ e ERE REP RES EDU dr o a 218 Public and Private Received numbers 000 0c eee eee eee eee 221 Private network dialing iuis cua eie xu ER icm Ex km Bene Sex Rm De CR Green 221 Setting up public network dialing liliis 221 Chutaoindg Call OUNI wh cane acp pee REIR4 amp CREER REEGG ERERZCRIPqTeE RE P Aba eR 222 Moomina CON ceto Mem Pr NU mabe 224 Processing incoming calls xuzses cer shew e my ERI kd RI XE m Rd Rm 225 Determining line access dialing 2 22 Rr RR ERR 228 Understanding access codes 0c re 229 Gal PAIK COORG PEUT 230 Creating Direct DIBISOlS uua c cres iunie nee Sheen a eke Reels Samed 231 Tips opoe DOUNS udo s axi aor p a a edageer Shea cde eer se 232 Using the MCDN access codes tandem calls lllslllslsssen 232 Line pool BECSSS CORBE cus exu Seo RERO es BU oe Dax ck es A e OR E a al 234 B lR tgsde oc PPP ORB 234 criar ie Call POLITE lt 1 ccc debere ERE ORE REERRRPREPICRPEPP REPE YA ea Y ER 234 Configuring Call by Call services 00 ccc eee eee 235 Call by Call SEV S 2a cence ecebave eis E RR ING RR ERE dudes EE e 236 Switches supporting Call by
212. SS network example Calling Site LOC HLC Calling Party Called Site Dialing String Called Party Number Number Site A 244 244 1111 Site B 6 668 2222 668 2222 Site B 668 668 2222 Site D 6 848 2222 848 2222 Site D 848 2222 Site D 2229 2229 Site C 496 496 3333 Public DN 9 563 3245 563 3245 NN40020 603 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview 61 Figure 11 DPNSS networking Private Network Terminating BCM Site C BCM Site A DN 3333 DN 111 LOC 49 LOC 244 2 DPNSS DPNSS Meridian M1 LOC 563 BCM Site D BCM Site B DN 2229 DN 2222 Extension 2222 LOC 668 LOC 848 Calls are dialed and identified to the system as follows To reach a telephone inside the Private Network at the BCM site dial the DN of choice To reach a telephone inside the Private Network from another site dial HLC DN To reach a telephone outside the Private Network dial an Access Code HLC DN Each node has its own destination dest code which includes the appropriate access and HLC codes to route the call appropriately BRI Euro Protocol The Kapsch enhancement introduces two protocol types in BRI Euro Protocol S T user T T user The existing protocol type is renamed to S T user Networking Configuration Guide 62 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview Naming convention Choose the protocol type for consistency with PRI tr
213. Sequential PRI Defines how B channel resources are selected for call processing Answer timer 1 2 8 4 or 5 sec E amp M PRI Set the minimum duration of an answer signal before a call is considered to be answered Networking Configuration Guide 106 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources Table 14 Module parameters values Sheet 3 of 4 Attribute Value Module line type Disconnect 60 100 260 460 or Loop T1 timer 600 milliseconds Specify the duration of an Open Switch Interval OSI before a call on a supervised external line is considered disconnected This setting must match the setting for the line at the central office CO You must enable disconnect supervision by changing the Line Trunk mode attribute Under the Telephony Services sub heading choose Lines and Line trunk Data Clock Source T1 PRI BRIS T Primary External Secondary External Internal DASS2 Designates whether the DTM BRI acts as a primary or secondary timing component for an external timing source or as the internal timing source Note A BRI module can be programmed with primary secondary clock source however it is recommended that a BRI module always be set to Internal if a DTM exists on the system to be the Primary External clock source Warning Changing the clock source may disconnect calls If you change the clock source for your system you may cause your system DTM interface s
214. TONKAD 19 x8 dc Rr tra cgo d RU e Rp dc Redes Seed eso 49 Netwwoiking with ETSI SIG uaucciizaadcoeas bods tniii ARR ESPERE ARE 50 ETSI Eur network SCIICRS Licuua sac iow sep ck god i oad pe baa as 51 DPNSS 1 S6 VIDUE LuesusanqiamskrcoemecR Eder E b Rue eR dam dk RON Ge Ron cames 52 DPRSS T espabillilig oua eokb d ter RERRE RR Ad heeded ERRARE 53 Networking Configuration Guide 4 Contents DPNSS 1T99 IU B uua E p REPE X wipe REERRqPP e 3RCA DORIA HERR AR E 53 Private networking with DPNSS 22 00e0e bunk use er RARE ERES 60 E Ewo PIOIDOUL conse aes cuoxupseid edad Sea teas beans aoe 61 Naming CONVENION 22202 c cc elit esee Reg CoRR ER EEE ee RRO oa 62 Application level differences 0 000 cece ete 62 Protocol level differences sagiciabieseeisseeesetae i eed CA DROP Renee Reus 62 Chapter 3 Telephony programming Configuring call traffic 63 eean CAS contecceeg ere RESETCARUROERGG ODER GYKGGdGer kae wd Rua kr PRU P 66 aera e ee l ATE TRI I 27 11 7 1070 LLLI 70 Chapter 4 Application Resources overview 0 0c eee 73 Tpoes UI a e ousxesse TE T PUO IPRIDUC RERBA PASTE RE TS 7S8 Total and Reserved Resources usa xus iS ERROR RS RON anes E ROUES RCRUR RR OR 3 Setting values for application resources 0 0c c eee eee 74 Chapter 5 Application Resources panel 00 0c eee eee eee eee 77 Chapter 6 Module configuration Trunk modules 000ee eee eee 81 Configuring the t
215. TURE 78 to insert a 1 5 second pause in the dialing string Figure 77 Routing service record use pool Routing Services Services Routing Service Route 000 999 Dial out if required Use Pool max 24 digits or characters 100 902 585 yc 101 902 585 pc 102 604 645 Apc 103 604 645 c Create unique set ites digits Route through Pool A route number NN40020 603 Chapter 25 Dialing plan Routing configurations 255 Figure 78 Routing service record Destination code Routing service continued Dest code Services Routing Services Dest Codes Service Normal Schedule Schedule DestCode Use route Absorb 1st route Absorb 2nd route Absorb 3rd route Absorb max 12 digits 001 999 Length 994 999 Length 591 999 Length 994 999 Length 30 100 0 000 All 000 All 000 All 31 101 0 000 All 000 All 000 All 32 102 0 000 All 000 All 000 All 33 103 0 000 All 000 All 000 All Create uniqu EM Add Destination code to ecode Specify which route to use dialout out string Programming the PRI routing table The into To A OO N dialing plan must be thoroughly planned out in advance before you program the information the BCM system program the PRI routing table Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Routing Click the route number record you want to
216. The user does not have to be at telephone A to forward calls to location C Using telephone B and Follow me Diversion the user can forward calls from A to location C Follow me diversion can be cancelled from the forwarded location Diversion on Busy and Diversion on No Reply cannot be cancelled from the forwarded telephone These are programmable only by an installer and not by the user If multiple telephones are programmed to take a call the first telephone to respond will act All other telephones responding are ignored Therefore if the first telephone to respond has Diversion enabled this feature will be invoked Restrictions by telephone type all variations supported on BCM digital and IP telephones ATA2 ASM8 all variations supported on an ATA ISDN all variations supported on ISDN telephones except Diversion on Busy and CFWD Busy Setting Diversion You set Diversion for DPNSS in the same way as call forward You will need to enter the end DN when prompted You may also need to include the DPNSS 1 routing number DPNSS to Embark connections DPNSS lines connected to an Embark switch perform call redirection diversion using the Call Forward feature to create a tandem link back to the switch Since this is different from other switches you must select the type of switch DPNSS will be connecting to when you do module programming Refer to Configuring the trunk module parameters on page 83 Before you program Call Forwar
217. U Size lt numeric string gt Maximum Transmission Size This is the largest packet measured in bytes that the BCM can send Internal Subnet De tails OAM LAN Subnet Details IP Address lt IP address gt The IP address for the subnet MAC Address lt read only gt This is the physical address of the BCM not the integrated router NN40020 603 Chapter 60 IP Subsystem 461 Table 95 Internal Subnets panel Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description Client Name lt read only gt Displayed if client has name in Reserved Addresses table otherwise blank Lease Start lt read only gt When IP lease began Lease Expiration lt read only gt When IP lease expires Main panel tabs Dial out Static Routes Automatic Dial out Interfaces require static routes Figure 130 illustrates the Dial Out Static Routes panel Refer to Table 96 for a description of the fields Networking Configuration Guide 462 Chapter 60 IP Subsystem Figure 130 Main panel tabs Dial out Static Routes IP Subsystem Dial out Static Routes General Settings Internal Subnets Dial Out Static Routes Destination address Destination mask Interface Name 2 Add Dial Out Static Route Destination address Metric Destination mask Interface name F None vi Metric 1 Add Table 96 Main panel tabs Dial out Static Route
218. WAN Failover Interface can be programmed in Element Manager Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces gt Global Settings Note Dial out interfaces to be used as the Failover Interface must not E be provisioned for an automatic dialout service Modem compatibility The internal modem is compatible with all V 34 modems and has been tested with the following modems e U S Robotics Sportster 33 6 FaxModem external modem e Microcom DeskPorte 28 8P external modem e PCTEL 2304WT V 92 MDC internal modem Dell Portable e U S Robotics Sportster 56K external modem NN40020 603 501 Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel The Dial Up Interfaces panel contains four sub panels Panel Task Dial out Interfaces panel Add and configure the dial out interfaces Global Settings panel Set the WAN Failover interface Modem Dial In Parameters panel Configure and check the status of the modem dial in interface ISDN Dial In Parameters panel Configure and check the status of the ISDN dial in interfaces Dial out Interfaces panel On the Dial out Interfaces panel you can add configure and control the connection status of both ISDN and Modem dial out interfaces These interfaces can be used for either Automatic dial out service or WAN Failover Service ISDN configuration e ISDN interfaces on page 502 ISDN Dial out Channel Characteristics on page 505 ISDN Dial out Link Parameters
219. XR OS ER EET S 26 Porgoss MEC DR EET TIT 26 Symbols and conventions used in this guide llli lere 28 wcllarHc red Meme REC DES 29 acsdsy q1 mem PP n AT TTT SST TT 31 Getting Help from the Nortel Web site lille 31 Getting Help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center 31 Getting Help through a Nortel distributor or reseller llli 32 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview lleeeeeesse 33 Basic system COMNGUISIONS sucus doceo doe ase SE RR EROR E RO RoD P Ape naci 33 Tandem calling to a remote PSTN slselslelellllle lee 36 Private network parameters ose uu se sow ac osx x aor eO Race c UR Ra des x NDA OR CR ea 37 Lines used lor networking uoa spe Pebble Rec A dx irii araa 39 Types of private newoIKS isioodases i e Rex RE x 3 RR edew RO ERE 39 Routing based networks using T1 E amp M lines liliis 40 PRI networking using Call by Call services 000 0c eee eee 41 PRI SL 1 Q Sig DPNSS and VoIP trunk networking lille 42 System daling PIANE e Bec dem sace dos nud dca Mak dec ae iE b GR Ed bg RR Ca 43 Creating tandem private networks lsllssesllee esee 43 Understanding Nortel Voice Networking MCDN network features 46 Network Call Redirection Information 0000 0c cee 46 ISDN Call Connection Limitation llli 47 Tunk Route DOSTWOEES ORI scc ke dace m dae xdg RR aom dee ck n aola Ree 48
220. a local system but dial 8 area code gt lt office code gt lt extension or DN gt for calls in another city over the public network Variable Example or default settings Line pool codes first character 5 Destination codes first 6 up to 11 more characters character 9 up to 11 more characters Telephones use pool codes and destination codes to dial externally because when the analog device goes off hook it seizes internal dial tone from the system The external access code is either a line pool code or destination code assigned to your system dialing plan Variable Example or default settings External code 9 NN40020 603 Chapter 24 Dialing plans 221 Public and Private Received numbers If the received number is different than the regular DN number in the target line configuration programming enter the number in the Private number and or Public number field Programming note Auto answer trunks such as PRI T1 BRI and VoIP trunks use these settings to route calls e DPNSS lines use the Private received number to route calls in the system BRI ETSI QSIG PRI ETSI QSIG MCDN DMS 100 DMS 250 and VoIP trunks route calls on a per call basis to either the public or private received digits Note VoIP trunking does not support Auto DN DISA DN functionality BRI ETSI Euro ND PRI ETSI Euro NI 4ESS T1 LoopStart E amp M DID GroundStart Analog LEC LoopStar
221. age 339 Private networking PRI and VoIP tandem networks on page 323 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP on page 297 Private networking DPNSS network services UK only on page 331 e Configuring centralized voice mail on page 351 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about DN records Routes The first step to setting up call routing is to define line pools into uniquely named routes A route can be used with more than one destination code but a line pool should only be used with one route Figure 81 illustrates the Routes tab Figure 81 Routes table Dialing Plan Routing Routes Destination Codes Routes Route External Number use Pool DN Type Service Type Service ID 000 N N N 001 4 Public Unknown N N Add Add Route Route NN40020 603 Chapter 26 Dialing plan Routing and destination codes 261 Table 47 describes the fields on the top panel Table 47 Route settings Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description Route 001 999 This number is unique to each route External a maximum of 24 Enter the external or dial out number for the route you want the Number digits assigned telephone to use The external number is a digit or group of digits that get inserted in front of your dialed digits If all the required numbers are defined in the destination code dial string
222. ailable as they are needed you can manage the resources by setting minimums and maximums for each service For information on configuring application resources see Application Resources panel on page 77 Types of resources There are four types of resources managed by the Application Resources panel e Signalling channels e VDI channels e Media channels e DSP resources Different applications require different resources For example each media gateway requires one DSP Resource and one media channel but does not require any signalling channels or VDI channels Use the Application Resources Reservations table to see what resources are required by each application Whenever an entry contains N A the application does not use that resource Total and Reserved Resources The total and reserved resource options display the current levels of total and reserved resources The total resource table displays the total resources on the system while the reserved resource table displays what resources are currently allocated or in use The total number of resources for signalling channels VDI channels and media channels exceeds the maximum capacity for the BCM you do not need to manage the resources based on these channels For example IP Trunks are the only application that use VDI channels and even if the BCM maximum of 12 IP trunks are in use they will not exceed the total of 62 VDI channels There is no need to modify the IP trunks
223. ailable centralized voice mail features to all nodes on the network ETSI lines UK profile also have network features available from the central office that can be enabled or disabled The following describes the different aspects of SL 1 and MCDN private networking e Configuring MCDN network features on page 319 e Configuring ETSI Euro network services on page 321 Configuring MCDN network features When you connect your BCM systems through PRI SL 1 or VoIP trunks and activate the MCDN protocol your network provides a number of network call features You can use this protocol to network other BCM systems Norstar systems Meridian 1 systems Succession systems and DMS 100 systems Table 63 lists the MCDN features that are provided by all SL 1 VoIP networks where MCDN is active The features affect call redirection and trunking functions Table 63 MCDN network features Centralized messaging Configuring Network Call Redirection Information on page 319 NCRI Centralize trunking ISDN Call Connection Limitation on page 320 ICCL Trunk Route Optimization TRO on page 320 TRO Trunk Anti tromboning TAT on page 320 TAT Configuring Network Call Redirection Information NCRI provides call information in the network when calls are redirected from one system to another NCRI builds on the following BCM features e External Call Forward e Call Transfer e Call Forward Networking Configuration Guide
224. all will pass through the system until the system with the matching destination code receives it at which point it will be sent through the local PSTN of that system How the system identifies the call depends on the type of trunk chosen for the route Refer to the table below Dialing plan setting NPI TON Private called number length based on MCDN trunks send private calls in this way None Private Subscriber Private DN length set on Private Network panel UDP Private UDP private access code home location code LOC private received digits CDP Private CDP private received digit DMS 100 DMS 250 ETSI QSIG trunks send private calls in this way None Private Subscriber Private DN length set on Private Network panel UDP Private Subscriber private access code home location code LOC private received digits CDP Private Subscriber private received digit Outgoing public calls routing Outgoing public calls from within the system typically have the routes set to Public Refer to Configuring call routing on page 234 The NPI TON gets sent as Unknown Unknown The public called number length is based on the Public DN lengths table in the Public networks dialing plan Networking Configuration Guide 224 Chapter 24 Dialing plans MCDN trunks also allow public call types when tandeming calls from another system on the private network Some of these systems use specific call types that the BCM needs to recognize to
225. alls through one BCM50 Figure 103 Routing all public calls through one BCM Warehouse Head Office System telephone System telephone router Intranet VoIP trunk 2050 IP phone router 2004 Company IP phone server remote 2004 IP phone Networking Configuration Guide 330 Chapter 35 Private networking PRI and VoIP tandem networks NN40020 603 331 Chapter 36 Private networking DPNSS network services UK only Programming note software keys are required to enable DPNSS 1 DPNSS 1 is not available on all profiles The following features are available and can be programmed over DPNSS lines Diversion Using the diversion feature on page 331 Redirection Using the Redirection feature on page 333 Executive intrusion Intrusion protection level on page 333 Call offer on page 334 Route Optimization on page 335 Loop avoidance on page 335 MWI is discussed with central voice mail setup Configuring centralized voice mail on page 351 Using the diversion feature Diversion is a DPNSS 1 feature for BCM that allows users to forward their calls to a third party on the DPNSS 1 network This feature is similar to call forward on BCM but takes advantage of the broader capabilities of DPNSS There are five variations of Diversion Call Diversion Immediate Call Diversion On Busy
226. already done so remember to define a route for the local PSTN for your own system so users can still dial local PSTN numbers Networking Configuration Guide 392 Chapter 46 Setting up VoIP trunks for fallback e Ensure the PSTN and VoIP line pools have been configured before you continue with this section For information about creating a VoIP line pool see Configuring VoIP trunk gateways on page 381 To configure PSTN lines select Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines Active Physical Lines Note If you already have routes for your PSTN or VoIP line pools configured E you do not need to configure new routes unless you cannot match the dialed digits Adding routes for fallback Enter the routes you want to use for normal and fallback traffic To add routes select Configuration Telephony Dialing Plan Routing To add the PSTN route to other system 1 Typea number between 001 and 999 This route defines the PSTN route to the other system Only numbers not otherwise assigned will be allowed by the system 2 Click OK To add the PSTN route to the local PSTN lines 1 Inthe Route field type a number between 001 and 999 This route defines the PSTN route to your local PSTN 2 Click Save To add the VoIP route 1 Inthe Route field type a number between 001 and 999 This route defines the VoIP route 2 Click Save Assigning the line pools to routes Assign the line pools to the routes you created in
227. an alternate telephone when a telephone is busy This feature is programmed in the Element Manager Diversion On No Reply diverts calls that go unanswered after a specified amount of time This feature is programmed in the Element Manager Bypass Call Diversion overrides all call forward features active on a telephone over a DPNSS line An incoming call to the telephone will not be forwarded instead the telephone will continue to ring as if call forward were not active This feature is used to force a call to be answered at that location Bypass Call Diversion is a receive only feature on BCM and cannot be used from a BCM telephone Follow me Diversion is also a receive only feature It allows the call forwarded destination to remotely change the BCM call forwarding programming Call Forward All Calls CFAC feature to a different telephone Note BCM CFAC must be active and the destination set PBX system must support the feature For example user A forwards all calls to telephone B a temporary office Later user A moves on to location C The user does not have to be at telephone A to forward calls to location C Using telephone B and Follow me Diversion the user can forward calls from A to location C Networking Configuration Guide 56 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview Follow me diversion can be cancelled from the forwarded location Diversion on Busy and Diversion on No Reply cannot be cancelled from
228. ane click Delete Click OK On O Networking Configuration Guide 264 Chapter 26 Dialing plan Routing and destination codes Note The destination codes must not conflict with the following park prefix external code direct dial digit e Auto DN e DISA DN Private access code line pool codes telephone DN e public target line received digits other routing codes Alternate routes for routing schedules When you select a route on the Destination Codes panel the alternate schedules for that route appear in a separate table You only need to fill out this panel if your system is using routing schedules Note that in these schedules you can configure three routes The second route acts as fallback route for the first route if it is unavailable If the second route is also unavailable the system will try the third route The dialing sequence for these routes needs to be the same from the user perspective as fallback occurs automatically and is not controlled by the user If all three routes fail the default normal route is used Figure 83 illustrates the Alternate Routes panel Figure 83 Alternate routing schedules Altemate Routes for Destination Code 9 Alternate Routes Schedule First Route Absorbed Length Second Route Absorbed Length Third Route Absorbed Length Night All All Al Evening All All All Lune All All All hed 4 All All All hed 5 All All All Sched 6 All All
229. anels allow you to create routes e create destination codes for the routes and the Normal schedule create alternate routing schedules Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view Panels Tasks Feature notes Routes on page 260 Grouping destination codes using a wild card on page 251 Destination codes on page 262 Using the MCDN access codes to tandem calls on page 257 Programming the PRI routing table on page 255 Setting up a destination for local calling on page 249 Setting up a route through a dedicated trunk on page 250 Adding Carrier access codes to destination codes on page 256 Alternate routes for routing Programming for least cost routing schedules on page 264 on page 252 Using multiple routes and overflow routing on page 252 Networking Configuration Guide 260 Chapter 26 Dialing plan Routing and destination codes Panels Tasks Feature notes See also e Setting up VoIP trunks for fallback on page 391 e Configuring lines on page 129 e BRI ISDN BRI T loops on page 195 e Dialing plan System settings on page 267 e Dialing plan Public network on page 275 e Dialing plan Private network settings on page 281 e Dialing plan Line pools and line pool codes on page 357 Public networking Tandem calls from private node on page 293 Private networking Using destination codes on p
230. annels lt read only gt The number of VDI channels in use on the system This number can change based on the values entered for applications and on the those applications currently in use Media channels lt read only gt The number of media channels in use on the system This number can change based on the values entered for applications and on the those applications currently in use DSP resources lt read only gt The number of DSP resources in use on the system This number can change based on the values entered for applications and on the those applications currently in use Application Resource Reservations Application lt read only gt The name of the application Minimum lt numeric value gt The minimum number of resources reserved at all times for the application If a value of 2 is entered the system will always reserve enough resources for 2 instances of the application Maximum lt numeric value or The maximum number of applications to allow If the value is the string MAX gt set to MAX the system will allow up to the system maximum as long as there are enough resources Licence lt read only gt The number of licenses the system has activated for the application If the value is N A the application does not require licenses System Max lt numeric value gt The maximum instances of an application the BCM can support Change Pending lt read only gt If this box is selected a chan
231. answer line on the BCM in Santa Clara as 6 221 Because 6 is programmed as a destination code for Toronto on the Santa Clara system another call is placed using route 002 from Santa Clara to Toronto At the Toronto system the digits 6 221 are interpreted as a target line Private received number The call now alerts at DN 6221 in Toronto Note Network calls that use routes are subject to any restriction filters in effect If the telephone used to make a network call has an appearance of a line used by the route the call will move from the intercom button to the Line button The telephone used to make a network call must have access to the line pool used by the route Network calls are external calls even though they are dialed as if they were internal calls Only the features and capabilities available to external calls can be used When programming a button to dial a Network number automatically autodial network calls must be treated as external numbers even though they resemble internal telephone numbers Routes generally define the path between your BCM switch and another switch in your network not other individual telephones on that switch PRI networking using Call by Call services The example shown in Figure 5 highlights the use of PRI Call by Call services It shows two offices of a company one in New York and one in Toronto Each office is equipped with a BCM system and a PRI line Each office has to handle incoming and outgoing
232. ap Figure 40 and Figure 41 provide an overview of the target line feature configuration process Networking Configuration Guide 142 Chapter 11 Configuring lines Target lines Figure 40 Configuring target lines main screen Main screen 3 4 z a NN40020 603 Chapter 11 Configuring lines Target lines 143 Figure 41 Configuring target lines subscreens ii Subscreen tabs N dus Yes Networking Configuration Guide 144 Chapter 11 Configuring lines Target lines Configuring Target line settings The following procedure describes the fields that need to be confirmed or set for these lines For detailed field descriptions refer to Configuring lines on page 129 1 Confirm or change the settings on the Trunk Line Data main panel Line Number of the assigned line Trunk Type Target line Name Identify the line or line function Control Set Identify a DN if you are using this line with scheduling Line Type Set to Public if the line is to be shared among telephones or DN if the line is only assigned to one telephone Prime Set If the line is to be answered at another telephone if the line is not answered at the target telephone Pub Received Confirm the existing number or enter a public received PSTN DID or PRI trunks that the system will recognize as the target telephone group Private Received If priva
233. apply to all types of lines The Properties tab is shown in Figure 36 on page 133 NN40020 603 Chapter 10 Configuring lines 133 Figure 36 Properties details panel Details for Line 061 Impedance Ohms Properties Preferences Restrictions Assigned DNs Trunk mode Dialmode Tone v Loss package 600 Supervised Y Medium CO v Link at CO Li Table 28 defines the fields on this panel and indicates the lines Table 28 Properties line settings Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description Legend Loop analog digital loop GS ground start DID DID E amp M E amp M BRI BRI DPNSS DPNSS VoIP VoIP TL Target Note PRI fields are all included under the main table Trunkmode Jte EE Unspr Define whether disconnect supervision also referred to as loop Supervised supervision releases an external line when an open switch Earth callin interval OSI is detected during a call on that line You must set MdL this to Supervised if a loop trunk has its Answer mode set to Loop guarded Auto or if you enable Answer with DISA Disconnect Loop unguarded supervision is also required to conference two external callers The line must be equipped with disconnect supervision from the central office for the Supervised option to work These listing only appear for UK analog lines Dial mode Loop GS DID E amp M Pulse Specify whether the system uses dual tone
234. ara IP 10 10 10 19 BCM50 Calgary IP 10 10 10 20 This example explains how a call from DN 321 in Ottawa would be made to DN 421 in Santa Clara It assumes that call signaling is set to Gatekeeper Resolved and no pre granted AdmissionRequest ARQ has been issued 1 BCM Ottawa sends an ARQ to the gatekeeper for DN 421 2 The gatekeeper resolves DN 421 to 10 10 10 19 and returns this IP in an AdmissionConfirm to the BCM Ottawa NN40020 603 Chapter 43 VoIP trunk gateways 379 3 BCM Ottawa sends the call Setup message for DN 421 to the gateway at 10 10 10 19 and the call is established If call signaling is set to Gatekeeper Routed and no pre granted ARQ has been issued 1 2 3 BCM Ottawa sends an ARQ to the gatekeeper for DN 421 The gatekeeper resolves DN 421 to 10 10 10 17 BCM Ottawa sends the call Setup message for DN 421 to the gatekeeper 10 10 10 17 which forwards it to the gateway at 10 10 10 19 The call is established Faxing over VoIP trunks You can assign VoIP trunks to wired fax machines if you have T 38 fax enabled on the local gateway The BCM supports this IP fax feature between BCMs BCM200 400 1000 running BCM 3 5 and subsequent up level versions of software and a Meridian 1 running IPT 3 0 or newer software or a CS 1000 M The system processes fax signals by initiating a voice call over the VoIP line When the T 38 fax packets are received at the remote gateway the receiving sys
235. arget Lines table locate the target line to be assigned In the Details for Line subpanel click the Assigned DNs tab Click Add Enter the required DN in the DN field Click OK ON Oo a Oo CallPilot programming 9 Setup CallPilot for voice mail or auto attendant answering e Voice mail In CallPilot Manager click Configuration and the click System Properties Ensure that the Enable Redirected DN box is selected e Auto Attendant Under the Auto Attendant heading click the line record you specified in step 4 and set the Auto Attendant to answer after O zero rings VoIP networking note If you are using H 323 VoIP trunks for central voice mail you need to set the following e Ensure that the local gateway protocol is set to SL 1 or CSE based on the version of the satellite systems Ensure that the remote gateways are programmed to route using CDP Ensure that the remote gateway protocols are set to SL 1 or CSE based on the version of the satellite system System set up for satellite systems Systems that are remote to the voice mail system need to ensure that outgoing calls are correctly directed to the voice mail service on the host system Process assumptions Networking Configuration Guide 354 Chapter 40 Configuring centralized voice mail Private network has been set up with MCDN between the satellite and host system The correct routing to the host system is set up and working You have suppl
236. at you do not select a port that has been assigned elsewhere in the BCM To ensure the port is not in use run netstat a from the command line Registration TTL s Default 60 seconds This TimeToLive parameter specifies the intervals when the VoIP gateway sends KeepAlive signals to the gatekeeper The gatekeeper can override this timer and send its own TimeToLive period Networking Configuration Guide 122 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources Table 22 H323 Settings fields Sheet 5 of 5 Field Value Description Gatekeeper TTL s The actual time used by the gatekeeper for the registration process Status lt read only gt Indicates if the device is online Modify lt button gt Click to modify the parameters Note All active H 323 calls are dropped if these settings are changed H323 Media Parameters The H323 Media Parameters tab defines how VoIP trunks handle the signals This panel also includes the settings to enable T 38 Fax signals over the trunks NN40020 603 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources 123 Figure 31 H323 Media Parameters panel Details for Module Internal Preferred Codecs Codec Preferences Available list Routing Table H323 Settings H323 Media Parameters SIP Settings SIP Media Parameters SIP URI Map Settings Enable Voice Activity Detection o Selected list Jitter buffer Auto v G 729 i G 723 m G 729 payloa
237. ate Network is a group of systems connected across various data transfer technologies that form a secure and private network BCM uses the Internet and tunneling protocols to create secure VPNs These secure extranets require a protocol for safe transport from the BCM to another device through the Public Data Network PDN BCM uses the IPSec tunneling protocols Extranets can connect e mobile users to a fixed private network at their office over the PDN e private networks in the two branch offices of the same corporation over PDN e two divisions of the same corporation over the corporate intranet When connecting two branch offices the use of a VPN over the public data network is very efficient if the connection is required only intermittently or a dedicated point to point link is considered too expensive Also with the advent of business to business solutions VPNs can be deployed to provide secure connections between corporations IPSec tunnels In the IPSec Specification there are two tunnel modes defined tunnel mode and transport mode BCM supports only tunnel mode Tunnel mode describes a method of packetizing TCP IP traffic to create a virtual tunnel Tunnels are created between servers which are also known as gateways This is called a Branch Office Connection The end nodes connect to each other through gateways These gateways set up the tunnel over the PDN on behalf of the end nodes The establishment of the tunnel and the PDN
238. ation codes that get dialed out as part of the dialing string access codes that identify a call type on incoming MCDN calls Refer to the following topics Creating dialing plans on page 218 Public and Private Received numbers on page 221 Private network dialing on page 221 Setting up public network dialing on page 221 Outgoing call routing on page 222 Incoming call routing on page 224 Determining line access dialing on page 228 Understanding access codes on page 229 Line pool access codes on page 234 Using Carrier codes on page 234 Configuring call routing on page 234 Configuring Call by Call services on page 235 Using destination codes on page 239 Setting up VoIP trunks for fallback on page 244 Networking Configuration Guide 218 Chapter 24 Dialing plans Also refer to Call security Restriction filters on page 433 This section also discusses Class of Service CoS passwords which you can use so that users can access the system features over public connections Refer to Call security and remote access on page 415 Creating dialing plans Dialing plans allow users to access the public network to make calls and to answer dial strings Access to and from and within your system is based on dialing strings and how the system adds or deletes digits from this sequence to route the call A dialing string is the numbers that the caller physically enters on a telephone or programs onto
239. ature provides dial tone for outgoing calls on any PRI line based on the digits dialed Digits dialed must match an entry in the second dial tone table to enable a second dial tone Dial tone occurs on the line until another digit is dialed a timeout occurs or the user hangs up Up to 10 separate entries can be stored in the second dial tone table The maximum digit length for each entry is four Each entry must be unique and cannot conflict with e Internal DNs Hunt Group DNs e DISA DNs e Auto DNs e Target Line DNs Tips Entries can match destination or access codes for outgoing lines The following paths indicate where to configure the Second Dial Tone in Element Manager and through Telset Administration Networking Configuration Guide 266 Chapter 26 Dialing plan Routing and destination codes Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Routing gt Second Dial Tone Telset interface CONFIG gt Services gt Routing Service gt 2nd Dial Tone Figure 84 Second Dial Tone Dialing Plan Routing Routes Destination Codes i Second Dial Tone SDT Prefix List SDT Prefixes Add Table 2 Second Dial Tone Attribute Value Description SDT Prefix List SDT Prefixes Enter the digits to match to trigger a second dial tone Actions Add Button Select to add an SDT prefix Delete Button Select an SDT prefix from the
240. atus lt read only gt Current connection status Disconnected Connecting Connected IP Address lt read only gt IP address assigned to the connected interface Subnet Mask lt read only gt Subnet mask assigned to the connected interface ISDN interfaces ISDN interfaces can only be configured on a BCM50 with an integrated BRI module or on a BCM with a BRI MBM installed in the expansion unit A maximum of two BRI ISDN interfaces are supported on each BCM Each of these interfaces supports two ISDN B channels NN40020 603 Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel 503 To add an ISDN interface Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces 2 On the Dial out Interfaces tab click Add The Add Dial Up Interface dialog box appears Select ISDN from the Interface type drop down list Enter a logical name in the Interface name field Select the Automatic Dialout check box to use this interface for scheduled service Refer to Creating an automatic dial out interface on page 521 6 Click OK The interface appears in the Dial out Interfaces table Enabling an ISDN interface An interface must be enabled to function as a backup connection If the BCM experiences a primary connection failure it will dial out using the dial up interface configured as the backup See WAN failover on page 513 To enable an ISDN interface Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces On the Dial out Int
241. aximum receive unit 1500 Maximum transmission unit 1500 IP header compression Software compression Access Settings Authentication CP wj User name nnadmin v NN40020 603 Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel 511 Table 113 Modem Dial out Interface Link Parameters fields Attribute Value Description Dial Out Parameters Dial out number numeric string Telephone number to use to connect using the modem interface If needed area codes and all necessary digits to dial an external number are included Hardware Compression read only Hardware compression is always enabled PPP Settings Idle timeout 90 36000 The interval after which the modem interface disconnects when there is no traffic Default 90 seconds Note Specifying a value of 0 makes the connection persistent Maximum Receive Unit 128 1500 The maximum size of the packets that can be received Default 1500 Maximum Transmit Unit 128 1500 The maximum size of the packets that can be sent Default 1500 IP Header Compression lt read only gt IP header compression is always enabled Software Compression lt read only gt Software compression is always enabled Access Settings Authentication PAP The authentication type for the link CHAP Default CHAP MSCHAP MSCHAPv2 User name drop down list Username that the link uses to authenticate itself when dialling
242. b A OO N 2 Type a value 0 25 in the Maximum transits box The default value is 25 Private networking with DPNSS International only DPNSS supports the Universal Dialing Plan UDP an international standard for sending and receiving private numbers over networks The UDP requires that a dialing number includes the following e aPrivate Access Code programmed into the system as part of the destination code table to prevent conflicts with the internal numbering system Configuration Telephony Dialing Plan Private Network Private Access Code aHome Location Code HLC assigned to each PBX system and configured as part of the destination code a maximum of seven digits For each HLC a destination code must be programmed in the system Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Private Network gt Location code e a Directory Number DNs assigned to each extension as a line appearance The DN appears as the last string segment in a dialed number In the number 244 1111 1111 is the DN Networking Configuration Guide 336 Chapter 36 Private networking DPNSS network services UK only A typical Private Number using a private access code and dialed from another site on the network appears below Private Access Home Location Directory Calling Party Code Code Number Number 6 848 2222 6 848 2222 In this networking example a private network is formed when se
243. ble 6 lists the settings for some of the hardware parameters for ETSI QSIG networking example shown in Figure 10 Table 6 Hardware programming for branch offices West End office East End office Hardware DTM BRIM PRI BHI Hardware DTM BRIM PRI BRI Programming Protocol ETSI QSIG E LO Protocol ETSI QSIG BchanSeq Ascend BchanSeq Ascend PRI only PRI only ClockSrc Primary ClockSrc Primary ETSI Euro network services If your system has ETSI ISDN BRI PRI lines you can activate the malicious call identification MCID and Network Diversion features Advice of charge end call AOCE is active if your service provider has activated that service on the line Networking Configuration Guide 52 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview When the features are activated users can e display a call charge redirect calls over the ETSI ISDN BRI PRI line to the outside network e tag malicious calls Advice of Charge End of Call AOCE AOCE is a supplementary service available from your service provider on ETSI ISDN BRI PRI links This feature allows the BCM user to view the charges for an outgoing call after the call completes This information is also reported to the Call Detail Reporting Application The information can be provided in currency or charging units depending on how the feature is set up by your service provider To invoke the feature the user presses FEATURE 818 DPNSS 1 services The Di
244. bled any trunk media bay modules prior to performing programming enable them now to ensure your system will function properly Restrictions Line and Remote Assigning Line restrictions and Remote Access Package restrictions are part of the configuration for controlling calls out of the system line restrictions and into the system from a private network node or from a remote user calling in over the PSTN lines Remote Access Packages The following paths indicate where to access the restriction settings in Element Manager and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines Telset interface CONFIG gt Lines or CONFIG gt Terminals and Sets The Restrictions tab is shown in Figure 38 Networking Configuration Guide 138 Chapter 10 Configuring lines Figure 38 Restrictions tables for a line Details for Line 061 Properties Preferences Restrictions Assigned DNs Use remote package 00 Line Restrictions Remote Restrictions Schedule Use Filter Schedule Use Filter Norma 03 Normal 04 Night 21 Night 31 Evening 22 Evening 32 Lunch 23 Lunct 33 Sched 4 oo Sched 4 oo Sched 5 oo Sched 5 00 Sched 6 00 Sched 6 00 Table 30 describes the fields on this panel Table 30 Restrictions Attribute Values Description Use remote package remote package gt If the line is being used to receive external calls or calls from other nodes on
245. busy is programmed for the telephone Call Offer is not accepted e The target line for the telephone must be set to If busy busy tone which is the default e Call Offer does not work if sent over Manual answer lines It is recommended that the lines be left at the default Auto User actions The party receiving a Call Offer has three choices Ignore it After a programmed time interval the Offer request is removed NN40020 603 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview 59 e Reject it If the user activates Do Not Disturb on Busy DND when the Call Offer request is made the request is removed from the telephone The calling party is informed of the rejection Note A call cannot be offered to a telephone with DND active The line indicator for external incoming calls still flashes e Accept it The Offer is accepted by releasing the active call Note Forward on Busy takes priority over DND on Busy Call Offer cannot gt be accepted by putting an active call on hold Route Optimization Route Optimization is a DPNSS 1 feature for BCM that allows calls to follow the optimum route between two end PBXs This allows efficient use of network resources Route Optimization is initiated by the system and is transparent to the user However the user may see a call switch from an appearance on the telephone to another appearance key or from an intercom button to the appearance key or vice versa This occurs
246. call limits l l 237 Provisioning for Call by Call limits with PRI 2 00000 eae eee 238 Call by Call service routing ssscssa ester rr RR RERO Ew 238 PRI IS BEDIOEOIS iousiricabe dab aes oa d desde ed oia EER mee d BUR EA 239 Using destination codes ccc eves eee xe eRe eM gom exce xm ex ES eae 239 Why use destination codes 2 c sceeeebesse cad sedhivueeieuaaseunt 240 Degiding on e OG sees pese se PEAR HORE REG dc RO d a Rud WORE ROD 241 Adding Carrier access codes to destination codes lslsusn 242 Routing schedules and alternate routes 0 000 cee ee eee 243 Networking Configuration Guide 8 Contents Setting ap VolF trunks Tor TallBagk iussus ka erac RR HOHER RO EROR RT Cae S 244 Chapter 25 Dialing plan Routing configurationsS 000 cece eee ee eee 247 Destination code numbering in a network 0 0 02 00 ee 249 Setting up a destination for local calling 0 0c cece eee 249 Setting up a route through a dedicated trunk 0 0 0 e cece eee eee 250 Grouping destination codes using a wild card 0 cc cece eee 251 Programming for least cost routing usse 9mm kem wee ee ams 252 Using multiple routes and overflow routing lisse 252 Dialing plam using public Tres uua soak EUR EE ERR E Pid SOROR SCR D 254 Programming the PRI routing table iiisiiduss ii 4 RE EERARRAR ER REA AE 255 Adding Carrier access codes to destination codes
247. call servers when calls are tandemed through a BCM system to the local PSTN Refer to Private Network Settings on page 282 for a description of these fields in context with the private dialing plan This is how the codes relate Meridian 1 access codes BCM access codes Sample code Network long distance code Private access code 6 National access code 61 Local code Local access code Special access code Calls tandeming to the public network through the private network need to retain their dialing protocol throughout network This means that a call from an M1 node tagged as a local call gets received by the local node and is recognized as a call intended for the public network but also as a call that needs to maintain the local tag until it gets to the local node that is directly connected to the PSTN This is accomplished by ensuring that the destination code which starts with this access code passes the call on using the route designated with the correct DN type Refer to Setting up a route through a dedicated trunk on page 250 Calls coming in from the public network need to be translated to their private network destination before routing tandeming through the private network In this case the route used is defined with the DN type of Private Figure 80 charts the process for a call tandeming through a BCM to the local public network Networking Configuration Guide 258 Chapter 25 Dialing plan Routing
248. caller Names can contain both letters and numbers but cannot be longer than seven characters You cannot use the number and star symbols Note You can give the same name to a telephone and a line in your system Use initials abbreviations or even nicknames to give each telephone a unique name to avoid confusion You can also determine if the calling line ID CLID is received by a telephone or if the CLID information from a system telephone gets sent out over the network Refer to Incoming and outgoing call display on page 214 Figure 66 illustrates an example of naming system components Networking Configuration Guide 214 Chapter 23 CLID Name display Figure 66 Naming components in the system K9 Unit 5553465 rum Public or Private network Trunks Hunt group Incoming and outgoing call display If you subscribe to Call Display services from your local telephone company one line of information about an external caller appears on the display after you answer a call If you answer before the Call Display information appears on your display press FEATURE 811 to view the line number or line name When you transfer an external call to another telephone in your system the same information appears on the recipient telephone display Depending on the services you subscribe to incoming Call Display information can contain up to three parts the name of the caller the
249. ccess number destination code When this code is dialed the BCM will select the VoIP line if possible If the line is not available the call will fall back to the PSTN line As well you need to create or ensure that your destination code 9 includes a Normal and VoIP schedule that includes the route you created to the local PSTN Note If you already have a line pool access code defined as 9 you will need to gt delete this record before you create the destination code To create destination codes for your fallback route 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Routing gt Destination Codes tab 2 Click Add The Add Destination Code dialog box appears Enter one or more digits for this destination code Click OK to close the dialog box Networking Configuration Guide 394 Chapter 46 Setting up VoIP trunks for fallback Example Destination code digit If it is available you might want to use the same number that you used for the destination code of the gateway If you have multiple gateways you could use a unique first number followed by the destination digits to provide some consistency such as 82 83 84 85 to reach gateways with destinations digits of 2 3 4 and 5 The number you choose will also depend on the type of dialing plan the network is using Networks with CDP dialing plans have unique system codes However with networks using UDP this is not always the case therefore
250. ce 503 modem interface 508 advice of charge end of call AOCE ETSI QSIG networking 52 321 AH authentication header encryption protocol 528 NAT restriction 528 alpha tagging 212 analog trunks module mode 104 ANI number programming 136 answer backup prime set for lines 132 mode 136 timer 105 with DISA trunk mode 133 answering calls call display services 214 privacy 98 ANY character 251 ARS automatic route selection See also call routing 234 ASM analog station module Call Park prefix 231 273 ATA2 analog terminal adapter 2 Call Park prefix 231 273 external code 269 authentication header See AH 528 auto DN overview 218 auto privacy lines 135 auto answer trunk DISA 420 427 private auto DN 282 public auto DN 276 remote restrictions 94 T1 420 427 autodial networks 249 automatic dial out 497 499 scheduled services 499 dial out interface 521 keycode file upload 499 software update pull 499 automatic CDR records push 499 background noise 533 backup answering prime set for lines 132 bandwidth available for other data 533 silence compression 529 B channels 536 selection sequence 105 sequence ETSI QSIG networking 51 314 BCM Business Communications Manager MCDN private networking 297 system requirements 312 network device prerequisites 466 networking MCDN with M1 43 multiple systems 327 numbering plans overview 218 overview 26 Networking Configuration Guide
251. ceived number 3322 Prime set DN 2221 Received number 2244 Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Target Lines Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Target Lines gt Line XXX Create remote gateway record for remote BCM Destination IP 47 62 54 1 Destination IP 47 62 84 1 QoS Monitor Enabled Transmit Threshold 3 5 moderate quality Gateway Type BCM3 6 Gateway protocol None Destination Digits Ottawa 2 Destination Digits Santa Clara 3 Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources gt IP Trunks gt Routing Table Destination digits note In this case the systems use a Coordinated Dialing Plan CDP network and the destination digit is included in the DN NN40020 603 Chapter 46 Setting up VoIP trunks for fallback 399 Table 81 Fallback configuration to create fallback between two systems Sheet 2 of 2 Task Settings for Santa Clara Settings for Ottawa Location in Element Manager Set up Scheduling to allow you to manually start and stop schedules Service setting Manual Overflow Selected Configuration gt Telephony gt Scheduled Services VoIP Schedule 4 Confirm or set up a route using the line pool to access the local PSTN Route 009 External External Line Pool lt publiclinepool gt DN type Public Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan Routing
252. centralized voice mail The BCM can also support centralized voice mail on a DMS 100 SL100 switch through a PRI DMS 100 connection The system also supports centralized voice mail on the switch through an indirect connection through an M1 where the DMS 100 SL100 is connected by PRI DMS 100 to the M1 and the M1 is connected to a BCM through a PRI MCDN connection The DMS 100 SL100 can use either the Public number or Private number of a BCM telephone to designate the mailbox number on the voice mail system To configure centralized voice mail the system must be using a CDP dialing plan and be running on a private network created using either DPNSS UK profile PRI SL 1 or VoIP trunking set up with MCDN Private network configuration and features are discussed in Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP on page 297 Note For centralized voice mail from a DMS 100 SL100 system configure the BCM dialing plan as either CDP or UDP Local system as host A local system that acts as a central voice mail location must be able to support MCDN You can add up to 1000 mailboxes on BCM voice mail providing you have entered adequate keycodes CallPilot constraints e To allow use of the auto attendant feature you must ensure that the Allow Network Transfers check box is selected in the CallPilot Manager e To allow use of voice mail you must ensure that the Enabled Redirected DN check box is selected in the CallPilot Manager e A target lin
253. ck ace eee ee eee ee es 877 Gatekeeper call scenarios nnna nannan 378 Operational notes and restrictions 0 0 ccc eee 379 Chapter 44 Configuring VolP trunk gateways 00 e eee eee eee 381 Configuring VoIP trunk media parameters 0000 0c cece eee 382 Setting up the local gateway 0 cece eee 383 Setting up remote gateways 0 60 eee 385 Configuring a remote gateway H 323 trunks 0 000 e eee 385 ponmgunhg Ve MES c d ded x be benak Roe acd nen ease bs eee werd ds 385 Configuring VoIP line features 0 0 cece eee 386 Chapter 45 VoIP interoperability Gatekeeper configuration 389 Using OS 1000 as a galekespel 2 icc chi didi eneseeseedede oa Pele newer awe 389 CS 1000 config ralloh ue uuu eee seed ur RR ERA CHER NUR OTHER ened 390 Chapter 46 Setting up VoIP trunks for fallback elles 391 Configuring routes Tor fallback uaa perpe icR endri Rap rre 26 s 391 Activating the VoIP schedule for fallback seleleelesssee 395 Networking Configuration Guide 12 Contents Deacivaling ihe VolP schedule uusesueesReRE uberi PO RR VR RR saws 396 Example A private network configured for fallback llle 396 Chapter 47 gc rr rU EE 401 EMONI oe Tak tees EH dee sere qoi er oa EUR P e e eel v MER RD aea OR Se ge duld cuu 401 DES c Vins 3 hae eaten RI ee Lele dpa er ele xi qs eee Marta 402 dodi galt aS arritrosi
254. code 1 2 3 Create a route that uses a line pool containing local lines only Routes on page 260 Program a route to use a line pool containing the lines used to access the long distance carriers Type the dialout digits which are the same as the access digits For example if the access code is 10222 the dialout digits are10222 Create a destination code 91 9 for outside access and 1 for long distance You must use a valid destination code NN40020 603 Chapter 25 Dialing plan Routing configurations 257 5 Set Absorbed Length to 1 The digit 9 is only used internally and should be dropped The 1 is needed to direct the call to the public carrier network Tips The destination codes 9 and 91 used in the examples cannot be used together If you need the destination code 91 to direct long distance calls you must create a separate set of codes that use local calling routes These codes would be for example 90 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 and 99 Refer to Grouping destination codes using a wild card on page 251 for information on programming destination codes Using the MCDN access codes to tandem calls Three special access codes exist specifically for programming calls over PRI and VoIP trunks that are using the MCDN protocol and which connect to a call servers that use specific call codes for special call types such as the Meridian 1 M1 The purpose of the codes is to allow easier programming of the
255. code 6 which places the call using Route 001 Networking Configuration Guide 342 Chapter 37 Private networking Using destination codes The call appears on the routing table on the BCM in Santa Clara as 6 221 Because 6 is programmed as a destination code for Toronto on the Santa Clara system another call is placed using route 001 from Santa Clara to Toronto At the Toronto system the digits 6 221 are interpreted as a target line Private received number The call now alerts at telephone 6221 in Toronto Note Network calls that use routes are subject to any restriction filters in effect If the telephone used to make a network call has an appearance of a line used by the route the call will move from the intercom button to the Line button The telephone used to make a network call must have access to the line pool used by the route Network calls are external calls even though they are dialed as if they were internal calls Only the features and capabilities available to external calls can be used When programming a button to dial a Network number automatically autodial network calls must be treated as external numbers even though they resemble internal telephone numbers Routes generally define the path between your BCM and another call server in your network not other individual telephones on that call server NN40020 603 343 Chapter 38 Private networking PRI Call by Call services The example s
256. codes services Routing service Destination codes Service Normal Rte Route schedule Schedule max 7 char DestCode Use route Absorb 1stroute Absorb 2nd route Absorb 3rd route Absorb max 7 digits 000 999 Length 7 000 999 Length 000 999 Length 000 999 Length An office can have leased lines or private network trunks that provide cheaper to long distance calls by routing through the dedicated lines to remote systems then using the local PSTN from that system to make the call The routing should take place automatically when the number of the outgoing call begins with 1 Setting up a route through a dedicated trunk If your long distance is supplied by an alternate service or if you want to use different trunks at different times of the day you can configure a route to use a specific trunk To set up a route through a dedicated trunk 1 Create a route that uses the line pool containing the discounted lines for long distance calling Refer to Routes on page 260 2 Create a destination code record and enter a valid destination code maximum of 12 digits Refer to Grouping destination codes using a wild card on page 251 You must use a valid destination code such as 91 9 indicating PSTN 1 indicating a long distance View existing destination codes before entering a new code The destination code can use a different route depending on the Schedule 3 Under the
257. cognizes this as a public DN and routes the call using Public service Incoming DID calls will be routed to telephones based on the trailing portion of the digits received by the network For example if a public network user dials an employee in the Toronto office the network delivers digits 4167632221 The BCM routes the call using the last four digits 2221 to the BCM50 Refer to Table 73 for a description of the settings required for this type of routing service Table 73 PRI Call by Call services routing information Sheet 1 of 2 Parameter Home System Settings Hardware DTM PRI Protocol NI 2 Trunk Line Data Line 125 Target line Private Public Received 2221 Line Access DN 2221 L125 Ring only Line pool access Line pool BlocA Routing Services Private Network Public network Route Use External Service type New York 001 No number Pool BlocA TIE Public network 002 No number Pool BlocA Public NN40020 603 Chapter 38 Private networking PRI Call by Call services 345 Table 73 PRI Call by Call services routing information Sheet 2 of 2 N A N A 9 002 ALL Line pool access ServicelD 1 DN type Private Destination Code 6 Normal route 001 Absorb 0 New York office Parameter Home System Settings Hardware DTM PRI Protocol NI 2 Trunk Line Data Line 125 Target line Private Public Received 6221 Line Access DN 6221 L125 Ring only Line p
258. configurations Figure 80 Local call tandemed through private network nodes IP Phone Dialout E22 Y The BCM receives the call The system recog nizes 9823 as the destination code for the local PSTN route Route drops the leading digit and dials out over the PSTN trunk The Meridian system recognizes the call as a local public call Deletes the routing digits Tags call as Local call type Sends out rest of dialout on private network iclout unknown 823 2222 Dialout lt local call gt 823 2222 Y 823 2222 Dialout 9 823 2222 Local M PSTN Hy The connecting system adds the Local access code to front of called number 9 823 2222 The system knows 9823 is the route to the next system and routes the call through private network NN40020 603 259 Chapter 26 Dialing plan Routing and destination codes A large system usually requires a number of destination codes to ensure that calls are directed to the correct trunks either on the private or public network The following paths indicate where to access destination codes in Element Manager and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration Telephony Dialing Plan Routing Telset interface CONFIG gt Services gt Routing Service gt Routes The following p
259. confirmation dialog box To add a Reserved Address 1 2 Click Configuration gt Data Services gt DHCP Server gt Address Ranges Click Add beneath the Reserved Address table The Add Reserved Address dialog box appears Enter the appropriate information in the IP address MAC address Client name and Client description fields The IP Address and MAC Address are required fields The Client Name and Client Access are optional fields Click OK The reserved address is added to the table To delete a Reserved Address 1 2 3 Highlight the Reserved Address you want to delete Click Delete Click Yes on the confirmation dialog box Note You cannot exclude addresses in an address range Instead you can use multiple address ranges 1 Create one address range for the IP addresses below the excluded addresses 2 Create a second address range for the IP addresses above the excluded addresses For example to create an address range from 10 10 10 10 to 10 10 10 49 but excluding addresses from 10 10 10 20 to 10 10 10 29 create one address range from 10 10 10 10 to 10 10 10 19 and one address range from 10 10 10 30 to 10 10 10 49 NN40020 603 Chapter 66 DHCP Server Settings panel 489 Main panel tabs Lease Info The lease info panel is a read only panel describing the current state of DHCP clients currently using the service The Lease Info panel contains the Customer LAN Lease Info Figure 135 Lease Info
260. d If your network uses a gatekeeper H 323 trunks only there are also specific settings that must be set on the H323 Settings panel to recognize the gatekeeper and also within the gatekeeper application so that VoIP lines are recognized Also refer to gatekeeper configuration VoIP interoperability Gatekeeper configuration on page 389 If you plan to use H 323 trunking and you have a firewall set up ensure that the ports you intend to use have been allowed SIP network applications considerations In order to maintain a level of quality during call setup QoS monitor must be enabled and configured SIP URI maps of both endpoints must match If you plan to use SIP trunking and you have a firewall set up ensure that the ports you intend to use have been allowed How VoIP trunks make a network Figure 112 shows a simple private networking configuration of three systems connected by VoIP trunks As in all private networking each system has direct routing configurations to the directly adjacent systems As well the dialing plans are configured to ensure that remote calls are correctly routed to the receiving system such as if Node A called someone in Node C NN40020 603 Chapter 43 VoIP trunk gateways 369 Figure 112 Internal call from Meridian 1 tandems to remote PSTN line Node B Node C Calgary Ottawa eae Wann w 1 baisse Pis Laiud wi VoIP trunk with MCDN optional Head office
261. d below for the first and second dial in connections Default disabled First dial in IP Address lt IP Address gt The IP address that will be assigned to the BCM side of the first dial in connection This is only assigned if the Remote Assigned is disabled Default 10 10 18 1 NN40020 603 Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel 521 Table 118 ISDN Dial In Parameters fields Sheet 3 of 3 Attribute Value Description Second dial in IP IP Address The IP address that will be assigned to the BCM side of the Address second dial in connection This is only assigned if Remote Assigned is disabled Default 10 10 18 2 Remote IP Address Specification Assign IP address to check box remote When enabled BCM will assign the remote end of the connection one of the IP addresses specified below When cleared the remote side will assign it s own IP address Default enabled First dial in IP Address IP Address The IP address that will be assigned to the remote side of the first dial in connection This is only assigned if Assign IP address to remote is enabled Default 10 10 18 10 Second dial in IP lt IP Address Address The IP address that will be assigned to the remote side of the second dial in connection This is only assigned if Assign IP address to remote is enabled Default 10 10 18 11 Creating an automatic dial out interface
262. d can define the set of line pools that may be accessed and whether or not the user has access to the paging feature The class of service CoS that applies to an incoming remote access call is determined by e the filters that you apply to the incoming trunk e the CoS password that the caller used to gain access to BCM e in cases where DISA is not automatically applied to incoming calls the remote caller can change the class of service by dialing the DISA DN and entering a CoS password Networking Configuration Guide 424 Chapter 52 Call security and remote access Remote users can access system lines line pools the Page feature and remote administration The exact facilities available to you through remote access vary depending on how your installer set up your system Note If the loop start line used for remote access is not supervised auto answer does not function and the caller hears ringing instead of a stuttered tone or the system dial tone Security Note CoS password security and capacity Determine the CoS passwords for a system randomly and change them on a regular basis Users should memorize their CoS passwords and keep them private Typically each user has a separate password However several users can share a password or one user can have several passwords Delete individual CoS passwords or change group passwords when employees leave the company A system can have a maximum of 100 six dig
263. d for manual dial out the interface must be disabled before it can be configured for automatic dial out Enable the interface under Configuration Resources Dial Up Interfaces Select the Automatic Dialout check box for the interface Set the Idle timeout s on the Link Parameters tab to a value greater than 60 seconds Add a static route Refer to To add a new IP Static Route on page 463 o0 5 ODN Associate the route with an application To manually disconnect an auto dial out interface Note Auto dial out interfaces are disconnected automatically once data zi transfer is complete Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces Select the interface to disconnect Click Disconnect A confirmation dialog box will appear 4 Click Yes Guidelines for using remote Dial in Consider the following guidelines when using remote dial in e The remote dial in for administration and the backup WAN link share the same modem If a remote administration user is connected while the primary link breaks the automatic backup function does not occur While using the back up interface BCM always calls BCM does not answer an incoming call from a router on the V 92 interface Using a dial up interface as a primary connection The dial up interfaces on the BCM are used as a Primary or Secondary interfaces The BCM does not have default dial up settings the Administrator must add them NN40020 603
264. d size ms a0 w G 711 uLaw l mnc G 711 aLaw G 723 payload size ms G 711 payload size ms 30 Incremental payload size go Enable T 38 fax Force G 711 for 3 1k audio o Table 23 describes the fields on this panel Table 23 H323 Media parameters record Sheet 1 of 2 Field Value Description Preferred Codecs Preferred Codecs None Select the Codecs in the order in which you want the system to G 711 uLaw attempt to use them G 711 aLaw Performance note Codecs on all networked BCMs must be G 729 consistent to ensure that interacting features such as Transfer and Conference work correctly G 723 Systems running BCM 3 5 or later software allow codec negotiation and renegotiation to accommodate inconsistencies in Codec settings over VolP trunks Note The G 723 codec can be used between IP endpoints If other types of connections are required ensure one of the other codecs is also selected Actions 1 Onthe Available list click the codec you want to add to the Selected list 2 Click the button to move the codec to the Selected list 1 Select a codec that you want to remove from the Selected list w 2 Click this button to move the codec back to the Available list 1 Select a codec on the Selected list N Click the appropriate arrow to move the codec up or down in the Selected list Networking Configuration Guide 124 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources Table 23
265. dation check with the switch on the number Configuration Telephony Sets Active Sets Line Access DPNSS 1 features The following features are available and can be programmed over DPNSS lines e Three party service on page 54 e Diversion Using the diversion feature on page 55 e Redirection Using the Redirection feature on page 56 e Executive intrusion on page 57 Networking Configuration Guide 54 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview e Call Offer on page 58 e Route Optimization on page 59 e Loop avoidance on page 59 e Message Waiting Indication The following parameters can be configured for DPNNS 1 lines e Line type e Prime set e CLID set e Auto privacy e Answer mode e Auxiliary ringer Full autohold Some features are transparent to the user but must be programmed to be activated Others are available for end user programming at the telephone Details about these features are given below Three party service Three Party Service is a DPNSS 1 feature for BCM that is similar to the BCM Conference feature The Three Party Service allows a user usually an operator to establish a three party conference by calling two other parties from one telephone Once the connection is made the controlling party can hang up leaving the other two connected The controlling party can even put one party on hold and talk to the other party Note BCM does not suppo
266. ddress IP address gt The IP address of the Proxy Server for IP phones 10 10 10 10 Port drop down list Select the appropriate port BCM SRG Meridian 1 Succession 1000 Centrex SL 100 Other Port number number The port number on the terminal through which IP phones connect NN40020 603 Chapter 66 DHCP Server Settings panel 485 Table 105 IP Terminal DHCP Options Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description Action lt read only gt The initial action code for the IP telephone Retry count lt number gt The delay before an IP phone retries connecting to the proxy server Secondary Terminal Proxy Server S2 IP address lt IP address gt The IP address of the Proxy Server for IP phones 10 10 10 10 Port drop down list Select the appropriate port BCM SRG Meridian 1 Succession 1000 Centrex SL 100 Other Port number number The port number on the terminal through which IP phones connect Action lt read only gt The initial action code for the IP telephone Retry count lt number gt The delay before an IP phone retries connecting to the proxy server VLAN VLAN identifiers comma delimited Specify the Virtual LAN VLAN ID numbers that are given to the IP telephones If you want DHCP to automatically assign VLAN IDs to the IP telephones enter the VLAN IDs in the following format VLAN A id1 id3 idn where VLAN A i
267. des Network assessment Answer the questions in Table 99 to ensure that the network is capable of handling IP telephony and that existing network services are not adversely affected Table 99 Network assessment Prerequisites Yes No 3 a Has a network assessment been completed 3 b Has the number of switch ports available and used in the LAN infrastructure been calculated 3 c Does the switch use VLANs If so get the VLAN port number and ID 3 d Have the used and available IP addresses for each LAN segment been calculated 3 e Has DHCP usage and location been recorded 3 f Has the speed and configuration of the LAN been calculated 3 g Has the estimated latency values between network locations been calculated 3 h Have the Bandwidth CIR utilization values for all WAN links been calculated 3 i Has the quality of service availability on the network been calculated NN40020 603 Chapter 61 Data network prerequisites checklist 467 Keycodes All elements of VoIP trunks and IP telephony are locked by the BCM keycode system Answer the questions in Table 100 to ensure you have the appropriate keycodes You can purchase keycodes for the amount of access you want for your system Additional keycodes can be added later provided there are adequate resources to handle them For information about determining the number of keycodes required see the Keycode Installation
268. dial up failover settings 512 interfaces 501 dialed digits VoIP trunk routing 391 dial in ISDN 518 modem 501 514 dialing link code F71 261 long tones F808 261 pause F78 261 restrictions maximum length 416 overrides 416 remote restrictions 418 wait for dial tone F804 261 dialing plan CDP 312 398 destination codes 255 destination digits 394 395 line access diagram 228 location code UDP 283 MI IPT prerequisite 312 MCDN network checklist 303 outgoing calls 385 private calls 287 public calls 223 279 PRI 541 routing table 255 private DN length 283 network ID 283 types 221 PSTN fallback 245 374 public DN lengths 221 lines 254 network 221 network code 277 public network dialing plan 277 restriction filters 415 433 system prerequisites 467 type 283 UDP 312 using T1 E amp M lines 40 dial out automatic 497 499 521 add interface 522 disconnect interface 522 static routes 524 digits destination codes 249 interfaces 501 local calls 249 modem 501 remote access 497 WAN failover 497 DID call by call service network 42 343 DID direct inward dialing ANI number 136 auto privacy 135 dial mode 133 redirect to 137 remote access 421 430 signaling programming 134 system diagram 34 290 use auxiliary ringer 135 digital Answer with DISA 136 auto privacy 135 dial mode 133 redirect to 137 use auxiliary ringer 135 Digital Private Network Signaling System See D
269. ding ensure that Both real channels and virtual channels are provisioned Destination or line pool codes are programmed for the DPNSS to Embark link NN40020 603 Chapter 36 Private networking DPNSS network services UK only 333 Also during programming for Call Forward No Answer and Call Forward on Busy when you enter the Forward to digits the system does a validation check with the switch on the number Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets All DNs panel Line Access tab and then double click the required field to enter the DN Using the Redirection feature Redirection is a DPNSS 1 feature similar to BCM Transfer Callback With Redirection the originating party can redirect a call awaiting connection or re connection to an alternate destination after a time out period Failed calls can also be redirected Priority calls are not redirected Diversion on No Reply feature takes precedence over Redirection Restrictions by telephone type e For telephones with single line displays the key acts as MORE and the key acts as VIEW e ATA2 ASM8 not supported e ISDN all variations supported on ISDN telephones Setting redirection The timer used for the network Callback feature is also used for redirection Executive intrusion Intrusion protection level Executive Intrusion EI is a DPNSS 1 feature that allows an operator or other calling party to intrude on a line when it is busy An example of the
270. ds appear under Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Active VoIP Lines To access VoIP lines you need to enter software keycodes Each keycode supports a specific number of lines No entries appear in the Enabled VoIP lines field until you complete the IP Trunks Settings field which appears when you click IP Trunks under Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources gt IP trunks VolP trunks should be configured to use a single line pool per trunk type Do not mix other trunk types on the same line pool The VoIP line pools are assigned to routes which in turn are configured with destination codes that route calls to the designated remote gateways of other BCM systems or Succession or MCS5100 systems You can also create a fallback for the trunk This is a situation where the system reroutes the call to a PSTN line pool if the primary route is not available or the call quality is not suitable If you do not configure your network for fallback and the call quality is below threshold the IP call fails NN40020 603 Chapter 8 Lines overview 91 Target lines Target lines are internal communications paths that directly connect auto answer trunks to system telephones These lines are incoming only Target lines allow you to make more efficient use of DID line resources You can map a range of target lines for each DID line The incoming call is routed according to the mapped dialed digits rather than a one to one line a
271. e Private Unknown unknown private Unknown Unknown unknown Table 26 SIP URI Map Fields Field Value Description SIP Domain Names e 164 National national e164 String to use in phone context to identify numbering plan type e 164 Subscriber subscriber e164 String to use in phone context to identify numbering plan type e 164 Special special e164 String to use in phone context to identify numbering plan type e 164 Unknown unknown e164 String to use in phone context to identify numbering plan type Private UDP UDP String to use in phone context to identify numbering plan type Private CDP CDP String to use in phone context to identify numbering plan type Private Special special private String to use in phone context to identify numbering plan type Private Unknown unknown private String to use in phone context to identify numbering plan type Unknown Unknown unknown String to use in phone context to identify numbering plan type NN40020 603 129 Chapter 10 Configuring lines All the Lines panels show the same type of tabbed panels The information on the tabbed panels may vary however depending on the type of line The following paths indicate where to access the lines information in Element Manager and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration gt
272. e Distinct Ring If you want this line to have a special ring indicate a pattern 2 3 4 or None Under the Properties tab Trunk mode Define whether the line will detect the open switch interval OSI when a call is released supervised Note UK profiles use Loop guarded Loop unguarded Dial mode The line service will dictate whether this needs to be set to Pulse or Tone DTMF dialing 2 Configure the trunk line data Preferences tab Auto privacy If you activate this feature the line is available only to the telephone that answers the call Full autohold This allows telephones to put a line on hold if the user picks up another line or starts to dial out on another line Aux ringer If your system is equipped with an external ringer you can enable this setting to allow this line to ring at the external ringer Distinct rings in use Indicates if a special ring has been assigned Answer mode Answer with DISA If this line is used for remote call ins determine how you want the line to answer automatically or requiring more user input If the answer mode is set to Auto decide whether the caller will be immediately connected to the system or whether a stuttered dialtone will require the caller to enter a CoS password Voice Message Center If the system is using a remote voice mail select the center configured with the contact number Redirect to If you want to automatically direct calls out of the system to a
273. e e Create destination codes for the private network node and the public network using the appropriate routes On public route drop the public network access code off the dial string On the private route drop the private network access code off the dial string Telephones e System telephones are not involved in tandem transactions However for calls destined for the system ensure that the telephones have the appropriate line line pool assignments to receive calls from both the public and private networks Caller access on a tandem network In this type of configuration there are three types of callers Each type of caller has a specific method of accessing the other two systems Callers using BCM These callers can call directly to a specific telephone Select an outgoing line to access a private network Select an outgoing line to access features that are available on the private network Select an outgoing central office line to access the public network use all of the BCM features Callers in the public network These callers use the public lines to e call directly to one or more BCM telephones e call into BCM and select an outgoing TIE line to access a private network e call into BCM and select an outgoing central office line to access the public network e call into BCM and use remote features Callers in the private network node These callers use private lines to NN40020 603 Chapter 31 Publ
274. e 425 447 system access remote 420 system configuration Business Communications Manager prerequisites 467 system speed dial alpha tagging 212 codes 01 70 347 system startup DN length 224 270 system wide dialing direct dial telephones 231 T T reference point 543 T 38 fax 379 enabling 401 Tl answer timer 105 clock source 106 DID trunk remote access 421 430 DID trunks DISA DN 420 427 disconnect timer 106 NN40020 603 567 E amp M network diagram 40 E amp M private networking 37 315 full autohold E amp M 135 parameters DSXI build 107 framing 107 internal CSU 107 108 line coding 107 signaling tone setting 133 tandem calls MCDN speciallabels 257 MCDN Meridian Customer Defined Networking speciallabels 232 tandem networking call routing 44 from public network 325 target lines BRI auto answer trunk mapping 132 changing DN length affecting received number 225 271 changing the name 213 description 39 ifbusy 137 programming 91 received 132 redirect to 137 use auxiliary ringer 135 TE see ISDN terminal equipment 543 telco features programming lines 94 telephone programming changing the name 213 direct dial 269 increasing DN length 224 271 received length 276 system speed dial 347 telephony services DID system 34 290 PBX system diagram 33 289 square system 33 terminating node DPNSS 1 52 three party service DPNSS 1 54 Tie lines call by call services 236
275. e Way Calling and Calling Party Identification Ordering ISDN PRI The following describes how to order ISDN PRI service for your BCM Ordering ISDN PRI service in Canada Ordering ISDN PRI service in Canada United States from your service provider Set the BCM equipment to the PRI protocol indicated by your service provider Ordering ISDN PRI service outside of Canada and the United States Outside Canada and the United States order Euro ISDN PRI and or BRI service from your service provider Set the BCM equipment to the Euro ISDN protocol Networking Configuration Guide 546 Appendix C ISDN overview Ordering ISDN BRI The following provides information about how to order ISDN BRI service for your BCM Ordering ISDN BRI service in Canada In Canada order Microlink service the trade name for standard BRI service You can order either regular Microlink service which includes the CLID feature or Centrex Microlink which includes access to additional ISDN network features including Call Forwarding When ordering Microlink service it must be ordered with EKTS turned off If you will be using a point of sale terminal adapter POSTA ask for D packet service to be enabled Ordering ISDN BRI service in the United States In the United States regardless of the CO Central Office type order National ISDN BRI NI 1 with EKTS Electronic Key Telephone System turned off Use the following packages as a guideline fo
276. e center field enter the center number of the voice center number that you want to assign to the remote voice mail system Repeat the previous step for all the target lines you want to change Configuring the telephone records 8 9 To access the DNs panel select Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs In the All DNs table click the DN you associated with the voice mail target line NN40020 603 Chapter 40 Configuring centralized voice mail 355 10 In the Details for DN subpanel click the Line Assignment tab 11 Add the line number of the target line programmed for the telephone 12 Select the Vmsg check box Configuring Call forward to go to voice mail 13 For the same DN a Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab In the Details for DN subpanel select the Allow redirect check box Click the Line Access tab Double click the Fwd No Answer field Enter the voice mail DN Double click the Fwd Busy field g Enter the voice mail DN 00 0 fF 14 Repeat the previous step for each of the DNs you want to assign to the remote voice mail 15 Test the system VoIP networking note If you are using H 323 VoIP trunks for central voice mail you need to set the following e Ensure that the local gateway protocol is set to CSE based on the version of the satellite systems Ensure that the remote gateways are programmed to route using CDP Ensure that the remote gateway protocols are set to CSE based on
277. e highest until all the codes are used The use of different of codes ensures a call reaches the right person especially when more than one incoming call is parked Note Model 7000 phones are supported in Europe only The highest call number the Call Park prefix followed by 25 is used by model 7000 and 7100 telephones analog telephones or devices connected to the system using an ATA2 Analog telephones or devices cannot use the other Call Park codes When parking a code on an analog telephone the call is parked on the highest park code When retrieving a call any phone can retrieve the call by entering the park code Calls are retrieved by pressing the intercom button and dialing the retrieval code On model 7000 and analog telephones pick up the receiver if the call is parked by the analog phone use the parkcode 25 otherwise use lt parkcode gt lt parknumber gt Note Analog phones can park call only at lt parkcode gt 25 You also need to program the park timeout The park timeout determines when external parked calls that are not answered return to the originating telephone See the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 for information on programming park timeout You can disable Call Park by setting the Park prefix to None Creating Direct Dial sets The Direct dial setting allows you to dial a single system wide digit to call a specific telephone called a direct dial telephone The most common example
278. e insight into the real time quality of the call from the end user perspective This information gives an indication of the type of problem and can be used to locate the source of the issue thus accelerating the isolation and diagnostics phase of problem resolution In addition to packet loss inter arrival jitter and round trip delay PVQM monitors the listening R value The R Factor as defined by ITU G 107 and IETF 3611 is a call quality index that assesses network impairments such as packet drops jitter and round trip delay with consideration for the burstiness and recency of these impairments The Listening R metric provides you with definitive answers about the actual QoS delivered to the telephone user With this metric you see the raw data such as jitter or packet drop rate and a summary of the effect of the data on the quality experienced by the user For example a Warning Threshold for the listening R value might be set at 80 When voice quality drops below this value as measured at the telephone set itself an event is generated The event notification is augmented with other valuable state information such as network loss rate average rate of discards due to jitter average length of bursts and presented as an alarm Analysis of the alarms and supplementary information in the alarm description helps you identify and troubleshoot voice quality issues and proactively initiate responsive actions Refer to the Administration Gu
279. e is no traffic on the IP link for a configurable amount of time The IP addresses assigned to the BCM and the remote client are configurable e The default configuration for the modem dial in is for the BCM to assign itself an address of 10 10 14 1 and assign to the remote client an address of 10 10 14 2 The settings can be changed to have the remote client assign itself an address or even assign the BCM an address e The default configuration for ISDN dial in is for the BCM to assign the first ISDN interface an address of 10 10 18 1 and the second client an address of 10 10 18 2 The first remote client is assigned 10 10 18 10 and the second client is assigned 10 10 18 11 The settings can be changed to have the remote clients assign themselves an address or even assign the BCM an address Finally an administrator has the capability to disconnect a modem or ISDN call if they find that a modem or ISDN call is in progress To program the RAS configurable options select Configuration Resources Dial Up Interfaces Modem Dial In Parameters Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces gt ISDN Dial In Parameters NN40020 603 Chapter 69 Dial Up overview 499 Modem Remote Access Service Specifics For Modem dial in the Auto disable feature will automatically disable the modem if no connections are established for a configurable period of time The Auto disable feature is turned off by default The modem can be enab
280. e it may be displayed as Private name if that is how the service provider has indicated that it should be displayed If the Calling Party Name is unavailable it may be displayed as Unknown name Your system might display the name of the called party on an outgoing call if it is provided by your service provider Your system sends the Business Name concatenated with the set name on an outgoing call but only after the Business Name has been programmed The available features include e Receiving Connected Name e Receiving Calling Name Networking Configuration Guide 540 Appendix C ISDN overview e Receiving Redirected Name e Sending Connected Name e Sending Calling Party Name Consult your customer service representative to determine which of these features is compatible with your service provider Name and number blocking ONN North America only When activated FEATURE 819 allows you to block the outgoing name and or number on a per call basis Name and number blocking can be used with a BCM set Consult your customer service representative to determine whether or not this feature is compatible with your provider Call by Call Service Selection for PRI North America only PRI lines can be dynamically allocated to different service types with the Call by Call feature PRI lines do not have to be pre allocated to a given service type Outgoing calls are routed through a dedicated PRI Pool and the calls can be routed
281. e must be set up to be answered by the auto attendant The target line received digits should match the voice mail DN Networking Configuration Guide 352 Chapter 40 Configuring centralized voice mail For details about setting up the CallPilot parameters and features refer to the CallPilot Manager Set Up and Operations Guide and the other CallPilot supporting documentation Meridian system as host If you are using a voice mail system connected to a Meridian 1 as a host system ensure that the systems are set up to be compatible with each other CallPilot compatibility If you are planning to use M1 based CallPilot software for the voice mail system there are no compatibility issues Note CallPilot for BCM accepts network wide and site specific VPIM gt broadcast messages from M1 CallPilot if the VPIM prefix in the message address matches the local mailbox prefix Meridian Mail compatibility issues If you are using Meridian Mail as the host system ensure that the Meridian has the following e Meridian Mail rel 7 MM7 or above e the appropriate number of PRI cards and D channel handlers to support the PRI links to all the BCMs using the system Special requirements e Over a PRI SL 1 line Meridian 1 must be on Release 19 or greater Over VoIP Meridian one must be installed with an IPT card version 3 0 or newer Meridian 1 requires the network ID of the BCM select Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing
282. e new DN length A private OLI is automatically assigned to the DNs if the DN length and the Received number length are the same If either changes so that they are not the same the private OLI field is cleared or not assigned PBX template Networking Configuration Guide 272 Chapter 27 Dialing plan System settings Tips about access codes Here are some pointers to assist you in planning the access codes for your system Note The following values must not conflict Park prefix external code direct dial digit Private access code Public Private Auto DN Public Private DISA DN line pool code destination code telephone DN Note If the line pool code and the external code start with the same digit the line pool code programming supersedes the external code External line access code Example If you enter the following selections Park Prefix 1 Direct Dial digit 0 Telephone DNs 2000 2500 You wish to add a destination code of 2500 and 12 This cannot be accomplished as this would conflict with existing dialing numbers To solve this you could modify the Park prefix and change the Telephone DN of 2500 e Ifthe DN length is changed and the changed DNs conflict with the external line access code the setting changes to None Direct dial telephone Another direct dial telephone an extra dial telephone can be assigned for each schedule in Services programming If the DN len
283. e of module Line Loop numbers default Line Access codes bus pool and routes A O Bloc N A VoIP trunks no module 001 048 3 Integrated BRI loops 2 061 064 05 06 Expansion 1 DID4 65 68 DID8 65 76 DTM T1 65 88 DTM NA PRI 65 87 DTM E1 PRI 65 94 BRI 65 72 CTM4 GATM4 and 65 68 4X16 CTM8 GATM8 8X16 65 68 upper lower 73 76 ISDN loops BRI ST 365 380 07 08 Expansion 2 DID4 95 98 DID8 95 106 DTM T1 95 118 DTM NA PRI 95 117 DTM E1 PRI 95 124 BRI 95 102 CTM4 GATM4 and 95 98 4X16 CTM8 GATM8 8X16 95 98 upper lower 103 106 ISDN loops BRI ST 381 396 Line pool tips Line pools are groups of lines Pooling lines allows you to use fewer lines than there are users PRI lines and VoIP lines are always defined into line pools Line pools must never contain a mixture of lines All lines in a given line pool should go to the same location NN40020 603 Chapter 8 Lines overview 97 Avoid putting unsupervised loop start lines in a line pool These lines can become unusable especially when a remote user uses the line pool to make an external call To assign line pool access to telephones select Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Line Pools To assign system wide line pool access codes select Configuration Telephony Dialing Plan General not applicable to Bloc pools A telephone can be administered to search automatically for an idle line from several l
284. e public network Table 69 describes how each node handles calls originating from the public network into the system Table 69 Call originating from the public network to a tandem network Sheet 1 of 2 Received Destination Description Node A Node A User in Calgary dials 761 xxxx number Incoming interface Public DN type Public Node A receives the call and identifies it as terminating locally Uses target line to route call Public received Destination Local target line Node A Node B User in Calgary dials a 762 xxxx number DN type Public Node A receives it and identifies it as being for node B Uses private trunk to route it to B Incoming interface Public Destination Remote Node Outgoing interface Private Node B receives the call and identifies it as terminating locally Uses target line to route call Private received Incoming interface Private Destination Local target line Node A Node C An external user in Calgary dials a 761 xxxx number which is answered with DISA Incoming interface Public DN type Public Destination Local DISA DN User enters a CoS password and a private DN for Node C 6 393 xxxx DN type Private Node A receives it and identifies it as being for C Uses the private trunk to route the call to C Incoming interface DISA user Destination Remote node Node C receives the call and identifies it as terminating locally Uses targ
285. e routing and a private dialing plan to control calls over the network Each example in this section describes the routing configurations that are required to support calls over the network Depending on the type of dialing plan you choose each node must also have a unique location or steering code so the calls can be correctly routed through the nodes of the network MCDN networks also require a Private Network ID which is supplied by the Meridian network administrator to define how the Meridian system identifies each node Creating tandem private networks You can tie a number of BCM systems together with SL 1 lines This tandem network provides you with the benefits of end to end name display and toll free calling over the SL 1 private link Each BCM system becomes a node in the network In this type of network you must ensure that each BCM system known as a node of the network is set up to route calls internally as well as to other nodes on the system This means each node must have a route to the immediately adjacent node and the correct codes to distribute the called numbers Each node must have a unique identification number which is determined by the type of dialing plan chosen for the network As well you can save costs by having a public network connection to only one or two nodes and routing external calls from other nodes out through the local PSTN thus avoiding toll charges for single calls VoIP note You can also use VoIP tru
286. e schedule Refer to Alternate routes for routing schedules on page 264 a b c Pick a schedule when you want these routes to be in effect In the First Route field enter the route number for the preferred route for the call Choose the absorb length for the first route that is appropriate for the dialout numbers you entered for the route Repeat steps b and c for Second Route and Third Route fields Define the start stop time as 0100 under the equivalent Routing Services schedule This setting means that the schedule is active 24 hours a day Refer to Configuring schedule names and timers in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 2 Assign an overflow route usually the most expensive route to the same Destination Code but for the Normal schedule Refer to Destination codes on page 262 3 Onthe Scheduled Services table choose auto for Service Setting and enable Overflow Refer to Configuring scheduled service in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 4 Useacontrol telephone to activate or override the feature on the telephones on which you want preferred routing to be active Note You must also ensure that the route correctly absorbs or passes dialed digits so that the number dialed for each line is the same from the user perspective When a user dials and the telephone cannot access the preferred line First Route the system tries each successive defined route Second Route then Third Ro
287. e the system can function with 12 ports it is recommended that 256 ports are reserved Signaling Ports Signaling ports are used by the system and cannot be modified They are provided to show where conflicts with UDP or RTP occur Networking Configuration Guide 406 Chapter 48 Port ranges overview NN40020 603 407 Chapter 49 Port Ranges panel The Port Ranges panel allows you to reserve ports for use by UDP User Datagram Protocol The Port Ranges panel consists of three tables RDP over UDP UDP and Signaling Panel tabs Tasks Features RTP over UDP Port Ranges on Adding new RTP over UDP Port page 407 Ranges on page 408 UDP Port Ranges on page 409 Deleting RTP over UDP Port Ranges on page 408 Signaling Port Ranges on Modifying RTP over UDP Port page 410 Ranges on page 409 Adding new UDP Port Ranges on page 409 Deleting UDP Port Ranges on page 409 Modifying UDP Port Ranges on page 410 Warning Do not change the ports unless necessary If you do change the ports make l sure you review the minimum requirements for each protocol As well make sure that you configure your firewall to reflect any changes you make to the ports RTP over UDP Port Ranges RTP Real time Transfer Protocol over UDP ports are necessary for IP trunk traffic such as for the transmission of audio and video signals across the Internet These values should only be changed if you are interoperating with
288. e using routing ensure it is put into Bloc A to F Prime Set If you want the line to be answered at another telephone if the line is not answered at the target telephone otherwise choose None Pub Received Not applicable Priv Received Not applicable Distinct Ring If you want this line to have a special ring indicate a pattern 2 3 4 or None 2 Configure the trunk line data In the top panel ensure a loop trunk is selected In the bottom panel select the Preferences tab Aux ringer If your system is equipped with an external ringer you can enable this setting to allow this line to ring at the external ringer 3 On the bottom panel under the Restrictions tab Use remote package If this line is used for remote call ins or is part of a private network ensure you specify a valid remote package NN40020 603 Chapter 44 Configuring VoIP trunk gateways 387 4 Setthe restriction and remote restrictions scheduling Restrictions tab Line Restrictions Enter a valid restriction filter for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of outgoing calls Remote Restrictions Enter a valid remote access package for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of incoming calls from remote users or private networks 5 Suggested next steps Configuring lines Target lines and DASS2 in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300
289. e who wants to call someone in Ottawa You cannot program DISA for VoIP trunks therefore your system cannot be accessed from an external location over a VoIP trunk The exception to this is if the call comes into a tandemed system system A from a PSTN and the call is then sent out across a VoIP trunk to system B as in this example In this case system A is controlling remote access through remote access packages and routing transferring the outside call to a VoIP trunk which is accessed by an allowed dial sequence The VoIP trunk connects directly to system B where the dialing sequence is recognized as directed to an internal DN In this scenario all remote call features are available to the caller Networking Configuration Guide 372 Chapter 43 VoIP trunk gateways Figure 113 Calling into a remote node from a public location Santa Clara ANE Ottawa PSTN hrget line XXX recognizes 2244 DN 2322 d l 5 DN 2244 assigned with target line XXX H DN 2244 l y System A System B PR i ey i s 3 L barrr roy Gateway 2 Remote gateway set up Dialout to Santa Clara 2244 2 CDP system code for NH ie Ottawa 2 Gateway destination digit 2 Lu 1 zl Route 022 VoIP nigel DN type Private IP network Destination code 2 using route 022 dedicated VoIP trunk private network Absorb length 0 Ensure VoIP trunk is set up with remote filters Call process Based on Figure 113 thi
290. e will be assigned solely to one telephone or if a group of users will have access to the line e Even when you use line pools it is possible that a line pool will be unavailable for outgoing traffic To alleviate this you can determine overflow paths for any routes that you designate Incoming lines can be assigned to telephones as individual lines or through target lines depending on the type of trunk supplied from the central office CO Incoming lines do not need to have an appearance on the telephone Target lines are for incoming calls only Two way single lines such as analog lines allow the user to make an outgoing call by pressing the idle assigned line button or if the line is part of a line pool by entering a line pool access code or destination code to access the line pool These lines can also be redirected on a per trunk basis through Element Manager or from the telephone by using FEATURE 84 PRI lines are always configured into line pools These lines require a destination code for outgoing calls Incoming calls use target line assignments NN40020 603 Chapter 8 Lines overview 99 e Voice over IP VoIP trunks use the data network to provide line service in and out of the system VoIP trunk configuration is described in the VoIP trunks use target lines for incoming calls and require line pool codes or destination codes for outgoing calls e You can assign a line a maximum of 93 times Incoming calls Fo
291. eate private networks Configuration can be based on such things as cost of trunks proximity of network nodes size of the private network and business requirements for communications VoIP based networking also requires an understanding of IP features such as codecs jitter buffers Quality of Service QoS function and silence suppression NN40020 603 Chapter 33 Private networking Basic parameters 317 The services provided within networks is based on the type of trunks and the protocols assigned to the trunks All trunks within the network should be running the same protocols to provide a consistent look and feel to the users These are the main types of private networking listed from the simplest to the more complex PRI ETSI and VoIP routing using MCDN protocols e Private networking Using destination codes on page 339 e Private networking PRI Call by Call services on page 343 e Private networking PRI and VoIP tandem networks on page 323 e Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP on page 297 e Private networking DPNSS network services UK only on page 331 Networking Configuration Guide 318 Chapter 33 Private networking Basic parameters NN40020 603 319 Chapter 34 Private networking MCDN and ETSI network features If the MCDN protocol is added to a PRI SL 1 or VoIP private network the network provides additional network management features and provides av
292. ect Private Branch Exchanges PBXs such as another BCM Outward Wide Area Telecommunications This outgoing call service allows a BCM user to call telephones in a specific geographical area referred to as a zone or band Typically a flat monthly fee is charged for this service Inward Wide Area Telecommunications This long distance service allows a BCM user to receive calls originating from specified areas without charge to the caller A toll free number is assigned to permit reverse billing An international long distance service that allows a BCM user to receive international calls originating from specified areas without charge to the caller A toll free number is assigned to permit reverse billing This service provides premises to premises voice and data transport with call management and monitoring features This service is commonly referred to as fixed charge dialing Private incoming and outgoing calls connect BCM to a virtual private network Dialed digits can conform to the standard North American dialing plan E 164 standard or the dialed digits can use a private dialing plan NN40020 603 Chapter 24 Dialing plans 237 Switches supporting Call by call limits Table 40 lists the service types and cross references them with four common switches Table 40 Switches and service types chart Switches Service types NI 2 DMS 100 DMS 250 AT amp T 4ESS custom FX FX FX N A N A Tie TIE
293. ed in LD 20 ROUT route number from LD 20 e Keep pressing enter until all values are Keep pressing enter until you get NCRD and displayed Check if NCRD is yes type Yes Keep pressing enter until you get the REQ prompt again TYPE end NN40020 603 Chapter 32 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP 307 Meridian TRO programming If you are using a Meridian 1 system as part of the network you need the following programming for each system M1 TRO set to yes for BCM route LD 16 TYPE RDB Cust xx Rout 0 511 TRO Yes An example of a private network with Meridian 1 Figure 98 shows a private network composed of one central Meridian 1 and two sites with BCM systems all connected by SL 1 with MCDN activated on all sites This example uses a coordinated dialing plan CDP The DNs consist of four digits The first digit is a destination code which is specific to each system The last three digits are unique to each telephone within that system Refer to Dialing plan Private network settings on page 281 for a description of the dialing plans available to private networks Networking Configuration Guide 308 Chapter 32 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP Figure 98 MCDN networking with a common public network connection Network 2221 Network 6221 Received 2221 Received 6221 Internal 2221 Internal 6221 PRI SL 1 PRI SL 1 BCM Me
294. ed manually or they can be triggered to connect by auto dial out see Creating an automatic dial out interface on page 521 Auto dial out routes can not be added if the interface is already manually connected unless the interface is already connected with auto dial out routes configured To manually connect the modem interface Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces On the Dial out Interfaces tab select the interface to connect Select the Enable check box In the IP Address Specification tab specify the remote IP address to which to connect a A WN In the top panel click Connect Networking Configuration Guide 510 Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel To disconnect a modem interface Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces On the Dial out Interfaces tab select the interface to disconnect Click Disconnect A confirmation dialog box will appear 4 Click Yes To delete a modem interface Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces Clear the Enable check box Click the modem interface Click Delete A confirmation dialog box appears 5 Click Yes The interface is deleted A OO N Modem Dial out Link Parameters Figure 140 Modem Dial out interface Link Parameters tab Details for Interface modem1 Link Parameters P Address Specification Dial Dut Parameters PPP Settings Dial out number Idle timeout s g0 Hardware compression M
295. ed to the many MCDN features Figure 100 ETSI QSIG networking Network 2221 Network 6221 Received 2221 Received 6221 Internal 2221 Internal 6221 p p PRI BRI 2g AIR PRI BRI ETSI QSIG T ETSI QSIG BCM EastEnd branch L1 DN 4221 PRI public protocol Central Office West End branch Networking Configuration Guide 314 Chapter 32 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP Settings for some of the hardware parameters for the ETSI QSIG networking example shown above are as follows West End office Hardware programming DTM BRIM Protocol BchanSeq ClockSrc PRI BRI ETSI QSIG Ascend PRI only Primary East End office Hardware DTM BRIM E Col Protocol BchanSeq ClockSrc PRI BRI ETSI QSIG Ascend PRI only Primary NN40020 603 315 Chapter 33 Private networking Basic parameters The following provides an overview of the values in the system that affect private networking including e Private networking protocols on page 315 e Keycode requirements on page 315 e Remote access to the network on page 316 e Other programming that affects private networking on page 316 e Types of private networks on page 316 Private networking protocols The BCM supports the following protocols for private networking PRI ETSI QSIG MCDN DPNSS BRE ETSI QSI
296. egend Loop analog digital loop GS ground start DID DID E amp M E amp M BRI BRI DPNSS DPNSS VoIP VoIP TL Target and DASS2 Note PRI fields are all included under the main If busy TL To Prime Busy Tone Define whether a caller receives a busy tone or the call forwards to the prime telephone when the target line is busy Busy tone only works for PRI trunks Tips The duration of an open switch interval OSI before BCM disconnects a call is programmed by the Disconnect timer setting Refer to Trunk Module Parameters on page 104 Voice Message Loop GS DID E amp M BRI DPNSS _ VoIP TL oie Center 1 If this line connects t o a remote voice mail either through the Center 5 private network or at the Central Office indicate which Center number has been configured with the contact number The system calls that number to check voice mail messages when a message indicator is presented to a telephone Redirect to Loop GS DID E amp M TL dial string Enter a dial string including destination code to redirect the line to an external telephone such as a call attendant on another system If you want to stop redirection you need to delete the dial string and allow the record to update Warning If the dialstring is set up the line will immediately be redirected out of the system not ringing any telephone Warning Enable modules If you disa
297. elds Attribute Values Description Network check box Allows you to choose if you want to allow calls to be Diversion redirected to an outside network MCID check box If you select this check box the called party can use FEATURE 897 to request the service provider network to record the identity of an incoming call Including called party number calling party number local time and date of the activity calling party sub address if provided by the calling user NN40020 603 Chapter 29 Dialing plan Private network settings 287 Table 58 ETSI MCDN and VoIP trunk private network settings fields Continued Attribute Values Description MCID note The feature code must be entered within 25 seconds of the caller hanging up a 25 second busy tone occurs If the called party hangs up first there is no opportunity to use the feature Note The call identification comes from your service provider not the local system You must have the service activated by the CO before the feature is active for the user regardless of the setting in this field Outgoing private calls routing When you set up routing for private calls the route is set to Private Refer to Setting up a route through a dedicated trunk on page 250 How the system identifies the call depends on the type of trunk chosen for the route Refer to the table below Dialing plan setting
298. em lift the handset and dial the local DN In this case the prime line has to be set to intercom or none For calls going outside the system e If you assign the prime line to a line pool all the lines in that line pool must be assigned to the telephone When you pick up the handset the telephone automatically grabs the first available line from the assigned line pool In this configuration you must ensure that the outgoing number is allowed by the line pool e Ifyou assign the prime line to an intercom button when you press the intercom button you get system dial tone Then you enter a line pool access code or a destination code to direct the outgoing call to the appropriate line pool where it exits the system on any available line in that pool NN40020 603 Chapter 3 Telephony programming Configuring call traffic 71 Figure 17 Configuring outgoing call traffic Sheet 1 of 2 Network configuration Telephone records and user features Networking Configuration Guide 72 Chapter 3 Telephony programming Configuring call traffic Figure 18 Configuring outgoing call traffic Sheet 2 of 2 NN40020 603 73 Chapter 4 Application Resources overview Application Resources is a management tool for allocating system resources such as signalling channels VDI channels media channels and DSP resources While the BCM manages resources for different services by making resources av
299. ement Manager Configuration Telephony Loops e Telset interface CONFIG gt Hardware gt Module gt TrunkMod gt BRI X gt Loop XXX Task Configure BRI S loops e Setting BRI properties for ISDN device connections on page 201 e DN records ISDN devices on page 202 Prerequisites Complete the following prerequisites checklist before configuring the modules Ensure that system hardware is installed and operating correctly Obtain all relevant central office service provider information for the loops BRI module is installed and operating LEDs are correct Wiring is complete for ISDN device configuration Setting BRI properties for ISDN device connections BRI S loops support devices that use an ISDN interface See ISDN overview on page 535 You can assign a single device to a loop or multiple devices connected through an NT 1 interface e You can assign a maximum of eight devices to a loop e Any device can only be configured to one loop e S loops do not supply any voltage for ISDN devices requiring power such as video cameras Voltage for these devices must be supplied by an external source on the S loop For detailed descriptions of the BRI module fields refer to BRI ISDN BRI loop properties on page 187 Networking Configuration Guide 202 Chapter 21 Programming BRI S loops lines and ISDN devices To set BRI properties for ISDN device connection
300. ength The number of digits of an incoming dial string that the system uses to determine if a call tagged as Private fits the system private DN numbering Default DID template same as DN length PBX template 3 Private Auto DN _ Digits to be received from a private auto answer trunk Private network calls answered without DISA require no password to access the BCM The type of service that applies to the call depends on the restrictions assigned to the trunk NN40020 603 Chapter 29 Dialing plan Private network settings 283 Table 55 Private Network Settings Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description Private DISA DN DISA DN digits to be received from the auto answer trunk For private network calls answered with DISA the system presents a stuttered dial tone to prompt a caller to enter a valid password The Class of Service CoS that applies to the call is determined by this CoS password After a remote user accesses the BCM they can change the existing CoS password using the DISA DN This gives you greater flexibility when you create access privileges For example you may want to have a shared DN for remote access but separate CoS passwords with different dialing out privileges for individuals Private access code lt systemcode gt MCDN coordinate with National access code This code identifies this system to the private network It comes in as the fir
301. eone d d d Rega Koc dnd wired 541 Dialing pan and PII aiu aide te tae RRO rer ERE TER RC RPoRE 541 ODN DAGI JO sacs a Rack iri RUE dade Rape qr os cba dca o o a HR ROCA eed an Np t dad 542 PRI Balle uuurocepe E EECHe EEG PX ECYHREG KE SIeiOERES ees qex mes 542 BEI HOA oue rud E EXC ER PCI ET ERWOUREOLE 4 3 OCURRE CR 542 Clock source Tar ISDN uoa uaa oce CR RC DRG Ree REARS Akr EERE WORE EROS 544 ISDN BRUNT equipment iui 5s cc2cecigeeciadeddae RU RSR RE R EUR 544 ISDN standards compsalibillly 1 sace xxn ck accio nh saws Rot bad 545 Planning your ISDN NetWork ucc s eR Rr EROR E Rr a Ra RE C RAE SR edad NU 545 CHER SON PRI eni Sade ete EE RAE eee heehee SU Ree YqR Ede 545 d cip RE BRI P PLC ETT 546 Supported ISDN protocols s s sro der E REPRE isnt kes REOR OR Pn ERE EPA 547 Appendix D NN40020 603 Contents 17 Networking Configuration Guide 18 Contents NN40020 603 List of procedures 19 List of procedures COMES s coss ee a ee ee ee ee 3 List Of procedures 6 2cccdce in dedace ene endo sence ken eee ERA 19 Getting started with BCM 2 2 cccecccccescvder uhr nha 25 System telephony networking overview seeeeeesese 33 Telephony programming Configuring call traffic 63 Application Resources overview 00 eee eee 73 Application Resources panel 000 cece eee eee eee 77 Module configuration Trunk modules 0 000 ee eee eens 81 TO detine the modu
302. eper Identified by the keyword src Example for private networks CDP alias src lt DN gt UDP alias Src LOC DN Example for public network src public OLI Note E164 or NPI TON alias types are commonly used since they fit into dialing plans A BCM alias list should not mix these types Also the type of alias used should be consistent with the dialing plan configuration Use the same alias naming method on all BCMs within a network Configuration note Refer to Using CS 1000 as a gatekeeper on page 389 for specific information about configuring the gatekeeper for H 323 trunks Network note If your private network contains a Meridian 1 IPT you cannot use Radvision for a gatekeeper If Gatekeeper Routed G atekeeper Resolved or Gatekeeper Routed no RAS are selected under Call Signaling enter one or more alias names for the gateway Call signaling port 0 65535 Default 1720 This field allows you to set non standard call signaling port for VoIP applications that require special ports 0 The first available port is used Ensure that you do not select a port that has been assigned elsewhere in the BCM To ensure the port is not in use run netstat a from the command line RAS port 0 65535 Default 0 This field allows you to set a non standard Registration and Admission RAS port for VoIP applications that require special ports 0 The first available port is used Ensure th
303. er 9 Configuring telephony resources H323 Settings Figure 30 H323 Settings Details for Module Internal Telephony Settings Fallback to circuit switched Forward redirected OLI Send name display Remote capability Mw Normal route fallback to Configuration Call signaling Enable H245 tunnelling Routing Table H323 Settings H323 Media Parameters SIP Settings SIP Media Parameters SIP URI Map Gateway protocol None w Gatekeeper digits Gatekeeper wildcard Ignore in band DTMF in RTP go Call signaling port RAS port Primary Gatekeeper IP Registration TTL s Backup Gatekeeper s Gatekeeper TTL s Alias names Modify Status Table 22 describes the fields on the H323 Settings tab Table 22 H323 Settings fields Sheet 1 of 5 Field Value Description Telephony Settings Fallback to Enabled All Your choice determines how the system will handle calls if circuit switched Enabled TDM the IP network cannot be used Disabled e Enabled All All calls are rerouted over specified PSTN trunks lines e Enabled TDM All TDM digital telephones voice calls will be rerouted over specified PSTN trunks lines Disabled Calls will not be rerouted Note Enabled TDM only enables fallback for calls originating on digital telephones This is useful if your IP telephones are connected remotely on the public side of the BCM network becau
304. er If T 38 fax is enabled on the system this setting defines how Redundancy string gt many times the message is resent during a transmission to avoid errors caused by lost T 38 messages Networking Configuration Guide 414 Chapter 51 Media Gateways panel NN40020 603 415 Chapter 52 Call security and remote access System restrictions are required to ensure that your system is used appropriately and not vulnerable to unauthorized use Call security includes restriction filters which limit outbound call access remote access packages which limit system call feature access for users calling in over the Private or Public network e Class of Service codes which require remote system users to enter a password before they can access the system CoS passwords also can have restriction filters applied Refer to the following topics Defining restriction filters on page 415 e Remote call in programming on page 419 Creating Direct Inward System Access DISA on page 420 Defining remote access packages on page 422 Defining CoS passwords on page 423 Call security works in conjunction with your dialing plan Refer to Dialing plans on page 217 Defining restriction filters Restriction filters allow you to restrict the numbers that can be dialed on any external line within BCM Up to 100 restriction filters can be created for the system To restrict dialing within
305. er and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Active Physical Lines Inactive Lines All Lines Telset interface CONFIG gt Lines Networking Configuration Guide 198 Chapter 20 BRI ISDN BRI T loops Prior programming BRI module Installed and configured Refer to Trunk Module Parameters on page 104 BRI loops are configured as T loops Refer to Configuring BRI T loop parameters on page 197 BRI loop lines are provisioned Refer to Provisioning module lines loops on page 112 Configuring provisioned BRI line features The following procedure describes the fields that need to be confirmed or set for these lines For detailed field descriptions refer to Configuring lines on page 129 To configure provisioned BRI line features 1 Confirm or change the settings on the Trunk Line Data main panel Trunk Type BRI ST determined by profile and type of BRI module Name Identify the line or line function Control Set Identify a DN if you are using this line with scheduling Line Type Define how the line will be used If you are using routing ensure it is put into line pool A to O Prime Set If you want the line to be answered at another telephone if the line is not answered at the target telephone otherwise choose None Pub Received Not applicable Priv Received Not applicable Distinct Ring If you want this line to have
306. ere you swipe credit or debit cards to transmit information using the D channel of the BRI line while the B channels of the BRI line remain available for voice and data calls A special adapter links transaction equipment such as cash registers credit card verification rigs and point of sale terminals to the X 25 network which is a data communications network designed to transmit information in the form of small data packets To support the D packet service your ISDN network and financial institution must be equipped with a D packet handler To convert the protocol used by the transaction equipment to the X 25 protocol your ISDN network must also be equipped with an integrated X 25 PAD which works with the following versions of X 25 Datapac 32011 CCITT T3POS ITT and API The ISDN service package you order must include D packet service for example Package P in the United States Microlink with D channel in Canada NN40020 603 Appendix C ISDN overview 539 Your service provider supplies a Terminal Endpoint Identifier TEI and DN to support D packet service The TEI is a number between 00 and 63 in Canada the default range is 21 63 Your service provider may also supply you with a DN to program your D packet device The DN for D packet service becomes part of the dialing string used by the D packet to call the packet handler Service provider features BCM supports the following ISDN services and features offered by ISDN ser
307. erfaces tab select the ISDN interface On the Link Parameters tab enter the Dial out number for the ISDN interface A OO N On the Dial out Interfaces tab select the Enable check box next to the ISDN interface to enable Note BCM50 R2 will only allow the configuration of two ISDN auto dialout interfaces When both of these interfaces are enabled ISDN dial in will be disabled To disable an ISDN interface 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces 2 On the Dial out Interfaces tab clear the Enable check box next to the interface Connecting an ISDN interface Interfaces can be connected manually or they can be triggered to connect by auto dial out see Creating an automatic dial out interface on page 521 Auto dial out routes can not be added if the interface is already manually connected unless the interface is already connected with auto dial out routes configured Networking Configuration Guide 504 Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel To manually connect an ISDN interface Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces On the Dial out Interfaces tab select the interface to connect Select the Enable check box In the IP Address Specification tab specify the remote IP address to which to connect a fF O N In the top panel click Connect To disconnect an ISDN interface 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces On the Dial out Interfaces tab
308. es including e faster call set up and tear down e high quality voice transmission dial up Internet and local area network LAN access e video transmission network name display name and number blocking PRI BRI and analog e access to public protocols Networking Configuration Guide 538 Appendix C ISDN overview Refer to the following features and services e Network name display on page 539 e Name and number blocking ONN on page 540 e Call by Call Service Selection for PRI on page 540 e Emergency 911 dialing on page 541 e 2 way DID on page 541 e Dialing plan and PRI on page 541 PRI services and features The services and features provided over PRI lines include e Call by call service selection NI protocol e Emergency 911 dialing internal extension number transmission e access to Meridian 1 private networking SL 1 protocol BRI services and features The services and features provided over BRI lines include e data transmission at speeds up to 128 kbps per loop depending on the bandwidth supported by your service provider shared digital lines for voice and data ISDN terminal equipment BCM Basic Rate Interface BRI also support D channel packet service between a network and terminal connection This allows you to add applications such as point of sale terminals POSTA without additional network connections Connecting a POSTA allows transaction terminals devices wh
309. es ISDN PSTN e Framing Choose the framing format supported by the service provider ESF SF Internal CSU Turn the internal channel on or off A Warning Disable the module before changing the internal CSU setting e CSU line build Internal CSU set to ON Set the gain level of the transmitted signal 0 7 5 15 dB e DSX1 build Internal CSU set to OFF Set the distance between the system hardware and the external channel service unit 000 100 100 200 200 300 300 400 400 500 500 600 or 600 700 feet Line coding Select the encoding signal used by the service provider B8ZS AMI e CRC4 El lines only Set the parameter to match the setting at the other end of the line Configuring DTM PRI module parameters e Protocol Set to the protocol used by the CO Warning Always confirm the line protocol with the head office Failure to set the 4 correct protocol could result in erratic service or service failure on the lines PRI T1 supports NI 2 DMS 100 DMS 250 4ESS SL 1 PRI E1 supports ETSI QSIG Euro SL 1 Note SL 1 and ETSI QSIG require an MCDN keycode e Protocol type for SL 1 Select the setting that applies to the way in which the system is viewed by the network Default is User Slave the CO or another network node controls the network If you want this system to control the network protocol select Network NN40020 603 Chapter 6 Module configuration Trunk modules 85
310. es on page 339 Private networking DPNSS network services UK only on page 331 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP on page 297 Networking Configuration Guide 180 Chapter 17 Configuring lines DASS2 lines NN40020 603 181 Chapter 18 Configuring lines DPNSS lines DPNSS trunks are specific to the UK protocol The following paths indicate where to access the DPNSS trunks in Element Manager and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines e Telset interface CONFIG gt Lines Task configure DPNSS lines connected to the system Configuring DPNSS line features on page 183 Also refer to Private networking DPNSS network services UK only on page 331 Prerequisites Complete the following prerequisites checklist before configuring the modules DTM module is installed and configured Refer to Trunk Module Parameters on page 104 Lines are provisioned Refer to Provisioning module lines loops on page 112 Process map Figure 56 and Figure 57 provide an overview of the DPNSS line feature configuration process Networking Configuration Guide 182 Chapter 18 Configuring lines DPNSS lines Figure 56 DPNSS line feature configuration process Part A No NN40020 603 Chapter 18 Configuring lines DPNSS lines 183 Figure 57 DPNSS line feature configuration process
311. es and bandwidth values for WAN or LAN links 1 c Does the network diagram contain IP Addresses netmasks and network locations for all BCM systems and other BCM products 1 d Answer this if your system will use IP trunks otherwise leave it blank Does the network diagram contain IP addresses and netmasks of any other VoIP gateways to which you must connect 1 e Answer this only if your system will use a gatekeeper otherwise leave it blank Does the network diagram contain the IP address for any Gatekeeper that may be used Networking Configuration Guide 466 Chapter 61 Data network prerequisites checklist Network devices Table 98 contains questions about devices on the network such as firewalls NAT devices and DHCP servers e If the network uses public IP addresses complete 2 d e If the network uses private IP addresses complete 2 e to 2 f Table 98 Network device checklist Prerequisites Yes No 2 a Is the network using DHCP 2 b If so are you using the DHCP server on the BCM Router 2 c Is the network using private IP addresses 2 d Are there enough public IP addresses to accommodate all IP telephones and the BCM 2 e Does the system have a firewall NAT device or will the BCM be used as a firewall NAT device 2f If the BCM50a BCM50e is to be used as a firewall NAT device do the firewall rules fit within the 10 input rules and the 10 output rules that the BCM provi
312. es table Digit Use System panel 0 direct dial digit Access codes 1 park prefix Access codes 2XX first digit of DNs DN lengths Set through Quick Start Wizard 9 line pool A destination code Routing Takes precedence over the External line destination code if there is a conflict Call Park codes When you park a call FEATURE 74 the system assigns one of 25 codes for the retrieval of the call You can then press the Page display key to announce the code that appears on the display These three digit codes include the Call Park prefix which can be any digit from 1 to 9 and a two digit call number between 01 and 25 For example if the Call Park prefix is 1 the first parked call is assigned Call Park retrieval code 101 Note The Park prefix must not conflict with the following external code direct dial digit private access code Public Private Auto DN Public Private DISA DN line pool code destination code or telephone DN Note Other programmable settings may affect which numbers appear in the window during programming Although the numbers 0 to 9 are valid Park prefix settings some may already be assigned elsewhere by default or by programming changes If the DN length changes and the changed DNs conflict with the Park prefix the setting changes to None NN40020 603 Chapter 24 Dialing plans 231 The system assigns Call Park codes to calls in sequence from the lowest to th
313. es the Nortel specific information that are required by IP sets This information includes TPS server information and VLAN ids If the S1 and S2 IP addresses are left as their default they will automatically be updated when the router s IP address is changed If the S1 and S2 addresses have been entered manually they will not be automatically updated when the router s IP address is changed Configuring the BCM with a DHCP address To configure the BCM with a DHCP address 1 Setup your DHCP server if it is not already configured on your network If you are using a BCM with a router consult the router documentation for information on configuring the DHCP network 2 Connect the BCM to the network By default the BCM will detect the presence of a DHCP server and set itself up as a client of this DHCP server Configuring the BCM to act as a DHCP server The BCM needs to act as a DHCP server only if there is no integrated router By default the BCM will attempt to detect the presence of another DHCP server and determine whether it needs to offer DHCP services To configure the BCM DHCP component 1 Determine the status of the DHCP server In most scenarios you can leave it as automatic 2 Configure the IP address range and DNS information 3 Configure the proxy server settings Networking Configuration Guide 492 Chapter 67 DHCP configuration with router Determining the status for the DHCP server By default the DHCP server
314. ess port number action and retry count for both the primary and secondary terminal proxy server NN40020 603 Chapter 67 DHCP configuration with router 493 Disabling the DHCP server To disable the DHCP server 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Data Services gt DHCP Server gt General Settings tab 2 Select Disabled from the DHCP server is list Networking Configuration Guide 494 Chapter 67 DHCP configuration with router NN40020 603 495 Chapter 68 Firewall configuration resources Table 108 shows the port configurations that must be allowed on a firewall for the BCM to function properly Table 108 Firewall configuration Port Type Description 5989 TCP Required for running Element Manager across a firewall 25 TCP SMTP used for Unified Messaging 143 TCP IMAP used for Unified Messaging 161 UDP SNMP management 162 UDP SNMP traps 389 TCP LDAP used for Unified Messaging 1222 TCP LAN CTE client traffic 1718 TCP H 323 signaling traffic 1719 TCP H 323 signaling traffic 1720 TCP H 323 signaling traffic 5000 UDP QoS monitor probe packets 5060 UDP SIP traffic 7000 UDP Unistim IP set signaling traffic 20000 20255 UDP Voice Path for IP telephony which is used when 28000 range is unavailable 28000 28255 UDP Voice Path for IP trunks Networking Configuration Guide 496 Chapter 68 Firewall configuration resources
315. ess TIE lines central office lines and BCM features from outside the system Remote users accessing a private network configured over a large geographical area can potentially also place long distance calls through the network and avoid toll charges Also refer to Call security and remote access on page 415 Note You cannot program a Private DISA DN or Private Auto DN to a VoIP trunk as they act as auto answer trunks from one private network to the next However you can configure VoIP line pools with remote access packages so that callers can access telephones or the local PSTN on remote nodes on a tandemed network that use VoIP trunks between systems Other programming that affects private networking Besides the line programming these links connect to other programming that affects or is affected by private networks Dialing plan System settings on page 267 Received Number Length Module configuration Trunk modules on page 81 Configuring lines on page 129 Configuring lines Target lines on page 141 Dialing plan System settings on page 267 Dialing plan Routing and destination codes on page 259 Call security Restriction filters on page 433 Call security Remote access packages on page 439 Configuring CLID on your system on page 205 Line Access tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Private OLT Types of private networks There are several ways you can cr
316. essary Secondary DNS address lt IP address gt Used if the primary DNS is unavailable The IP Address of the server that will provide DNS information to the system This information is generally provided by the ISP This field needs to be completed only if the Obtain IP address dynamically check box is not selected It can be provided by your ISP or IS department In small office settings a DNS may not be necessary MTU size lt numeric string gt Maximum Transmission Unit This is the largest packet measured in bytes that the BCM can send Note 1500 is the default setting and should not be changed unless instructed by a network administrator Main panel tabs Internal subnets The Internal subnets tab contains two subpanels e Internal Subnet settings on page 458 e Internal Subnet Details on page 459 Internal Subnet settings The Internal Subnets tab contains a table describing the two internal subnets The OAM LAN provides an interface where administrators can connect directly to the BCM by plugging their laptop into the OAM port NN40020 603 Chapter 60 IP Subsystem 459 The Internal LAN is an interface that is used internally by the BCM for digital signal processing Warning Only modify a subnet if the address the subnets are currently set to are in use l i elsewhere on the network Modifying a Subnet Warning You should modify a subnet only if the address
317. et line to route call Private received Incoming interface Private Destination Local target line Networking Configuration Guide 326 Chapter 35 Private networking PRI and VoIP tandem networks Table 69 Call originating from the public network to a tandem network Sheet 2 of 2 Received Destination Description Node A Ottawa An external user in Calgary dials a 761 xxxx number which is answered with DISA User PSTN enters a CoS password and an Ottawa public network number Incoming interface Public DN type Public Destination Local DISA DN Node A receives it and identifies it as being for C Uses the private trunk to route the call to C Incoming interface Local DISA user Destination Remote PSTN Node C receives the call and identifies it as a public number and routes it out over the local PSTN Incoming interface Private Destination Local PSTN Calls originating in the private network Table 70 describes how each node handles calls originating in the public network Table 70 Calls originating from the private network within a tandem network Sheet 1 of 2 Received Destination Description Node B Node B DN is internal therefore no trunk routing is required Incoming interface Intercom DN type Local Destination Local Node A Ottawa PSTN User in Node A dials the private network access code for Node C followed by an Ottawa public number I
318. et up the network shown in Figure 98 Table 62 Network routing information Sheet 1 of 2 West End office Trunk Line Data Line 125 Private Received Line Access DN 2221 Line pool access Target line 2221 L125 Ring only Line pool BlocA Routing Services Private Network Public Network Head Office and East end Route 001 002 External No number No number Use Pool BlocA Pool BlocA DN type Private Public Destination codes Head office to M1 Head office to East End for routes to Destination Code 4 includes location code 6 9 Normal route 001 001 002 Absorb 0 0 0 NN40020 603 Chapter 32 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VolP 311 Table 62 Network routing information Sheet 2 of 2 East End office Trunk Line Data Line 125 Target line Private Received 6221 Line Access DN 6221 L125 Ring only Line pool access Line pool BlocA Routing Services Private Network Public Network Head Office to West End Route 001 002 Dial out No number No number Use Pool BlocA Pool BlocA DN type Private Public Head Office to M1 Head Office to West End Call terminates at M1 Destination Code 4 contains location code 2 9 Normal route 001 001 002 Absorb 0 0 0 Configuring fallback over a VoIP MCDN network The Voice over IP VoIP MCDN networking protocol between a Meridian 1 and one or more BCMs works the same way as it does over PRI lines You sti
319. eters on page 104 Lines are provisioned Refer to Provisioning module lines loops on page 112 Process map Figure 50 and Figure 51 provide an overview of the line features for Ground Start lines Networking Configuration Guide 164 Chapter 15 Configuring lines T1 Digital Ground Start Figure 50 T1 Digital Ground Start lines configuration process Part A NN40020 603 Chapter 15 Configuring lines T1 Digital Ground Start 165 Figure 51 T1 Digital Ground Start lines configuration process Part B amp Properties screen EL SS e Il L Bem d A No Networking Configuration Guide 166 Chapter 15 Configuring lines T1 Digital Ground Start Configuring digital ground start line features The following procedure describes the fields that need to be confirmed or set for these lines For detailed field descriptions refer to Configuring lines on page 129 To configure digital Ground Start line features 1 Confirm or change the settings on the Trunk Line Data main panel Line Unique number Trunk type Ground Start Name Identify the line or line function Control set Identify a DN if you are using this line with scheduling Line type Define how the line will be used If you are using routing ensure it is put into line pool A to O If you are using line pools you must also configure target lines Co
320. ettings The LAN controls how the BCM behaves as a device on the IP network To modify the LAN settings refer to IP Subsystem on page 455 DHCP configuration By default the BCM is set as a DHCP client When the BCM is started it sends a request for an address to a DHCP server If no server responds it determines that there is no DHCP server on the LAN and it sets a static IP address of the last IP address received from the DHCP server The default IP address is 192 168 1 2 Also refer to DHCP configuration with router on page 491 Networking Configuration Guide 450 Chapter 57 LAN overview NN40020 603 451 Chapter 58 Configuring the BCM with a DHCP address To configure the BCM with a DHCP address 1 Set up your DHCP server if it is not already configured on your network If you are using a BCM50a or BCM50e consult the router documentation for information on configuring the DHCP network On your DHCP server set a reserved address for the BCM This requires the BCM MAC address which you can find on the IP subsystem panel or on the stock tag for the box in which the BCM ships If you do not set a reserved IP address for the BCM you must change Element Manager clients every time the IP address is reset Connect the BCM to the network By default the BCM detects the presence of a DHCP server and sets itself up as a client of this DHCP server If you plug in the BCM when the DHCP is not available it wi
321. etworking Configuration Guide 36 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview Tandem calling to a remote PSTN A system connected to a private network that uses dedicated circuits or VoIP circuits can allow a user to dial directly to many other users on different nodes using a coordinating dialing plan Using a private network saves on toll charges and local charges as fewer PSTN accesses are required for internal and external calling Several nodes located on one site initiate their external local calls to a centralized BCM having a T1 termination to the PSTN This type of configuration avoids multiple PSTN terminations at other local nodes The same tandeming concepts can be applied to inbound calls DID numbers dialed from the PSTN can be processed and tandem routed out of the centralized system to the localized remote nodes See other details on Tandem routing Creating tandem private networks on page 43 Figure3 Tandem dialing through a BCM to from a private network Private Network Node E TIT T1 lines T1 EM Analai M TTT ON ait aii Public PRI SL1 TP sn 9 PRI BRI lines Network VoIP f a M a l mmm M i i269 L1 E ses Bane In the above example there are three types of callers Each type of caller has a specific method of accessing the other two systems Callers using BCM These callers can call directly to a specific telephone e select an outgoing line to access
322. f 3 Attribute panel Legend Loop analog digital loop GS ground start DID DID E amp M E amp M BRI BRI DPNSS DPNSS VoIP VoIP TL Target and DASS2 Note PRI fields are all included under the main Auto privacy Full autohold Aux ringer Loop GS DID E amp M BRI VoIP lt check box gt Loop Define whether one BCM user can select a line in use at another telephone to join an existing call Refer to Turn Privacy on or off in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 FEATURE 83 BRI DPNSS VoIP lt check box gt Loop GS Enables or disables Full autohold When enabled if a caller selects an idle line but does not dial any digits that line is automatically placed on hold if you then select another line Full autohold is always in place for T1 E amp M trunks because it has no meaning for incoming only T1 DID trunks The default setting should be changed only if Full autohold is required for a specific application DID E amp M BRI DPNSS VoIP TL lt check box gt Turn the auxiliary ringer on or off for all telephones using this line When programmed on a line the auxiliary ringer will ring every Note When programmed only on a telephone no ring occurs for a transferred call An auxiliary ringer can also be programmed in Services to ring for a line placed into a scheduled Ringing service Refer to Configuring scheduled service
323. f you activate this feature the line is available only to the telephone that answers the call Aux ringer Use if your system is equipped with an external ringer you can enable this setting to allow this line to ring at the external ringer ANI number Enable if the caller number is to be logged For T1 lines this only appears if Signaling is set to WinkStart DNIS number Defines whether the digits dialed by an external caller on this line will be shown Answer mode If this line is used for remote call ins determine how you want the line to answer Auto or Manual If the answer mode is set to Auto decide whether the caller will be immediately connected to the system or whether a stuttered dial tone will require the caller to enter a CoS password Voice message center If the system is using a remote voice mail select the center configured with the contact number Distinct rings If you want this line to have a special ring indicate a pattern 2 3 4 or None Networking Configuration Guide 156 Chapter 13 Configuring lines T1 E amp M Redirect to If you want to automatically direct calls out of the system to a specific telephone such as a headoffice answer attendant enter that remote number here Ensure that you include the proper routing information 4 Setthe restriction and remote package scheduling Restrictions tab Use remote package Enter a valid remote access package for the Normal schedule and any ot
324. ference call tone will sound every 20 seconds Intrusion levels Whether a telephone accepts or rejects an Executive Intrusion request depends on the level of intrusion protection programmed Each telephone DN has an Intrusion Capability Level ICL and four Intrusion Protection Levels IPL When the ICL of the intruding telephone is higher than the IPLs of both telephones on the active call EI occurs Nortel recommends that you set the IPLs of most BCM telephones to the default of None or Low or Medium Intrusion levels are described as follows e ICL determines the ability of the attendant to intrude As long as the ICL is higher than the IPL of the wanted party EI is allowed Because EI is a receive only feature the ICL cannot be set on BCM e IPL determines the ability of the attendant to refuse intrusion If the IPL is lower than the ICL of the originating party EI is allowed For general purposes setting the IPL to None Low or Medium is recommended unless intrusion is not wanted Networking Configuration Guide 58 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview Call Offer Call Offer over DPNSS 1 allows a calling party to indicate to the wanted party that there is an incoming call available even though there is no answer button available to present the call on the telephone The intended recipient can ignore accept or decline the offered call Call Offer is useful in increasing the call coverage capability of a
325. figuration which determines how the router communicates with devices on the LAN and Main Module LAN configuration which determines how the Main Module of the BCM communicates with other devices on the LAN IP telephones IP telephones offer the functionality of regular telephones but do not require a hardwire connection to the BCM Instead they must be plugged into an IP network which is connected to the LAN or WAN on the BCM Calls made from IP telephones through the BCM can pass over VoIP trunks or across a Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN Nortel has several types of IP telephones that connect to the BCM through Ethernet The IP softphone 2050 which runs as a client application on a PC or PDA also connects to the BCM through the Ethernet VoIP trunks VoIP trunks allow voice signals to travel across IP networks A gateway within the BCM converts the voice signal into IP packets which are then transmitted through the IP network to a gateway on the remote system The device at the other end reassembles the packets into a voice signal Creating an IP telephony network An IP telephony network consists of telephones gatekeepers IP networks and access to a PSTN Networking with BCM The BCM is a key building block in creating your communications network It interoperates with many devices including the Meridian 1 system and BCM devices The BCM system can be connected to devices through multiple IP networks as well as thr
326. figuring CLID on your system Figure 65 CLID configuration process NN40020 603 Chapter 22 Configuring CLID on your system 207 Programming incoming CLID Telephones can receive Name Number and Line display for incoming calls over trunks that support CLID or between telephones within the system The following describes the different areas where these capabilities are configured Note If no configuration is done CLID will show up after answering a call unless Feature 811 is used To make CLID appear before answer you must set the Caller ID set on the set programming Digital analog and VoIP lines support CLID for incoming calls and no special programming is required for the feature on these lines for BCM digital or IP phones Allowing CLID for telephones incoming Target lines and analog CLID trunks connected to a GATM 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Line Access and then select the DN record for a telephone assigned with analog lines that support CLID On the Line Assignment tab select a line that supports CLID Select the check box beside the Caller ID Set field of the highlighted row Repeat for each line assigned to the telephone a Ff Q N Repeat above steps for telephones assigned with these lines Note Only 30 telephones can be assigned CLID for a line Using alpha tagging for name display incoming To set up alpha tagging on your system
327. figuring the gatekeeper for H 323 trunks Network note If your private network contains a Meridian 1 IPT you cannot use Radvision for a gatekeeper Call signaling port If there are VoIP applications that require non standard call signaling ports enter the port number here 0 the system uses the first available port RAS port If the VoIP application requires a non standard RAS port enter the port number here 0 the system uses the first available port Enable H245 tunneling Select or deselect the check box to allow or disallow H 245 messages within H 225 Note that the VoIP Gateway service must be restarted for any change to take effect Gatekeeper Support Fill out these fields if the network is controlled by a Gatekeeper Also refer to VoIP interoperability Gatekeeper configuration on page 389 Primary Gatekeeper IP This is the IP address of the primary gatekeeper Backup Gatekeepers NetCentrex gatekeeper does not support RAS therefore any backup gatekeepers must be entered in this field Gatekeepers that use RAS can provide a list of backup gatekeepers for the end point to use in the event of the primary gatekeeper failure In the Alias names field enter all the alias names required to direct call signals to your system Gateway protocol Select SL 1 for BCM 2 5 systems Select CSE for BCM 3 0 and newer systems Or select None Registration TTLs Specifies the KeepAlive interval Gateway TTLs This pro
328. for Module Internal Routing Table H323 Settings H323 Media Parameters SIP Settings SIP Media Parameters SIP URI Map Routing T able Name Destination Digits Destination IP GW Type GW Protocol VolP Protocol QoS Monitor Tx Threshold Annable 2 192 168 29 25 BCM35 None H323 45 Cooper 3 192 168 249 131 IPT SL1 SIP 2 28 Sangster 4 192 168 25 45 Other CSE H323 1 7 Table 21 Routing Table fields Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description Name lt alphanumeric gt Enter the name of the remote system Destination Digits lt numeric gt could be the Set the leading digits which callers can dial to route calls same as the destination through the remote gateway Ensure that there are no other code for the route to this remote gateways currently using this combination of system destination digits If multiple leading digits map to the same remote gateway separate them with a space For example 7 81 9555 These numbers are passed to the remote system as part of the dialed number Destination IP IP Address Enter the IP address of the remote system gateway NN40020 603 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources 117 Table 21 Routing Table fields Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description GW Type BCM Choose the type of system that is accessed through the BCM35 remote gateway IPT BCM BCMs running 3 6 or later software and CallPilot with
329. for each user This setup allows you to assign a dedicated phone number to each telephone The CO assigns a list of available numbers for each DID line You can change your DN range to match these numbers or you can use target lines to match each number with a DN Figure 93 illustrates an example of a DID system NN40020 603 Chapter 30 Public networking Setting up basic systems 291 Figure 93 DID system Target line mapped to DN 4005 CO DID line 769 with range of call e numbers 4005 to 4020 Target line mapped to DN 4008 Target line mapped to a DN 4006 Target line mapped to DN 4007 Programming Lines e Assign lines as auto answer Note DID lines are incoming only PRI lines can be used for both directions e Configure target lines for each telephone indicating public received number 769 4006 in the example above Routing e Create line pool access code to outgoing line pool Telephones e Assign target line to each telephone e Assign outgoing line pool to telephones e Set call forward no answer and call forward on busy to attendant or voice mail system if available Networking Configuration Guide 292 Chapter 30 Public networking Setting up basic systems NN40020 603 293 Chapter 31 Public networking Tandem calls from private node If your system is connected by a private network to another system
330. for fallback To activate the VoIP line from the control set 1 Dial FEATURE 873 from the control set for the VoIP trunk The phone prompts you for a password Type the password default admin 23646 Press OK The first schedule appears Scroll down the list until VoIP is selected Press OK The VoIP schedule stays active even after a system reboot and can only be manually deactivated Deactivating the VoIP schedule To deactivate a schedule 1 Dial FEATURE 7873 The phone prompts you for a password 2 Type the password 3 Press OK The system returns to the Normal schedule Example A private network configured for fallback The following describes a sample BCM configuration which includes e Activating the VoIP schedule for fallback on page 395 e Deactivating the VoIP schedule on page 396 In this scenario shown in Figure 117 two BCMs in different cities are connected through a WAN One BCM is in Ottawa the other is in Santa Clara Both VoIP trunks and an PRI SL 1 line connect the system in a private network NN40020 603 Chapter 46 Setting up VoIP trunks for fallback 397 Figure 117 Example PSTN fallback DN 3322 DN 2244 d Ow i S fg we i T 44 Dialout IP network PON 5 ao Packet Data Network LU U Otta Santa Clara Gateway 2 Mi dr k Pede soi a L Gateway destination digit igit Ottawa a wes Route 867 VoIP S ae Route 867 No abe to um PSTN
331. g Direct Inward System Access DISA on page 427 Configuring CoS passwords for remote access on page 443 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about Hospitality services Configuring remote access packages Use these panels to add allowed line pools to up to 99 remote access packages Remote access packages are assigned to lines and class of service CoS passwords Lines used for private networking need remote access packages because calls coming from other nodes on the network are considered remote call ins by your system Networking Configuration Guide 440 Chapter 55 Call security Remote access packages Figure 126 Remote Access Packages tables Remote Access Packages Packages Package Remote Page 00 EJ EJ BJ EJ EJ CJ DJ Cl Add Line Pool Line Pool Details for Package 01 Line Pool Access Line Pool Table 91 describes each field on this panel Table 91 Remote Access Packages Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Values Description Packages table Package lt 00 99 gt This designates the package number This is what is entered in the fields for lines programming for remote access Remote Page lt check box gt Select check box if you wish to allow remote callers access to paging Note Remote paging is not supported on IP trunks Line Pool Access table Line pool lt A to O gt BlocA to F Choose the line pool for
332. g E amp M line features The following procedure describes the fields that need to be confirmed or set for these lines For detailed field descriptions refer to Configuring lines on page 129 1 Confirm or change the settings on the Trunk Line Data main panel Line Line number Trunk Type E amp M Name Identify the line or line function Control Set Identify a DN if you are using this line with scheduling Line Type Define how the line will be used If you are using routing ensure it is put into line pool A to O If you use line pools you also need to configure target lines and assign the target lines to DNs Refer to Configuring Target line settings on page 144 Prime Set If you want the line to be answered at another telephone if the line is not answered at the target telephone otherwise choose None Pub Received Not applicable Priv Received Not applicable Distinct Ring If you want this line to have a special ring indicate a pattern 2 3 or 4 Use remote package If this line is used for remote call ins or is part of a private network ensure you specify a valid package Configure the trunk line data Properties tab Dial mode The line service dictates whether this needs to be set to Pulse or Tone DTMF dialing These are the only two options available Signaling Match this choice with the information supplied by the service provider Set the preferences Preferences tab Auto privacy I
333. g the highest IP address ina 10 10 10 10 gt range Add lt button gt Click to add an included address range Delete lt button gt Click to delete a selected address range Modify lt button gt Click to modify a selected address range Reserved Addresses IP Address lt IP address gt Specify the IP Address that is reserved for this DHCP client MAC Address lt IP address gt Specify the MAC address for the DHCP client to which this IP address is assigned The permitted values is 6 bytes in hexadecimal format Client Name lt alphanumeric gt Specify the name of the DHCP client Client Description lt alphanumeric gt Specify the description that will help to identify the DHCP client to which this IP address is assigned Add lt button gt Click to add a reserved address Delete lt button gt Click to delete a reserved address Networking Configuration Guide 488 Chapter 66 DHCP Server Settings panel To add a new Included Address Range Click Configuration gt Data Services gt DHCP Server gt Address Ranges Click Add beneath the Included Address Ranges table The Add Included Address Range dialog box appears Enter the appropriate From IP address and To IP address ranges Click OK The address range is added to the table To delete an Included Address Range 1 2 3 Highlight the Address Range you want to delete Click Delete Click Yes on the
334. ge is pending to the system Most changes take effect immediately but in some instances a change may wait until applications shut down Details about changes pending can be seen in the details panel Sig Ch lt read only gt The number of signalling channels reserved by the application This can be changed by modifying the minimum and maximum values for the application If the field has a value of N A the application does not require this type of resource VDI Ch lt read only gt The number of VDI channels reserved by the application This can be changed by modifying the minimum and maximum values for the application If the field has a value of N A the application does not require this type of resource Media Ch lt read only gt The number of media channels reserved by the application This can be changed by modifying the minimum and maximum values for the application If the field has a value of N A the application does not require this type of resource DSP lt read only gt The number of DSP resources reserved by the application This can be changed by modifying the minimum and maximum values for the application If the field has a value of N A the application does not require this type of resource Networking Configuration Guide 80 Chapter 5 Application Resources panel Table 8 Application Resources panel Sheet 3 of 3 Attribute Value Description
335. ge settings two not configurable Page only select Devices cannot be assigned to Page zones Configuring Capabilities and Preferences in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 are the only capability settings that require specific configuration for ISDN devices Configuring telephone capabilities in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 OLI as called number check box If Enabled the specified OLI for the telephone is used for CLID for calls All other settings are variable based on your system requirements NN40020 603 205 Chapter 22 Configuring CLID on your system The following describes the various areas in the system that need configuration to allow incoming or outgoing Calling Line Identification Display CLID information to display incoming calls or transmit over the trunks outgoing calls The following describes programming and setting up this feature Tasks Set up incoming display Programming incoming CLID on page 207 Set up outgoing display Programming outgoing CLID on page 208 Set up the method for blocking outgoing set identification ONN Blocking North American systems in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Process map Figure 65 provides a quick view of the areas of the system that need programming to provide incoming and outgoing CLID services Networking Configuration Guide 206 Chapter 22 Con
336. ging this parameter 4 If the lines are assigned to a line pool assign the line pool to DNs Line Access Line Pool Access tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 e also assign a target line to the DN record Line Access Line Assignment tab and Line Access Line Pool Access tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 5 Suggested next steps e Dialing plan Dialing plan System settings on page 267 Dialing plan Public network on page 275 Dialing plan Routing and destination codes on page 259 e Networking Public networking Setting up basic systems on page 289 Public networking Tandem calls from private node on page 293 Private networking Using destination codes on page 339 NN40020 603 163 Chapter 15 Configuring lines T1 Digital Ground Start The following describes how to configure digital Ground Start lines The following paths indicate where to access the Ground Start lines through Element Manager and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines e Telset interface CONFIG gt Lines Task Configure ground start lines connected to the system e Configuring digital ground start line features on page 166 Prerequisites Complete the following prerequisites checklist before configuring the modules DTM module is installed and configured Refer to Trunk Module Param
337. gital Private Network Signaling System DPNSS 1 is a networking protocol enhancement that extends the private networking capabilities of existing BCM systems It is designed to offer greater centralized functionality for operators giving them access to BCM features over multiple combined networks Note The DPNSS feature is dependent on which region loaded on your system at startup and that a software keycode was entered to enable the feature For more information see e DPNSS 1 capabilities on page 53 e DPNSS 1 features on page 53 e Private networking with DPNSS on page 60 DPNSS 1 allows a BCM local node acting as a terminating node to communicate with other PBXs over the network For example corporate offices separated geographically can be linked over DPNSS 1 to other BCM nodes bypassing the restrictions of the PSTNs to which they may be connected Connected BCM nodes can therefore function like a private network with all features of BCM accessible Note BCM DPNSS 1 works as a terminating node only BCM to BCM gt DPNSS is not supported You can use DPNSS 1 features on any BCM telephone On most BCM telephones you must use specific keys and or enter a number code to access the features NN40020 603 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview 53 DPNSS 1 capabilities A single BCM node acting as a terminating node on the network supports the following capabilities over DPNSS 1 lines e
338. gramming headings Filter Heading Sub heading 02 System DNs Set restrictions 03 Lines Line restriction 04 Lines Remote restriction Default filters for other common profiles Three profiles have global overrides which do not appear in Element Manager restriction programming and cannot be changed Australia 000 13144A UK 999 112 Networking Configuration Guide 438 Chapter 54 Call security Restriction filters NN40020 603 439 Chapter 55 Call security Remote access packages This panel describes the telephony configuration that is used to control access to system lines by calls coming in from outside the system The remote access package also allows remote paging capabilities Note Callers dialing into the system over private network lines are also considered remote callers The following paths indicate where to access remote access packages in Element Manager and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Call Security gt Remote Access Packages Telset interface CONFIG gt System prgrming gt Remote Access This is a two table panel where you select a Remote Access Package number on the first panel and then add or delete the line pools from the second table Panels Subpanels Tasks Configuring remote access packages on Restrictions Line and Remote on page 137 lines page 439 Also refer to Call Security Configurin
339. gt Dialing Plan gt Private Network and select the check box beside TRO e Configure call routing for all optimal routes e Configure call forward All Calls No Answer Busy or Selective Line Redirection to use the optimal routes This feature avoids the following situation A call originating from a BCM system may be networked to a Meridian system which in turn is networked to another Meridian system which is the destination for the call If the call routes through the first Meridian M1 to reach the second Meridian M2 two trunks are required for the call An optimal choice is a straight connection to M2 This finds these connections and overrides the less efficient setup Figure 8 shows two call paths The first route through the Meridian demonstrates how a call might route if TRO is not active The second route that bypasses the Meridian demonstrates how TRO selects the optimum routing for a call NN40020 603 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview 49 Figure8 Call paths with and without TRO Meridian 1 Elephone B Meridian 1 Y m iie Original call no TRO m e Forwarded call no TRO Telephone A aama a Mi Call path with TRO Telephone C Trunk Anti tromboning Trunk Anti Tromboning TAT is a call reroute feature that works to find better routes during a transfer of an active call This feature acts to prevent unnecessary tandeming and tromboning of trunks No
340. gth is changed and the changed DNs conflict with the Direct dial digit the setting changes to None Public Private Auto DN The length of the Auto DNs are the same as the Public or Private Received Number Lengths specified under Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Public or Private The public private Auto DN is cleared if the corresponding Received Number Length is changed NN40020 603 Chapter 27 Dialing plan System settings 273 e Public Private DISA DN The length of the DISA DNs are the same as the Public or Private Received number length specified under Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Public or Private The public private DISA DN is cleared if the corresponding Received number length is changed Call Park codes When you park a call FEATURE 74 the system assigns one of 25 codes for the retrieval of the call You can then press the Page display key to announce the code that appears on the display These three digit codes include the Call Park prefix which can be any digit from 1 to 9 and a two digit call number between 01 and 25 For example if the Call Park prefix is 1 the first parked call is assigned Call Park retrieval code 101 Note The park prefix must not conflict with the following park prefix external code Direct dial digit Private access code Public Private Auto DN Public Private DISA DN line pool code destination code telephone DN Note
341. gure 115 Networking Configuration Guide 376 Chapter 43 VoIP trunk gateways Figure 115 Setting up routes and fallback for call to remote system CDP dialing code Call to person within remote BCMS50 system User dials DN which includes the destination code Example 2233 Destination code 2 schedules System dialout to remote system UDP network The user dials 2233 remote system DN 2233 destination digits private access code 555 The system then adds the private access code to the dialout digits If the call falls back to PSTN line the system then dials out the private access code private network PSTN line or public access number public PSTN to the remote system in front of the 2233 NN40020 603 Chapter 43 VoIP trunk gateways 377 Optional VoIP trunk configurations A number of VoIP trunk features are optional to setting VoIP trunk functions The following briefly describes these features Port settings firewall In some installations you may need to adjust the port settings before the BCM can work with other devices Firewalls can interfere with communications between the BCM and another device The port settings must be properly configured for VoIP communications to function properly Using the instructions provided with your firewall ensure that communications using the ports specified for VoIP are allowed A Nortel IP telephone uses ports between 51000 and 51200 to communica
342. h Data Type 1 octet e Five choices 0x80 0x90 0x9d Oxbf Oxfb 128 144 157 191 251 e Providing a choice of five types allows the IP Phone 2004 to work in environments where the initial choice may already be in use by a different vendor Select only one TYPE byte Length 1 octet variable depends on the message content Data length octets e ASCII based e format VLAN A XXX YYY ZZ7 where VLAN A uniquely identifies this as the Nortel DHCP VLAN discovery A signifies this version of this spec Future enhancements could use B for example ASCII comma is used to separate fields ASCII period is used to signal end of structure XXX YYY and ZZZ are ASCII encoded decimal numbers with a range of 0 4095 The number is used to identify the VLAN Ids A maximum of 10 VLAN Ids can be configured NONE means no VLAN default VLAN The DHCP Offer message carrying VLAN information has no VLAN tag when it is sent out from the DHCP server However a VLAN tag is added to the packet at the switch port The packets are untagged at the port of the IP phone NN40020 603 475 Chapter 65 DHCP overview On the BCM DHCP can be set up in a variety of configurations based on your needs your existing network and the version of the BCM that you have The following explains the various ways that you can configure DHCP on the BCM including router and main configuration e Understanding DHCP
343. h the information supplied by the service provider Link at CO Enable if provider switch provides alternative line when F71 is invoked for an outgoing call Line Tuning Digit 3 Configure the Preferences tab Auto privacy If you activate this feature the line is available only to the telephone that answers the call Aux ringer Use if your system is equipped with an external ringer you can enable this setting to allow this line to ring at the external ringer ANI number Enable if the caller number is to be logged For T1 lines this only appears if Signaling is set to WinkStart Distinct rings If you want this line to have a special ring indicate a pattern 2 3 4 or None Voice message center If the system is using a remote voice mail select the center configured with the contact number Redirect to If you want to automatically direct calls out of the system to a specific telephone such as a headoffice answer attendant enter that remote number here Ensure that you include the proper routing information NN40020 603 Chapter 16 Configuring lines T1 DID 173 Set the restriction and remote package scheduling Restrictions tab Line restrictions Enter a valid restriction filter for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of outgoing calls Remote Restrictions Enter a valid remote access package for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this l
344. hanging 224 271 client application requirements 224 271 numbering plan overview 218 overview 218 system startup 224 270 voice mail contact center 224 271 records prerequisites 467 type call by call services network 345 MCDN network 310 route programming 261 DNIS number 136 DPNSS digital private network signaling system call offer 58 334 diversion feature 55 331 Embark switch 53 332 full autohold 135 home location code 60 335 host node 106 intrusion programming 57 networking 52 private access code 60 335 protocol 37 315 remote access 421 431 paging 422 431 three party service 54 use auxiliary ringer 135 DPNSS 1 call diversion 55 331 features 53 331 PBXlink 52 terminating node 52 three party service 54 DRP distinctive ring pattern 132 DS CLID module mode 104 DSM digital station module Networking Configuration Guide 556 Index hostnode 106 DSXI build 107 DTI trunk See also DIM 39 DTM digital trunk module clock source 544 ISDN hardware 542 DTMF dual tone multi frequency dial mode 133 setting ANI DNIS 136 E E amp M ANInumber 136 answer timer 105 answer with DISA 136 auto privacy 135 dial mode 133 DNIS number 136 full autohold 135 redirect to 137 remote access issue 422 432 signaling programming 134 use auxiliary ringer 135 Element Manager destination codes 393 H 323 trunks record 385 Embark switch DPNSS network 53 332 host node 106 emergency 911 dialing PRI
345. he SPIDs tab and indicates the lines NN40020 603 Chapter 19 BRI ISDN BRI loop properties 191 Table 33 Loop settings Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description SPIDS table SPID Digits digits Supplied by your service provider System running with North American country profiles support additional BRI services offered by ISDN service providers and defined by network service profile identifiers SPID The SPID allows you to enter a network connection that provides a path for voice or data services Number of 1 2 North American BRI loops can support two B channels The SPID B channels may be the same or different for the channels Actions Add SPID digits 2 Click Add Select the appropriate SPID 1 or 2 Add SPID SPID digits Click OK Enter the SPID digits supplied by your ISDN service provider Onthe table click the Number of B channels field beside the number you entered Choose the number of B channels allowed for this SPID Delete Network DNs table Click Delete Click OK co I Oo010 Cc Select the SPID that you want to delete DN system DN This ISDN DN acts as the contact point for the loop to the system Call Type Voice Defines the type of calls supported on the loop Data Both Networking Configuration Guide 192 Chapter 19 BRI ISDN BRI loop properties Table 33 Loop settings Sheet 2 of 2
346. he call to switch from H 323 line pools to a PSTN line without requiring intervention by the user Use the dialing plan worksheet in the Programming Records to plan your dialing requirements so you can pinpoint any dialing issues before you start programming If you are programming an existing system you can look at what numbers the users are familiar with dialing and you can attempt to accommodate this familiarity into your destination codes plan Figure 73 shows how a fallback network would be set up between two sites NN40020 603 Chapter 24 Dialing plans 245 Figure 73 PSTN fallback diagram BCM50 B BCM50 A Public or Private PSTN line Public or Private PSTN line In a network configured for PSTN fallback there are two connections between a BCM and a remote system e One connection is a VoIP trunk connection through the IP network e The fallback line is a PSTN line which can be the public lines or a dedicated T1 BRI PRI or analog line to the far end system When a user dials the destination code the system checks first to see if the connection between the two systems can support an appropriate level of QoS If it can the call proceeds as normal over the VoIP trunk If the minimum acceptable level of QoS is not met the call is routed over the second route through the PSTN line For PSTN fallback to work you must ensure that the digits the user dials will be the same regardless of whether
347. he gateway parameters are set correctly for the IP trunks H 323 network applications considerations Networking Configuration Guide 382 Chapter 44 Configuring VoIP trunk gateways Jf your network uses a gatekeeper H 323 trunks only there are also specific settings that must be set on the your system to recognize the gatekeeper and also within the gatekeeper application so that VoIP lines are recognized Refer to VoIP interoperability Gatekeeper configuration on page 389 If there is a gatekeeper on the network you do not have to configure remote gateway settings Ifyou plan to use H 323 trunking and you have a firewall set up ensure that the ports you intend to use have been allowed e SIP network applications consideration Ifyou plan to use SIP trunking and you have a firewall set up ensure that the ports you intend to use have been allowed Using VoIP to tandem systems on page 327 and Configuring fallback over a VoIP MCDN network in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Configuring VoIP trunk media parameters The VoIP trunk media parameters allow you to specify the order in which the trunk will select IP telephony system controls for codecs jitter buffers silence suppression and payload size The following path indicates where to access the VoIP trunk media parameters in Element Manager Element Manager Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources gt IP Trunks For de
348. he host system Networking Configuration Guide 276 Chapter 28 Dialing plan Public network This panel includes information about e Public Network Settings on page 276 e Public network DN lengths on page 277 e Carrier Codes on page 279 Public Network Settings This following describes system settings that allow the system to determine if an incoming call is meant for the local system These settings determine how many digits the system needs to receive before sending the dial string over the trunk interface Figure 86 illustrates the Public Network Settings panel Figure 86 Public Network Settings panel Public Network Settings Public Received number length 3 v Public Auto DN Public DISA DN Public network dialing plan National m Public network code Table 52 describes each field in the Public Network Settings box Table 52 Private and Public received numbers Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description Public Received number length max 2 12 The maximum number of digits 2 3 4 5 6 7 that the system uses to determine if an incoming call tagged as public fits the system public DN numbering Default DID template same as DN length PBX template 3 Also refer to Setting up a destination for local calling on page 249 Public Auto DN DN digits to be received from the auto answer trunk Public network calls answered without DISA re
349. he same protocols to provide a technically sound and stable network The following links are procedures to set up basic networks to advanced networks using the support protocols within BCM e Routing based networks using T1 E amp M lines on page 40 Networking Configuration Guide 40 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview e PRI networking using Call by Call services on page 41 e PRI SL 1 Q Sig DPNSS and VoIP trunk networking on page 42 Routing based networks using T1 E amp M lines By properly planning and programming routing tables and destination codes an installer can create a dialing plan where T1 E amp M lines between BCM systems are available to other systems in the network Figure 4 shows a network of three BCM systems Two remote systems connect to a central system Figure 4 Dialing plan for T1 E amp M routing network fA S A f a New Yorkfi Toronto Pi oe VP 7 Network 22214 Network 62214 hy IE C MURS Suus Received 22211 Received 62211 C VSS ammi EE by Internal amp 22218 Internal 62218 mund E Santa Clara J Ar Network 42214 A E o Received 42214 oum E 7f Internal amp 42218 Each system must be running BCM software Each system must be equipped with target lines and a BCM expansion unit with a DTM with at least one T1 E amp M line NN40020 603 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview 41 The call appears on the auto
350. her call types the system truncates the trailing digits to the Public Received Length Go to step 4 Private calls e If the call is tagged as Private Subscriber or Private UDP the system prepends the Private access code e If the call is tagged as Private CDP no access code is added 3 The system tries to match the first digits of the dial string to a destination code If the digits match the dial string is routed out of the system 4 Ifthe system cannot match the first digits to a destination code the system tries to match the dial string to a target line Public or Private Received Number If the dial string does not match any target lines the call is routed to the prime set for the line Figure 68 is a graphic illustration of incoming call processing NN40020 603 Chapter 24 Dialing plans 227 Figure 68 Incoming public and private call coding Networking Configuration Guide 228 Chapter 24 Dialing plans Determining line access dialing Understanding access codes on page 229 and Configuring call routing on page 234 describe what you do with the lines and loops you previously set up into line pools By using access codes or call routing which uses destination codes you can determine which lines routes outgoing calls use When you create a route you can also specify restrictions that apply to how or when the line will be used Figure 69 provides an overview of how access codes
351. her schedules that you want this line to be part of incoming calls from remote users or private networks Line restrictions Enter a valid restriction filter for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of outgoing calls Remote Restrictions Enter a valid remote access package for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of incoming calls from remote users or private networks 5 Assign the lines to DNs Assigned DNs tab applicable to manual answer only If you have configured the DNs and know to which telephones the line needs to be assigned you can enter those DNs here The DN record also can be used to assign lines and line pools for these lines DN Unique number Appearance type Choose Appr or Appr amp ring if the telephone has an available button otherwise choose Ring only Model 7000 and 7100 telephones have no programmable buttons so this must be set to Ring only Model 7000 phones supported in Europe only Vmsg set When activated an indicator on the telephone appears when a message from a remote voice mail system is waiting Check with your system administrator for the system voice mail setup before changing this parameter 6 Suggested next steps Dialing plan Dialing plan System settings on page 267 Dialing plan Public network on page 275 Dialing plan Routing and destination codes on page 259 Networking
352. here is no camped call on the target telephone DND on busy is turned on prime set is also busy with no free key and with DND turned on Attendant capability is high 2 and higher than either the target telephone or the caller the target telephone owner is busy with Only post dial break in is supported by MCDN 1 2 Attendant dials destination number If a busy tone is heard the attendant presses the BKI button Attendant is given access to the conversation You can set a level of priority that will determine if a telephone will allow an attendant to break in This is referred to as setting the Intrusion level Use the following rules to configure the break in feature Set the Intrusion level for each telephone under Capabilities on the DN record Refer to Capabilities tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 How the intrusion hierarchy works Break in is allowed if Attendant telephone is High and caller telephone is Medium Break in is not allowed if Attendant telephone is Medium and caller telephone is high NN40020 603 Chapter 32 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP 303 MCDN networking checklist The following points provide a quick check for the system prerequisite settings for MCDN networking Select the dialing plan to be used e UDP Universal Dialing Plan DNs on the same node are dialed directly DNs on other nodes are called by first dialing an Access Code a
353. his information is supplied by your service provider Analog trunks use a dialing digit sequence called a Vertical Service Code VSC The VSC differs from region to region and must be programmed Analog trunks with both tone and pulse dialing trunks can have separate VSCs PRI trunks have only one VSC No specific system programming is required ETSI note ETSI lines may use the Calling Line Information Restriction CLIR supplementary service to provide this feature ETSI PRI lines do not use a VSC The line always uses Suppression bit to invoke the CLIR supplementary service BRI trunks can be set to either provide ONN using a suppression bit which provides a notice from the system to the central office to withhold CLI provide ONN using a VCS which is dialed out in front of the dialed digits optional on ETSI trunks BRI trunk ONN settings are located under the loops settings Refer to BRI ISDN BRI T loops on page 195 BRI ISDN BRI T loops in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Programming note Ensure that users who have access to this feature have telephones with valid OLI numbers NN40020 603 211 Chapter 23 CLID Name display BCM displays the name of the calling party at the answering telephone when this information is available on Private or Public PRI trunks VoIP trunks and analog trunks that support Calling Line Identification CLID The displayed name can include the Receiving
354. hown in Figure 107 highlights the use of PRI Call by Call services It shows two offices of a company one in New York and one in Toronto Each office is equipped with a BCM and a PRI line Each office must handle incoming and outgoing calls to the public network In addition employees at each office often have to call colleagues in the other office Note Call by Call Services must be provided by the Central Office for z them to work in the BCM Figure 107 PRI networking using Call by Call Services Toronto office New York office Network 2221 Network 6221 Received 2221 Received 6221 Internal 2221 Internal 6221 DID 763 2221 DID 562 6221 TIE Connection Public Network Central Office Central Office To reduce long distance costs and to allow for a coordinated dialing plan between the offices private lines are used to handle interoffice traffic Refer to Dialing plan Public network on page 275 and Dialing plan Private network settings on page 281 If Call by Call services were not used each BCM system might have to be equipped with the following trunks e 12 TI DID lines needed to handle peak incoming call traffic e eight TI E amp M lines needed to handle inter office calls e eight lines needed to handle outgoing public calls Networking Configuration Guide 344 Chapter 38 Private networking PRI Call by Call service
355. hs indicate where to access the DASS2 trunks in Element Manager and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines e Telset Interface CONFIG gt Lines Task configure DPNSS lines connected to the system Configuring DASS2 line features on page 177 Also refer to Private networking DPNSS network services UK only on page 331 Prerequisites Complete the following prerequisites checklist before configuring the modules DTM module is installed and configured Refer to Trunk Module Parameters on page 104 Lines are provisioned Refer to Provisioning module lines loops on page 112 Process map Figure 54 and Figure 55 provide an overview of the DASS2 line feature configuration Networking Configuration Guide 176 Chapter 17 Configuring lines DASS2 lines Figure 54 DASS2 line feature configuration process Part A Yes NN40020 603 Chapter 17 Configuring lines DASS2 lines 177 Figure 55 DASS2 line feature configuration process Part B gu Yes Yes Configuring DASS2 line features The following procedure describes the fields that need to be confirmed or set for these lines For detailed field descriptions refer to Configuring lines on page 129 1 Confirm or change the settings on the Trunk Line Data main panel e Trunk type DASS2 e Name Identify the line or l
356. ic and private DN lengths e a schedule optional Configuring Call by Call services Call by Call service selection CbC allows you to access services or private facilities over a PRI line without the need for dedicated facilities The different services represent different types of access to the network Refer to the following information e Call by Call services on page 236 e Switches supporting Call by call limits on page 237 e Provisioning for Call by Call limits with PRI on page 238 Networking Configuration Guide 236 Chapter 24 Dialing plans Supporting protocols The following protocols support Call by call limits e National ISDN 2 NI 2 e DMS 100 custom e DMS 250 AT amp T 4ESS custom Call by Call services BCM supports the Call by Call Services listed in Table 39 Table 39 Call by Call Services available on the system Service Description Public Foreign Exchange FX TIE OUTWATS INWATS International INWATS Switched Digital Nine Hundred Private Public calls connect BCM and a Central Office CO BCM supports both incoming and outgoing calls over the public network Dialed digits conform to the standard North American dialing plan E 164 standard Foreign exchange service connects a BCM site to a remote central office CO This provides the equivalent of local service at the remote location TIE lines are private incoming and outgoing lines that conn
357. ic networking Tandem calls from private node 295 call directly to one or more BCM telephones call into BCM and select an outgoing TIE line to access other nodes in a private network call into BCM and select an outgoing central office line to access the public network call into BCM and use remote features Networking Configuration Guide 296 Chapter 31 Public networking Tandem calls from private node NN40020 603 297 Chapter 32 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP The following describes how to network BCMs together in a private network using PRI lines with MCDN protocol When BCMs are networked with other call services such as Meridian 1 using the MCDN protocol the network can also support centralized voice mail This chapter discusses MCDN networking based on North American trunks PRI SL 1 ETSI QSIG private networking is configured very similarly although network features may be supported slightly differently The following describes the different aspects of MCDN private networking e Using MCDN to network with a Meridian system on page 297 e Configuring fallback over a VoIP MCDN network on page 311 e Networking with ETSI QSIG on page 313 Refer to Private networking Basic parameters on page 315 for general requirements and directions for setting up non PRI private networks Using MCDN to network with a Meridian system When you connect your BCM systems through the MCDN protocol to a
358. ich you subscribe Note MCDN networks fully support name display features within the private network environment Networking Configuration Guide 212 Chapter 23 CLID Name display Receiving and sending calling party name Network Name Display displays the name of an incoming PRI BRI analog with CLID or VoIP with MCDN call on the BCM telephone receiving the call Calling Party Name with status of Private can appear on the Called Party telephone as Private name If the incoming Calling Name is defined by the CO as a private name then Private name appears on the answering telephone If the Calling Party Name is unavailable it can appear on the Called Party telephone as Unknown name If the call is answered by a Hunt group the hunt group name appears instead of the telephone name in forming the connected name The Connected Name is a transient display that appears for approximately three seconds The Connected Name is sent only if the OLI is programmed You can program both a public and private OLI The system uses the one appropriate to the type of call Network name display interactions Calling and Connected Name information if available passes between trunks with Selective Line Redirection SLR Only Calling Name information passes between trunks in cases where Direct System Inward Access DISA results in tandeming of trunks Outgoing name display You can set up the trunks to disallow name display to be sent o
359. ide 146 Chapter 12 Configuring lines PRI Figure 42 PRI line feature configuration process Part A NN40020 603 Chapter 12 Configuring lines PRI 147 Figure 43 PRI line feature configuration process Part B Restrictions subscreen Ii Yes Configuring PRI line features The following procedure describes the fields that need to be confirmed or set for these lines For detailed field descriptions refer to Configuring lines on page 129 1 Confirm or change the settings on the Trunk Line Data main panel e Line Number of the line being assigned Trunk Type PRI or ETSI European standard e Name Identify the line or line function e Control Set Identify a DN if you are using this line with scheduling e Line Type Define how the line will be used If you are using routing ensure it is put into line pool BlocA to BlocF If you use line pools you need to assign target lines to the telephones as well refer to Configuring lines Target lines on page 141 e Prime Set If you want the line to be answered at another telephone if the line is not answered at the target telephone Networking Configuration Guide 148 Chapter 12 Configuring lines PRI e Pub Received Not applicable e Priv Received Not applicable e Distinct Ring If you want this line to have a special ring indicate a pattern 2 3 4 or None Subpanel under Restrictions
360. ide NN40020 600 for information on how to configure and use PVQM functionality NN40020 603 367 Chapter 43 VoIP trunk gateways You can use a VoIP trunk to establish communications between a BCM and a remote system across an IP network Each trunk is associated with a line record lines 001 012 and are configured in the same way that other lines are configured However VoIP trunks have additional programming to support the IP network connection This system supports SIP trunks and H 323 trunks Both types of trunks support connections to other BCMs a central call server such as Succession 1000 M and trunk based applications SIP trunks and H 323 trunks are assigned to a single Pool and the routing decision to route calls via H 323 or SIP is made based on the routing modes of the two services Direct Gatekeeper Proxy and the combined routing table To access the Voice over IP VoIP trunk gateway in Element Manager select Element Manager Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources gt IP Trunks gt Routing Table tab Configuring a VoIP trunk requires the following e Pre installation system requirements on page 367 e Keycodes on page 368 e H 323 network applications considerations on page 368 e SIP network applications considerations on page 368 You can use VoIP trunks for calls originating from any type of telephone within the BCM system Calls coming into the system over VoIP trunk
361. ied a list of DNs to the host system administrator that require mailboxes To set up a satellite system for voice mail 1 To access the Centralized Voice Messaging panel select Configuration gt Applications gt Voice Messaging Contact Center Click the voice center number that you want to assign to the remote voice mail system In the External Number field enter the voice mail DN assigned by the host system Ensure that you include any appropriate routing codes to the string Also refer to Centralized Voice Messaging external voice mail in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 DPNSS process Type the new target number starting with an access code if required or None For example 65142222 Enter the Message Waiting Indication String that is expected from the particular message center Program the Message Waiting Cancellation String that is expected from the message center Note The line must be programmed to Appear and or Ring at the telephone Configuring the Target lines 6 7 If the telephone does not already have a target line assigned a To access the Target Lines panel select Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Target Click the Preferences tab Lines b Inthe Target Lines table locate the target line to be assigned C In the Details for Line subpanel click the Assigned DNs tab d Click Add e Enter the required DN in the DN field f Click OK g h In the Voice messag
362. ignments to share calls You can also configure lines for use by system users who call in from outside the system You can give them direct access to the system with an Auto DN or you can configure the line so they hear a stuttered dial tone at which point they need to enter a password CoS to gain access DISA DN NN40020 603 Chapter 3 Telephony programming Configuring call traffic 67 Figure 14 Incoming call configuration part A Telephony settings and features Networking Configuration Guide 68 Chapter 3 Telephony programming Configuring call traffic Figure 15 Incoming call configuration part B User features NN40020 603 Chapter 3 Telephony programming Configuring call traffic 69 Figure 16 Configuring incoming call controls Networking Configuration Guide 70 Chapter 3 Telephony programming Configuring call traffic Outgoing calls For outgoing calls you can assign one or more intercom keys to directly link to a line pool or prime line or allow line pool access codes destination codes or internal system numbers to direct the call Telephones without intercom keys on the telephone have intercom keys assigned but the user must pick up the handset to access calls In this case the intercom key is an assigned DN For calls within the system all telephones are virtually linked within the system To call another telephone inside the syst
363. iguration gt Sets gt All DNs to assign the line pool e Select Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Routing to assign a pool for routing and assign the service type and service id if required e Select Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Loops gt Call by Call Limits tab to specify the minimum and maximum values for the pools Call by Call service routing Table 41 is an example of a Routing Table containing Call by Call programming available in the North America market profile Also refer to Configuring Call by Call services on page 235 Table 41 Call by Call routing table example Route Number Dial Out Use Pool Service Type Service 000 999 24 digits Identifier 003 BlocA Public 004 BlocA FX XXXXX 005 BlocA TIE XXXXX 006 BlocB OUTWATS XXX 007 BlocB Private 008 BlocB Switched Digital Note The public DN lengths are used for all PRI calls except those whose routes use service type Private or service type TIE with DN Type specified as Private Note This type of routing applies only to those PRI trunks set with a protocol of NI DMS 100 DMS 250 or 4ESS NN40020 603 Chapter 24 Dialing plans 239 The service identifier SID depends on the selected service type for example with NI 2 protocol Service Type Service Identifier description Public None FX Facility Number 1 5 digits TIE Facility Number 1 5 digits OUTWATS2 Op
364. iguring telephony resources 127 Table 25 SIP Media parameters tab Sheet 2 of 2 Field Value Description Settings Enable Voice check box The voice activity detection silence suppression identifies Activity Detection periods of silence in a conversation and stops sending IP speech packets during those periods In a typical telephone conversation most of the conversation is half duplex meaning that one person is speaking while the other is listening For more information refer to Silence suppression on page 529 If voice activity detection is enabled no voice packets are sent from the listener end This greatly reduces bandwidth requirements G 723 1 and G 729 support silence suppression G 711 does not support silence suppression Performance note voice activity detection on all networked BCMs and IPT systems VAD setting on IPT systems must be consistent to ensure that interacting features such as Transfer and Conference work correctly Default Disabled Jitter Buffer Auto Select the size of jitter buffer you want to allow for your system None Small Medium Large G 729 Payload Size 10 20 30 40 50 60 Set the desired payload size per codec for VoIP calls sent over ms Default 30 SIP trunks G 723 Payload Size 30 Note Payload size can also be set for Nortel IP telephones ms G 711 Payload Size ms 10 20 30 40 50 60 Default 30 Refer to the Device Configura
365. ils for Module Internal Routing Table H323 Settings H323 Media Parameters SIP Settings i SIP Media Parameters SIP URI Map Preferred Codecs Settings Codec Preferences Enable Voice Activity Detection Available list Selected list Jitter buffer Aug v G 729 J TEE G 723 j G 729 payload size ms 20 v A G 711 uLaw kl G 711 aLaw G 723 payload size ms G 711 payload size ms 20 w v Enable T 38 fax Table 25 SIP Media parameters tab Sheet 1 of 2 Field Value Description Preferred Codecs Preferred Codecs None Select the Codecs in the order in which you want the system to G 711 uLaw attempt to use them G 711 aLaw Performance note Codecs on all networked BCMs should be consistent to ensure that interacting features such as Transfer G 729 and Conference work correctly G 723 Note The G 723 codec can be used between IP endpoints If other types of connections are required ensure one of the other codecs is also selected Actions 1 Onthe Available list click the codec you want to add to the Selected list 2 Click the button to move the codec to the Selected list 1 Select a codec that you want to remove from the Selected list eS 2 Click this button to move the codec back to the Available list Select a codec on the Selected list M o Click the appropriate arrow to move the codec up or down in the Selected list N NN40020 603 Chapter 9 Conf
366. in Element Manager Element Manager Configuration Resources Telephony Resources IP Trunks Task Set up VoIP gateway parameters e Set up the media parameters for the gateway Configuring VoIP trunk media parameters on page 382 e Set up the local gateway parameters including H323 gatekeeper or SIP Proxy settings if necessary Setting up the local gateway on page 383 e Set up the routing table if one is required Setting up remote gateways on page 385 e Configure the line parameters Configuring VoIP lines on page 385 Prerequisites Ensure that you have obtained the following information or familiarize yourself with the requirements before continuing with VoIP trunk configuration Keycodes Obtain and install the necessary keycodes for the number of VoIP trunks you want to support on the system See the Keycode Installation Guide NN40010 301 for more information about installing the keycodes Talk to your BCM sales agent if you need to purchase VoIP keycodes Each keycode adds a specific number of VoIP trunks You must reboot your BCM after you enter VoIP keycodes to activate trunking The FEPS service will restart automatically after you enter the VoIP keycodes If you want to use the MCDN features on the VoIP trunks you will need an MCDN keycode If you have already deployed MCDN for your SL 1 PRI lines you do not require an additional keycode Media gateway parameters Ensure that t
367. in panel tabs Address Ranges on page 486 Main panel tabs Lease Info on page 489 Main panel tabs General Settings The General Settings tab controls the main DHCP settings including WINS and DNS settings Networking Configuration Guide 482 Chapter 66 DHCP Server Settings panel Figure 132 General Settings tab DHCP Server IP domain name Primary DNS IP address Secondary DNS IP address WINS server address General Settings IP Terminal DHCP Options Address Ranges Lease Info DHCP serveris Disabled WINS node type H nade v Default gateway 1982168 249 1 Lease time s 604800 Warning Whenever you make changes to the default gateway the DHCP server may become unavailable to clients for a brief period of time When making changes consider doing so at a time that will minimize the effect on users Table 104 General Settings Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description The DHCP Disabled Determines the functionality of the DHCP server Server is Enabled IP Phones Only Default Disabled Enabled All Devices Enabled Automatic IP domain lt alphanumeric character The domain name of the network name string gt Primary DNS IP Address format The IP address of the primary DNS to be used by DHCP IP address 10 10 10 10 gt clients Secondary lt IP Address format The IP address of the secondary DNS to be used by DHCP DNS IP 10 10 1
368. in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 time a call is received Networking Configuration Guide 136 Chapter 10 Configuring lines Table 29 Preferences details fields for lines Sheet 2 of 3 Attribute Value Description panel Legend Loop analog digital loop GS ground start DID DID E amp M E amp M BRI BRI DPNSS DPNSS VoIP VoIP TL Target and DASS2 Note PRI fields are all included under the main ANI Number DID E amp M lt check box gt Define whether the telephone number of the caller will be shown for this line For T1 E amp M and T1 DID trunks connected to a DTM this setting only appears if Signaling is set to WinkStart The central office must deliver ANI DNIS in DTMF mode No additional equipment is required DNIS Number lt check box gt E amp M Defines whether the digits dialed by an external caller on this line will be shown For T1 E amp M trunks connected to a DTM this setting only appears if Signaling is set to WinkStart and Answer mode is set to Manual Distinct Rings in lt read only gt Indicates if a special ring has been assigned See Distinct Ring use on the main table Answer mode Loop GS E amp M BRI DPNSS Manual Define whether a trunk is manual or automatic answer Auto Auto answer mode allows the trunk to be a shared resource by the system telephones This shared re
369. ine access code direct dial digit or any line pool access code the setting for the prefix or code changes to None and the corresponding feature is disabled Optional applications affected by DN length changes Voice mail and Contact Center applications are reset if you change the DN length after these services are installed Warning If your system is running with a PBX telephony template the Public and Private received number length are set to 3 digits at start up Increasing the DN length after system startup does not change these digits so you will need to manually change the Public and Private received number length Private OLIs are automatically assigned to the DN records if the DN length and the Private received number length are the same If this changes the Private OLIs are cleared or are not assigned PBX template Network note If your system is part of a private network ensure that you confirm the dialing plan for the network before changing this length If you change the length ensure that you check all DN related settings after the change Received number notes If you change the received number length for your system the Public number entry for the target lines will clear if the new received length is less than the number entered in this field If the new received number length has more digits than the number entered in the target lines Public Number field the entry remains but does not update to th
370. ine and network requirements If the MCDN protocol is added to this type of private network the network provides additional network management features as well as allowing centralized voice mail features to be available to all nodes on the network The following topics describe the different aspects of SL 1 and MCDN private networking e System dialing plans on page 43 e Creating tandem private networks on page 43 NN40020 603 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview 43 e Understanding Nortel Voice Networking MCDN network features on page 46 e Networking with ETSI QSIG on page 50 e Private networking with DPNSS on page 60 The type of network you require depends on the equipment in the network and how you want to use the network e With MCDN you can tie a set of BCM systems together with PRI SL 1 MCDN ETSI QSIG DPNSS or VoIP trunks to create a tandem network This type of network provides the additional advantage of providing private line access to local PSTNs for all the nodes on the network Note A keycode is required to use the Nortel Voice Networking functionality gt which is referred to as SL 1 in the BCM Element Manager System dialing plans Both of these types of networks require similar setups for dialing plans and routing Each node must have a way to route external calls to the adjacent node or nodes To do this all nodes must have the same Private DN lengths You us
371. ine function e Control Set Identify a DN if you are using this line with scheduling Networking Configuration Guide 178 Chapter 17 Configuring lines DASS2 lines Line type Define how the line will be used If you are using routing ensure it is put into line pool A to O Prime Set If you want the line to be answered at another telephone if the line is not answered at the target telephone otherwise choose None Pub Received Not applicable Priv Received Not applicable Distinct ring If you want this line to have a special ring indicate a pattern 2 3 4 or None Use remote package If this line is used for remote call ins or is part of a private network ensure you specify a valid package 2 Configure the trunk line data Properties tab Answer mode If this line is used for remote call ins determine how you want the line to answer automatically or requiring more user input Use auxiliary ringer If your system is equipped with an external ringer you can enable this setting to allow this line to ring at the external ringer Full autohold This allows telephones to put a line on hold if the user picks up another line or starts to dial out on another line Voice Message Center If the system is using a remote voice mail select the center configured with the contact number 3 Set the restriction and remote package scheduling Restrictions tab Line restrictions Enter a valid restriction filter fo
372. ine to be part of incoming calls from remote users or private networks Assign the lines to DNs Assigned DNs tab applicable to manual answer only If you have configured the DNs and know to which telephones the line needs to be assigned you can enter those DNs here The DN record also can be used to assign lines and line pools for these lines Appearance type Choose Appear or Appear and ring if the telephone has an available button otherwise choose Ring Only Model 7000 and 7100 telephones have no programmable buttons so this must be set to Ring only Model 7000 phones supported in Europe only VMsg set When activated an indicator on the telephone appears when a message from a remote voice mail system is waiting Check with your system administrator for the system voice mail setup before changing this parameter Suggested next steps Dialing plan Dialing plan System settings on page 267 Dialing plan Public network on page 275 Dialing plan Routing and destination codes on page 259 Networking Public networking Setting up basic systems on page 289 Public networking Tandem calls from private node on page 293 Private networking Using destination codes on page 339 Networking Configuration Guide 174 Chapter 16 Configuring lines T1 DID NN40020 603 175 Chapter 17 Configuring lines DASS2 lines DASS2 trunks are specific to the UK protocol The following pat
373. ines that appear on the telephone Assign a line pool as the prime line When the user lifts the receiver or presses Handsfree any one of the lines if idle can be selected by Automatic Outgoing Line selection Changes in the settings for trunk type on a system that is in use can result in dropped calls When assigning lines to line pools consider your network configuration You can create a unified dialing plan by assigning lines to the same location to the same line pool on each of your systems For example if system A and system B each have TIE lines to system C assign the TIE lines to pool D on each of the systems You cannot assign target lines to a line pool as they are incoming only Using loss packages Use the loss package settings to select the appropriate loss gain and impedance settings for each line The setting is based on the terminating switch type and the distance between BCM and the terminating switch When measuring the distance from BCM to CO and from BCM to PBX systems use 600 ohms as the termination resistance setting Table 12 Loss package settings Loss Receive Transmit Impedance Distance to switch cable loss terminating Package Loss Loss switch Short CO 0 dB 3 dB Short Short lt 2 dB BCM to CO Medium CO 0 dB 0 dB TIA EIA 464 Medium 22 dB and 6 dB BCM to CO Long CO 3 dB 0 dB TIA EIA 464 Long 6 dB BCM to CO Short PBX 0 dB 0 dB Short Short lt 2 dB BCM to PBX Long PBX 3 dB 0 dB TIA E
374. ing These protocols are used for lines TIE connected to DMS 100 DMS 250 and 4ESS switches Refer to PRI route types on page 262 Foreign exchange FX OUTWATS Switched Digital SDS Service ID digits If you choose a service type in the identification number for the service Note Outgoing call display If you have the trunks set up to send called number information and the DN type is set to anything except Private the system sends the Public OLI number you specified under line programming If the DN type is set to Private the system sends the Private OLI number Refer to Line Access tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Networking Configuration Guide 262 Chapter 26 Dialing plan Routing and destination codes Table 47 Route settings Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description Actions Add 1 Under the routes table click Add 2 Enter a route number in the dialog box 3 Click OK to save the new route Delete 1 On the routes table select the route you want to delete 2 In the Routes pane click Delete 3 Click OK Modifying Warning Modifying some route settings may result in dropped calls Ensure that you routes modify the destination codes Absorbed Length setting if required if you add or change the External Number entry Changing the Use Pool or DN Types Service Types values will result in dropped calls if the lines in the line pool do not support the DN Service
375. ing 541 add interface 503 B and D channels 536 bearer capability 537 BRI card 542 544 call by call services for PRI 540 capabilities 535 capability packages 545 546 channel characteristics 505 clock source 544 clocking 544 compared to analog 536 configure link parameters 507 connect interface 504 data transmission speed 538 deleting an interface 504 dial in parameters 518 dialing plan 541 digital access lines DAL settings 108 disable interface 503 disconnect interface 504 enable interface 503 hardware 542 interface 501 ISDN 502 IP address 508 layers 536 link parameters 506 507 loss plan setting 107 network name display 539 synchronization 544 ordering 545 ordering service 546 planning service order 536 PRI 2 way DID 541 programming sequence 92 remote access 498 S interface 543 S reference point 543 services and features 537 539 standards 545 supported protocols 547 T reference point 543 terminal equipment configuration 543 type of services 536 ISDN call connection limitation ICCL MCDN 47 320 J jitter buffer VoIP trunks 124 127 K keycode file upload automatic 499 keycodes MCDN networking 38 315 prerequisite list 467 VoIP trunks 368 NN40020 603 559 L LAN Business Communications Manager function 467 least cost routing 243 252 line access call diagram 228 call by call services network 344 MCDN network 310 line coding T1 parameters 107 line filter CoS programming 444
376. ing outgoing number display OLI on page 209 NN40020 603 Chapter 19 BRI ISDN BRI loop properties 189 Table 31 Loops main panel Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description ONN blocking Suppression bit the system flags the call to the Central Office CO so that the name and number is not sent to the person you call Service code VSC digits are dialed out before the called number to activate ONN at the central office These codes are supplied by your service provider for the lines Refer to ONN Blocking codes North American systems in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 PRI lines have only one code so do not require specific configuration T loop general settings The Settings tab allows you to define loop characteristics Note that not all of these settings are required in all BRI markets Figure 59 illustrates the Settings tab Figure 59 Settings subpanel T loops Table 32 describes the fields on this panel Details for Loop 701 Settings SPIDs Clock source Primary external v Primary external Secondary extemal Internal Table 32 Details for Loop Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description Clock source Primary External Secondary External Internal Primary External uses clock from PSTN Secondary External used if system has more than one Loop Internal uses clock on BCM Overlap receiving lt check bo
377. ings CRC4 lt check box gt E1 PRI Ensure this is enabled setting for the trunk or disabled to match the service provider Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC4 Station modules do not have any configurable module parameters Interface levels The default Interface levels are the ISDN loss plan settings Also refer to ISDN overview on page 535 Check with your telecommunications service provider to determine if your BCM system is connected to a central office CO with digital network loss treatment ISDN I F levels or analog network loss treatment PSTN I F levels Networking Configuration Guide 108 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources The ISDN setting requires digital access lines DAL that have digital network loss treatment On a DAL network the PBX system administers the dB loss not the CO DALs may have ISDN signaling or digital signaling for example T1 The loss plan follows the Draft TIA 464 C loss plan which uses a send loudness rating SLR of 8 dB You must contact your service provider to get DAL network loss treatment on a line with digital signaling The PSTN setting requires analog access lines AAL that have analog network loss treatment and digital signaling On an AAL D network the CO administers the dB loss The loss plan follows the Draft TIA 464 C loss plan The ISDN loss plan uses a send loudness rating SLR of 8 dB and a receive loudness rating RLR of 2 dB The PSTN
378. is changed it will cause VM CC to be defaulted in order to work properly NN40020 603 Chapter 27 Dialing plan System settings 269 Table 51 Private and Public received numbers Sheet 2 of 3 Attribute Value Description Dialing timeout Default 4 This is the maximum period allowed between user dialpad seconds presses before the system decides that the dial string is complete Access Codes Park prefix None The Park prefix is the first digit of the call park retrieval code that one digit a user enters to retrieve a parked call If the Park prefix is set to number None calls cannot be parked Refer to Call Park codes on page 273 before choosing a number SWCA note If this field is set to None the system wide call appearance SWCA feature will not work Refer to System Wide Call Appearances in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 External code None The External code setting allows you to assign the external line one digit access code for 7100 and 7000 digital phones and analog number telephones attached to ATA 2s or to analog modules to access external lines Note Model 7000 phones are supported in Europe only When the caller picks up the handset the system tone sounds The caller then enters this number to access an external line Note This number is overridden by line pool or starting with the same digit s Refer to Tips about access codes on page
379. isioned using NRS Manager Refer to JP Peer Networking Installation and Configuration 553 3001 213 for detailed information on configuring a CS 1000 gateway NN40020 603 391 Chapter 46 Setting up VoIP trunks for fallback The following path indicates where to access setting VoIP trunks for fallback in the Element Manager Element Manager Configuration Resources Telephony Resources IP Trunks H323 Settings tab Task Configure VoIP trunks to allow fallback to PSTN lines e Configuring routes for fallback on page 391 e Example A private network configured for fallback on page 396 Configuring routes for fallback Configuring routes allows you to set up access to the VoIP and the PSTN line pools These routes can be assigned to destination codes The destination codes then are configured into schedules where the PSTN line is assigned to the Normal schedule and the VoIP route is assigned to a schedule that can be activated from a control set For details about route and schedule configuration refer to the information under the headings below e Adding routes for fallback on page 392 e Assigning the line pools to routes on page 392 e Adding the destination code for the fallback route on page 393 e Configuring the schedules for the destination codes on page 394 e Setting up the VoIP schedule to overflow on page 395 Pre configuration requirements e Ifyou have not
380. it CoS passwords 00 to 99 To maintain the security of your system the following practices are recommended Warn a person to whom you give the remote access number to keep the number confidential Change CoS passwords often Warn a person to whom you give a CoS password to memorize the password and not to write it down Delete the CoS password of a person who leaves your company Security Note Remote users can make long distance calls Remember that a remote user can make long distance calls that are charged to your company They can also access line pools and make page announcements in your office NN40020 603 Chapter 52 Call security and remote access 425 External access tones You can hear some of the following tones when accessing BCM from remote location Table 88 shows the different types of tones and what they mean Table 88 External access tones Tone What it means System dial tone You can use the system without entering a CoS password Stuttered dialtone Enter your CoS password Busy tone You have dialed a busy line pool access code You hear system dial tone again after five seconds Fast busy tone You have done one of the following e Entered an incorrect CoS password Your call disconnects after five seconds Taken too long while entering a CoS password Your call disconnects after five seconds e Tried to use a line pool or feature not permitted by your Class of Service You hea
381. itoring SM silent monitor SWCA system wide call appearance Organization This guide is organized for easy access to information that explains the concepts operations and procedures associated with the BCM system About BCM The BCM system provides private network and telephony management capability to small and medium sized businesses The BCM system integrates voice and data capabilities VoIP gateway functions and QoS data routing features into a single telephony system e enables you to create and provide telephony applications for use in a business environment NN40020 603 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM 27 BCM features BCM50 supports the complete range of IP telephony features offered by existing BCM products Note You enable the following features by entering the appropriate keycodes no additional hardware is required e VoIP Gateway H 323 and SIP Up to 12 VoIP trunks e VoIP Telephony Clients Up to 32 VoIP Telephony clients supporting the range of Nortel IP Phones and softclients BCM applications BCM50 supports many applications provided on the existing BCM platforms Note You enable the following features by entering the appropriate keycodes no additional hardware is required e Voice Messaging for standard voice mail and auto attendant features e Unified Messaging providing integrated voice mail management between voice mail and common e mail applications e Fax Suite pr
382. ived number assigned to a target line Variable Example or default settings Private received number lt CDP same as DN of telephone UDP LOC code DN Public received number North America 10 digits XXX XXX XXXX the trailing digits are the DN lt DPNSS maximum number of digits in local dialing pattern Outgoing calls Other network codes include the information about public dialing codes that you enter under Configuration Telephony Dialing Plan Public Networks The public dialing plan defines which dialing string prefixes will be allowed over the public PSTN lines By defining these dial strings and the length of the prefix the central office can direct the calls to the correct public destination Variable Example or default settings Public DN lengths Public dialing table prefixes For private networks if you are not using routing and destination codes you need to identify an access code that indicates an incoming call is destined for the private network Variable Example or default settings Private Access Code 6 Networking Configuration Guide 220 Chapter 24 Dialing plans MCDN special call types If your system is networked to other types of systems such as Meridian 1 which sends calls through one or more BCM systems to the public network you need to specify specific call type codes These codes append to the incoming dial string so that the call type remains intact a
383. k audio signals such as modem or TTY machines 4 Setup the local gateway parameters Setting up the local gateway on page 383 Setting up the local gateway The call signaling method used by the local gateway defines how the BCM prefers call signaling information to be directed through VoIP trunks Call signaling establishes and disconnects a call You set this information in the local gateway panels If the network has a gatekeeper H 323 trunks only the BCM can request a method for call signaling this request is granted depending on the configuration of the gatekeeper Ultimately the gatekeeper decides which call signaling method to use Refer to VoIP interoperability Gatekeeper configuration on page 389 The following path indicates where to access the local gateway in Element Manager Element Manager Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources gt IP Trunks In the bottom panel select the H323 Settings or SIP Settings tab Choose the settings that you need for your system Fallback to circuit switched define how you want the system to handle calls that the system fails to send over the VoIP trunk Note Enabled TDM enables fallback for calls originating on digital telephones This is useful if your IP telephones are connected remotely on the public side of the BCM network because PSTN fallback is unlikely to result in better quality of service in that scenario Forward redirected OLI If the bo
384. k prefix external code direct dial digit e Auto DN e DISA DN Private access code line pool codes telephone DN e public target line received digits other destination codes Note You can enter destination codes up to a maximum of 12 digits Why use destination codes Routes determine path line or pool and any required access numbers Destination codes determine which route to take that is an end node uses one destination code for all other nodes in the system If you choose to use the destination codes Normal schedule the call will always go out over the same route If you choose to use the other destination codes schedules you can set up a more responsive plan whereby calls can go out over more than one route based on scheduled times Destination codes provide you with the opportunity to create a dialing plan that allows users to connect to other systems in a relatively seamless or consistent manner regardless of the lines or routes that are being used to get there For example connecting through VoIP lines requires significantly different ways of dialing than dialing over T1 lines However you can configure destination codes such that the user dials the same number of digits regardless of the trunks over which the calls are routed NN40020 603 Chapter 24 Dialing plans 241 Figure 71 Using destination codes to access another system 9 1 601 555 2222 1 601 555 2222 E 10222 1 601
385. k synchronization The clock synchronization process generates alarm codes and event messages Clock synchronization is supported by the DTM and BRI module The BCM derives timing from the network using T reference points loops Terminal equipment on S reference points loops derive timing from the BCM system When you configure the network connections to the BCM you should take into account the system preferences for selecting loops for synchronization e lower numbered loops have preference over higher numbered loops e the loop preference order is 201 202 203 204 etc e the system skips S and analog loops when selecting a network connection for synchronization Systems with only S loops act as timing masters for the attached terminal equipment TE and are not synchronized to the network ISDN TE without access to a network connection BRI lines has limited or no functionality If your system has both a BRI S T configured as BRI and a DTM configured as PRI it is recommended that you use PRI as the primary clock source See PRI hardware on page 542 ISDN BRI NT1 equipment The NT1 network termination type 1 connects an S interface four wire to a U interface two wire In most cases it connects loops from a BRI module to the network connection which uses the U interface NN40020 603 Appendix C ISDN overview 545 The NT1 converts and reformats data so it can be transmitted to and from the S or T connection
386. kage for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of incoming calls from remote users or private networks 4 Assign the lines to DNs Assigned DNs tab If you have configured the DNs and know to which telephones the line needs to be assigned you can enter those DNs here The DN record also can be used to assign lines and line pools for these lines Appearance Type Choose Appr only or Appr amp Ring if the telephone has an available button otherwise choose Ring only Model 7000 and 7100 telephones have no programmable buttons so this must be set to Ring only Model 7000 phones supported in Europe only VMsg set When activated an indicator on the telephone appears when a message from a remote voice mail system is waiting Check with your system administrator for the system voice mail setup before changing this parameter Networking Configuration Guide 200 Chapter 20 BRI ISDN BRI T loops NN40020 603 201 Chapter 21 Programming BRI S loops lines and ISDN devices BRI modules support both trunk and station telephone services The following describes the process for configuring station device S loops which support devices that use an ISDN interface You can assign a single device to a loop or multiple devices connected through an NT 1 interface The following paths indicate where to configure loops through Element Manager and through Telset Administration El
387. king 41 342 programming 415 433 remote access 416 removing 416 services 415 telephones 416 restrictions line filter CoS 444 lines 93 retrieving call park 230 273 route programming DN type 261 external 261 private DN 261 public DN 261 Use pool 261 router port settings 377 routing 242 256 call by call routing table 238 call by call services network 344 CbC services routing 344 dedicated trunks for long distance 250 defining multiple routes 243 252 destination codes 255 destination wild card character 251 destinations E amp M networking 340 least cost routing 243 252 local calling 249 long distance access code 242 256 long distance calling 250 MCDN network 310 MCDN private network 310 network example 399 overflow programming 243 252 PRI routing table 255 PSTN fallback 395 public network dialing 254 service E amp M networking 340 service MCDN network 310 tandem networks 44 VoIP trunks 391 S S interface 543 S loop sampling programming 188 S or T reference point 543 S reference point 543 schedule activating VoIP schedule 395 control set 399 destination codes 394 PSTN fallback 395 service setting manual 395 scheduled services automatic dial out 499 SCNFallback 120 security dialing restriction 415 433 IPSec 527 recommendations remote access 424 446 remote access on VoIP trunks 422 432 See ISDN Networking Configuration Guide 566 Index Selective LIne Redirection see SLR 212
388. l Access subpanel The Add Line Pool dialog box appears Enter a line pool the ISDN interface can use to dial out Click OK Modem Dial In Parameters panel The Modem Dial In parameters controls Dial in to the BCM for remote access This panel is used to configure the modem for Dial in It also displays the connection status of the modem if one is in progress The Modem Dial in Parameters panel is shown in Figure 143 If the BCM50 has an integrated router BCM50a or BCM50e see Additional configuration to allow network access functionality on page 517 NN40020 603 Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel 515 Figure 143 Modem Dial In Parameters panel Dial Up Interfaces Dial out Interfaces Global Settings Modem DiaHn Parameters ISDN DiaHn Parameters Enable modem dial in o Allow network access o Connection State User Local IP Address Remote IP Address Callback Status Callback Settings Callback retries 3 Callback retry interval s E Table 116 Modem Dial In Parameters fields Sheet 1 of 3 PPP Configuration DiaHn Settings Idle timeout s 1800 Line Maximum receive unit 500 Calling number 01142793900 Maximum transmission unit 500 Number of rinas 1 Auto disable oO PAP CHAP Auto disable timer min 30 MSCHAP MSCHAPv2 7 Directory Number Local IP Address Specification Remote IP Address Specification Remote assigned go Assign IP address to remote IP add
389. l only DPNSS supports the Universal Dialing Plan UDP an international standard for sending and receiving private numbers over networks The UDP requires that a dialing number include the following e a Private Access Code programmed into the system as part of the destination code table to prevent conflicts with the internal numbering system Access Codes aHome Location Code HLC assigned to each PBX system and configured as part of the destination code a maximum of seven digits For each HLC a destination code must be programmed in the system Configuration Telephony Dialing Plan Private Networking e aDirectory Number DN assigned to each extension as a line appearance The DN appears as the last string segment in a dialed number In the number 244 1111 1111 is the DN A typical Private Number using a private access code and dialed from another site on the network appears below Private Access Home Location Directory Calling Party Code Code Number Number 6 848 2222 6 848 2222 In this networking example a private network is formed when several systems are connected through a Meridian 1 and a terminating BCM system Each site has its own HLC and a range of DNs Figure 11 illustrates this example Table 7 shows examples of the construction of numbers used when dialing within the example network Note that 6 is the Private Access code Table 7 Calling numbers required for DPN
390. l tone and must then enter a CoS password that determines what they are allowed to do in the system e Auto answer T1 loop start and T1 E amp M trunks are configured to answer with DISA by default e T1 DID trunks You cannot configure T1 DID trunks to answer with DISA If you want incoming T1 DID calls to be answered with DISA configure the system with a DISA DN Incoming T1 DID calls that map onto the DISA DN are then routed to a line that has DISA e You cannot program a DISA DN or Auto DN to VoIP trunks because they act as auto answer lines for private networks However you still need to assign remote access packages to the VoIP trunks to ensure that remote access restrictions are properly applied to incoming calls trying to access the system or the system network Also refer to the following information Remote access line settings e Remote access on loop start trunks on page 421 e Remote access on T1 DID and PRI trunks on page 421 e Remote access on DPNSS lines on page 421 e Remote access on a private network on page 422 Remote access line settings The remote access feature allows callers elsewhere on the private or the public network to access your BCM by dialing directly and not going through the attendant After the remote user is in the system they can use some of the system resources You must enable remote access in programming before callers can use it BCM supports remote system access on a n
391. lation Guide NN40010 301 Each BCM has 10 telephones that will be using VoIP lines In this setup only eight calls can be sent or received over the VoIP trunks at one time If all 10 telephones attempt to call at the same time two of the calls will be rerouted to the PSTN or other alternate routes if multiple routing is set up in the destination code schedule System programming for networking and fallback routes Table 81 provides the settings that are required for both systems to create a fallback network Table 81 Fallback configuration to create fallback between two systems Sheet 1 of 2 access to the VoIP line pool Task Settings for Settings for Location in Element Manager Santa Clara Ottawa Set up a Control set for each 3321 2221 Configuration gt Telephony gt VoIP line Sets gt All DNs Set first preferred Codec G 729 Configuration gt Resources gt E Telephony Resources gt Set voice activity detection Selected IP Trunks H 323 Set Jitter Buffer Medium Media Parameters tab Put 8 VoIP lines into the BlocF same line pool Give all system telephones BlocO Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Line Pools Confirm or assign target lines to all DNs or Hunt Groups t Configure the target lines that you assigned targetline gt Control set 3321 Control set 2221 Trunk Line data Line Type Private If busy To prime Prime set DN 3321 Re
392. lds Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description PPP Settings Idle Timeout s 0 36000 The interval after which the ISDN interface disconnects when there is no traffic Default 90 seconds Note A value of 0 makes the connection persistent Maximum Receive Unit lt 128 1500 gt The maximum size of the packets that can be received Default 1500 Maximum Transmit 128 1500 The maximum size of the packets that can be sent Unit Default 1500 NN40020 603 Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel 507 Table 111 ISDN Dial out Interface Link Parameters fields Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description IP Header Compression check box Enable or disable IP header compression Note The feature must be enabled at both ends of the connection Default enabled Software Compression check box Enable or disable software compression When enabled all dial up connections use BSD Scheme for compression Default disabled Access Settings Authentication PAP or CHAP Select the authentication type for the link Default CHAP Dial Out User Name drop down list Enter the username used for authenticating to the remote end To configure the ISDN Link Parameters Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces Click the ISDN interface to configure Click the Link Parameters tab The Link Parameters panel a
393. le to the caller Remote access on T1 DID trunks Remote system access on T1 DID trunks is similar to that of TI E amp M trunks connected to a private network The main differences are e A remote caller is on the public network dialing standard local or long distance telephone numbers The digits received are delivered by the central office e DISA cannot be administered to a T1 DID trunk You can program the dialed digits to match those of a specific target line DN the DISA DN or the Auto DN If you program the dialed digits to the DISA DN only the incoming calls that match the programmed DN will receive a DISA dial tone Incoming calls with other digits will route to a target line NN40020 603 Chapter 53 Call Security Configuring Direct Inward System Access DISA 431 Refer to Configuring lines TI E amp M on page 151 Configuring lines T1 DID on page 169 Remote access on PRI Remote system access on PRI trunks is similar to that of T1 E amp M trunks connected to a private network The main differences are A remote caller is on the public network dialing standard local or long distance telephone numbers The digits received are delivered by the central office Answer with DISA cannot be administered to a PRI trunk Instead you can program the dialed digits to match those of a specific target line DN the DISA DN or the Auto DN North America Use incoming Call by Call CbC Service routing to map
394. led through Element Manager using Feature 9 8 or the Startup Profile If the modem is enabled using the Startup Profile the Auto disable capability is turned off The modem has a Directory Number DN associated with it This DN can be used to redirect a call to the modem A call can be redirected to the modem DN using the F70 Transfer feature from any sets attached to the BCM or it can be redirected to the modem DN using the Auto Attendant feature Any user on the BCM can redirect an active call at their set by using Feature 9 0 if they don t know the modem DN Feature 9 0 will also display the modem DN on any sets with at least 1 line display The modem can also be programmed to answer incoming lines directly after a configurable number of rings Please be aware that most modems are programmed by default to give up on a connection after 60 seconds If the number of rings and the amount of time it takes for the 2 modems to establish a connection take more than 60 seconds the connection will fail If an administrator wants a modem to answer after a longer period than this default timeout the calling modem answer timeout should be changed accordingly Internal calls to the modem will always be answered immediately External calls transferred to the modem will be answered after the number of rings specified on the Modem Dial In Parameters tab This gives enough time to wait and collect caller ID information which will be captured and logged every
395. les to tha SYStOM aiciessscccsecessencessvenstoesssursucnacsvesvicasuesnecae noaei 83 Managing modlleS 2cciseascdecivince sedi ERR ERRRRERE PRAE ERE 87 TOemHe gr disable a BUS MORE TEL DET TT 87 Totun apot channel ON Or Off Pe 87 Lines OVEIVIEW esso xad e pa o eased Y PETGP PYCKRUPRPPS EY 89 Configuring telephony resources 00 eee e ee eee eee eee 101 Configuring WINGS cc icccc ied eescceiewes iececstatenseriesienenss 129 To and a DN record tac line FebO ue iius e RETRO RR ARE eae 139 Configuring lines Target lines leeren 141 Configuring lines PRI 2 2 csescccstcecsserasseiassessacevcannes 145 To configure Call by Call services and the PRI lines eeeseseeeeees 149 Configuring lines TI E amp M 1 2 0 cece eee 151 Configuring lines T1 Loop start 0 00 e eee eee eee 157 To coniigure digital loop start Hoo kk Y rers FE EE CN OPERE C EE FERRE FR C RUD 161 Configuring lines T1 Digital Ground Start LLsue 163 To configure digital Ground Start line features ssssssseseeeeeeene 166 Configuring lines T1 DID 0 20 cece cece eee eee eee 169 To contigube DID line TeQtwt e 172 Configuring lines DASS2 lines 002 cece eee eee eee eee 175 Configuring lines DPNSS lines 200 e eee eee eee eee 181 Networking Configuration Guide 20 List of procedures BRI ISDN BRI loop properties 000 eee ee eee
396. lines that provide Call by Call services Bloc line pools have an additional configuration that allows you to configure service type limitations For information on PRI protocols refer to Table 42 Figure 111 illustrates the Call by Call Limits tab Figure 111 Line Pools Call by Call Limits fields Details for Line Pool Bloc DNs Call by Call Limits all Limits by Service Type Service Type Minimum Incoming Maximum Incoming Minimum Dutgoing Maximum Outgoing d 4 49 NN40020 603 Chapter 41 Dialing plan Line pools and line pool codes 361 Table 78 describes the fields on the Lines tab Table 78 Line Pools Call by Call limits fields Attribute Value Description Service Type lt read only gt This is the type of CbC service provided on the PRI trunks in the line pool Minimum Incoming Default 2 Note The total of the minimum values for Maxi Default 23 incoming or outgoing PRI services cannot exceed SOMIT ONY Seas the total number of lines in the Blocpool Minimum Outgoing Default 4 The maximum value for an incoming or outgoing Maximum Outgoing Default 23 PRI service cannot exceed the total number of lines in the Bloc pool Networking Configuration Guide 362 Chapter 41 Dialing plan Line pools and line pool codes NN40020 603 363 Chapter 42 VoIP overview On the BCM the LAN configuration consists of two components Router LAN con
397. list and click delete to remove from the list Note Second dial tone is not provided on outgoing lines for remote access users and for ISDN terminal users when the Call Transfer feature Is activated NN40020 603 267 Chapter 27 Dialing plan System settings The panels described in the following information define various common system settings that affect or that are affected by number planning The following paths indicate where to access system settings for dialing plans in Element Manager and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt General e Telset interface CONFIG gt System Programming gt Access codes System Programming gt General gt Direct Dial sets Panels Subpanels Tasks Feature notes Common dialing plan settings on page 267 DN length To define a direct dial set on Dialing Time out page 270 e Park code Capabilities tab in the Device Configuration External code Guide NN40020 300 assign Direct dial direct dial set to a telephone Also refer to e Dialing plan Public network on page 275 e Dialing plan Private network settings on page 281 e Dialing plan Line pools and line pool codes on page 357 Configuring CLID on your System on page 205 DN length constraints on page 270 Received number notes on page 271 Tips about access codes on page
398. list must contain an entry for every remote system to which you want to make VoIP call Gatekeeper note If your system is controlled by a gatekeeper you do not need to establish these gateways Refer to VoIP interoperability Gatekeeper configuration on page 389 The following path indicates where to access the remote gateway in Element Manager Element Manager Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources 1 On the Modules panel in the Module type column select IP Trunks In the bottom panel select the Routing Table Click Add The Add Remote Gateway dialog box appears Enter a Name and Destination Digits for the remote gateway Enter the appropriate information for the remote system e Destination IP Indicate the IP address of the device you want to connect with This code will be part of your destination code programming e GW Type Choose the variable that identifies the type of system or application being connected to e GW Protocol Choose the protocol that supplies the required call features None default supplies no feature This setting is dictated by the type of remote system e VoIP Protocol Select signalling to endpoint SIP or H 323 e QoS Monitor Enable this feature if you are using fallback to PSTN lines and the network supports QoS monitoring e Tx Threshold Indicate the level of transmission at which the signal must be maintained If the signal falls below this level the call falls back to
399. ll default to a static IP address You can recover by unplugging the BCM and reconnecting once the DHCP server is available Networking Configuration Guide 452 Chapter 58 Configuring the BCM with a DHCP address NN40020 603 453 Chapter 59 Data networking overview The BCM is a converged voice product and can be connected to virtually any data network to provide Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP support in either a Local Area Network LAN or Wide Area Network W AN environment The BCM is also available with an integrated Broadband Ethernet or ADSL Router which is intended to provide basic data networking and services as well as Virtual Private Network VPN connectivity for small sites Refer to VPN overview on page 525 for more information With the router the BCM can handle all data networking needs including both VoIP and basic IP networking The BCM is also available without a router to provide VoIP capabilities to networks that already have an existing IP network What is data networking On the BCM data networking refers to both standard IP data networks as well as VoIP These two types of networks are closely intertwined and connect a wide range of IP devices including IP telephones and computers with the BCM and with external networks The BCM with router can also handle all routing requirements For more information about setting up networks see System telephony networking overview on page
400. ll require the MCDN and IP telephony software keys and compatible dialing plans on all networked systems The one difference between MCDN over PRI and MCDN over VoIP is that the VoIP trunks require specific Remote Gateway settings unless there is a Gatekeeper configured to route traffic on the IP network You must also ensure that your PSTN fallback line is a PRI SL 1 line to maintain MCDN features on the network Refer to Figure 99 for an example Networking Configuration Guide 312 Chapter 32 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP Figure 99 M1 to BCM network diagram Head Office Warehouse M1 IPT Meridian I BCM50 telephone PSTN fallback route C telephone Intranet VoIP trunk Feder Router Company server 2004 9 IP telephone To set up the M1 in a BCM network 1 Make sure the M1 IPT meets the following requirement e IPT version 3 0 or newer 2 Ensure that the M1 ESN programming CDP UDP is compatible For information about this refer to your M1 documentation 3 Onthe BCM Element Manager e Set up outgoing call configuration for the VoIP gateway e Set up a remote gateway for the Meridian 1 Ensure the dialing rules CDP or UDP are compatible with the M1 e Configure the PSTN fallback and enable QoS on both systems e If target lines have not already been set up configure the telephones to receive incoming calls through target li
401. loops lines and ISDN devices 203 Figure 64 ISDN DN record overview Prerequisites Ensure that the following prerequisites checklist is complete before configuring the devices BRI module installation and configuration is complete Refer to Trunk Module Parameters on page 104 BRI loops programming is complete Refer to Setting BRI properties for ISDN device connections on page 201 Lines are provisioned and configured Refer to Provisioning module lines loops on page 112 Wiring and network connections for the devices are complete Networking Configuration Guide 204 Chapter 21 Programming BRI S loops lines and ISDN devices Configuring an ISDN telephone DN record On each panel on the DNs list add or modify settings to customize the telephone operations The following headings correspond to each panel Refer to the Programming notes in each section for configurations that are unique or specific for ISDN telephones Table 36 ISDN device specific DN record settings Affected field Setting Panel name and link to common procedures Name Unique to each device or System DNs Line Access tab in the Device device loop Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Call forward Not supported Line appearances Ring only Line Assignment and Line Pools in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Answer DNs Ring only Intercom keys The following settings Pa
402. lts e Each entry consists of an equal access identifier code prefix one to six digits and a carrier identification code length one digit 1 to 9 e Each entry is identified by the prefix digits themselves Networking Configuration Guide 280 Chapter 28 Dialing plan Public network Table 54 describes each field on this panel Table 54 Carrier Code values Attribute Values Description Code Prefix one to six digits This value defines the prefix that will be used to access the Read only carrier code ID Length 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 or 9 This value defines the carrier ID length Adding a carrier code 1 Click Add 2 Enter the required code and ID Code Prefix ID length 3 Click Save Modifying a carrier code 1 Click the line for the Carrier Code where you want to change information 2 Click the field that you want to change and enter the new value Deleting a carrier code 1 Click the line for the carrier code that you want to delete 2 Click Delete 3 Click OK NN40020 603 Chapter 29 Dialing plan Private network settings The panels described in the following information define various system settings that affect or that are affected by number planning for private networks The following paths indicate where to access the dialing plan for private networks in Element Manager and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt
403. ly a 911 route to an IP telephone that is off the premises where the PSAP is connected to the system 2 way DID With PRI the same lines can be used for receiving direct inward dialing DID and for making direct outward dialing DOD calls The dialing plan configured by your customer service representative determines how calls are routed Consult your customer service representative to determine whether or not this feature is compatible with your service provider Dialing plan and PRI The Dialing Plan supports PRI connectivity to public and private networks The dialing plan is a collection of features responsible for processing and routing incoming and outgoing calls All PRI calls must go through a dialing plan Notes about the dialing plan Networking Configuration Guide 542 Appendix C ISDN overview e allows incoming calls to be routed to sets based on service type and digits received e provides the ability to map user dialed digits to a service type on a Call by Call basis e allows long distance carrier selection through user dialed Carrier Access Codes Consult your customer service representative to determine how your dialing plan is configured ISDN hardware To support connections to an ISDN network and ISDN terminal equipment your BCM must be equipped with a BRI S T Media Bay Module BRIM or a Digital Trunk Media Bay Module DTM card configured for PRI Refer to the following for a description of the BRI and
404. m DN Control DN for the loop This DN must be on the Assigned DNs list Assigned DNs table DN system DN ISDN assigned to the loop up to eight devices Actions Add 1 In the top frame click the loop where you want to add DN records 2 In the bottom frame click Add 3 Enter the DN record number 4 Click OK 5 Repeat for all the DN records you want to assign Delete 1 In the top frame click the loop where you want to delete DN record assignments 2 In the bottom frame click the DN record you want to delete 3 Click Delete 4 Click OK NN40020 603 195 Chapter 20 BRI ISDN BRI T loops BRI modules support both trunk and station telephone services The following describes the process for configuring trunk T loops Task Configure BRI T loops Configuring BRI T loop parameters on page 197 Prerequisites Complete the following prerequisites checklist before configuring the modules Ensure that system hardware is installed and operating correctly Obtain all relevant central office service provider information for the loops BRI module is installed and operating LEDs are correct Process overview Figure 63 shows the process for configuring BRI loops Networking Configuration Guide 196 Chapter 20 BRI ISDN BRI T loops Figure 63 BRI loops configuration process Assign DNs to 8 loops NN40020 603 Chapter 20 BRI ISDN BRI T loops
405. m dial tone To bypass the restriction filters on a telephone 1 Press FEATURE 68 2 Enter the six digit CoS password that allows the required type of call 3 Enter the number to be dialed Example Remote access over the public network bypassing the restrictions on a telephone To use the system at a distance you must use a telephone with tone dialing to call the system Remote access is possible only on lines that your installer programs to auto answer calls To use paging on a remote system press followed by the feature code When you are calling from within BCM press instead of FEATURE In some conditions you can experience lower volume levels when using the system from a distance External access tones You can hear some of the following tones when accessing BCM from a remote location Table 93 shows the different types of tone and what they mean Table 93 External access tones Sheet 1 of 2 Tone What it means System dial tone You can use the system without entering a CoS password Stuttered dialtone Enter your CoS password Busy tone You have dialed a busy line pool access code You hear system dial tone again after 5 seconds Networking Configuration Guide 448 Chapter 56 Configuring CoS passwords for remote access Table 93 External access tones Sheet 2 of 2 Fast busy tone You have done one of the following e Entered an incorrect CoS password Your call disconnects after five seconds
406. ming international 011 or special case dial string 911 411 and designates the call as a special type call 9011 9911 9411 Incoming and tandem calls Also refer to Dialing plan Routing and destination codes on page 259 Network ICCL check box ISDN Call Connection Limitation is part of the call initiation request This feature acts as a check at transit PBX points to prevent misconfigured routes or calls with errors from blocking channels TRO check box Trunk Route Optimization occurs during the call setup This feature finds the most direct route through the network to send a call between nodes TAT check box Trunk anti tromboning works during an active call to find the optimum routing These features require compatible programming on the remote system VoIP specific private network dialing The features contained in the VoIP subpanel are required for installations like the Survivable Remote Gateway SRG where the remote call server requires bandwidth management to handle calls Figure 90 illustrates the VoIP panel Figure 90 VoIP special dialing plan settings VoIP Virtual Private Network ID 8 Zone ID o Use Table 57 to determine the settings you want to define network services feature availability Table 57 VolP special dialing plan values Attribute Values Description Networking Configuration Guide 286 Chap
407. minimum and maximum since the necessary VDI resources will always be available The only resource you need to manage is DSP which is used by media gateways voice mail and Call Centre Fax and Conferencing Networking Configuration Guide 74 Chapter 4 Application Resources overview Setting values for application resources For all applications you can modify the minimum and maximum values The minimum values reflect the number of resources that will always be reserved for a particular application while the maximum reflects the maximum instances of an application the system will allow at once If an application attempts to use system resources and the system is already supporting the maximum for that application the service will be declined regardless of whether there are sufficient resources available A value of MAX is also acceptable which sets the maximum number of applications allowed to the maximum number possible For example the System Maximum for Media Gateways is 80 If the Maximum value for Media Gateways is set to MAX then the system allows up to 80 Media Gateways at once as long as sufficient resources are available Changes pending In some cases a change you make to the application resources panel may not be able to take effect immediately For example if you change the number of conference calls allowed from three to two while there are three calls in progress the resource allocations will not change until afte
408. ministrator for information about network setup and how the BCM fits into the network SIP Proxy A SIP Entity that receives requests and sends them on to another proxy or to their final destination A Proxy uses the information retrieved from the Location Service in order to find an alias or an actual destination address for the request Alternatively a Proxy can be statically configured in which case registration is not necessary IP Network WAN A Wide Area Network WAN is a communications network that covers a wide geographic area such as state or country For CallPilot a WAN is any IP network connected to a WAN card on the CallPilot system This can also be a direct connection to another CallPilot system If you want to deploy IP telephones that will be connected to a LAN outside of the LAN that the BCM is installed on you must ensure the BCM has a WAN connection This includes ensuring that you obtain IP addresses and routing information that allows the remote telephones to find the BCM and vice versa NN40020 603 Chapter 42 VoIP overview 365 LAN A Local Area Network LAN is a communications network that serves users within a confined geographical area For BCM a LAN is any IP network connected on the BCM system Often the LAN can include a router that forms a connection to the Internet A BCM can have up to two LAN connections Key VoIP concepts The following explains a few commonly used VoIP terms QoS
409. mmediate not appear for T1 E amp M or T1 DID trunks connected to a DTM if the Dial mode is set to tone DelayDial f Make sure that this matches the signal type programmed for the trunk at the other switch Link at CO Loop analog lt check box gt Preferences lines Some exchanges respond to a Link signal also called hook flash FEATURE 71 by providing an alternative line for making outgoing calls Enabling Link at CO causes the system to apply the restrictions on outgoing calls to the digits dialed after the Link signal As well the call on the alternative line is subject to all restrictions Disabling Link at CO prevents a Link signal from resetting the BCM restrictions in cases where the host exchange does not provide an alternative line The Preferences tab shows information that may vary from trunk to trunk Most of this information needs to coordinate with the line service provider equipment The Preferences tab is shown in Figure 37 NN40020 603 Chapter 10 Configuring lines 135 Figure 37 Preferences details panel Details for Line 061 Ci Properties Preferences Restrictions Assigned DNs Auto privacy v Full autohold go Aux ringer go Distinct rings in use Answer mode Manual v Voice message center Redirect to m Table 29 defines the fields on this panel and indicates the lines Table 29 Preferences details fields for lines Sheet 1 o
410. mp M E amp M lines must be digital T1 The following paths indicate where to access the E amp M lines in Element Manager and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines e Telset interface CONFIG gt Lines Task Configure TI E amp M lines connected to the system Configuring E amp M line features on page 155 Prerequisites Complete the following prerequisites checklist before configuring the modules DTM module Installed and configured Refer to Trunk Module Parameters on page 104 Lines are provisioned Refer to Provisioning module lines loops on page 112 Process map Figure 44 Figure 45 and Figure 46 provide an overview for configuring the line features for T1 E amp M lines Networking Configuration Guide 152 Chapter 13 Configuring lines T1 E amp M Figure 44 T1 E amp M line configuration process Part A il E nm i NN40020 603 Chapter 13 Configuring lines T1 E amp M 153 Figure 45 T1 E amp M line configuration process Part B Properties screen E Preferences tab z LE Networking Configuration Guide 154 Chapter 13 Configuring lines T1 E amp M Figure 46 T1 E amp M line configuration process Part C NN40020 603 Chapter 13 Configuring lines T1 E amp M 155 Configurin
411. ms running the PBX telephony template the Private and Public Received length default to 3 unless the DN length is changed during the Startup procedure These digits identify target lines Processing incoming calls on page 225 Auto DNs and DISA DNs The received number can be shorter if network or central office constraints require this This number cannot be greater than the system DN length on a networked system using a coordinated dialing plan CDP or a universal dialing plan UDP On a standalone system it is possible that the received number length would be greater than the DN length Warning Decreasing the received number length clears all programmed received digits A that are longer than the new settings Processing incoming calls The system processes a call in the following way 1 The system receives a call from the public or private network 2 The system identifies the call type Public calls e If the call is from the MCDN network and is a local national or special call type the system prepends the appropriate access code Networking Configuration Guide 226 Chapter 24 Dialing plans e Ifthe call is from ETSI QSIG MCDN NI DMS 100 or DMS 250 and tagged as Private Subscriber the system prepends the Private access code if the dialing plan is UDP e Ifthe call is tagged as Unknown Unknown or Private Unknown ETSI QSIG MCDN N1 DMS 100 or DMS 250 trunks no access code is added e For all ot
412. n create a unique destination code for the call you want to route Networking Configuration Guide 242 Chapter 24 Dialing plans Example If users are used to dialing 9 1 555 1234 DN numbers to reach another system whose DN codes start with 6 you create a destination code of 915551236A using the VoIP line pools users dial the destination code plus the DN of the telephone they want to reach on the other system The letter A at the end of the code represents any number from 0 to 9 which is not used by any other destination code If you need to use PSTN lines for a specific connection on the other system you can create a destination code specific to that destination number and attach it to the route set up with the PSTN line pool for example 915551236333 6333 being the DN of the device on the other system When the user dials that specific number the call will always go over the PSTN line Note that by entering this code users dialing with the code in the previous paragraph could never dial any DN that started with 63XX e Ifyou want to use VoIP lines as your main lines but you want to program one or more PSTN lines as fallback lines you need to configure the routing and routing schedules so that the user dials the same number regardless of which routes get used You use the external number dialout string and absorb digits fields under the schedules in Destination code programming for this purpose e Ifacompany wants to use V
413. n to other lines in the system Public line can be accessed by more than one telephone Private line can be assigned only to one telephone and the prime telephone for that line Enter the internal number of the telephone e Pool A O digital lines and BRI BlocA to BlocF PRI and VoIP lines assigns the line to one of the line pools If a line is assigned to a line pool but is not assigned to any telephone that line is available only for outgoing calls Bloc line pools must be used in conjunction with routes and destination codes Target lines cannot be put into line pools Networking Configuration Guide 132 Chapter 10 Configuring lines Table 27 Trunk Line Data main panel Sheet 2 of 2 Target lines only Attribute Value Description Prime set DN Assign a telephone to provide backup answering for calls None on the line For an Auto Answer line calls are redirected if the received number is invalid or the target line is busy and if the If busy parameter is set To prime Each line can be assigned only one prime telephone Pub digits associated with a Specify the digits the system will use to identify a call from Received specific target line the public network to this target line Areceived number cannot be the same as or be the start digits of a line pool access code a destination code the DISA DN or the Auto DN e f you are configuring auto answer BRI trunks to map to target
414. ncoming interface Intercom DN type public Destination Remote PSTN Node C receives the call and identifies it as being for the public network Node C routes the call over the local public network Incoming interface Private DN type Public Destination Local PSTN Node B Calgary PSTN User on Node B dials a public DN Node B recognizes it as being the responsibility of Node A and uses private trunk to route the call to A Incoming interface Intercom Destination Remote node Node A receives the call and identifies it as being for the public network Node A routes the call over the local public network Incoming interface Private Destination Remote PSTN NN40020 603 Chapter 35 Private networking PRI and VoIP tandem networks 327 Table 70 Calls originating from the private network within a tandem network Continued Sheet 2 of 2 Received Destination Description Node B Node A User in Node B dials a private DN for a user on A DN type Private Node B recognizes it as being for Node A Uses the private trunk to route the call the call to A Incoming interface Intercom Destination Remote node Node B receives the call and identifies it as terminating locally Uses target line to route call Private received Incoming interface Private Destination Local target line Node B Node C User on Node B dials a private DN for a user on C DN type Private
415. nd an ESN Each node has its own ESN e CDP Coordinated Dialing Plan DNs on all nodes are dialed directly Ensure the following common programming is configured e BCM Programming Configure the system DN length to match the DN length used in the rest of the private network Program the private Route Type Private Dial None Program the public Route Type Public Dial None Enable the MCDN Supplementary Services TRO selected ICCL selected TAT selected Program telephones with a target line that specifies the system DN of the telephone in the Private received number field Note If you have public DNs set up for your telephones that are different from the system assigned DN each telephone needs to use the public and private received digits on the target line e Meridian 1 Programming Program the system PNI and the PNIs for the routes Program the Meridian voice mailboxes if required Enable the MCDN Supplementary Services RCAP ND2 TRO MWI NASA YES Set up the specific programming the system requires for the dialing plan Refer to the following tables Networking Configuration Guide 304 Chapter 32 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP UDP specific programming BCM UDP programming Private Dialing Plan Type UDP HomeLoc three digit prefix gt e Private Access Code lt unique code gt Private DN length lt total of Private Access Code
416. nd speed than analog transmission because of its end to end digital connectivity on all transmission circuits Being digital allows ISDN lines to provide better quality signaling than analog POTS lines and ISDN out of band data channel signaling offers faster call set up and tear down While an analog line carries only a single transmission at a time an ISDN line can carry one or more voice data fax and video transmissions simultaneously An analog modem operating at 14 4K takes about 4 5 minutes to transfer a 1MB data file and a 28 8K modem takes about half that time Using one channel of an ISDN line the transfer time is reduced to only 1 minute and if two ISDN channels are used transfer time is just 30 seconds When transmitting data the connect time for an average ISDN call is about three seconds per call compared to about 21 seconds for the average analog modem call Types of ISDN service Two types of ISDN services lines are available Basic Rate Interface BRI and Primary Rate Interface PRI Each line is made up of separate channels known as B and D channels which transmit information simultaneously e BRIis known as 2B D because it consists of two B channels and one D channel e PRI is known as 23B D in North America or as 30B D in Europe In North America 23B D consists of 23 B channels and one D channel T1 carrier In Europe 30B D consists of 30 B channels and one D channel E1 carrier B channels B channels a
417. ne telephone Large Actions Reset Hotdesking Click this button to reset the hotdesking password for a telephone See the Device password Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Force Firmware This button downloads the firmware from the system to the selected telephone See the Download Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Deregister Click this button to deregister the selected telephone See the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Voice over IP trunks The following tabbed panels appear when you select a VoIP trunk entry on the Telephony Resources panel See the following topics for a description of each tabbed panel and their fields e Routing table on page 116 e H323 Settings on page 118 e H323 Media Parameters on page 122 Networking Configuration Guide 116 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources e SIP Settings on page 125 e SIP Media Parameters on page 126 e SIP URI Map on page 127 Routing table Both H 323 and SIP trunks are automatically assigned to line pool BlocA The decision about whether a given call is through SIP or H 323 is made from the information in the Routing Table Calls can be routed directly from entries in the Routing Table or can use the services of a redirect proxy or gatekeeper Note If BCM has keycodes for H323 and SIP check the BCM DNS configuration to prevent issues in enabling VoIP trunks in H323 or SIP protocols Figure 29 Routing Table Details
418. nes MCDN functionality on fallback PRI lines To enable MCDN functionality over PRI fallback lines e Check MCDN PRI settings on the M1 For information on this refer to the M1 documentation Ensure SL 1 MCDN keycodes are entered on the BCM and the PRI line is set up for SL 1 protocol NN40020 603 Chapter 32 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP 313 For a detailed description of setting up fallback refer to Setting up VoIP trunks for fallback on page 391 Networking with ETSI QSIG International systems only ETSI QSIG is the European standard signaling protocol for multi vendor peer to peer communications between PBX systems and or central offices Also refer to Configuring ETSI Euro network services on page 321 Figure 100 illustrates an ETSI QSIG network Note that this is exactly the same setup as that shown in the MCDN section for North America in An example of a private network with Meridian 1 on page 307 which describes PRI SL 1 networking The exception in the configuration is for the hardware configuration because the trunk lines are different The hardware programming for ETSI QSIG is described below the following diagram All other configurations are the same as those shown in the MCDN section for North America in Using MCDN to network with a Meridian system on page 297 Note Features for ETSI Q sig are basic compared to MCDN Only z basic call and calling number is supported as oppos
419. nes available aio sce 9 eRIRER Ed RRG RO RA EK ERR COCER E RC RE Eds 98 WEIN Galle TEL T LT T 99 Outaolhg Calls 2s ccccaesadeen I RR ARR XE XPEceSASSNeRR ER uq edd 99 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources 200 e eee eee eee 101 Telephony Resources table ccc cdaciabid aude ER Reads QE beens eee Sais 102 Media bay module panels sivi xb LSRRGG oehes Pau e Goh PRESA GN eR d PEREEVUAS 104 Trunk Module Parameters cuu ieee rece Seeks ake dol retann aai 104 Call by Call Service Selection liliis 108 POROUS 44 eal pb RUE ERE XE RRARERPGRI ERES CEN E EE 110 Provisioning module lines loops 0 0c e eee II 112 IP telephones aus ssur ee he eee renias eieae s eR RS Rae Lo Rd E ed wes 112 IP Terminal Global Setngs cu cuussss ce bad o ooo n tee P ld 113 IP telephone set detalle uasa asas x xa p doa cadens URGE bw pew bors Rp Rod 114 Voie over IP MUNKS uasa S34 RRERPRPITQIOOCOREGe xay c 340 93 RY SE SGD SESS 115 PoU TANS oire EE ENE EF da rd a N R E unb di BUM NE 116 Hao Sene 5 cob ac hese eee Shee dae en ese wee okey SEAR 4 c E 3e 118 H323 Media Parameters V VoL bade canes baw ee Bode ochre wae Y P ARR eRe sd 122 SIP SUNOS sdsamontoigxeddKdsbbelsies3mG da Wd X RC dw di ed ERR 125 SIP Maia Params c lt 8cteseciee Gi kh coepere km eq idae e eo E ehm 126 oP URNA m TT 127 Chapter 10 Configuring liis oio seis iens paetuashen uBhsca shbcziense 129 Tink Line data main panel 22 2riiaac eere Rep RRRRU RI EROR RE cade 13
420. nes or trunks This designation includes e circuit switched lines PSTN connect to the system through media bay modules e Voice over IP VoIP trunks connect through the LAN or IP network e target lines internal channels connect PRI T1 and VoIP trunks to specific devices e intercom lines connect all internal telephones together through the DN numbers and allow the user to access line pools for making outgoing calls as well as being required for other call features such as conference calling and system wide call appearance SWCA calls Intercom designations are assigned in the DN record or automatically by the system for each telephone Prerequisites You must configure the media bay modules and or the VoIP trunk parameters before you can set up line programming The position on the system bus of the trunk media bay modules determines the line numbers that are available See the Installation and Maintenance Guide NN40020 302 The position on the system bus of the station media bay modules determines which DNs are available although DN numbers can be changed e Available VoIP lines are determined by the number of VoIP keycodes entered on the system between 01 and 12 starting with line 001 and ending at line 012 See the following information e Understanding how the system identifies lines on page 90 e Line record on page 93 Line Job Aids on page 94 Other line configuration options or requirements e BRI
421. nfiguration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources gt IP Trunks H323 Settings Remote Capability MWI select if M1 has MWI package with RCAP set to MWI Turning on the service for IP trunks Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources gt IP Trunks gt H323 Settings Remote Capability MWI select if M1 has MWI package with RCAP set to MWI Telset admin Telco features VMsg Ctr Tel Numbers e Voice Message Center 1 set to destination code plus M1 voice mail DN 1 Disable the PBX D channel associated with IPT LD96 2 Add MWI to the RCAP of the D channel LD 17 RCAP MWI 3 Ensure the RLS ID is a minimum of 25 RLS ID 25 4 Re enabled the PBX D channel Note Package 219 is required on the Meridian PBX to allow RCAP MWI Note If IP routing is being used you must complete this procedure on all the D channels in the private network Lines target line Telco features Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt All Lines gt choose a target line to see the Voice message Center 1 feature under the Preferences tab Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active sets gt Line access gt Line assignment assign target line to each set e in target line select VMsg NN40020 603 Chapter 32 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP 301 Camp on A call received by the Meridian attendant can be assigned to a telephone anywhere in the MC
422. nfiguring lines Target lines on page 141 Prime set If you want the line to be answered at another telephone if the line is not answered at the target telephone otherwise choose None Pub Received Not applicable Priv Received Not applicable Distinct ring If you want this line to have a special ring indicate a pattern 2 3 4 or None Restrictions tab Use remote package If this line is used for remote call ins or is part of a private network ensure you specify a valid package 2 Configure the trunk line data Properties tab Auto privacy If you activate this feature the line is available only to the telephone that answers the call Dial mode The line service will dictate whether this needs to be set to Pulse or Tone DTMF dialing Answer mode Answer with DISA If this line is used for remote call ins determine how you want the line to answer automatically or requiring more user input If the answer mode is set to Automatic decide whether the caller will be immediately connected to the system or whether a stuttered dial tone will require the caller to enter a CoS password Aux ringer If your system is equipped with an external ringer you can enable this setting to allow this line to ring at the external ringer Redirect to If you want to automatically direct calls out of the system to a specific telephone such as a headoffice answer attendant enter that remote number here Ensure that you include the
423. nfiguring telephony resources on page 101 Managing modules on page 87 Module configuration Trunk modules on page 81 Configuring VoIP trunk gateways on page 381 VoIP interoperability Gatekeeper configuration on page 389 Setting up VoIP trunks for fallback on page 391 NN40020 603 Chapter 3 Telephony programming Configuring call traffic 65 Line configuration target line configuration BRIISDN BRI loop properties on page 187 BRI ISDN BRI T loops on page 195 Programming BRI S loops lines and ISDN devices on page 201 Configuring BRI lines on page 197 Configuring lines on page 129 Configuring lines T1 Loop start on page 157 Configuring lines T1 E amp M on page 151 Configuring lines T1 Digital Ground Start on page 163 Configuring lines T1 DID on page 169 Configuring lines PRI on page 145 Configuring VoIP lines on page 385 Configuring lines DPNSS lines on page 181 Configuring lines Target lines on page 141 Call Security Configuring Direct Inward System Access DISA on page 427 Networking private and public Public networking Setting up basic systems on page 289 Public networking Tandem calls from private node on page 293 Private networking Basic parameters on page 315 Private networking MCDN and ETSI network features on page 31
424. ng telephony 213 lines 131 network display 539 remote gateway 385 name display calling party 211 network 211 selective line redirection 212 name display alpha tagging 212 NAT network address translation IPSec restriction 528 NAT network prerequisites 466 national e 164 outgoing calls 223 279 national access code 285 MCDN 285 National ISDN standards 545 Netmask network prerequisites 465 network autodial access 249 devices prerequisites 466 dial out digits 249 locations prerequisites 465 port settings 377 private systems to BCM 37 294 public network to BCM 37 294 TI E amp M 40 339 network call by call service network 42 343 ETSI QSIG 50 313 MCDN 308 networking 40 339 network call redirection information NCRI MCDN 46 319 network diversion ETSI network 322 network name display 539 calling party name 212 General heading 211 selective line redirection SLR 212 networking advice of charge end of call AOCE feature 52 32 Business Communications Manager prerequisites 467 destination code 340 DPNSS 1 52 features 53 DPNSS 1 three party service 54 DPNSS connected to Embark 53 332 E amp M remote access 340 E amp M routing destinations 340 E amp M routing service 340 ETSI QSIG 50 313 ETSI QSIG services 51 321 external 340 keycodes 38 315 malicious call identification MCID 322 MCDN Networking Configuration Guide 562 Index private networking 297 MCDN check list
425. ng or modifying a CoS password values lues 444 External access TONGS ua i244 EUR eee 65 PRS CEEberqERPi4 ERO heeded 447 Chapter 57 LN OVGIieW occ oE cee Sot SREN EAR AE PRSE aurea E RN E 449 Whats LAN Vos ad to EXOR4 up DR phe PG pe beeee ener tar er pud d d dx Rm 449 LAN SOUS duc GRE 55 OER ORE es o Wl RR Nl C C RR CR REA WU 449 DACP Conti REID uus dud coxa secca ea ios Wiles EC dor Peces x a ted Qe E don 449 Chapter 58 Configuring the BCM with a DHCP address sse 451 Chapter 59 Data networking overview 00 00 cece eee eee eee hs 453 What is data WORN So oe nat bath oe ERR ERE Each don Ma aai o wo E 453 About the BCM VoIP capability i i sisccee ce RR m yx 453 NETWVOM VORGIUENT depduce dep RA METER ERE GOR ORLGUEUR ON UCA Au ERROR RUP OR LAMP UR d 4538 Configuring the BCM with data networks 00 cece eee 453 Chapter 60 Duc roi EMT 455 Main panel tabs General settings liliis 455 IP Settings CDI o odii s dor eae C c See Ue OR bI Swen en OS 455 DNS Selings Ibo user Rice deca dida PER eater ees CESSES eke deed 456 Networking Configuration Guide 14 Contents MIL GON Cb dS E RC NO ea or e Ee RR ashe beady bdo e dun 456 Main panel tabs Internal subnets 00 nuana eee eee eee 458 Internal Subnet settings 2 06 ce wee ee ee mox R9 ORAE ERR Rr RR 458 Internal Subnet Details 0 000 eee 459 Main panel tabs Dial out Static Routes
426. ng tab e Loops provides configuration for general loop settings Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view Panel tabs Tasks Configure loop type and general ONN blocking parameters on page 188 T loop general settings on Provisioning module lines loops on page 112 page 189 Configuring lines on page 129 Configuring lines T1 Loop start on page 157 T loop SPIDS and network DNs on BRI ISDN BRI T loops on page 195 page 190 S loops assigned DNs on Programming BRI S loops lines and ISDN page 193 devices on page 201 DN records parameters in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 T loops D packet service on page 192 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about user management You can define BRI loops as either T loops for connecting to ISDN trunks or S loops for connecting to internal ISDN equipment Both types of loops are displayed in the top frame in the Loop Parameters panel In the bottom frame the settings displayed are specific to each type of loop Networking Configuration Guide 188 Chapter 19 BRI ISDN BRI loop properties Configure loop type and general parameters The Loops table displays the BRI loops for an installed module and the settings that are common to both T loops and S loops Figure 58 illustrates the Loops table Figure 58 Loops table Loops ONN Blocking Suppression bi
427. ngs on page 267 Dialing plan Public network on page 275 Dialing plan Private network settings on page 281 Dialing plan Routing and destination codes on page 259 NN40020 603 Chapter 18 Configuring lines DPNSS lines 185 Networking Public networking Tandem calls from private node on page 293 Private networking Using destination codes on page 339 Private networking DPNSS network services UK only on page 331 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP on page 297 Networking Configuration Guide 186 Chapter 18 Configuring lines DPNSS lines NN40020 603 187 Chapter 19 BRI ISDN BRI loop properties The Loops tables display settings for installed BRI modules The BCM50b BCM50ba and BCM50be models include an integrated BRI module which equips the system with two T loops The T loops can be changed to S loops depending on your system requirements The default loops are 301 and 302 Physical lines 061 064 are always assigned to the BRI cNIC Refer to the BCM50 2 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide NN40020 302 for more information on the BCM50 integrated BRI models The following paths indicate where to access the loops table for BRI modules in Element Manager and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration Telephony Loops e Telset interface CONFIG gt Hardware gt Module gt TrunkMod gt BRI X gt Loop XXX This panel contains the followi
428. nks between some or all of the nodes The setup is the same except that you need to create gateway records for each end of the trunk and routing tables to accommodate the gateway codes or you can configure a gatekeeper Refer to VoIP interoperability Gatekeeper configuration on page 389 Networking Configuration Guide 44 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview Routing for tandem networks In tandem networks each node needs to know how to route calls that do not terminate locally To do this you set up routes for each connecting node by defining destination codes for each route If the node is also connected to the public network the usual routing is required for that connection The following tables show the routing tables for Node A and Node C for external and internal terminating calls Note The PRI and VoIP trunks are en bloc dialing lines so all dialed digits are collected before being dialed out NN40020 603 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview 45 Table 1 Node A destination code table external termination Route Absorb length Destination code public DNs 4 PSTN 1 91604 3 Node B 0 91403762 Node B 3 Node B 0 91403765 Node E 4 PSTN 1 9140376 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 914037 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 91403 not internal network 4 PSTN 1 9 not internal network This wild card represents a single digit Table 2 Node
429. nstaller privileges See the Administration Guide NN40020 600 for information on accounts and privileges Global password 10 alphanumeric X If the Enable global registration password check box is selected Default bcmi 2264 enter the password the installer will enter on the IP telephone to connect to the system If this field is left blank no password prompt occurs during registration Auto Assign DN lt check box gt If selected the system assigns an available DN as an IP terminal requests registration It does not prompt the installer to enter a set DN Note For this feature to work Registration must be selected If not selected the installer receives a prompt to enter the assigned DN during the programming session Advertisement Logo lt alphanumeric Any information in this field appears on the display of all IP string gt telephones For example your company name or slogan Networking Configuration Guide 114 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources Table 19 IP terminal Global panel fields Sheet 2 of 2 Field Value Description Default Codec Auto If the IP telephone has not been configured with a preferred codec G 711 aLaw choose a specific codec that the IP telephone will use when it connects to the system G 711 uLaw G 729 If you choose Auto the system will select the most appropriate Codec when the IP telephone is on a call G723 If you are unsure about applying a
430. nswer T1 E amp M trunks can be answered with or without DISA These DNs are described in Dialing plan Private network settings on page 281 Answer with DISA cannot be administered to a PRI trunk Instead you can program the dialed digits to match those of a specific target line DN the DISA DN or the Auto DN on the other system Answer with DISA cannot be administer to voice over IP VoIP since they do not connect systems outside the private network However a user calling in remotely on another system on the network can use the trunk to access the system or a user calling in on a PSTN line can use the trunk to access the private network To provide control for this type of access ensure that you specify remote access packages for the trunk This type of call is called a tandem call Other programming Call security Remote access packages on page 439 Configuring CoS passwords for remote access on page 443 NN40020 603 433 Chapter 54 Call security Restriction filters The following describes the panels that are used to enter restriction filters and restriction overrides You can have a maximum of 100 restriction filters on the system The following paths indicate where to access restriction filter settings in Element Manager and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration Telephony Call Security Restriction Filters Telset Interface CONFIG Terminals and Sets or CO
431. nt to add a DN record In the bottom frame click Add Enter the DN record number and line settings DN e Appearance Type e Appearances target lines only e Caller ID Set for display sets and ASM8 e VMsg Set Click OK Repeat for all the DN records you want to assign Networking Configuration Guide 140 Chapter 10 Configuring lines NN40020 603 141 Chapter 11 Configuring lines Target lines Target lines are virtual lines that allow the mapping of received digits to a line number over PRI channel The following paths indicate where to access target lines in Element Manager and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines e Telset interface CONFIG gt Lines Task Configure Target lines and DASS2 line settings e Configuring Target line settings on page 144 Prerequisites Complete the following prerequisites checklist before configuring the modules Ensure that external number is mapped to internal received number if required Have a list of DNs where the target lines will get assigned For features that require target lines e Configure lines into line pools Refer to Trunk Module Parameters on page 104 e Routing and destination codes Refer to Dialing plan Routing and destination codes on page 259 Setup VoIP fallback Refer to Setting up VoIP trunks for fallback on page 391 Process m
432. ntain compatibility with existing bridges and end stations e Ifall bridge ports are configured to transmit and receive untagged frames bridges will work in plug and play ISO IEC 15802 3 mode End stations are able to communicate throughout the Bridged LAN Choosing DHCP for VLAN By using the BCM DHCP server you can configure DHCP to auto assign a VLAN ID to each IP telephone that registers With this configuration you can also choose to manually enter VLAN IDs if you choose The BCM DHCP server becomes the default VLAN that everyone can reach The server provides the network configuration information in the default VLAN and it also provides the VLAN information for the network Networking Configuration Guide 474 Chapter 64 VLAN overview Specifying the site specific options for VLAN The BCM DHCP server resides in the default VLAN and is configured to supply the VLAN information to the IP phones The DHCP server supplies site specific options in the DHCP offer message The following definition describes the Nortel IP Phone 2004 specific site specific option This option uses the reserved for site specific use DHCP options DHCP option values 128 to 254 and must be returned by the DHCP server as part of each DHCP OFFER and ACK message for the IP Phone 2004 to accept these messages as valid The IP Phone 2004 pulls the relevant information out of this option and uses it to configure the IP phone Format of field is Type Lengt
433. ntercom button You can enter a line pool access code or a destination code followed by the telephone number to direct the outgoing call where it exits the system on any available line in that pool Networking Configuration Guide 100 Chapter 8 Lines overview NN40020 603 101 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources The Telephony Resources panel allows you to view and configure the information for the modules that support the digital analog ISDN lines for the system and the gateways that support the Voice over IP VoIP trunks This provides a cohesive view of your telephony communications channels for the system The following paths indicate where to configure telephony resources in Element Manager and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources e Telset interface CONFIG gt Hardware you cannot configure VoIP trunks or IP telephones The following table provides links to descriptions of each subpanel Panel Telephony Resources table on page 102 Media bay module panels on page 104 Trunk Module Parameters on page 104 Port details on page 110 Call by Call Service Selection on page 108 Also refer to Provisioning module lines loops on page 112 IP telephones on page 112 IP Terminal Global Settings on page 113 IP telephone set details on page 114 Voice over IP trunks on page 115 Routing table on page 116
434. nually if changes are required Programming note The following trunks use one or both of these settings to route calls e DPNSS lines use the Private received number to route calls in the system BRIETSI QSIG PRI ETSI QSIG MCDN DMS 100 DMS 250 and VoIP trunks route calls on a per call basis to either the public or private received digits Note VoIP trunking MCDN calls do not support Auto DN DISA DN functionality BRI ETSI Euro NI PRI ETSI Euro NI 4ESS T1 LoopStart E amp M DID GroundStart Analog LEC LoopStart and DASS2 trunks route calls using the Public received number Networking Configuration Guide 92 Chapter 8 Lines overview Physical lines Physical lines are the central office CO trunks assigned to the trunk media bay modules See the Installation and Maintenance Guide NN40020 302 for information about which lines are enabled You can change the line types to suit your system For instance BRI and DTM modules can be designated to a number of line types depending on the type of line service provided through the central office CO However the line numbers are associated for specific tasks or to specific DS30 bus numbers The line record allows you to program settings for lines that affect how the lines operate in the network and with other switches as well as how the system uses the line Trunk types VoIP e DTM digital TI types Loop E amp M DID Ground or fixed da
435. number of the caller e the name of the line in your system that the call is on Call display information can also be sent out when a system telephone calls out of the system What displays at the called party s telephone depends on what the private or public lines allow Outgoing call display information can be allowed or blocked at the system level or single telephone level Figure 67 illustrates an example of incoming and outgoing call display NN40020 603 Chapter 23 CLID Name display 215 Figure 67 Sending and receiving call display DogFood 5556897 line 026 Business name Public or display RCMP Privat RCMP K Unit 5552354 n Incoming Name Number Line display Pe Outgoing Name display e Networking Configuration Guide 216 Chapter 23 CLID Name display NN40020 603 217 Chapter 24 Dialing plans The BCM allows for flexible dialing plans using access codes destination codes PSTN trunks and private network trunks that provide multiple options for customizing the dialing options to meet each customers unique requirements Refer to Outgoing call routing on page 222 While the BCM can be plugged in and used immediately it is recommended that you plan and execute the appropriate dialing plan The dialing plan includes the dialing plans that govern the expected dialing strings on a private network the allowed dial strings on a public network the access and destin
436. o a remote voice mail system either on another node on the private network or at the central office Line type determines what features are available Some features must be coordinated with the settings at the other end of the line Programming links Alternate click the Line Assignment panel tab to see a list of the line feature settings and to see which lines have each setting Line restrictions Restrictions prevent certain kinds of calls from occurring over specific lines You can also restrict some features If you want different restrictions to apply at different times of the day or week you can set up the line restriction schedules to that effect The Normal schedule runs when no other schedule is specified or if fallback is used for VoIP trunks The default restriction filters are listed in Table 9 Table 9 Default restriction filters Schedule Use filter Schedule Use filter Normal 03 Schedule 4 00 Schedule 1 Night 21 Schedule 5 00 Schedule 2 Evening 22 Schedule 6 00 Schedule 3 Lunch 23 Note When a remote user places an external call on a line any filters used with the line still apply Networking Configuration Guide 94 Chapter 8 Lines overview Programming links The template has a set of default restrictions in Restriction 02 only You must create your own restriction files if you want to use other settings Remote restrictions Your system can accommodate users
437. o make two calls of shorter periods The number to dial has to be a number which can be dialed using a Destination Code route The modem or ISDN link cannot use a Line Pool access code to dial out Networking Configuration Guide 500 Chapter 69 Dial Up overview The BCM will use the user name and password associated with the configured account to authenticate itself with the remote server The IP addresses assigned to the BCM and the remote server are configurable Both must be resolvable with the routes programmed for dialing out and the remote server address must match the address supplied when programming the service that will attempt to deliver the packets More than one route can be programmed but all will use the same phone number to reach the remote server To program the Automatic Data Dial Out configurable options in Element Manager select Configuration Resources Dial Up Interfaces Dial Out Interfaces WAN Failover Service The WAN failover service is used in conjunction with the Integrated Router The Integrated Router monitors the status of the primary WAN link When the primary WAN link is detected to have failed the Integrated Router will route the traffic to the WAN Failover dial up interface if one is configured The dial up interface can be ISDN or an analog modem When the WAN link recovers the dialed failover WAN connection is terminated and the IP traffic is then routed over the primary WAN link The
438. o the gatekeeper configuration e Before a registered Gateway Endpoint makes calls it must have its routing entry information assigned within the gatekeeper configuration e Before any of these configuration changes become part of the gatekeeper active configuration they must be committed to the active database BCM requirements Set the BCM Local Gateway IP interface to the following using BCM Element Manager go to Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources gt Select IP Trunk gt H323 Settings tab e Set Call Signaling to GatekeeperRouted or GatekeeperResolved e Set Primary Gatekeeper IP to the IP address of the NRS e Set Alias Names to the Alias name that was used when the H 323 Endpoint for the BCM was created on the NRS In order to make a BCM 3 01 or later to CS 1000 call ensure that the BCM routes and dialing plan used to reach the CS 1000 systems match the numbering plan entry assigned to the CS 1000 systems through NRS Manager Networking Configuration Guide 390 Chapter 45 VoIP interoperability Gatekeeper configuration Similarly to make a CS 1000 system to BCM 3 01 or later call ensure that the numbering plan entry assigned to the BCM through NRS Manager matches the dialing plan information configured on the CS 1000 systems CS 1000 configuration You must use NRS Manager to configure the CS 1000 The NRS server must be enabled and properly configured before any NRS data can be prov
439. o the system over a PSTN private network to use system features or for users who must bypass local restrictions on telephones The following paths indicate where to access the Class of Service settings in Element Manager and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Call Security gt Class of Service e Telset interface CONFIG gt Passwords Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view Panel tabs Tasks Features Class of Service table on page 443 External access tones on page 447 Also refer to Call security Restriction filters on page 433 Call Security Configuring Direct Inward System Access DISA on page 427 Call security Remote access packages on page 439 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about user management CoS passwords permit controlled access to the system resources by both internal and remote users e When an internal user enters a CoS password at a telephone the restriction filters associated with the CoS password apply instead of the normal restriction filters Similarly when a remote user enters a CoS password on an incoming auto answer line the restriction filters and remote package associated with their CoS password apply instead of the normal restriction filters and remote package Class of Service table Refer to the following CoS information e Notes about CoS passwords
440. oIP lines between sites for interoffice calls but not necessarily for all the voice traffic they can configure specific destination codes for the VoIP routes In this case the destination code contains the same digits as a user would dial for a PSTN line thus making the shift transparent to the user and at the same time ensuring that the most economical route is being used Depending on how many exceptions there are you can use the wild card at the end of the string to save yourself from the necessity of entering a number of destination codes with the same leading digits Configuring Absorbed length The digit absorption setting Absorbed Length applies only to the destination code digits When the Absorbed Length is at 0 the actual digits dialed by a caller are preserved in the dialout sequence As you increase the absorbed length the equivalent number of digits are removed from the beginning of the destination code Adding Carrier access codes to destination codes In some instances long distance service uses the same lines as local service but is switched to a specific carrier using an access number which is sometimes referred to as a carrier access code CAC Route programming can include the access number so the users do not have to dial it every time they make a long distance call Figure 72 shows an example of how the system interprets what the user dials into a valid outgoing call NN40020 603 Chapter 24 Dialing plans 243
441. odom meni fe 510 To configure the Modem Link Parameters csssccceeesseeeeeeeeseeneeeeeteeeeeenenseeneetens 511 To configure the Modem IP Address Specification sssssssssesss 512 To assign a modem interface for WAN failover ccccessccceeteseeneeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeneeeeeees 514 To assign an ISDN interface for WAN failover esssesseneeennne 514 Toaddan automatic diaout TUI TR ceeias vic riae baese tbra dudo n Pd qas quu nia 522 To manually disconnect an auto dial out interface sseeeeeee 522 VPN OVEFVIOW ee a ee 525 Silence SUBPIESSION socis cc hewnci sce cesseeeee se REF rER REGE riota 529 ISDN OVVIE onccc cece cceksoreeeercdscss prea aebna 535 GOIE AES Mn 549 MASX bach dato sde oe E 000 TENE EDIE TEA I EEIE NERA 551 Networking Configuration Guide 24 List of procedures NN40020 603 25 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM Refer to the following topics for general BCM information About BCM e Symbols and conventions used in this guide on page 28 e Related publications on page 29 e How to get Help on page 31 About this guide The Networking Configuration Guide describes how to configure and assign features to telephony devices through Telset and through Element Manager Purpose The concepts operations and tasks described in this guide relate to the BCM software This guide provides task based information ab
442. ogramming NSI strings for MWI MWC NN40020 603 Chapter 39 Configuring voice messaging 349 e No spaces are allowed including spaces at the end of the string e A must be present at the end e Attora cannot be present in the first character Local voice messaging access CallPilot Manager Local voice messaging is configured using a client application This CallPilot application is explained in detail in the CallPilot documentation Click the Launch CallPilot Manager button to access the application from which you can set up your local voice messaging system Local Voice Messaging Call Center Launch CallPilot Manager Networking Configuration Guide 350 Chapter 39 Configuring voice messaging NN40020 603 351 Chapter 40 Configuring centralized voice mail The BCM supports voice mail configuration either from the local source or by accessing a remote voice mail system located on another BCM located on a BCM50 or attached to a Meridian 1 system The system can be configured to more than one voice mail system However each telephone can only be configured to one system Refer to the following information e Local system as host on page 351 e Meridian system as host on page 352 e System set up for host system on page 352 e System set up for satellite systems on page 353 e Configuring the system for centralized voice mail on page 355 DMS 100 SL100
443. oice mail and Contact Center applications are reset if you change the DN length after these services are installed If you increase your DN length and then decide to decrease the DN length you will have to cold start your system and lose all of the programming NN40020 603 Chapter 24 Dialing plans 225 Warning If your system is running with a PBX telephony template the Public and Private received length are by default 3 digits at startup Increasing the DN length after system startup does not change these digits so you will need to manually change the Public and Private Receive Number length Private OLIs are automatically assigned to the DN records if the DN length and the Private Received Number length are the same If this changes the Private OLIs are cleared or are not assigned PBX template Network note If your system is part of a private network ensure that you confirm the dialing plan for the network before changing this length If you change the length ensure that you check all DN related settings after the change Using the Received length If you change the DN length of your system you may need to change the Received length Private and public networking and the access codes to determine a route for an incoming call over an auto answer trunk On systems running the DID telephony template the Private and Public Received length is set to the same length as the DN length for the system On syste
444. oint digital connection between BCM and ISDN terminal equipment TE that uses an S interface Refer to Figure 152 S loops support up to seven ISDN DNs which identify TE to the BCM system Figure 152 S reference point _ _ ol ON ISDN TE T with terminating resistors ISDN TE ISDN TE with terminating resistors ISDN TE T Reference Points The T reference point connections provide a point to point digital connection between the ISDN network and BCM Refer to Figure 153 A T loop provides lines that can be shared by all BCM telephones peripherals and applications and ISDN TE Networking Configuration Guide 544 Appendix C ISDN overview Figure 153 T reference point cnetwor connection T BCM A T loop can be used in combination with an S loop to provide D packet service for a point of sale terminal adapter POSTA or other D packet device D packet service is a 16 kbps data transmission service that uses the D channel of an ISDN line The T and S loops must be on the same physical module Clock source for ISDN Systems with ISDN interfaces need to synchronize clocking with the ISDN network and any ISDN terminal equipment connected to the network Systems synchronize clocking to the first functionally available network connection If there are excessive errors on the reference network connection the next available network connection is used for cloc
445. on Guide 30 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Telset Administration Guide NN40020 604 BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration Basics NO115790 BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration Advanced N0115791 BCM50e Integrated Router Configuration Basics N0115788 BCM50e Integrated Router Configuration Advanced N0115789 Telephones and Peripherals Telephony Device Installation Guide NN40020 309 Digital Mobility T7406 Cordless Handset Installation Guide P0606142 IP Telephony BCM IP Softphone 2050 Installation Guide N0022555 WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Configuration Guide N0060634 User Guides Telephones and Peripherals BCM Telephone Features User Guide NO060608 BST Doorphone User Guide P0605668 Central Answering Position CAP User Guide P0603480 Hospitality Features Card N0027326 System wide Call Appearance SWCA Features Card N0027186 T7000 Telephone User Card P0912061 17100 Telephone User Card P0609621 17208 Telephone User Card P0609622 17316 Telephone User Card P0935248 T7316E Telephone User Card P0609623 IP Phone 1120E User Guide NN 10300 062 IP Phone 1 140E User Guide NN 10300 064 IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 User Guide N0060623 IP Key Expansion Module KEM User Guide NN40020 603 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM 31 Digital Mobility DECT 413X 414X Handset User Guide N0O028550 DECT 4 I45Ex AI46E
446. on page 445 e External access tones on page 447 f Security Note Change passwords frequently to discourage unauthorized access Networking Configuration Guide 444 Chapter 56 Configuring CoS passwords for remote access Figure 127 Class of Service table panel cos Class of Service Passwords Class of Service Password Set Restriction Filter Line Restriction Filter Remote Package Table 92 describes the fields on this panel Table 92 CoS password values Attribute Values Description CoS lt CoS 00 CoS 99 gt These numbers identify the password position to the system Read only Password lt six digits gt Enter a combination of numbers that the user needs to dial to get into the system Refer to Notes about CoS passwords on page 445 Set Restriction None Assign a restriction filter to a Class of Service password Filter Filter lt plus a two digit user filter gt The user filter associated with the Class of Service password replaces any normally applicable set restriction line set restriction and remote restriction The default setting None means that any normally applicable filters set restriction line set restriction or remote restriction still apply Line Restriction Filter None Filter lt plus a two digit line filter gt Assign a specific line restriction to a Class of Service password The line filter associated with the Cla
447. on page 506 ISDN Dial out IP Address on page 508 Modem configuration e Modem interface on page 508 Modem Dial out Link Parameters on page 510 e Modem Dial out IP Address on page 512 Networking Configuration Guide 502 Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel Figure 136 Dial out Interfaces panel Dial Up Interfaces Dialout Interfaces Global Settings Modem DiaHn Parameters ISDN DiaHn Parameters Dial out Interfaces Type Interface Name Automatic Dialout Protocol Enable Status IP Address Subnet Mask ISDN isdn PPP Disconnected 255 255 255 255 Modem modem PPP Disconnected 65 iso aro Tu CT O a Add Dial Up Interface Interface type ISDN Interface name Automatic dialout Oo Table 109 Dial out Interfaces fields Attribute Value Description Type drop down list gt Select the type of interface to be added Interface types supported Modem ISDN Interface Name Automatic dialout lt alphanumeric string gt lt check box gt Enter a logical name to identify the interface Enable or disable the interface for Automatic dialout Selected static routes can be added for this interface Cleared this interface can be used for WAN Failover Note Automatic dial out interfaces can not be used for WAN failover Protocol lt read only gt Always PPP Enable lt check box gt Enable or disable the interface St
448. one None Dialed number 4221 6221 Santa Clara office Parameter Setting Network line external to New York Line 001 004 VoIP Line type BlocA Target line internal to Santa Clara telephone Line 125 Target line Private Received 4221 Line Access DN 4221 L125 Ring only Line pool access Line BlocA Routing Destinations Office 1 and 2 Routing to New York Toronto Route 001 Use BlocA External None Destination Code 2 6 Absorb None None Normal route 001 001 Remote access Note All lines in BlocA and BlocB need to be assigned in Remote Rem access pkgs 01 Access Package 1 This is done Line pool access BlocA ON el the restrictions tab of the Line pool access BlocB ON NN40020 603 Chapter 37 Private networking Using destination codes 341 Table 72 VoIP routing for a BCM network Sheet 3 of 3 Toronto office Parameter Setting Trunk Line Data external Line 001 004 VoIP Line type BlocA Target line internal Line 125 Target line Private Received 6221 Line Access DN 6221 L125 Ring only Line pool access Line BlocA Routing Destinations Office 1 Officet2 ge Routing to New York Santa Clara Route 001 Use BlocA External None Destination Code 4 2 Absorb None None Normal route 001 001 If a user in New York wants to call Toronto within the network they dial 6221 The local BCM checks the number against the routing tables and routes the call according to the destination
449. one answers the call e When the S T user type is chosen this can impact the billing in tandem cases The billing metrics start once the call is tandemed and not when the destination telephone is answered But in the case of the T T user type the billing is triggered when the far end answers the call and not when the call is tandemed NN40020 603 63 Chapter 3 Telephony programming Configuring call traffic Telephony call traffic has a number of configuration requirements Some configuration is common to both incoming and outgoing traffic Other settings are specific to the call direction In the case of private networking call configuration becomes more complex as remote systems send calls over the private network to other nodes or to your system PSTN network and your local PSTN handles calls directed to remote nodes through your system Line programming and number planning both play critical roles in controlling call traffic for your system See also e Incoming calls on page 66 e Outgoing calls on page 70 Networking Configuration Guide 64 Chapter 3 Telephony programming Configuring call traffic Figure 12 Telephony system and device programming Dialing plan and telephony programming Although many of the tasks involved in programming both areas can be performed in any order work flow falls generally in the following order e Module configuration VoIP trunk gateways Co
450. ones that have these lines set to Ring only set to None Caller ID Set Select check box to display caller ID for calls coming in over the target line VMsg set When activated an indicator on the telephone appears when a message from a remote voice mail system is waiting Check with your system administrator for the system voice mail setup before changing this parameter NN40020 603 145 Chapter 12 Configuring lines PRI PRI are auto answer lines These lines cannot be individually assigned to telephones They must be configured into line pools PRI line pools then are assigned routes and these routes are used to create destination codes The following paths indicate where to access PRI line pools in Element Manager and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines e Telset interface CONFIG gt Lines Task Configure the PRI lines connected to the system e Configuring PRI line features on page 147 e Configuring PRI Call by Call services on page 148 Prerequisites Complete the following prerequisites checklist before configuring the modules Install and configure the DTM module Refer to Trunk Module Parameters on page 104 Provision lines Refer to Provisioning module lines loops on page 112 Process map Figure 42 and Figure 43 provide an overview of the PRI line feature configuration process Networking Configuration Gu
451. onfigurations In the most basic application your system can provide support for system telephones to make and receive calls over public network PSTN lines Two basic system telephony configurations The following provides a broad overview of the telephony setup for two of the most common office telephone configurations PBX system This setup is for larger offices which have fewer CO lines than telephones In this case the lines are pooled and the line pool access is assigned to all DNs There may also be a designated attendant with a telephone that has all lines individually assigned Networking Configuration Guide 34 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview Figure 1 PBX system Lines are assigned to a line pool CO line 28 CO line 38 CO line 48 All telephones are assigned access to the line pool for outgoing calls Fa Receptionist de Oe Assignedalllines 22s appearance and ring Incoming calls 1 A call comes in on a line 2 The receptionist answers the call and finds out who the call is for 3 The receptionist transfers the call to a specific telephone DN 4 The person can pick up the call at that DN only Outgoing calls 1 User selects the intercom button or dials a line pool access code which selects a line in the line pool 2 The user dials the outgoing telephone number DID system This setup allows you to assign a dedicated phone number
452. ool BlocA Routing Services Private Network Public Network Route External Use ServiceType ServicelD DN type Destination Code Normal route Absorb Toronto 001 No number Pool BlocA TIE 1 Private 2 001 0 Public Network 002 No number Pool BlocA Public N A N A 9 002 ALL Networking Configuration Guide 346 Chapter 38 Private networking PRI Call by Call services NN40020 603 347 Chapter 39 Configuring voice messaging You can have either an internal voice message service or you can connect your system to an external voice message service either over the PSTN network to a message center at the central office or through a private network to another system This panel allows you to choose the type of voice messaging service you want to use If you choose an external service you can enter the contact numbers to the Centralized Voice Messaging table The following paths indicate where to access the loop start trunks through Element Manager and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration gt Applications gt Voice Messaging gt Contact Center e Telset interface CONFIG gt Telco features Assign external numbers to System Speed dial codes Panels Subpanels Tasks features Centralized Voice Messaging external voice Configuring centralized voice mail on page 351 mail on page 347 Local voice messaging acce
453. opean DTM DPNSS line parameters e Host node Choose the type of switch the lines connect to to ensure correct call forwarding M1 Embark IDPX DSM NN40020 603 87 Chapter 7 Managing modules When you need to find out information about a module you can determine the status of any of the settings under the media bay module headings To correct a problem or change a module setting you may need to enable or disable a bus module or select ports on the module Refer to the following procedures Disabling or enabling a bus or module on page 87 Disabling or enabling a port channel setting on page 87 Trunk module metrics on page 88 Disabling or enabling a bus or module The following procedure describes the process for enabling or disabling a bus This means that if there is more than one module assigned to the DS30 bus all modules will be disabled To enable or disable a bus 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources gt Modules panel and then click the module you wish to enable or disable Click either Enable or Disable The system prompts you to confirm your request Click OK Disabling or enabling a port channel setting If you need to isolate a problem or block access from the module you may need to turn off individual port channels rather than the entire module To turn a port channel on or off 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources gt Module
454. option 175 act as the timing master for the private network connections use descending mode for PRI B channel selection recognize dial codes for all nodes in the network provide routing tables that direct incoming calls to the correct nodes on the network including DID calls from the public network recognize the destination code usually 9 that indicates a public network call regardless of where in the network the number was dialed from Note For MCDN over VolP trunks the Meridian uses the IPT trunk card Both systems must have remote gateways pointed to correct system types and protocols Refer to Configuring VoIP trunk gateways on page 381 for information about Remote Gateways for the BCM system Software requirements These additional software packages may be required to activate all the options on the Meridian For a new MI option 81C 61C or 51C on X11 Rls 25 the following additional packages are required to provide the software options listed above SW0059B SW0052D SW0221C SW0051B For a new M1 Option 11C or 11C Mini or X11 Rel 25 order one of the following Enterprise software package NAS VNS software package NN40020 603 Chapter 32 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP 299 Meridian MCDN call features over PRI SL 1 lines Besides the general MCDN features described in Using the MCDN access codes to tandem calls on page 257 an MCDN connection with a Meridian 1 voice mail system also p
455. opyright 2 CoS Class of Service auto DN 282 calls answered with DISA 276 283 password with DISA 420 427 passwords 423 443 programming 444 CSU Channel Service Unit 108 D DASS2 clock source 106 ifbusy 137 received 132 redirect to 137 use auxiliary ringer 135 data encryption methods 527 networking IPSec 527 D channels 536 default restriction filters 417 436 delay dial signaling programming 134 delete ISDN interface 504 modem interface 510 DES encryption protocol 527 destination codes absorbed length 242 ANY character 251 call by call services network 345 constraints 240 243 257 264 dedicated long distance trunks 250 dialout to network 249 E amp M networking 340 for fallback 393 least cost routing 243 252 local calls 249 long distance access code routing 242 256 MCDN network 310 numbering plan overview 218 220 overflow routing 253 PSTN fallback 393 remote gateway destination digits 394 395 schedule 394 wild card character 251 destination digits destination code 394 395 network example 398 Networking Configuration Guide 554 Index remote gateway 385 destination gateway 533 destination IP network example 398 remote gateway 385 DHCP dynamic host configuration protocol IP telephone prerequisites 468 network prerequisites 466 dial direct dial telephones 231 mode lines 133 signaling 134 tone stuttered 425 447 system 425 447 dial tone wait 804 261
456. ot see the ping request The ping request was sent directly from the CSC 192 168 1 2 to PCI 192 168 1 50 For more information about configuring static routes and configuring Bypass Triangle Route see BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration Basics N0115790 or BCM50e Integrated Router Configuration Basics NO115788 ISDN Dial In Parameters panel The ISDN Dial In Parameters controls Dial in to the BCM for remote access This panel is used to configure the ISDN for Dial in It also displays the connection status of the ISDN connections if any are in progress Refer to Table 118 for a description of the ISDN Dial in fields If the BCM50 has an integrated router BCM50a or BCMS0e see Additional configuration to allow network access functionality on page 517 Note ISDN Dial in will be disabled if both ISDN auto dialout interfaces are enabled NN40020 603 Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel 519 Figure 145 SDN Dial in parameters fields Dial Up Interfaces Enable ISDN dial in Connection State Channel User Local IP Address ISDN1 ISDN2 Callback Settings Callback retries Callback retry interval s B0 PPP Configuration Idle timeout s 1800 Maximum receive unit 500 Maximum transmission unit 500 PAP CHAP Local IP Address Specification Remote assigned oO First dial in IP address 40 40 1841 Allow network access Remote IP Address Dial out Interfaces
457. ough the PSTN Multiple BCM systems also can be linked together on a network of VoIP trunks and or dedicated physical lines Networking Configuration Guide 364 Chapter 42 VoIP overview Telephones The BCM can communicate using digital telephones 7000 7100 7100N T7208 7208 7208N 7316 7316E 7316E KIMs and 7310 cordless telephones 7406 and IP telephones and applications Nortel IP Phone 2001 IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2004 and Nortel IP softphone 2050 With this much flexibility the BCM can provide the type of service you require to be most productive in your business Note Model 7000 phones are supported in selected markets only While analog and digital telephones cannot be connected to the BCM system using an IP connection they can make and receive calls to and from other systems through VoIP trunks Calls received through the VoIP trunks or other IP telephones to system telephones are received through the LAN or WAN card and are translated within the BCM to voice channels Gatekeepers A gatekeeper tracks IP addresses of specified devices and provides routing and optionally authorization for making and accepting calls for those devices A gatekeeper is not required as part of the network to which your BCM system is attached but gatekeepers can be useful on networks with a large number of devices When planning your network be sure to consider all requirements for a data network Consult your network ad
458. out CoS passwords The CoS password can define the set of line pools that may be accessed and whether or not the user has access to the paging feature The password all defines which restrictions are applied The class of service CoS that applies to an incoming remote access call is determined by e The filters that you apply to the incoming trunk e The CoS password that the caller used to gain access to BCM e In cases where DISA is not automatically applied to incoming calls the remote caller can change the class of service by dialing the DISA DN and entering a CoS password Networking Configuration Guide 446 Chapter 56 Configuring CoS passwords for remote access Remote users can access system lines line pools the Page feature and remote administration The exact facilities available to you through remote access vary depending on how your installer set up your system Note Remote paging is not available on IP trunks Security Note CoS password security and capacity Determine the CoS passwords for a system randomly and change them on a regular basis e Users should memorize their CoS passwords and keep them private Typically each user has a separate password However several users can share a password or one user can have several passwords e Delete individual CoS passwords or change group passwords when employees leave the company e A system can have a maximum of 100 six digit CoS passwords 00
459. out how to assign features and provide basic programming for the BCM Use Element Manager Startup Profile and Telset Administration to configure various BCM parameters In brief the information in this guide explains e global telephony settings e steps to configure DNs e product features and how to assign them Audience The Networking Configuration Guide is directed to installers who install configure and maintain BCM systems To use this guide you must e be an authorized BCM installer or administrator within your organization e know basic Nortel BCM terminology e be knowledgeable about telephony and IP networking technology Networking Configuration Guide 26 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM Acronyms The following is a list of acronyms used in this guide Table 1 Acronyms Acronym Description ASM Analog station module ATA analog terminal adapter BRI Basic Rate Interface BCM Business Communications Manager CAP Central Answering Position CC Contact Center CLID Calling Line Identification CoS Class of Service DPNSS Digital Private Network Signaling System ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network KIM Key Indicator Module MCDN Meridian Customer Defined Networking MCID malicious call identification MWI message wait indicator OLI outgoing line identification ONN outgoing name and number PVQM proactive voice quality mon
460. out to another router Default nnadmin To configure the Modem Link Parameters 1 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces Click the Modem interface to configure Click the Link Parameters tab The Link Parameters panel appears See Figure 140 4 Configure the Modem Link Parameters Refer to the information in Table 113 Networking Configuration Guide 512 Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel Modem Dial out IP Address Figure 141 Modem Dial out Interface IP Address Specification tab Details for Interface modem aE Link Parameters IP Address Specification Local IP amp ddress Specification Remote IP Address Specification Remote assigned Assign IP address to remote IP address IP address m Table 114 Modem Dial out Interface IP Address Specification fields Attribute Value Description Local IP Address Specification Remote Assigned check box When selected the BCM obtains it s IP address from the remote end Default enabled IP address IP Address When the Remote Assigned parameter is disabled a static IP address must be configured in this parameter Remote IP Address Specification Assign IP address to check box When selected BCM will assign the IP Address field of remote this section to the remote end of the connection IP Address IP Address The local IP address used on the BCM for the dial out connection Default 10 11 16
461. over a VoIP MCDN network selsseseesenn 311 MCDN functionality on fallback PRI lines llle 312 Networking with ETSI OSIG iac sess xm ce RR Renee IRR rton ratiuni SCA 313 Chapter 33 Private networking Basic parameters sellers 315 Private networking protocols udo ace xe ERREUR OR RR E RabR e RR E 315 Keycode requilerrieni amp iius sees emm em ee rm xp ones m Ro RE m EORR n 315 Remote access to the network 00 0 c eee eee 316 Other programming that affects private networking 000ee ee aee 316 Types ol private SOG oso pe peer Sede e GSES Cee Re eee wense een yoead 316 Chapter 34 Private networking MCDN and ETSI network features 319 Configuring MCDN network features llli 319 Configuring ETSI Euro network services 000 cece eee eee ee 321 Networking Configuration Guide 10 Contents Chapter 35 Private networking PRI and VoIP tandem networks 323 Routing for tandem Networks ciscus auno Rad RERO RARE OR m ees 323 Routing calls through a tandem network 0 000 eee 324 Calls originating from the public network 00000 cee eee 325 Calls originating in the private network lisse 326 Using VolP to tandem systems acssses xe x oes c RR Rx Rex eee i 327 Chapter 36 Private networking DPNSS network services UK only 331 Using the diversion Teature ius ace xor Ee eee eee dd So wee
462. oviding support for attached analog fax devices e Voice Networking features LAN CTE computer telephony engine e IP Music Intelligent Contact Center Networking Configuration Guide 28 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM Symbols and conventions used in this guide These symbols are used to highlight critical information for the BCM system Caution Alerts you to conditions where you can damage the equipment j Danger Alerts you to conditions where you can get an electrical shock Warning Alerts you to conditions where you can cause the system to fail or work l improperly Note Alerts you to important information Tip Alerts you to additional information that can help you perform a task Security Note Indicates a point of system security where a default should be changed or where the administrator needs to make a decision about the level of security required for the system Warning Alerts you to ground yourself with an antistatic grounding strap NS before performing the maintenance procedure Warning Alerts you to remove the BCM main unit and expansion unit power cords from the ac outlet before performing any maintenance procedure Ke NN40020 603 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM 29 The following conventions and symbols are used to represent the Business Series Terminal display and dialpad Convention Example Used for Word in a s
463. pecial font shown in Pswd Command line prompts on display telephones the top line of the display Underlined word in capital letters PL ps Display option Available on two line display shown in the bottom line of a telephones Press the button directly below the two line display telephone option on the display to proceed Dialpad buttons Buttons you press on the dialpad to select a particular option The following text conventions are used in this guide to indicate the information described Convention Description bold Courier Indicates command names and options and text that you must enter text Example Use the info command Example Enter show ip alerts routes italic text Indicates book titles plain Courier Indicates command syntax and system output for example prompts text and system messages Example Set Trap Monitor Filters FEATURE Indicates that you press the button with the coordinating icon on HOLD whichever set you are using RELEASE Related publications This section provides a list of additional documents referred to in this guide There are two types of publications Technical Documents on page 29 and User Guides on page 30 Technical Documents System Installation BCM50 2 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide NN40020 302 Keycode Installation Guide NN40010 301 System Programming Administration Guide NN40020 600 Networking Configurati
464. plan Line pools and line pool codes Figure 109 Dialing Plan Line Pools table Dialing Plan Line Pools Line Pools Pool Access Code poa a BlocB N BlocC N Bloct NZA BlocE N BlocF N Table 76 describes the fields on the top frame Table 76 Line Pools table fields Attribute Value Description Pool lt read only gt These are the available line pools Program only the ones for which you have actually assigned lines Line pools are configured on the Lines panel Access lt XXX gt Use access codes if you are not using destination codes on the Code system These codes serve the same purpose without the ability to define dialing sequences and multiple codes per route Line pool access code notes Note You cannot assign Bloc line pools with a line pool access code You must define Es Bloc line pools under routing and create destination codes for the routes Note A line pool access code cannot conflict with the following table NN40020 603 Chapter 41 Dialing plan Line pools and line pool codes 359 Note The line pool number must not conflict with the following e park prefix e external code e direct dial digits e private access code e Public Private Auto DN e Public Private DISA DN Telephone DN If the line pool code and the external code start with the same digit the line pool code programming supersedes the external code
465. ppears See Figure 138 4 Configure the ISDN Link Parameters Refer to the information in Table 111 Networking Configuration Guide 508 Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel ISDN Dial out IP Address Figure 139 ISDN Dial out Interfaces IP Address Specification tab Details for Interface isdn2 Channel Characteristics Link Parameters IP Address Specification Local IP Address Specification Remote IP Address Specification Remote assigned Assign IP address to remote IP address IP address Table 112 ISDN Dial out Interfaces IP Address Specification fields Attribute Value Description Local IP Address Specification Remote assigned check box When selected the BCM obtains its IP address from the remote end Default selected IP address IP Address When the Remote Assigned parameter is disabled a static IP address must be configured in this parameter Remote IP Address Specification Assign an IP address check box When selected BCM will assign the IP address in the IP to remote Address field of this section to the remote end of the connection Default cleared IP address lt IP Address The local IP address used on the BCM for the dial out connection Default 10 11 16 1 Modem interface BCM supports one V 34 modem connection to and from the BCM50 e Caution Do not modify any of the advanced modem settings on the integrated router
466. process Part A NN40020 603 Chapter 14 Configuring lines T1 Loop start 159 Figure 48 T1 Loop start line configuration process Part B e Properties tab a zZ li z o Yes E i TT Networking Configuration Guide 160 Chapter 14 Configuring lines T1 Loop start Figure 49 11 Loop start line configuration process Part C pum E 97 mm S a NN40020 603 Chapter 14 Configuring lines T1 Loop start 161 Configuring digital T1 E1 loop start lines The following procedure describes the fields that need to be confirmed or set for these lines For detailed field descriptions refer to Configuring lines on page 129 To configure digital loop start lines 1 Confirm or change the settings on the Trunk Line Data main panel Line Read only list shows available lines for system Trunk Type Loop Name Default name is line number shown as part of incoming CLID Control Set If you use schedules enter DN for telephone that controls line schedules Line Type Define as public if the line is shared or as Private To DN if the line is assigned to a specific telephone or put it in a line pool A to O Prime Set If you want the line to be answered at another telephone if the line is not answered at the target telephone otherwise choose None Pub Received Not applicable Priv Received Not applicabl
467. quire no password to access the BCM The type of service that applies to the call depends on the restrictions assigned to the trunk Public DISA DN DISA DN digits to be received from the auto answer trunk For public network calls answered with DISA the system presents a stuttered dial tone to prompt a caller to enter a valid password The Class of Service CoS that applies to the call is determined by this CoS password After a remote user accesses the BCM they can change the existing CoS using the DISA DN This gives you greater flexibility when you create access privileges For example you may want to have a shared DN for remote access but separate CoS passwords with different dialing out privileges for individuals NN40020 603 Chapter 28 Dialing plan Public network 277 Table 52 Private and Public received numbers Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description Public network National Local dialing plan defines a seven digit numbering scheme dialing plan Local National dialing plans define an extended number scheme North Subscriber America is set to 10 digits However systems in other countries may have a variable length Public network code 1 to 7 digits This number concatenates with the Public OLI which by default is the DN of the device Note In systems running the North American profile if the Public OLI contains the public network code that entry overrides
468. r 2 A logical connection between the central office or the far end and the BCM system BCM has one or two of these connections for each BRI link and one for each PRI link Without Layer 2 call processing is not possible e Layer 3 Also a logical connection between the ISDN network your service provider and the BCM system For BRI lines layer 3 is where call processing and service profile identifier SPID information is exchanged This controls which central office services are available to the connection For example a network connection can be programmed to carry data calls Note Throughout this chapter references are made to Service profile identifiers SPIDs SPIDs are a part of the BRI National ISDN standard SPIDs are not used in the ETSI BRI standard or on PRI The three layers mentioned in this section are important when you are installing maintaining and troubleshooting an ISDN system For information about troubleshooting ISDN see the Administration Guide NN40020 600 ISDN bearer capability Bearer capability describes the transmission standard used by the BRI or PRI line so that it can work within a larger ISDN hardware and software network The bearer capability for BRI and PRI is voice speech 3 1 kHz audio fax and data unrestricted 64 kbps restricted 64 kbps or 56 kbps Services and features for ISDN BRI and PRI As part of an ISDN digital network your system supports enhanced capabilities and featur
469. r IP Trunks The details panel appears 3 Click the H323 Media Parameters or the SIP Media Parameters tab Verify that the preferred codec appears in the Selected List field Networking Configuration Guide 402 Chapter 47 T 38 fax 5 Verify that the codecs are set at the default before performing T 38 sessions To enable a T 38 fax Click Configuration gt Telephony Resources 2 Inthe Telephony Resources panel select the row for IP Trunks The details panel appears 3 Click the H323 Media Parameters tab or the SIP Media Parameters tab 4 Select the Enable T 38 fax check box Figure 118 H323 Media Parameters tab Details for Module Internal Routing Table H323 Settings H323 Media Parameters SIP Settings SIP Media Parameters SIP URI Map Preferred Codecs Settings Codec Preferences Enable Voice Activity Detection oO Available list Selected list Jitter buffer Auto x G 729 4 G 723 i G 729 payload size ms 30 w LL a7i1aw f l nE G 711 aLaw G 723 payload size ms G 711 payload size ms 30 p 3 Incremental payload size Fi Enable T 38 fax Force G 711 for 3 1k audio go Lines To enable T 38 fax protocol you must configure the following e Voice over IP VoIP lines see Configuring lines on page 129 e target lines see Configuring lines Target lines on page 141 e call routing see Dialing plan Routing configurations on page 247 e destination code
470. r incoming calls you can have a central answering position or you can specify lines to one or more telephones to receive directed calling You can arrange your telephones in Hunt groups ringing groups or call groups that use system wide call appearance SWCA assignments to share calls You can also configure lines for use by system users who call in from outside the system You can give them direct access to the system with an Auto DN or you can configure the line so they hear a stuttered dial tone at which point they need to enter a password CoS to gain access DISA DN Outgoing calls For outgoing calls you can assign one or more intercom keys to access a line pool or prime line destination code or internal system numbers to direct the call Telephones without intercom keys do require intercom paths assigned but to access calls users must pick up the handset to connect For calls within the system all telephones are virtually linked within the system To call another telephone inside the system you can lift the handset and dial the local DN In this case the prime line must be set to intercom For calls going outside the system e If you assign the prime line to a line pool When you pick up the handset the telephone automatically grabs the first available line from the assigned line pool In this configuration you must ensure that the outgoing number is allowed by the line pool e Ifyou assign the prime line to an i
471. r one of the calls has been disconnected In a situation where the changes cannot be made immediately a checkmark appear in the Changes Pending box and you can view details of these changes by clicking on the application and viewing the details below IP set resources Because there is no circumstance where the number of IP sets on the system would exceed the available resources there is generally no need to modify the resources for this application However if you want to limit the number of IP set connections you can change the maximum value IP trunk resources Because there is no circumstance where the number of IP trunks on the system would exceed the available resources there is generally no need to modify the resources for this application However if you want to limit the number of IP trunk connections you can change the maximum value Media gateway resources Media gateways require DSP resources Because there is often a slight delay in allocating the DSP resources you may want to set the minimum to 2 or more This will ensure that there is generally no delay in setting up the media gateway NN40020 603 Chapter 4 Application Resources overview 75 Voice mail and CC resources These resources require DSP resources Because there is often a slight delay in allocating DSP resources you may want to set the minimum to 2 or more This setting generally ensures that there is no delay occurs in setting up the application
472. r ordering your National ISDN BRI NI 1 However Nortel recommends using packages M or P with the BCM system Contact your service provider for more information about the capability packages it offers Bellcore National ISDN Users Forum NIUF ISDN packages supported by BCM for ordering in U S Capability Feature set Optional features Point of Voice Data sale M Alternate CLID X X voice circuit switched data on both B channels P Alternate flexible calling for voice not additional call offering not X X X voice circuit switched data supported by BCM supported by BCM on both B channels Basic D Channel Packet calling line identification D channel packet If you want to transmit both voice and data and support D channel packet service order package P However BCM does not support the flexible calling for voice and additional call offering features that are included in package P Multi Line Hunt may be ordered with your package When a telephone number the Network DN in the group of numbers assigned by your service providers is busy the Multi Line Hunt feature connects the call to another telephone number in the group BCM supports the feature only on point to point network connections T loop Check with your service provider for more information about Multi Line Hunt Any of the ISDN packages will allow you to use sub addressing but your ISDN TE must be equipped to use sub add
473. r system dial tone again after five seconds e Dialed a number in the system which does not exist Your call disconnects after five seconds IP trunk lines do not produce tones when accessed from a remote location Networking Configuration Guide 426 Chapter 52 Call security and remote access NN40020 603 427 Chapter 53 Call Security Configuring Direct Inward System Access DISA This following describes the telephony configuration that allows users to call from a remote site into the system to access system features The following paths indicate where to access DISA settings in Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Configuration Resources Telephony Resources Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Public Network Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Private Network e Telset interface CONFIG gt System prgrming gt Access codes Task Configuring DISA DNs Auto DNs Answering with DISA e Set up the system parameters for system users to call into the from a remote location Note that Remote Access Packages are required for private network trunks as well Refer to the following e Remote access overview on page 427 e Setting up remote access on lines on page 430 Remote access overview To control access from the public or private network you can configure auto answer trunks to answer with DISA Remote
474. r the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of outgoing calls Remote Packages Enter a valid remote access package for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of incoming calls from remote users or private networks 4 Assign the lines to DNs Assigned DNs tab If you have configured the DNs and know to which telephones the line needs to be assigned you can enter those DNs here The DN record also can be used to assign lines and line pools for these lines Appearance type Choose Appr or Appr amp ring if the telephone has an available button otherwise choose Ring only Model 7000 and 7100 telephones have no programmable buttons so this must be set to Ring only Model 7000 phones supported in Europe only VMsg set When activated an indicator on the telephone appears when a message from a remote voice mail system is waiting Check with your system administrator for the system voice mail setup before changing this parameter 5 Suggested next steps Dialing plan Dialing plan System settings on page 267 Dialing plan Public network on page 275 Dialing plan Private network settings on page 281 Dialing plan Routing and destination codes on page 259 NN40020 603 Chapter 17 Configuring lines DASS2 lines 179 Networking Public networking Tandem calls from private node on page 293 Private networking Using destination cod
475. rcuit switched also known as PSTN fallback on the H323 Settings or SIP Settings panels you allow the system to check the availability of a VoIP trunk then switch the call to a PSTN line if the VoIP trunk is not available For the PSTN fallback to work on a suitable bandwidth QoS monitor must be enabled and a transmit threshold must be set For QoS and transmit threshold settings refer to Table 81 You use scheduling and destination codes to allow the call to switch from H 323 or SIP to a PSTN line without requiring intervention by the user Use the dialing plan worksheet in the Programming Records to plan your dialing requirements so you can pinpoint any dialing issues before you start programming If you are programming an existing system you can look at what numbers the users are familiar with dialing and you can attempt to accommodate this familiarity into your destination codes plan Networking Configuration Guide 374 Chapter 43 VoIP trunk gateways On any IP gateway for which you want to allow fallback based on network quality you need to ensure that QoS monitor is enabled Warning QoS monitor must be turned on at both endpoints To enable the QoS Monitor select Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources gt IP Trunks gt Routing Table panel Describing a fallback network Figure 114 shows how a fallback network would be set up between two sites Figure 114 PSTN fallback diagram BCM5
476. re NN40020 603 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources 121 Table 22 H323 Settings fields Sheet 4 of 5 Field Value Description Alias Names Alias names are comma delimited and may be one of the following types E 164 numeric identifier containing a digit in the range 0 9 Identified by the keyword TEL Example the BCM is assigned an E 164 and an H323 Identifier Alias Names TEL 76 NAME bcm10 nortel com e NPI TON also referred to as a PartyNumber alias Similar to E164 except that the keyword indicates the NPI numbering plan identification as well as the TON type of number Identified by one of the following keywords PUB Public Unknown Number PRI Private Unknown Number UDP Private Level 1 Regional Number UDP CDP Private Local Number CDP e H 323ldentifier alphanumeric strings representing names e mail addresses etc Identified by the keyword NAME Example The BCM is assigned a public dialed number prefix of 76 a private CDP number of 45 and an H323 Identifier alias Alias Names PUB 76 CDP 45 NAME bcm10 nortel com e H 225 Q 931 CallingPartyNumber NetCentrex gatekeeper The NetCentrex gatekeeper uses the H 225 Q 931 CallingPartyNumber to resolve the call originator for billing purposes This number must then contain a unique prefix or location code that is unique across all endpoints that are using the NetCentrex gateke
477. re analog trunks Trunk Module Parameters The Trunk Module Parameters tab shows the information that is unique to the type of trunk module selected in the main Modules list Figure 23 Trunk Module Parameters subpanel Details for Module Expansion 2 1 Trunk Module Parameters Provision Lines TRES T1 Parameters Answer timer 2 x CO fail TlAS47A v DECC tinier 460 3 Interface levels ISDN v Clock source Primary extemal v Framing ESF M Line coding pars w Internal CSU CSU line build pdg v Table 14 describes the possible fields trunk module parameters and an indication of which types of modules use each setting Table 14 Module parameters values Sheet 1 of 4 Attribute Value Module line type Trunk type All trunks Indicates the type of tr Trunk mode DS CLID Global Legacy Loop unks This field is read only for all modules except DTM modules NN40020 603 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources 105 Table 14 Module parameters values Sheet 2 of 4 Attribute Value Module line type e DS CLID displays for old North American LS DS or CLID analog trunk modules the old analog MBM or the GATM with North American DIP switch settings e Global displays for the GATM MBM with no regional DIP switches set Legacy displays for all other old analog trunk modules Protocol NI 2 DMS 100 DMS 250 AT amp T4ESS SL 1 Euro ETSI Q Sig PRI
478. re passed to PPP stack to manage the PPP connection Idle timeout lt numeric Idle time after which PPP will terminate the PPP connection string gt Default 1800 seconds Maximum Receive Unit lt 128 1500 gt The maximum size of the packets that can be received Default 500 Maximum Transmit Unit lt 128 1500 gt The maximum size of the packets that can be sent Default 500 Authentication support PAP Supported PPP authentication CHAP Default CHAP MSCHAP MSCHAPv2 Dial In Settings Line numeric Line number monitored by the modem for incoming calls A string value of 0 blank Range Min Target Line Max Target Line Default blank Calling Number lt numeric Analog modem uses this Calling Number Calling ID CLID string to detect an incoming data call Number of Rings 1 10 Number of rings before the BCM redirects a call to the modem This field applies only when a call is directed to the line number specified in this section Otherwise this value is ignored and the modem answers 10 seconds after a call is presented Note The number of rings for certain market profiles must be multiplied by 2 due to double ring cadence For these profiles the maximum number of rings is 5 6x2 10 Default 1 Auto disable check box When selected the modem is automatically disabled after use Default disabled NN40020 603 Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel 517 Table
479. re the bearer channel and are used to carry voice or data information and have speeds of 64 kbps Since each ISDN link BRI or PRI has more than one B channel a user can perform more than one transmission at the same time using a single ISDN link D channels The standard signaling protocol is transmitted over a dedicated data channel called the D channel The D channel carries call setup and feature activation information to the destination and has speeds of 16 kbps BRI and 64 kbps PRI Data information consists of control and signal information and for BRI only packet switched data such as credit card verification ISDN layers ISDN layers refer to the standards established to guide the manufacturers of ISDN equipment and are based on the OSI Open Systems Interconnection model The layers include both physical connections such as wiring and logical connections which are programmed in computer software When equipment is designed to the ISDN standard for one of the layers it works with equipment for the layers above and below it Three layers are at work in ISDN for BCM To support ISDN service all three layers must be working properly NN40020 603 Appendix C ISDN overview 537 e Layer 1 A physical connection that supports fundamental signaling passed between the ISDN network your service provider and the BCM system When the LED on a BRI S T Media Bay Module configured as BRI is lit your layer 1 is functioning e Laye
480. reating tandem private networks Norstar systems Meridian 1 systems Succession systems DMS 100 systems or CSE systems Table 5 lists the MCDN features that are provided by all SL 1 VoIP networks where MCDN is active The features affect call redirection and trunking functions Table 5 MCDN network features Centralized messaging Network Call Redirection Information on page 46 NCRI Centralize trunking ISDN Call Connection Limitation on page 47 ICCL Trunk Route Optimization on page 48 TRO Trunk Anti tromboning on page 49 TAT Network Call Redirection Information Network Call Redirection Information NCRI builds on the following BCM features External Call Forward e Call Transfer e Call Forward NCRI adds the ability to redirect a call across an MCDN network using Call Forward All Calls No Answer Busy and Call Transfer features The call destination also receives the necessary redirection information This feature allows the system to automatically redirect calls from within a BCM system to the mail system such as Meridian Mail which resides outside the BCM system on the Meridian 1 Figure 6 shows an example of this situation where user calls user B on the same BCM If user B is busy or not answering the call automatically gets transferred to a Meridian Mail number user C across an MCDN link between the BCM system and the Meridian 1 system where the mailboxes are set up NN40020 603 Chapter
481. rection information NCRI 46 319 outgoing call display 261 over VoIP 311 PRI fallback 312 PRI M1 loops 106 private access code 283 private network ID 283 private networking 297 private outgoing calls 287 protocol 315 remote gateway 311 routing information 310 SL 1 networking 43 special international access code 285 special route codes 261 tandem calls 232 257 trunk anti tromboning TAT 49 320 trunk route optimization TRO 48 320 UDP programming specifics 303 Zone ID 286 media bay modules clock source support 544 disable a bus 87 disable enable a port 87 enable a bus 87 MCDN network settings 309 task list 81 menu lines 90 Meridian MCDN network 46 319 MCDN system requirements 297 Meridian Meridian Customer Defined Networking SL 1 networking 43 Meridian 1 NN40020 603 561 MI IPT 368 MCDN special calls 232 257 MCDN networking 311 message waiting indication MCDN 299 messages network features 299 modem add interface 508 compatibility 500 configure IP address 512 connecting 509 delete interface 510 dial in 501 514 dial out 501 disabling 509 disconnect 510 enabling 509 interface 501 508 IP address 512 link parameters 510 511 remote access 498 499 modify ISDN channel characteristics 506 module networking 39 module mode module record 104 multi line hunt 539 546 MWI MI remote capability 106 300 MWIMI 106 N NI call by call services 540 name blocking ONN 540 changi
482. ress 40 10 14 1 IP address 10 10 14 2 Attribute Value Description Default disabled Enable Modem Dial In check box Enable or disable modem dial in Default disabled Allow network access check box Enable or disable dial in access to the entire network if no dial in connection is currently active Connection State This is a table that shows the current dial in state if connected Note There is a maximum of one entry in this table as there is only one modem This table will be blank Networking Configuration Guide 516 Chapter 70 Dial Up Interfaces panel Table 116 Modem Dial In Parameters fields Sheet 2 of 3 interval s Attribute Value Description User lt read only gt Displays the user that is currently dialed in Local IP Address lt read only gt The local IP address assigned to the dial in connection Remote IP Address lt read only gt The remote IP address of the dial in connection Callback lt read only gt Displays if callback is enabled for this dial in connection Status lt read only gt The status of the dial in connection Callback Settings Callback retries lt 1 10 gt The number of attempts made by the BCM to dial out to the remote end during callback Default 3 Callback retry lt 0 360 gt Interval for successive connection attempts for dial out during callback Default 60 seconds PPP Configuration These parameters a
483. ressing for the feature to work Ordering ISDN BRI service outside Canada or the United States Outside Canada or the United States order Euro ISDN PRI or BRI service or both from your service provider Set the BCM equipment to the Euro ISDN protocol NN40020 603 Appendix C ISDN overview 547 Supported ISDN protocols The switch used by your service provider must be running the appropriate protocol software and the correct version of that software to support ISDN PRI and BRI Each protocol is different and supports different services Contact your service provider to make sure that your ISDN connection has the protocol you require Networking Configuration Guide 548 Appendix C ISDN overview NN40020 603 549 Appendix D Codec rates The information in the table below enables the administrator to determine the number of resources that can be maintained on the available system bandwidth The packet transfer rate must also include the overhead Note Using Silence Suppression on G 723 and G 729 can reduce the overall bandwidth consumption by 40 Note The totals in the bytes s column represent one direction only Table 120 RTP over IP Sheet 1 of 2 Payload Overhead Latency bytes Packets frame bytes Total bytes bytes s Overhead msec G 729 10 1 58 68 54400 580 00 10 20 2 58 78 31200 290 00
484. rface 1 O ON oc Oo 11 Click Configuration gt Resources gt Dial Up Interfaces Click Add The Add Interface dialog box appears Select Modem from the drop down menu Enter a logical name for the interface in the interface name field Click OK Select the new Modem interface Click the Link Parameters tab in the bottom panel Enter the Dial out number to use for the back up Click the Access Parameters tab in the bottom panel Select the account with remote access privileges from the Dial out user name drop down menu Select the Authentication value that is appropriate for your configuration See Table 127 fora description of these fields Add the SNMP Trap destination 1 2 Click Configuration Administrator Access SNMP SNMP Trap Destinations tab Click Add The Add Trap Destination dialog box appears See the Administration Guide NN40020 600 for information on how to configure the Add Trap Destination dialog box Note The Host address must be the IP address of the static route created in this procedure 4 Click OK Static Routes for Automatic Dial out Interfaces Static routes must be configured for Automatic Dial out Interfaces These can be programmed in Element Manager Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem gt Dial Out Static Routes Refer to Configuring static routes on page 463 NN40020 603 525 Appendix A VPN overview A VPN Virtual Priv
485. ridian M1 em branch Z East End branch PNI 1 PNI 1 T DN 4221 Voice mail or l Auto Attendant PRI public protocol Central Office This example could represent a large head office the Meridian 1 connected to several smaller branch offices the two BCMs In this network only the head office has trunks connected to the public network The branch offices access the public network through the PRI to the head office This configuration allows for cost savings by consolidating the public access trunks Users at all three locations access the public network by dialing 9 followed by the public number For example a user in the West End branch might dial 9 555 1212 for a local call or 9 1 613 555 1212 for a long distance call The BCM routing table routes these public calls to the Meridian 1 Routing tables at the Meridian 1 will then select an appropriate public facility for the call Note that the Private Network Identifier PNI is programmed at each end of the links The PNI identifies the BCM to the Meridian 1 system Routing is set up such that network calls are made by dialing a four digit private network DN For example if a user in the West End branch wishes to call a user in the East End branch within the private network they dial 6221 Figure 98 illustrates this example The implications on the configuration on each node to access the PSTN through one network node e Each node must have the Private Ne
486. rivacy 135 DISA 367 381 fallback routing 244 253 full autohold 135 gateway prerequisites 465 private networking 37 315 schedule activating 395 schedule setting up 395 use auxiliary ringer 135 VoIP trunks activating VoIP schedule 395 destination codes 393 jitter buffer 124 127 keycodes 368 making calls 399 MCDN private outgoing calls 287 networking multiple systems 327 outgoing call configuration 385 outgoing calls 385 overview 99 port ranges legacy systems 377 port settings 377 PSTN fallback 373 PSTN fallback schedule 395 remote access issues 422 432 remote access warning 371 372 remote gateway 385 routing 391 signaling method 383 using firewalls 377 voice activity detection 124 127 VoIP trunks configuring 367 381 VoIP trunks T 38 fax protocol 379 VSC 210 W Wait for dial tone 804 261 WAN Business Communications Manager function 467 failover 500 513 dial out interface 497 ISDN 514 modem 514 wild card character Destination codes ANY character 251 WinkStart 134 workstation prerequisites 468 Z zone ID MCDN 286 NN40020 603
487. rk flow Figure 74 shows an overview task flow for the areas in programming that affect how routes are set up Networking Configuration Guide 248 Chapter 25 Dialing plan Routing configurations Figure 74 Routing workflow Yes Yes dm No Yes NN40020 603 Chapter 25 Dialing plan Routing configurations 249 Destination code numbering in a network Because the system checks the initial digits of a call against the routing tables each type of internal or external call must begin with a unique pattern of digits Table 43 gives a sample plan for how initial digits are assigned in a network of systems with three digit intercom numbers Table 43 Destination code leading digits Leading Digits Use 0 221 253 N 0 00 2 Network Direct Dial Intercom calls Coordinated Dialing Plan Unused Unused Call Park Prefix All PSTN Calls Unused In Table 43 4 is used as the initial digit for the coordinated dialing plan but 5 or 6 can also be used for this purpose Tips When programming a button to dial an external number automatically autodial private network calls must be programmed as external autodial numbers even though they resemble internal extension numbers Routes generally define the path between the BCM system and another switch in the network not other individual telephones on that switch Setting up a destination for local calling An office can have different
488. rotocol Gatekeeper wildcard check box If selected all dialed digits match gatekeeper digits and VoIP calls will be routed through the gatekeeper Ignore in band DTMF in RTP check box If selected the BCM ignores audible in band DTMF tones received over VoIP trunks after the BCM connects the remote end to a locally hosted call center application or a locally hosted CallPilot application such as auto attendant voice mail or IVR Note This setting is useful should be selected when the far end is a Call Server 2000 CS2K amp Packet Voice Gateway PVG combination where the PVG is provisioned for OOBDTMFSupp FullSupport resulting in the PVG CS2K sending out of band as well as in band DTMF tones at the same time to the BCM The PVG MAY not send both tone notifications depending on whether the call is using G711 and the version of the CS2K software release i e SNxx This setting should be co coordinated with the CS2K administrator Default Cleared Networking Configuration Guide 120 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources Table 22 H323 Settings fields Sheet 3 of 5 Field Value Description Configuration Call signaling Direct Direct call signaling information is passed directly between Gatekeeper Resolved endpoints The remote gateway table in the Element Manager defines a destination code digits for each remote Gatekeeper Routed system to direct the
489. rovides some special call features which are listed in Table 59 Table 59 MCDN feature enhancements Centralized messaging Message Waiting Indication Centralized Attendant e Camp on on page 301 Break in on page 301 Message Waiting Indication MWI allows the voice mail host system Meridian 1 that is designated to receive messages to notify a target telephone on the BCM of a call waiting using the native MCDN MWI or MIK MCK message indicators on the Meridian telephones This feature works for both Nortel and third party voice mail systems Messages are received at a centralized location to a predetermined telephone where they are processed and forwarded to the target telephone MWI allows the user to reply or call back to the message center The procedure for retrieving messages is described in the Telephone Features Handbook Figure 95 demonstrates how the Meridian responds when a call is forwarded to a CallPilot mailbox Networking Configuration Guide 300 Chapter 32 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP Figure 95 Message waiting indication message BCM Meridian 1 with CallPilot Telephone A Message Telephone B mmm sp Original call mm mum amie Call forwarded to CallPilot Ban MWI message signal over target line Programming notes BCM programming M1 programming To select Remote Capability for MWI on a per loop basis for PRI Co
490. rovision Virtual Channels tab panel e BRI loops require an extra step so the Provision Loops tab panel appears when a BRI module is selected Table 18 describes the fields on these panels Table 18 Provisioning panels Field Value Description Provision Lines tab Line Provisioned line number check box This is a list of the lines assigned to the module If the check box is selected beside a line that line is available for call traffic Provision Virtual Channels tab Virtual Channel lt read only gt A virtual channel assigned to the DPNSS module Provisioned lt check box gt If the check box is selected beside a channel that channel is available for call traffic Provision Loops tab Loop lt loop number gt These are the loop numbers assigned to the selected BRI module Modules have four loops but only loops designated as T loops require provisioning Provisioned lt check box gt If the check box is selected beside a loop that loop has lines that can be provisioned Line lt line number gt Each loop as two lines assigned You can provision or deprovision these lines individually Provisioned lt check box gt If the check box is selected beside a line that line is available for call traffic IP telephones The following tabbed panels appear when you select an IP terminals entry on the Telephony Resources table e IP Terminal Global
491. rs within the system A remote caller must have DTMF capability to access the Page feature e The line redirection feature allows the originating party to redirect a call that is waiting a connection or re connection to an alternate destination after a time out period Failed calls can be redirected Priority calls cannot be redirected Remote access on a private network Systems connected to the private network deliver the last dialed digits to the destination BCM system for interpretation The destination BCM system matches the digits to a target line or interprets the digits as a remote feature request BCM then routes the call to the specified target line or activates the remote feature e By default T1 E amp M trunks are set to answer with DISA For auto answer T1 E amp M trunks connected to a private network change the default so that the trunks are not answered with DISA If an auto answer T1 E amp M trunk is configured to answer with DISA the system tries to interpret any received digits as a CoS password The DISA DN and the Auto DN allow auto answer private network and DID calls in the same way that calls on auto answer loop start and auto answer T1 E amp M trunks can be answered with or without DISA These DNs are described in Understanding access codes on page 229 e Answer with DISA cannot be administered to a PRI trunk Instead you can program the dialed digits to match those of a specific target line DN the DISA DN or
492. rt Hold over the DPNSS link itself This means that the conferenced party on the distant end of the network cannot place a Three Party Service call on Hold This feature is designed to allow operators to assist in the connection of calls from one main location NN40020 603 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview 55 Making a conference call To initiate or disconnect from a conference call on a BCM system over DPNSS 1 use the procedure described in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Note Three Party Service is supported on model 7000 telephones but in a receive only fashion These telephone types cannot initiate Three Party Service For more information about these telephone types see the Telephony Device Installation Guide NN40020 309 model 7000 phones supported in Europe only Using the diversion feature Diversion is a DPNSS 1 feature for BCM that allows users to forward their calls to a third party on the DPNSS 1 network This feature is similar to Call Forward on BCM but takes advantage of the broader capabilities of DPNSS There are five variations of Diversion Call Diversion Immediate Call Diversion On Busy Call Diversion On No Reply Bypass Call Diversion and Follow me Diversion These variations are described below Diversion Immediate diverts all calls to an alternate telephone This function is programmed by the user at their telephone Diversion On Busy diverts all calls to
493. runk module parameters 0000 c eee eee 83 Module parameters St usus see Bean aed irsk eee EUR ORA RUE Rx RUP OR RRR ER REGS 83 Chapter 7 Managing modul6 iuiodaorae c s ew ri robr iori ne eb ea 87 Disabling or enabling a bus or module lllsllleseleseleen 87 Disabling or enabling a port channel setting llle 87 Trunk module metfi6S coc ccc cer xem md m yxokeh e Ree x eR Rm nea ene 88 Chapter 8 Lines OVEIVIOW iiia AEERARRHARAEOLERRRA RAERAEARTAWARERATAAMTRR krisan 89 Understanding how the system identifies lines lees 90 Determining which lines you need to program 00 eee 90 BRI loops programming reresik e Rata u 9d ee ee beh I aser s Sob waka 92 Lie CO Cue muere RECS S de e Bab pra een Fab Bite edu 3 Ies a did 93 Lie eara elbrialibS esas coe Seis AGE ER AU Fs ROC C PE e Xa SRS RES 93 Line toste emt C RR E 93 Remote FESTHCHONG luec cesses sms EERE EERE E Y CE Rk Enia 94 Vulce message CONIC ossa czda e RRYIRXTEGGROPGOR Y G PU c eG 4 ROG p ERE R RR Ya 94 Lite JOBS eos ari Rod ERUR E dope aD pc e ad bv ub b pde doe d 94 Determining line numbers and destination codes 2000000 es 95 NN40020 603 Contents 5 Lite PGR WES er CC TT 96 Lisa loss packages odd ERE XRG eee os BRE NC OUR OE ION Re Pad Y ORDRE 97 Turn Privacy on or off for a call Linse ius RR RC hake ORE SR DR exes 98 Programming line ACCESS 0 00 steed secs em ee ees a PREX Rr RE rari Ro Rd 98 Making li
494. s Attribute Value Description Destination Address IP Address IP address in Ipv4 format Specify the IP address of the destination network or host Default None Destination Mask IP Address Specify the subnet mask of the destination Default 255 255 255 0 Interface Name drop down list Choose the dial out interface to be used by the IP traffic Note This is a drop down list with only interfaces that have Automatic dialout selected Metric Value 1 327675 Specify the metric value associated with the interface 1 means lowest cost and 32767 is the highest cost Default 1 NN40020 603 Chapter 60 IP Subsystem 463 Configuring static routes To add a new IP Static Route 1 2 Click Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem gt Dial out Static Routes tab Click Add The Add Dial out Static Route dialog box appears Enter the Destination Destination mask Interface name and Metric fields Click OK The new IP static route appears in the list To modify an existing IP Static Route 4 Click Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem gt Dial out Static Routes tab Click Modify The Modify Dial out Static Route dialog box appears Enter the correct value Click OK to apply the change To delete an existing IP Static Route 1 Click Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem gt Dial out Static Routes tab Select the
495. s The total required is thus 28 lines If the BCM systems were using T1 trunks then two T1 spans would be required at each office Note that the total of 28 lines represents the worst case value for line usage In reality the total number of lines in use at any one time will generally be less than 28 For example during periods of peak incoming call traffic the demand for outgoing lines will be low With PRI Call by Call services it is not necessary to configure a fixed allocation of trunks Each of the 23 lines on the PRI can be used for DID private TIE or outgoing public calls This consolidation means that it may be possible for each office to use a single PRI span rather than two T1 spans With PRI Call by Call services the only limitation is that there are no more than 23 calls in progress at any one time The dialing plan at each BCM site is configured to determine the call type based on the digits dialed by the user If a user in Toronto wishes to dial a colleague in New York they dial the four digit private DN such as 6221 The dialing plan recognizes this as a private network DN and routes the call using TIE service with a private dialing plan Incoming TIE calls are routed to telephones based on the digits received by the network which in this case will be the four digit private DN If a user in either location wishes to dial an external number they dial 9 followed by the number such as 9 555 1212 The dialing plan re
496. s 1 Onthe top panel identify the loop as an S loop Refer to Configure loop type and general parameters on page 188 e Sampling e ONN block state 2 Onthe bottom panel identify which ISDN DNs to associate to the loop S loops assigned DNs on page 193 Default DNs 597 694 additional DNs 565 597 change type to ISDN e Assigned DNs e Loop DN must be on the Assigned DN list If you set this field to None unanswered calls are dropped If the field is left blank Assigned DNs make and receive data calls 3 Configure the ISDN DN records for the device s assigned to the loop Refer to Configuring an ISDN telephone DN record on page 204 DN records ISDN devices ISDN telephones and devices have a limited feature set They do not have programmable buttons or user preferences and do not support call forward features However you can assign Answer DNs and some capabilities features Task Determine the programming for individual telephones and devices attached to BRI module S loops e Configuring an ISDN telephone DN record on page 204 ISDN overview on page 535 For a detailed description of DN record panels and DN record procedures see DN records parameters in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 ISDN devices have a DN range that is unique to ISDN devices Process map Figure 64 provides an overview of the ISDN DN record configuration process NN40020 603 Chapter 21 Programming BRI S
497. s see Destination codes on page 262 Media gateways T 38 UDP redundancy refers to the number of times IP packets not fax pages are sent because TCP UDP does not support packet validation unlike TCP IP To configure media gateways click Configuration Resources Media Gateways NN40020 603 Chapter 47 T 38fax 403 Figure 119 Media Gateways panel Media Gateways Echo cancellation Enabled w NLP v T 38UDP redundancy 3 Note For more details and instructions on how to configure media gt gateways see Media Gateways panel on page 413 T 38 Fax restrictions Note Fax tones that broadcast through a telephone speaker can disrupt calls on other telephones using VoIP trunks near the fax machine Follow these suggestions to reduce the chance of your VoIP calls being dropped because of fax tone interference Locate the fax machine away from other telephones Turn the speaker volume on the fax machine to the lowest level or off Note Fax tones can be recorded in a voice mail box In the rare event that fax tones are captured in a voice mail message opening that message from a telephone using a VoIP trunk can cause the connection to fail Voice mail and T 38 FoIP share a maximum of eight fax ports Voice mail supports only two fax ports If you allow fax messaging for the local VoIP gateway you must be aware of the guidelines in Operational notes and restrictions on page
498. s starting from the front of the dial string the system will wait before sending to the public network About the Public Network DN lengths table In the public Network DN lengths table e You can define up to 30 entries e Each entry consists of a DN prefix string 1 to 10 digits and a length value two digits 1 25 e Several entries are predefined in the North America profile These defaults can handle most regions in North America without the need for additional programming If required you can remove or modify these entries e The table always contains one default entry You cannot remove this entry You can only modify the length parameter associated with this entry The default entry specifies the length of any dialing string that does not match one of the other table entries Adding a DN Prefix for public dialing The Default DN prefix cannot be deleted The DN length for this prefix varies depending on the country profile running on the system To add a new Prefix follow these steps 1 Inthe Public Network DN Lengths box click Add 2 Enter the new parameters DN Prefix e DN Length 3 Click Save Modifying a DN prefix You can only change the DN length for a prefix To change the prefix itself delete the existing prefix and enter a new one 1 Onthe Public Network DN Lengths panel click the DN prefix you want to modify 2 Click in the DN length field for that prefix and enter the new value
499. s an identifier that tells the IP telephone that this message is a VLAN discovery message id1 id2 idn are the VLAN ID numbers that DHCP can assign to the IP telephones You can have up to 10 VLAN ID numbers listed The VLAN ID numbers must be from 0 to 4095 For example if you wanted to use VLAN IDs 1100 1200 1300 and 1400 you would enter the following string in this box VLAN A 1100 1200 1300 1400 If you do not want DHCP to automatically assign VLAN IDs to the telephones enter VLAN A none in this text box Note1 The NORTEL IP Terminal VLAN ID string must be terminated with a period Note2 If you do not know the VLAN ID contact your network administrator Note3 For information about how to set up a VLAN refer to the user documentation that came with your VLAN compatible Switch Networking Configuration Guide 486 Chapter 66 DHCP Server Settings panel Main panel tabs Address Ranges Warning Whenever you make changes to the address range the DHCP server may become unavailable to clients for a brief period of time When making changes consider doing so at a time that will minimize the effect on users The Address Ranges tab specifies IP addresses to be provided to DHCP clients The Address Ranges tab has two tables Included Address Ranges and Reserved Addresses The Included Address Ranges specifies a range of IP addresses to be provided to DHCP clients DHCP subnets By default the DHC
500. s for two calls on a full duplex link with silence suppression Note that the peak bandwidth is twice the full transmission rate even though the average bandwidth is considerably less The spare bandwidth made available by silence suppression is available for lower priority data applications that can tolerate increased delay and jitter Figure 151 Two calls on a full duplex link with silence suppression Conversation Buenos noches Juan SE SSS Mf MAHK_GEAHAFA A TI FJF tu ESS SSA XG GG 999 Tx Ax VERD em Como esta Hello Fred This is Susan Do you have a minute z SS SS Fred here Hi Sure Conversation c Hane Used NS Channel Link max 5 d N SS Y Channel Link max WMA WM A YW EN v JA Tx Channel Bandwidth Time Peak channel bandwidth is n average Independent Tx and Ax bandwidth bandwidth per call not shared by half duplex calls Comfort noise To provide a more natural sound during periods of silence comfort noise is added at the destination gateway when silence suppression is active The source gateway sends information packets to the destination gateway informing it that silence suppression is active and describing what background comfort noise to insert The source gateway only sends the information packets when it detects a significant change in background noise Networking Configuration Guide 534 Appendix B Silence suppression
501. s from other systems can be directed to any type of telephone within the system You cannot program Auto DN or DISA DN for VoIP trunks therefore you cannot use CoS passwords to remotely access features on your system The exception to this would be a tandemned call where a call comes into system A over the PSTN then tandems to system B over a VoIP trunk In this case the remote access package on the line will determine which system features are available to the caller Pre installation system requirements Ensure that you have obtained the following information or familiarize yourself with the requirements before continuing with VoIP trunk configuration Networking Configuration Guide 368 Chapter 43 VoIP trunk gateways Keycodes Before you can use VoIP you must obtain and install the necessary keycodes See the Keycode Installation Guide NN40010 301 for more information about installing the keycodes Talk to your BCM sales agent if you need to purchase VoIP keycodes Each keycode adds a specific number of VoIP trunks To activate trunking you must reboot your BCM after you enter VoIP keycodes If you want to use the MCDN features on the VoIP trunks you will need an MCDN keycode If you have already deployed MCDN for your SL 1 PRI lines you do not require an additional keycode H 323 network applications considerations In order to maintain a level of quality during call setup QoS monitor must be enabled and configure
502. s is how the call would progress 1 A home based employee in Santa Clara wants to call someone in Ottawa so they dial into the local BCM network using the access code for an unsupervised trunk not VoIP trunks and the destination code and DN for the person they want to reach on System B 2 When the call is received from the public network at System A Santa Clara the system recognizes that the received number is not a local system number The call is received as a public call 3 System A has a route and destination code that recognizes the received number and destination code as belonging to the route that goes to System B Ottawa System A passes the call to System B over a dedicated trunk in this case a VoIP trunk This call is now designated as a private call type NN40020 603 Chapter 43 VoIP trunk gateways 373 dedicated VoIP trunk private network 4 System B recognizes the code as its own and uses a local target line to route the call to the correct telephone Target line XXX recognizes 2244 DN 2244 assigned with target line XXX DN 2244 Fallback to PSTN from VoIP trunks Fallback is a feature that allows a call to progress when a VoIP trunk is unavailable or is not providing adequate quality of service QoS Refer to the information under Describing a fallback network on page 374 for details about setting up fallback for VoIP trunks By enabling Fallback to ci
503. s it passes through the BCM call processing Variable Example or default settings Local Access Code 9 Coordinate these settings with Meridian National Access Code 61 routing for these calls types and the Private Access Code Special Access Code 911 Internal feature access Meanwhile you need to keep in mind that the leading digit of any of the above dialing codes cannot conflict with the other system access codes that you want to use Variable Example or default settings Park Prefix 1 101 125 Direct Dial Digit 0 Line pool and destination access codes Once these basic numbers have been picked you can decide what numbers to use for line pool access codes and or destination codes The system will not allow these codes to start with any of the numbers currently assigned If you are working with an established dialing plan you may want to ensure that the numbers that the users are familiar with dialing are reserved for these codes For instance if the users are familiar with dialing 9XXXXXXX to access numbers outside of their own offices you will want to reserve this number for the destination codes If you are setting up a new system you could opt to use the location codes of the other systems as destination codes or you could define one number for local calls but which are still outside the system and one number for long distance calls For example The users may dial 6 lt DN number for calls within
504. s panel and then click the module supporting the port you want to enable disable Select the port you want to enable disable in the Set Port Details tab Click either the Enable or Disable button The State field indicates the mode of operation for the port as shown in Figure 21 If the port is enabled this field shows unequipped unless a device is physically connected Networking Configuration Guide 88 Chapter 7 Managing modules Figure 21 Set Port Details Details for Module Internal Set Port Details Ports on Module Port DN Device type Version State 0401 221 Unequipped Unequipped 0402 222 Unequipped Unequipped 0403 22 Unequippe Unequipped 0404 224 Unequippec Unequippe 0405 225 Unequippec Unequipped D406 226 Unequipped Unequipped 0407 227 Unequipped Unequipped 0408 228 Unequipped Unequipped 0409 229 Unequipped Unequipped 0410 23 Unequippe Unequippe Note A trunk media bay module has no changeable settings on the gt Trunk Port Details record Trunk module metrics To view the current status of the module trunks you can use the Telephony Metrics Trunk Modules Metrics panel See the Administration Guide NN40020 600 for more information about telephony metrics NN40020 603 89 Chapter 8 Lines overview Telephony signals into the system within the system and out of the system are carried over channels For consistency these channels are all called li
505. s this process Figure 70 Local call tandemed through BCM nodes The BCM receives the call The system recognizes 9823 as the destination cock for the local PSTN route Route crops the koding cligit and dials out over the PSTN trunk The Mericlicin system recognizes the call cis ct local public call Deletes the routing digits Togs call eis Local call hype Sends out rest of dialout on private network Diclout unknown 823 2222 823 2222 The BCM Achs Local cock to front of called number 9 823 2222 The system knows 9823 is the route to the next system cine routes the call through private network Calls coming in from the public network need to be translated to their private network destination before routing tandeming through the private network In this case the route used is defined with the call type of Private Networking Configuration Guide 234 Chapter 24 Dialing plans Line pool access codes Line pool access codes allow you to assign an access code for each of the basic line pools A to O These codes specify the line pool for making an outgoing external call Up to three digits in length these codes do not allow any other routing programming The user simply dials the code in front of the dial string The system in turn deletes the entire code before sending the call out over the appropriate route If you need a more complex routing arrangement you need to specify routes and destina
506. sPrefix gt Private Type CDP CDP lt dialedDigitsPrefix gt Private Type UDP UDP lt dialedDigitsPrefix gt Routing Table Since VoIP trunks are point to point channels besides the local gateway information on your system you need to tell your system about the gateway at the remote end However if the network has a gatekeeper or a SIP Proxy Server it handles call traffic so a routing table is not required To configure a remote gateway you need to define the following information aname that identifies the destination system NN40020 603 Chapter 43 VoIP trunk gateways 371 e the IP address of the destination system e whether QoS monitor is enabled this is required if you plan to use PSTN fallback e transmit threshold so that the system knows when to activate the fallback feature e the remote gateway system type e the gateway protocol e the unique digit s that identify the remote system this is usually part of the destination code PSTN call to remote node Making a call to a remote node requires any BCM systems between the calling and receiving nodes to have the correct routing to pass the call on to the next node This is the same if you use PSTN lines or VoIP trunks for the network Figure 113 shows a call tandeming from the public network PSTN through System A Santa Clara and being passed to System B Ottawa over a VoIP trunk network In this case it might be a home based employe
507. sage waiting Refer to Programming MWI and MWC strings on page 348 Message wait string Indicates that the voice messages have been retrieved This is a default NSI string for message waiting Programming MWI and MWC strings MWI and MWC information is received from the network in the form of NSI strings The default MWI and MWC strings are default NSI strings for Message Waiting 58B AN 1 Message Waiting Indication 58B AN 0 Message Waiting Cancellation This provides the information required to program the strings as AN 1 for MWI and AN 0 for MWC Private network strings will differ with different message centers These should only be changed on the advice of your customer service representative DPNSS The NSI strings in DPNSS are dependent on the supplier of the PBX Therefore the strings vary depending on the originating PBX system Each string has the following default structure 58XYYYYY Table 75 describes each part of the NSI string Table 75 Parts of the NSI string String Component Description 58 Identifies that it is an NSI string X Any letter from A to Z or nothing YYYYY Manufacturer specific string which can contain any sequence of alphanumeric digits or Marks the end of the identifier Only the YYYYY portion of the string must be programmed for MWI and MWC The procedure is similar to Set Name Line Name The following criteria must be met when pr
508. se PSTN fallback is unlikely to result in better quality of service in that scenario NN40020 603 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources 119 Table 22 H323 Settings fields Sheet 2 of 5 Field Value Description Forward redirected OLI check box If the check box is selected the OLI of an internal telephone is forwarded over the VoIP trunk when a call is transferred to an external number over the private VoIP network If the check box is cleared only the CLID of the transferred call is forwarded Send name display check box When selected the telephone name is sent with outgoing calls to the network Remote capability MWI check box This setting must coordinate with the functionality of the remote system hosting the remote voice mail Normal route fallback None Select None or Prime set If Prime set is selected and the to Prime set outgoing IP trunk leg of the call in a tandem scenario cannot be completed the call will terminate on the prime set for the line Default None Gateway protocol None Both these protocols require a keycode SL1 SL1 Use this protocol only for BCM 2 5 systems CSE CSE Use this protocol for BCM 3 0 and later systems This protocol supports Meridian 1 IPT Otherwise use None Gatekeeper digits 0 9 If dialed digits match gatekeeper digits the call is routed via H323 protocol If the digits do not match the call is routed via SIP p
509. select the filter where you want to delete information 2 Onthe Restrictions table select the restriction filter that has the exception that you want to delete 3 On the Exceptions table click one or more of the exceptions 4 Under the Exceptions table click Delete 5 Click OK The default values for restriction filters are based on country profile Refer to Default filters on page 436 and Default filters for other common profiles on page 437 Adding a restriction filter and exceptions To add a restriction filter oar O N a 8 9 On the Filters table select the number for the Restriction Filter where you want to add filters Under the Restrictions table click Add Enter the digits that you want to restrict if they precede a dial string going out of the system Click OK Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all filters you want to add If you need to apply overrides to a filter on the Restricted table click the restricted digit to which you want to add overrides Under the Exceptions table click Add Enter the number that you want to allow when this restriction is in effect Repeat steps 7 and 8 for all overrides you want to add to this filter 10 Repeat steps 6 to 9 for all the filters to which you want to add overrides Networking Configuration Guide 436 Chapter 54 Call security Restriction filters 11 Click OK 12 Next steps Assign filters to lines DN records and class of service CoS pass
510. sing select Configuration Telephony Dialing Plan Private network ID Enter the network system identifier the Meridian system administrator supplied between 1 and 127 if you are networked with a Meridian 1 somewhere in the network select Configuration Telephony Dialing Plan Private Network panel Private network type Install a DTM module to connect to the appropriate PRI SL 1 trunk or enter the keycode for the required number of VoIP trunks Configure the lines you plan to use assigning them to the same line pool Refer to Configuring lines PRI on page 145 and Configuring VoIP lines on page 385 Enter the MCDN keycode Choose the MCDN network features that you want to use Select Configuration Telephony Dialing Plan Private Network panel and then select the MCDN subpanel Set up routing to target the PRI or VoIP line pool you set up Set up your dialing plan to recognize the network system identifiers of the other nodes on the system so your system can pass them along as required Assign the pool to any telephones you want to allow to use this line Program target lines and assign to telephones Set up the voice mail DN for the system that is being used as the host voice mail system for your network Test the link Refer to the CallPilot documentation to set up the mailboxes or auto attendant features and other voice mail parameters NN40020 603 357 Chapter 41 Dialing plan
511. slation call control admission control bandwidth control zone management IP registration Networking Configuration Guide 378 Ch apter 43 VoIP trunk gateways A single gatekeeper manages a set of H 323 endpoints This unit is called a Gatekeeper Zone A zone is a logical relation that can unite components from different networks LANS These Gateway zones such as the BCM are configured with one or more alias names that are registered with the gatekeeper The gatekeeper stores the alias IP mapping internally and uses them to provide aliases to IP address translation services Later if an endpoint IP address changes that endpoint must re register with the gatekeeper The endpoint must also re register with the gatekeeper during the time to live TTL period if one is specified by the gatekeeper Refer to the gatekeeper software documentation for information about changing IP addresses Note A gatekeeper may help to simplify IP configuration or the BCM dialing gt plan however it will not simplify the network dialing plan Gatekeeper call scenarios The following explains how a call would be processed for the two types of gatekeeper configurations Figure 116 shows a network with three BCMs and a gatekeeper Figure 116 BCM systems with a gatekeeper gatekeeper IP 10 10 10 17 BCM50 Ottawa IP 10 10 10 18 LL CM gt Le a e EEEN B ANNO A BCM50 Santa Cl
512. source is created through routing to target lines or using DISA For auto answer trunks being used to allow remote call in from system users the trunk can be configured to answer with a straight dial tone if DISA has not been enabled It can also be configured to answer with a stuttered dial tone if DISA is enabled and the caller is expected to enter a CoS password The CoS password defines which system features the caller is permitted to access Manual answer trunks are assigned to one or more telephones The assigned telephones exclusively own the line Note You require Disconnect supervision on the line if loop start trunks are to operate in auto ans wer mode Answer with DISA Loop GS E amp M BRI lt check box gt Define whether the system prompts a caller for a six digit class of service CoS password This setting appears for T1 loop start T1 E amp M lines that have auto answer mode and analog trunks Set this option to No for T1 E amp M lines on a private network that have auto answer mode To program DISA on a PRI trunk you need to specify a DISA DN see Call Security Configuring Direct Inward System Access DISA on page 427 and Dialing plan Private network settings on page 281 NN40020 603 Chapter 10 Configuring lines 137 Table 29 Preferences details fields for lines Sheet 3 of 3 Attribute Value Description panel L
513. specific telephone such as a headoffice answer attendant enter that remote number here Ensure that you include the proper routing information Networking Configuration Guide 162 Chapter 14 Configuring lines T1 Loop start Under the Restrictions tab e Use remote package If this line allows remote call ins ensure that you define a remote package Line Restrictions Enter a valid restriction filter for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of outgoing calls e Remote Restrictions Enter a valid remote access package for the Normal schedule and any other schedules that you want this line to be part of incoming calls from remote users or private networks 3 Assign the lines to DNs Assigned DNs on page 138 If you have configured the DNs and know to which telephones the line needs to be assigned you can enter those DNs here The DN record also can be used to assign lines e DN Unique number e Appearance Type Choose Appr only or Appr amp Ring if the telephone has an available button with indicator otherwise choose Ring only The 7000 and 7100 digital phones have no programmable buttons so this must be set to Ring only Model 7000 phones supported in Europe only e VMsg set When activated an indicator on the telephone appears when a message from a remote voice mail system is waiting Check with your system administrator for the system voice mail setup before chan
514. ss CallPilot Refer to the CallPilot documentation for task and Manager on page 349 feature details Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about Hospitality services Centralized Voice Messaging external voice mail This panel allows you to record on the system the dial strings that allow users on your system to access a remote voice messaging service Note that public or private trunks need to be properly configured for these numbers to work Figure 108 Voice Message Centers table Centralized Voice Messaging Voice Message Centers Center External Number Message Waiting Indication String Message Waiting Cancellation String 2 AN I AN Ott 3 AN AN O 4 AN AN O 5 AN 1 AN O Networking Configuration Guide 348 Chapter 39 Configuring voice messaging Table 74 describes each field on this panel Table 74 Voice Message Centers Table cancellation string MWC Attribute Values Description Center lt read only gt You can define a maximum of five external voice message centers Note that any one user can only be connected to one center External Number lt dial string gt This is the number for the external voice message center Ensure that you add the appropriate routing information Message wait lt string gt Indicates that the message center has a message in the indicate string mailbox MWI This is a default NSI string for mes
515. ss of Service password replaces any normally applicable line restriction The default setting None means that any normally applicable line filter still applies Remote Package None Package lt plus a two digit remote package gt Refer to Call security Remote access packages on page 439 for more information Adding or modifying a CoS password values Programming references e Notes about CoS passwords on page 445 NN40020 603 Chapter 56 Configuring CoS passwords for remote access 445 e External access tones on page 447 Note You can add a maximum of 99 CoS Passwords To add or modify a CoS password 1 On the Class of Service table click the CoS line to which you want to add or modify a password 2 Select the field you want to change and enter the appropriate information Name Enter a descriptive name for the password or user Password Enter a set of six digits that are unique from any other CoS password Set Restriction Filter If you want the user to be able to override set and line set restrictions for the number being called enter the allowed filters Line Restriction Filter If you want the user to be able to override the line restrictions that the call uses to access the system enter the allowed filters here Remote Package Enter the remote package that you want the system to use to determine the level of access the user will have to system features Notes ab
516. ssignment Systems configured using the DID template automatically assign target lines to all assigned DNs You also require target lines when you use PRI T1 or VoIP trunks Target lines use line numbers 125 to 268 To view these lines select Configuration Telephony gt Lines gt Target Lines Record this information in your system Programming Records so you have a clear view of where each line is assigned Other features e Each target line can be assigned to more than one telephone e A telephone can have multiple appearances of a target line Target lines are internal direct links the BCM uses to allow external callers to dial specific system telephones or a group of system telephones You assign the target line to one or more telephone DNs and then configure the target line to function as you require You can also assign multiple appearances of a target line to one telephone This allows more than one call to simultaneously use the target line Target lines are required by lines that support multiple numbers over one trunk T1 E amp M DID trunks T1 DID trunks PRI trunks and VoIP trunks Caution Changing the received length If you change the received length for your system the Public number entry for the target lines will clear if the new received length is less than the number entered in this field If the new received length has more digits than the number entered in this field you need to change the entry ma
517. st digit in a dial string defined as private and is read based on the private DN length Example if the dialed number is 7880 and the private DN length is 4 the system scans the four digits from the right recognizing the 7 as the private access code for this system Private network CDP UDP You can specify if your Private network uses a coordinated type None dialing plan CDP or a universal dialing plan UDP If you choose None the private networking supplementary services are not available Private Network ID 1 127 This is the unique number that identifies the system to the CDP UDP Meridian PRI MCDN network Both end points must match on a networks PRI MCDN network On a VoIP trunking MCDN network this ID must be the same on all nodes This number is supplied by the private network administrator Location code lt up to seven This code identifies this particular system for calls within the digits gt network for a UDP dialing plan This number must be unique Note The system uses the Private Access Code length plus the Location code length plus the DN length to determine the DN length required to determine that a call is a private network call Private DN length 3 14 The Private DN length parameter specifies the length of a dial string that the system uses to determine that the call is a private network call when the route uses DN Type Private CDP and UDP private DN lengths are de
518. strictions DND on busy must be programmed as N DN Capabilities for a telephone to accept Call Offer If CF on busy is programmed for the telephone Call Offer is not accepted The target line for the telephone must be set to If busy busy tone which is the default Refer to Configuring lines Target lines on page 141 Call Offer does not work if sent over Manual answer lines It is recommended that the lines be left at the default Auto Note Forward on Busy takes priority over DND on Busy Call Offer cannot be accepted by putting an active call on hold NN40020 603 Chapter 36 Private networking DPNSS network services UK only 335 Route Optimization Route Optimization is a DPNSS 1 feature for BCM that allows calls to follow the optimum route between two end PBXs This allows efficient use of network resources No system programming is required for the feature when BCM is working as a terminating PBX system However BCM must have a private access code programmed that maps to a valid destination code or line pool code on DPNSS lines Further Allow redirect must be set to selected For more information see Capabilities tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Loop avoidance To set Loop avoidance during hardware configuration Click the keys beside Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources In one of the expansion modules select DPNSS Click the Trunk Module Parameters ta
519. suppliers for local and long distance telephone service By programming a destination code any call that begins with 9 which is the most common dial out digit automatically uses lines dedicated to local service To build a route to allow local calls 1 Create a route that uses the line pool you assigned for the PSTN trunks Refer to Routes on page 260 2 Create a destination code record and enter a destination code such as 9 which is a common local call code Refer to Grouping destination codes using a wild card on page 251 For local calls only there are no dial out numbers Compare with Setting up a route through a dedicated trunk on page 250 The destination code can use a different route depending on what schedule is assigned In the current example the route you define is used when someone dials 9 during Normal mode when the other Schedules are turned off Networking Configuration Guide 250 Chapter 25 Dialing plan Routing configurations 3 Setup the Normal schedule with the route number you defined in step 1 Figure 75 Routing Service programming example Routing Service services Routing Service Route Dial out if required Use Pool 000 999 max 24 digits or characters 001 none lJBCDEFGHIJKLMNO 002 none Alc DEFGHIJKLMNO Figure 76 shows an example of a destination codes programming record filled out Figure 76 Destination codes for call routing Destination
520. t and DASS2 trunks route calls using the Public received number Private network dialing If your BCM is part of a private network you have a choice of dialing plans However all BCMs on a network must use the same type of dialing plan and have the same Private DN lengths to ensure proper call direction Plan these settings before you start programming for the private network e UDP Universal Dialing Plan uses a destination code and a location code plus the set DN that is 6 403 XXXX to determine where a call gets routed You specify a Private DN length to allow all required digits to be dialed Each node on the network has a unique location code e CDP Coordinated Dialing Plan uses a unique steering code that is transparent to the user and is dialed as part of the destination set s DN that is 2X XXX for one node 3X XXX for another node and so on to determine where the call gets routed Since each node on the network has a unique code no other routing is required e The Meridian system administrator or the call control system generates the Private Network IDs These IDs are unique to each node on a network Both UDP and CDP must include this code in programming Setting up public network dialing The public network settings allows you to enter DN lengths for the networks the callers are allowed to dial including special numbers such as 411 and 911 The public DN lengths table is used for all PRI calls except for those routes
521. t Suppression bit Suppression bit Table 31 describes the fields found on the Loop main panel Table 31 Loops main panel Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description Loop lt X01 X04 gt Each BRI module supports four loops eight lines for T loop programming Type T This setting defines whether the loop supports trunks S T loop or device connections S loop Note This variable may be different for different market profiles Protocol Euro Select the appropriate ISDN protocol QSIG The values displayed depend on both the market profile and NI 2 software keycodes Euro ETSI ISDN standard QSIG also an ETSI standard Only appears if the ETSI QSIG keycode is loaded NI 2 Sampling Adaptive Select a sampling rate for the S loop S loops only Fixed Fixed two or more S interface devices use the loop and N A the length of the loop is less than 200 m 650 ft Adaptive two or more S interface devices use the loop and the length of the loop is greater than 200 m 650 ft If one device is using the loop the length of the loop can be a maximum of 1000 m 3230 ft ONN blocking Suppression bit Service code Set the Outgoing Name and Number ONN Blocking When you activate ONN a user can press FEATURE 819 to block the outgoing name and number on a per call basis Programming note Ensure that all telephones that have this feature available are assigned valid OLI numbers Refer to Programm
522. t up a network of BCMs 1 Ensure that the existing network can support the additional VoIP traffic Coordinate a Private dialing plan between all the systems On each BCM e Set up outgoing call configuration for the VoIP gateway e Set telephones to receive incoming calls through target lines e Configure the PSTN fallback and enable QoS on both systems This system uses fallback to PSTN so calls can be routed across the PSTN connection if VoIP traffic between the BCMs becomes too heavy If only one of the BCMs in a network has a line to the PSTN network all public calls from other systems are funneled through the system with the PSTN connection and all communication between the systems occurs over VoIP trunks To facilitate this system you need to ensure that the destination codes on the non PSTN system point to the system connected to the PSTN and then to the PSTN On the PSTN connected system the system and destination codes must be configured to recognize and pass public calls from the other system out into the PSTN network Since the receiving PSTN sees the calls as remote dial ins ensure that the correct remote access packages have been established for the VoIP trunks This also means that if the VoIP trunks are inaccessible between the systems there is no provision for a fallback route NN40020 603 Chapter 35 Private networking PRI and VoIP tandem networks 329 Figure 103 demonstrates an example of routing all public c
523. t you dialed Routing service replaces a number of manual tasks including entering a line pool code NN40020 603 Chapter 24 Dialing plans 235 dialing an access code for a long distance carrier e deciding which line pool to use according to the time and day You can set up routing to take advantage of any leased or discounted routes using information supplied by the customer The system cannot tell what lines are cheaper to use For Call by Call service selection PRI only the installer defines destination codes for various call types over PRI lines for example Foreign Exchange TIE Trunk or OUTWATS The user dials a number using the intercom button without entering any special information For more information see Provisioning for Call by Call limits with PRI on page 238 Warning Plan your routing service before you do any programming Routing affects every call placed in the system and must be carefully planned to avoid conflicts and gaps in the programming Use tables to design routes and destination codes then check for potential problems before you start programming It also saves you time when all the settings are written out in front of you Routing configuration The settings for a call routing include athree digit route number 000 999 e external digits up to 24 digits e a line pool destination codes max of 500 available up to 12 digits e DN type and or Service Type e publ
524. ta channel PRI DASS2 DPNSS e CTM North America GATM Analog Loop BRE BRI S T e Target lines BRI loops programming The Loops panels define the loop numbers and loop attributes that correspond to the DIP switch settings that were configured on the BRI trunk media bay modules installed on your system Check your Programming Record to see which modules are installed and what settings were chosen Available BRI trunk loop attributes are determined by the country profile that is assigned to your system All profiles allow BRI programming however there is a difference between T1 based profiles and for E1 based profiles Once loops are provisioned the system assigns two line numbers per loop These lines are then programmed as you would any other lines You can program a loop to support either trunking services to the ISDN network or terminal services to one or more ISDN devices The following sections describe the programming for each type of loop For complete module installation instructions and safety precautions see the Installation and Maintenance Guide NN40020 302 Programming links Determine line assignments for routing Line Job Aids on page 94 NN40020 603 Chapter 8 Lines overview 93 Line record The line record allows you to e Identify the line and the features on the line Assign restrictions for outgoing calls Line characteristics Assign a voice message center if the line connects t
525. tact Center Line Job Aids See the following additional information e Determining line numbers and destination codes on page 95 e Line pool tips on page 96 NN40020 603 Chapter 8 Lines overview 95 Using loss packages on page 97 Turn Privacy on or off for a call on page 98 Determining line numbers and destination codes Refer to Table 11 for a list of lines assigned per bus DS30 bus and offset based on the module type configured with that address You can use this chart to note which lines should be active for the modules you installed You can also note which line pool you put the lines in and note the line pool access codes or routes and destination codes to which you assigned the line pools or use your programming records Follow these steps to use the table 1 2 For each bus number circle the module you set to that number Beside the module name circle the group of line numbers appropriate for the offset you set on the modules In the Line pool column indicate a line pool name if you want to associate lines into a pool This enables assigned telephones to grab any free line from the pool On the far right column list the access codes and routes associated with the lines Networking Configuration Guide 96 Chapter 8 Lines overview Table 11 Line numbering for modules and VoIP DS30 Typ
526. tails about the fields on this panel refer to H323 Media Parameters on page 122 and SIP Media Parameters on page 126 1 Onthe Modules panel in the Module type column select the IP Trunks line 2 Inthe bottom panel select the H323 or SIP Media Parameters tab 3 Enter the information that supports your system Ensure that these settings are consistent with the other systems on the network e Preferred Codecs Choose codecs in the same order for all remote equipment e Settings Enable Voice Activity Detection Disable or enable this feature based on network requirements Also refer to Silence suppression on page 529 Jitter buffer Voice Either choose auto to let the system determine resource availability or choose a buffer size Payload Size Change the defaults to coordinate with other systems on the network Operations note Fax tones that broadcast through a telephone speaker may disrupt calls at other telephones using VoIP trunks in the vicinity of the fax machine Here are some suggestions to minimize the possibility of your VoIP calls being dropped because of fax tone interference Locate fax machine away from other telephones Turn the speaker volume on the fax machine to the lowest level or off if that option is available NN40020 603 Chapter 44 Configuring VoIP trunk gateways 383 Force G 711 for 3 1k audio When enabled the system forces the VoIP trunk to use the G 711 codec for 3 1
527. te This feature is not applicable for alerting calls Figure 9 shows how TAT reduces the line requirements The solid line shows Telephone A calling Telephone B and being transferred over an additional PRI line to Telephone C With TAT active the same call is transferred to Telephone C over the same PRI line Networking Configuration Guide 50 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview Figure 9 Call paths with and without TAT BCM BCM Telephone C Telephone A Telephone B gt Forwarded call no TAT J Forwarded call using TAT Networking with ETSI QSIG International systems only ETSI QSIG is the European standard signaling protocol for multi vendor peer to peer communications between PBX systems and or central offices See ETSI Euro network services on page 51 Figure 10 illustrates an ETSI QSIG network Note that this is exactly the same setup as that shown in the MCDN section for North America The hardware programming for ETSI QSIG is described in Table 6 All other configurations are the same as those shown in the MCDN section for North America NN40020 603 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview 51 Figure 10 ETSI QSIG networking Network 2221 Network 6221 Received 2221 Received 6221 Internal 2221 Internal 6221 PRI BRI ETSI QSIG BCM West end branch BCM East end branch DN 4221 Office Ta
528. te network trunks PRI or VoIP trunks are configured enter a Private received This number is usually the same as the DN Distinct Ring If you want this line to have a special ring indicate a pattern 2 3 4 or None 2 Configure the trunk line data Preferences tab Aux ringer If your system is equipped with an external ringer you can enable this setting to allow this line to ring at the external ringer If Busy To automatically direct calls to the prime telephone select To prime from the drop down menu or select Busy tone Voice message center If the system is using a remote voice mail select the center configured with the contact number Redirect to To automatically direct calls out of the system to a specific telephone such as a headoffice answer attendant enter that remote number here Ensure that you include the proper routing information 3 Assign the lines to DNs see Assigned DNs on page 138 If you have configured the DNs and know to which telephones the line needs to be assigned you can enter those DNs here The DN record can also be used to assign lines refer to Line Access Line Assignment tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 DN Unique number Appearance Type Choose Appr only or Appr amp Ring if the telephone has an available button otherwise choose Ring only Appearances Target lines can have more than one appearance so that multiple calls can be accommodated For teleph
529. te with the system The system by default uses ports 28000 to 28255 to transmit VoIP packets BCM uses UDP port ranges to provide high priority to VoIP packets in existing legacy IP networks You must reserve these same port ranges and set them to high priority on all routers that an administrator expects to have QoS support You do not need to reserve port ranges on DiffServ networks You can select any port ranges that are not used by well known protocols or applications Each H 323 or VoIP Realtime Transfer Protocol RTP flow uses two ports one for each direction The total number of UDP port numbers to be reserved depends on how many concurrent RTP flows are expected to cross a router interface In general Include port number UDP 5000 in the reserved port ranges for the QoS monitor The port ranges reserved in a BCM system are also reserved by the remote router You must reserve two ports for each voice call you expect to carry over the IP network You can reserve multiple discontinuous ranges BCM requires that each range meet the following conditions Each range must start with an even number each range must end with an odd number no more than 256 ports can be reserved Note By default SIP uses port 5060 Gatekeepers The BCM supports the use of an ITU H323 gatekeeper A gatekeeper is a third party software application residing somewhere on the network which provides services such as address tran
530. tem establishes a new path that uses the T 38 protocol Both the endpoints must be running a software version that supports the T 38 fax Caution Operations note Fax tones that broadcast through a telephone speaker may disrupt calls at other telephones using VoIP trunks in the vicinity of the fax machine Here are some suggestions to minimize the possibility of your VoIP calls being dropped because of fax tone interference e Locate fax machine away from other telephones e Turn the speaker volume on the fax machine to the lowest level or off Fax tones recorded in a voice mailbox In the rare event that fax tones are captured in a voice mail message opening that message from an telephone using a VoIP trunk will cause the connection to fail For a list of limitations and requirements for using T 38 fax refer to Operational notes and restrictions on page 379 Operational notes and restrictions Some fax machines will be unable to successfully send faxes over VoIP T 38 trunks to the following destinations CallPilot mailboxes CallPilot mailboxes accessed through auto attendant Fax Transfer calls transferred to a system fax device through the auto attendant Use the following tips to avoid this problem Networking Configuration Guide 380 Chapter 43 VoIP trunk gateways Avoid the use of manual dial on the originating fax machine In some fax machines manually dialing introduces a much shorter call time out
531. temporarily lose connectivity to the network The IP address fields are read only However you can modify their values using the Modify button Warning If any of the IP settings are changed in the modify window for IP settings the Element Manager will disconnect Networking Configuration Guide 456 Chapter 60 IP Subsystem To modify an IP address Click Configuration gt System gt IP Subsystem gt General Settings tab 2 Click Modify The Modify IP Settings dialog box appears Enter the appropriate values See Table 94 for a description of these fields Click OK You may need to restart your Element Manager to reconnect with the BCM DNS Settings options Enter the DNS Settings options for the BCM to obtain domain name information from a DNS server MTU option BCM allows you to change the MTU based upon your network architecture NN40020 603 Chapter 60 IP Subsystem 457 Figure 128 General Settings panel IP Subsystem General Settings Intemal Subnets Dial Qut Static Routes System name bcm50R2 MAC address IP Settings Obtain IP address dynamically IP address IP subnet mask Default gateway DNS Settings DNS domainname ca nortel com Primary DNS address Secondary DNS address MTU size 1500 Table 94 General Settings Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description System name alphanumeric Enter a name to iden
532. ter 29 Dialing plan Private network settings Table 57 VoIP special dialing plan values Virtual Private digits Default 0 Network ID This is the VPN ID for a remote system such as Succession 1000 M In some applications such as for the Survivable Remote Gateway SRG acting as a Branch Office this ID is required to ensure that Bandwidth Management is handled correctly for calls coming into the Succession 1000 M from your system See VPN overview on page 525 for more information on VPN Zone ID digits Default 0 A remote system such as Succession 1000 M may configure your system into a separate zone to accommodate specific dialing requirements such as for an SRG system acting as a Branch Office to a Succession 1000 M system The system administrator of the Succession 1000 M system provides the Zone ID Enter that number here and include it in any destination codes directed to or through that system so that the remote system can correctly direct incoming calls ETSI specific network features The features contained in the ETSI subpanel are service provider based network services available for some PRI ETSI lines This subpanel is illustrated in Figure 91 Figure 91 ETSI private network settings ETSI Network Diversion oO MOD 7 Use Table 58 to determine the settings you want to define network services feature availability Table 58 ETSI MCDN and VoIP trunk private network settings fi
533. termined this way CDP the system uses the telephone DN length UDP the system combines the private access code length location code length telephone DN length When a call comes in the system recognizes the leading digits as a private call and removes truncates them leaving the telephone DN which is recognized as the private DN length Networking Configuration Guide 284 Chapter 29 Dialing plan Private network settings Note The value entered for Private Access Code should be a local digit E different than the digits used as Destination Codes in Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Routing gt Destination Codes This field should not be blank For example if there are routes that use 9 and 6 as Destination Codes a good value for this field could be 1 2 3 4 5 7 or 8 Using a blank value or 9 or 6 will cause a Fail of the call reason Reject Private Network MCDN network PRI SL 1 PRI ETSI VoIP If your system is part of a private network using the MCDN protocol you may need to configure these special dialing access codes and network settings Figure 89 illustrates the MCDN panel Figure 89 MCDN network values MCDN Local access code National access code Special access code Network ICCL Fi TRO TT Table 56 describes the values for these fields Table 56 Private network values Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Values Description Pri
534. that does not have PSTN line access or which is not located within the local dialing range you can set up a routing plan that allows the users of the private network to dial into your system and through your system to the PSTN network This type of call feature is referred to as tandem dialing Refer to Programming for tandem dialing on page 293 The reverse is also true You can set up routing so that calls from the PSTN can be passed through your system and over the private network to the remote node Also refer to Private networking PRI and VoIP tandem networks on page 323 Figure 94 Tandem dialing through a BCM to or from a private network Private Network Node ant T1 lines T1 ESM ia Analog lines Public i nee QIL PRI SL1 s sn 8 PRI BRI lines Network VolP Y mm mm 518 i mana ETT MH TA aana NE Programming for tandem dialing Since incoming lines terminate within the system you need to set up routing to pass the calls along to the required destination Lines e Setup private network lines as auto answer if applicable e Put private and public lines into separate line pools e Assign lines to configured Remote Access Packages Networking Configuration Guide 294 Chapter 31 Public networking Tandem calls from private node Dialing plan Routing e Coordinate Dialing plan with private network node e Assign each line pool to a rout
535. the Auto DN on the other system e Answer with DISA cannot be administer to voice over IP VoIP since they do not connect systems outside the private network However a user calling in remotely on another system on the network can use the trunk to access the system or a user calling in on a PSTN line can use the trunk to access the private network To provide control for this type of access ensure that you specify remote access packages for the trunk Defining remote access packages The Remote access packages setting allows you to control the remote access to line pools and remote page NN40020 603 Chapter 52 Call security and remote access 423 Create a remote access package by defining the system line pools remote users can access You then assign the package to individual lines and to a particular Class of Service password see Defining CoS passwords on page 423 Defining CoS passwords CoS passwords permit controlled access to the system resources by both internal and remote users e When an internal user enters a CoS password at a telephone the restriction filters associated with the CoS password apply instead of the normal restriction filters e Similarly when a remote user enters a CoS password on an incoming auto answer line the restriction filters and remote package associated with their CoS password apply instead of the normal restriction filters and remote package Notes about CoS passwords The CoS passwor
536. the Normal schedule Refer to Setting up a route through a dedicated trunk on page 250 If all the required numbers are defined in the dial string clear the External Number field Choose the line pool that contains the local service carrier lines Now you need to create a destination code and assign the route to the Night schedule In this case the change in route uses the start and stop times for Night Schedule 5 Create 91 as a Destination code 6 Make sure Absorbed length is set at 1 7 Under Night schedule enter the route you defined in step 1 Calls that begin with the digits 91 travel out without using the access code when the Night schedule becomes active or when you turn it on at a control telephone Using multiple routes and overflow routing If all the lines used by a route specified by a destination code are busy when a call is made you can program other routes that the system automatically flows the calls to or you can allow the call to overflow directly to the Normal route schedule usually the most expensive route However this only takes effect if an active schedule is applied to the line Overflow routing is not available in Normal mode You must create overflow routes for each destination code for which you want to allow overflow routing NN40020 603 Chapter 25 Dialing plan Routing configurations 253 To set up the multiple routing overflow feature 1 You assign the preferred routes in a destination cod
537. the call type to the DISA DN With FX INWATS 900 and SDS service types either a Service Id SID or a CDN is mapped to Target Line Receive Digits This is programmed under Configuring PRI Call by Call services on page 148 DISA may be accessed by having the SID or CDN map to the DISA DN This example has a Receive Digit Length 4 DISA DN 1234 and CbC Routing with Service Type FX Map from SID 2 Map to digits 1234 A call presented to the BCM system with service type FX and SID 2 will be handled as follows The ISDN setup message will specify FX with SID 2 The FX SID z 2 will be mapped to DISA DN digits 1234 The call will be answered with DISA Refer to Configuring lines PRI on page 145 Remote access on DPNSS lines A remote caller can access a BCM system dial tone select a line pool that contains exchange lines or DPNSS lines and then dial a number The procedure is identical to dialing an outside number from an extension in the local system The main features are Calls coming from another switch to the BCM system are routed in two ways depending on the Answer mode that you program If the Answer mode is set to Manual and the line is assigned to ring at an extension the incoming call automatically rings at the assigned extension If Answer mode is set to Auto BCM automatically answers the incoming call Because most other DPNSS features are extension specific Nortel recommends that you configure
538. the destination digit for the remote system set the absorbed length to the number of digits in the destination code The system will dial out the External you entered in front of the rest of the number that the user dialed This would occur if the network is set up with a UDP dialing plan Note Do not add alternative routes second or third Since fallback is active the system immediately falls back to the Normal schedule if the first route is not available NN40020 603 Chapter 46 Setting up VoIP trunks for fallback 395 Absorbed length Normal schedule If this is a private network PSTN line and the network uses a CDP dialing plan and the remote system identifier is 2 which is part of the remote system DN structure and you specified destination digit of 2 for the remote gateway then configured a destination code of 82 set this field to 1 so that the 2 is still part of the dialout If the destination code is different from the private access code destination digits for the remote system UDP dialing plan or this is a public PSTN enter private access code or the public access number to the remote system into the External field on the route record In this case set the absorbed length to the number of digits in the destination code The system will dial out the External you entered in front of the rest of the number that the user dialed Setting up the VoIP schedule to overflow Once you have configured the routing
539. the forwarded telephone These are programmable only by an installer and not by the user e If multiple telephones are programmed to take a call the first telephone to respond will act All other telephones responding are ignored Therefore if the first telephone to respond has Diversion enabled this feature will be invoked Hestrictions by telephone type e all variations supported on BCM digital and IP telephones e ATA2 ASM8 all variations supported on an ATA e SDN all variations supported on ISDN telephones except Diversion on Busy and CFWD Busy Setting Diversion You set Diversion for DPNSS in the same way as Call Forward You will need to enter the end DN when prompted You may also need to include the DPNSS 1 routing number Using the Redirection feature Redirection is a DPNSS 1 feature similar to BCM Transfer Callback With Redirection a call awaiting connection or reconnection is redirected by the originating party to an alternate destination after a time out period Failed calls can also be redirected Priority calls are not redirected Note The address to redirect depends on the history of the call Calls that have been transferred are redirected to the party that transferred them In all other cases the address to redirect is the one registered at the PBX system originating the redirection Note BCM does not support the redirection of BCM originated calls even over DPNSS 1 The Diversion on
540. the private network ensure that you indicate a remote package that provides only the availability that you want external callers to have This attribute is typically used for tandeming calls Schedule Default Normal Night Evening Lunch Sched 4 Sched 5 Sched 6 Line Restrictions lt 00 99 gt Enter the restriction filter number that applies to each Use Filter schedule controls outgoing calls he eae lt 00 99 gt Enter the restriction filter that applies to each schedule Use Filter This setting provides call controls for incoming calls over a private network or from remote user dialing in over PSTN Assigned DNs The Assigned DNs tabbed panel displays the DN properties for lines that are assigned to telephones This information can also be configured on the DN record Any information added deleted or modified in this table reflects in the DN record Note Lines that do not allow single line assignment such as PRI lines and VoIP lines gt will not display this tabbed panel The Assigned DNs tab is shown in Figure 39 NN40020 603 Chapter 10 Configuring lines 139 Figure 39 Add a DN record Details for Line 061 Properties Preferences Restrictions Assigned DNs DN Appearance Type Appearances Caller ID Set Vmsg Set 221 Appr amp Ring N o o Add Add Line Appearance To add a DN record to a line record In the top panel click the line where you wa
541. the problem is related to the delay in initiating the fax session reduce the number of rings for fax mailboxes Call Forward No Answer CENA NN40020 603 405 Chapter 48 Port ranges overview The Port Ranges panel provides a list of which Ports are currently being used for RTP UDP UDP and Signaling In the case of RTP over UDP and UDP it allows changes to the ports being used For information on configuring port ranges see Port Ranges panel on page 407 Warning Port configuration should not be changed unless absolutely necessary such as l in instances where port configurations are causing conflicts or if a firewall is restricting communications over certain ports RTP over UDP RTP over UDP is used by IP sets to connect to media gateways and by IP trunks to connect to remote devices or PDM devices All of these services require RTP over UDP Each media gateway uses two ports By default RTP over UDP is set to use the port range 28000 28255 It s recommended that you keep 256 ports configured for RTP over UDP The BCM requires a minimum of 110 ports to support necessary services This includes 32 IP sets 11 voice mail and contact center voiceports and 12 trunks Each of these devices requires two RTP over UDP ports You can configure up to ten separate ranges of ports UDP is used for T 38 Fax over UDP By default it uses the Range 20000 to 20255 You can configure up to ten separate ranges of ports Whil
542. the system you can apply restriction filters to e outgoing external lines as line restrictions e telephones as set restrictions e external lines on specific telephones as line set restrictions Restriction filters can also be specified in Restrictions service for times when the system is operating according to a schedule Dialed digits must pass both the line restrictions and the set restrictions The line per set line set restriction overrides the line restriction and set restriction Networking Configuration Guide 416 Chapter 52 Call security and remote access Notes about restriction filters A restriction filter is a group of restrictions and overrides that specify the external numbers or feature codes that cannot be dialed from a telephone or on a line The restriction filters setting allows you to assign restrictions in one step as a single package of dialing sequences that are not permitted In addition to restricting telephone numbers you can prevent people from entering dialing sequences used by the central office the public network to deliver special services and features Some of these features provide the caller with dial tone after they have entered the special code which often uses or therefore users have an opportunity to bypass restrictions To prevent this from happening you can create filters that block these special codes You create a filter by defining the dialing sequences that are denied There
543. the voice stream at a rate of 64 kbps kilo bits per second and is the Codec to use for maximum voice quality Choose the G 711 Codec with the companding law alaw or ulaw that matches your system requirements e The G 729 Codec samples the voice stream at 8 kbps The voice quality is slightly lower using a G 729 but it reduces network traffic by approximately 80 The G 723 Codec should be used only with third party devices that do not support G 729 or G 711 Networking Configuration Guide 366 Chapter 42 VoIP overview Codecs with Silence Suppression also referred to as VAD Voice Activity Detection make VAD active on the system which performs the same function as having silence suppression active Also refer to Silence suppression on page 529 Note You can only change the codec on a configured IP telephone if it is online to the BCM or if Keep DN Alive is enabled for an offline telephone Proactive Voice Quality Management PVQM Proactive Voice Quality Monitoring PVQM provides real time notification in case of voice over IP call quality degradation thus allowing you to monitor and manage calls on the network in real time As a result you can be aware of and respond to changing network conditions in a proactive way PVQM monitors a set of metrics which include e packet loss e inter arrival jitter e round trip delay e Listening R These metrics and supplementary information provide you with valuabl
544. tify the BCM characters MAC address lt read only gt This is the physical address of the BCM core not the integrated router IP Settings Obtain IP address lt check box gt If selected the BCM obtains IP address information dynamically from a DHCP sever If selected the IP address and subnet mask are read only If not selected enter the IP address and subnet mask of the BCM IP address lt read only gt The IP address of the BCM main unit IP subnet mask lt read only gt The subnet mask used by the BCM Networking Configuration Guide 458 Chapter 60 IP Subsystem Table 94 General Settings Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description Default gateway lt read only gt The gateway used by the BCM Note The gateway must be in the same domain and reachable from this IP address Modify button Click Modify to change IP settings DNS Settings DNS domain name lt alphanumeric gt A name for the local domain You must enter information in this field only if the Obtain IP address dynamically check box is not selected Primary DNS address lt IP address gt The IP address of the server that will provide DNS information to the system This information is generally provided by the ISP This field needs to be completed only if the Obtain IP address dynamically check box is not selected Provided by your ISP or IS department In small office settings a DNS may not be nec
545. time the modem connects Automatic Data Dial Out Service Automatic Dial Out Service allows IP communications with a remote server through the modem or ISDN interface The user can configure the BCM system to automatically set up a modem or ISDN connection with a remote PPP server for establishing a PPP link when it needs to deliver IP data packets Many services on the BCM have destination or source addresses which could be resolved by a route associated with the Auto Dial Out service The SNMP Trap delivery service Log download Backup download CDR records push Software Updates pulls and the Keycodes file upload are just examples of such services An administrator must be aware that the use of scheduled services over the modem may not give the expected results as a modem connection could fail for many different reasons and besides the SNMP v3 trap delivery those services have no retry capabilities The triggering IP data follows a configured IP route to access the PPP interface which then activates a dialing script to cause the modem to dial a remote number starts PPP negotiation establishes PPP link and delivers the data packets After a configurable period of inactivity over the PPP link the modem or ISDN link is disconnected Any new IP data packets will then trigger the connection again Please keep in mind the long distance charges when configuring the inactivity timeout Sometimes it is cheaper to keep a link up a bit longer than t
546. tion codes which allows you more flexibility in terms of dial strings routing schedules and routing restrictions Using Carrier codes A multi digit Carrier access code contains an Equal Access Identifier Code CAC followed by a Carrier Identification Code CIC The CIC identifies the carrier that handles the call The Carrier Access Code table stores the CAC digit pattern that you define for your region In most cases it is not necessary to change the default values About Carrier access codes Here are some general points about carrier access codes You can define up to five carrier codes e Two entries will be predefined in North America but you can remove these defaults e Each entry consists of an equal access identifier code prefix one to six digits and a carrier identification code length one digit 1 to 9 e Each entry is identified by the prefix digits themselves Configuring call routing Call routing allows you to define how calls are routed by your BCM system Call routing decides what path an outgoing call takes using the digits that are dialed It is sometimes called Automatic Route Selection ARS When you select an internal line and dial the system checks the numbers you enter against the routing tables If the number you dial starts with a destination code the system uses the line pool and dials out digits specified by the route assigned to that destination code and then dials the rest of the number tha
547. tion Guide NN40020 300 Refer to the Telephony Device Installation Guide NN40020 309 Enable T 38 lt check box gt Enabled The system supports T 38 fax over IP Disabled The system does not support T 38 fax over IP o Caution Operations note Fax tones that broadcast through a telephone speaker may disrupt calls at other telephones using VoIP trunks in the vicinity of the fax machine Here are some suggestions to minimize the possibility of your VoIP calls being dropped because of fax tone interference Locate fax machine away from other telephones Turn the speaker volume on the fax machine to the lowest level or off if that option is available SIP URI Map Use the SIP URI Map to configure the sub domain name associated with each SIP URI Session Initiated Protocol Uniform Resource Identifier These strings must be coordinated with the other nodes in the network Networking Configuration Guide 128 Chapter 9 Configuring telephony resources Figure 34 SIP URI Map tab Details for Module Internal Routing Table H323 Settings SIP Domain Names H323 Media Parameters SIP Settings SIP Media Parameters SIP URI Map 2 164 National e 164 Subscriber amp 184 Unknown national e164 subscriber e164 unknown e184 amp 154 Special special e164 Private UDP udp Private CDP cdp Private Special special privat
548. tion codes frame Table 49 Destination codes table Attribute Value Description Destination Code lt max 12 digits gt This number precedes a telephone number to tell the system where the call needs to be routed An A in the destination code represents an any character designation The A code is a wildcard Normal Route configured route gt This is the route that the system will use when the destination code is added to the dial string Absorbed Length All None 1 X This indicates how much of the destination code gets removed before the system sends the dial string to the network Wild Card 0 9 Included Excluded If you enter the wild card character A at the end of a Unavailable destination code then the following applies Included This number can be dialed as part of the destination code Excluded This number will not be accepted as part of a destination code string because it is already used in the system Unavailable This number is already defined in another destination code and cannot be used Actions Add Under the Destination Codes table click Add Enter the new destination code Click OK to save the route settings On the Destination Codes table select the fields beside the route you just created and modify them as required Test the route Bom Delete On the Destination Codes table select the destination code you want to delete In the Destination Codes p
549. tional Band Number 1 3 digits Private None Switched Digital None a For NI 2 do not program the Carrier Access Code for banded OUTWAT calls This call may be rejected When you select or change a PRI protocol the Service Type and Service ID fields automatically clear for each entry in the routing table for that PRI PRI routing protocols Table 42 lists the service DN type choices available for PRI lines Table 42 PRI Service type DN type values PRI Protocol Type Values MCDN DN Public Private Local National Special ETSI Euro DN None Overlap ETSI QSIG N A NI Service Public TIE Foreign Exchange FX OUTWATS DMS 100 Service Public Private TIE Foreign Exchange FX OUTWATS DMS 250 Service Public Private TIE Foreign Exchange FX OUTWATS 4ESS Service TIE OUTWATS Switched Digital SDS Using destination codes Destination codes allow you to control how the system interprets and routes dial strings from internal sources Destination codes are similar to line pool codes except that by using routes which attach dial strings and DN type designators to line pools and schedules you can control what digits the user has to dial and how the system routes the call out of the system including what numbers from the dial string get added or deleted to the route dialout Networking Configuration Guide 240 Chapter 24 Dialing plans Note Destination codes must not conflict with the following e par
550. to 99 CoS passwords must be unique To maintain the security of your system the following practices are recommended e Warn a person to whom you give the remote access number to keep the number confidential e Change CoS passwords often e Warn a person to whom you give a CoS password to memorize the password and not to write it down e Delete the CoS password of a person who leaves your company Security note Remote users can make long distance calls Remember that a remote user can make long distance calls that are charged to your company They can also access line pools and make page announcements in your office CoS examples Example Using the CoS feature to access a restricted line NN40020 603 Chapter 56 Configuring CoS passwords for remote access 447 A sales representative out of the office needs to make long distance calls to the European office Your system has a leased line to Europe with reduced transatlantic charges You provide the sales representative with a Class of Service password that gives access to the transatlantic line The sales representative can telephone into the system DISA DN from a hotel enter the Class of Service password and then use a destination code to access the leased transatlantic line to make calls To access the system over a public network 1 Dial the system remote access number 2 When you hear a stuttered dial tone enter your CoS password 3 Wait for the syste
551. to Called ID must be selected Refer to Capabilities tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Internal name and extension display If you want to be able to see the CLID of internal telephones you call ensure that Auto caller ID is enabled under Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt Capabilities and Preferences Refer to Capabilities and Preferences main tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Programming name display outgoing You can program name display for individual telephones On the DN record you can change the Name field from the DN to a more logical label Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs Note that only eight characters display Refer to Main panel tabs common fields in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 Programming outgoing number display OLI You can determine what number displays at the other end of an outgoing call if the outgoing line allows name display and the receiving telephone has number display active Note OLI is not supported on analog trunks The Outgoing Line Identification OLI can be set for each telephone for both private and public network calls The Private OLI is used for CLID over private networks It is usually set to the DN number as a default although this does not always occur if DN length changes have occurred Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt Line Access table Refer to
552. to each telephone The CO assigns a list of available numbers for each DID Direct Inward Dial line You can change your DN range to match these numbers and you use target lines to match each number with a DN NN40020 603 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview 35 Figure 2 DID system Target line mapped to DN 4005 CO DID line i e 769 with range of call numbers 4005 to 4020 Target line mapped to DN 4006 Target line mapped to DN 4007 Target line mapped to DN 4008 Incoming calls 1 DID trunks are assigned to be auto answer Note PRI lines are automatically set to auto answer All DNs are assigned target lines A caller dials a system code and a DN In the example shown above it might be 769 4006 The call comes into the trunk which answers and maps the call on the target line assigned to the matching received digits 5 The DN assigned to that target line rings You can assign unanswered or busy telephones to Call Forward to another DN such as a designated attendant or a voice mail system Basic telephony routing In a basic configuration simple access codes for example Line Pool Codes are used to access the PSTN network In a more complex configuration more advanced destination codes are required to access multiple PSTNS private network resources and remote nodes Access to these resources enables advanced features such as tandem routing N
553. to that of TI E amp M trunks connected to a private network The main differences are e A remote caller is on the public network dialing standard local or long distance telephone numbers e DISA cannot be administered to a T1 DID and PRI trunk You can program the dialed digits to match those of a specific target line DN the DISA DN or the Auto DN If you program the dialed digits to the DISA DN only the incoming calls that match the programmed DN will receive a DISA dial tone Incoming calls with other digits will route to a target line Remote access on DPNSS lines A remote caller can access a BCM system dial tone select a line pool that contains exchange lines or DPNSS lines then dial a number The procedure is identical to dialing an outside number from an extension in the local system The main features are Networking Configuration Guide 422 Chapter 52 Call security and remote access Calls coming from another switch to the BCM system are routed in two ways depending on the Answer mode that you program If the Answer mode is set to Manual and the line is assigned to ring at an extension the incoming call automatically rings at the assigned extension If Answer mode is set to Auto BCM automatically answers the incoming call Because most other DPNSS features are extension specific Nortel recommends that all DPNSS lines are configured as auto answer lines e The Page feature is available to both remote callers and calle
554. tocol should match all other systems on the network Status This field displays the current status of the gatekeeper 3 Suggested next steps Ensure router settings firewalls and system ports are set correctly to support IP traffic over the trunks Configuring lines on page 129 Configuring lines Target lines on page 141 Setting up VoIP trunks for fallback on page 391 Ensure private network dialing plan and access settings matches the rest of the private network Dialing plan Private network settings on page 281 Private networking Private networking Basic parameters on page 315 Assigning the VoIP line pools to system telephones Line Access Line Pool Access tab in the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 NN40020 603 Chapter 44 Configuring VoIP trunk gateways 385 Setting up remote gateways The following explains how to set up your system to place calls through VoIP trunks The system at the other end of the call must be set up to receive VoIP calls For information about this refer to Configuring a remote gateway H 323 trunks on page 385 Configuration note If the VoIP network has a gatekeeper you do not need to configure remote gateways as they are not used Configuring a remote gateway H 323 trunks The following explains how to configure the BCM to communicate with other BCMs and or other VoIP gateways such as Meridian IPT using H 323 trunks The remote gateway
555. ts are only sent when a speaker is talking When a voice is being transmitted it uses the full rate transmission rate Since the sender and receiver do not share the same channel the peak bandwidth requirement per channel is still equal to the full transmission rate The following figure shows the peak bandwidth requirements for one call on a full duplex link with silence suppression enabled The spare bandwidth made available by silence suppression is used for lower priority data applications that can tolerate increased delay and jitter Figure 150 One call on a full duplex link with silence suppression Conversation Hello Fred This is Susan Do you have a minute Tx a pare SSSSSSSSSSSSSISSSSNISIS T SESS Sur R TIT A M i CD C C Conversatio E t Paricwidin used Channel Link max oF som a RM IAA ANNLIN te E 7 Channel Link max 9 cs LE oS r aaaea Independent Tx arid Ax bandwidth not shared by half duplex calls Bandwidth available for data apps NN40020 603 Appendix B Silence suppression 533 When several calls are made over a full duplex link all calls share the same transmit path and they share the same receive path Since the calls are independent the peak bandwidth must account for the possibility that all speakers at one end of the link may talk at the same time Therefore the peak bandwidth for n calls is n the full transmission rate The following figure shows the peak bandwidth requirement
556. twork Access Code set to the value 9 e Each node must have destination codes that match the Private Network Access Code plus digits corresponding to calls terminating in the local PSTN For example if the Private Network Access Code is 9 the node in Ottawa would require a destination code of 91613 Similarly Toronto would require the following destination code 91416 NN40020 603 Chapter 32 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP 309 BCM module settings Table 60 lists the module settings that are required to set up the network described in Figure 98 Table 60 Module settings for MCDN network West End office Module programming DTM PRI Protocol SL 1 BchanSeq Ascend ClockSrc Primary East End office Module programming DTM PRI Protocol SL 1 BchanSeq Ascend ClockSrc Primary Networking Configuration Guide 310 Chapter 32 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP BCM dialing plan settings Table 61 lists the dialing plan settings that are required to set up the network described in the figure in the previous section Table 61 MCDN dialing plan settings West End office Dialing Plan Type programming CDP Private Network ID 1 Private DN Length 4 Public DN Length 7 East End office Dialing Plan Type programming CDP Private Network ID 1 Private DN Length Public DN Length 7 BCM routing information Table 62 lists the lines and routing information required to s
557. u must use the configuration guides for each of those products to set up your router For information about configuring the Router refer to the BCM 4 0a Integrated Router Configuration Guide NN40020 500 or the BCM 4 0e Integrated Router Configuration Guide NN40020 501 e Configure IP settings on the BCM For information about configuring IP settings on the BCM refer to LAN overview on page 449 e Configure DHCP on the BCM For information about configuring DHCP on the BCM refer to DHCP overview on page 475 NN40020 603 455 Chapter 60 IP Subsystem The IP Settings define the basic and advanced IP address and DNS configuration for the BCM main unit The panel tabs links provide a general description of each panel and definitions of each panel field Click one of the following links Panel tabs Main panel tabs General settings on page 455 Main panel tabs Internal subnets on page 458 Main panel tabs Dial out Static Routes on page 461 Main panel tabs General settings The General Settings panel displays the basic IP settings for the BCM main unit It contains e TP settings options on page 455 e DNS Settings options on page 456 e MTU option on page 456 IP settings options The IP settings options include settings for modifying the IP address information for the BCM Modifying IP address information Warning Modifying the IP address information for the BCM may cause the BCM to AN
558. ucdeeadcdumicakeass 401 To verify codecs in Element MEBUSF cesis tiowitabtlas extus eee EAR SERM P ERIS aaia 401 i 0 2 Too Mr 402 Port ranges OVOIVIOW isixaraazszgAREVRRSRARARARRETRRARARRARAA ATA 405 Port Ranges pan l uouassensaesc n na ydus ER rakiga nnee i 407 To add new port ranges in the RTP over UDP table eeeeeeseeeeses 408 To delete port ranges from the RTP over UDP table eeeeeeeeeeeeees 408 To modify am entry on the RTP over UDP Tablg u iei inrer sentita dnt etta uo Ed n er 409 To add new port ranges in the UDP Table Luise ceni prt tr emt rari Ren Ee ER tb 409 To delete port ranges from the RTP over UDP table eeeeeeeeeeeeees 409 To modiiy an entry onthe UDP table sioe m aer aE 410 Networking Configuration Guide 22 List of procedures Media gateways overview eere 411 Media Gateways panel leeeeeeeerren nnn 413 Call security and remote access eeseeeeeeees 415 Call Security Configuring Direct Inward System Access DISA 427 Call security Restriction filters 00 000 eee eee eee 433 To add EN Cu eB 435 Call security Remote access packages llesss 439 Configuring CoS passwords for remote access 443 Te aud OF MOY a CoS PASSION iain aired tadak kae bar s dai Rak Rr a data bed dA IRE 445
559. umber of trunk types which may require the remote caller to enter a password for DISA NN40020 603 Chapter 52 Call security and remote access 421 The system resources such as dialing capabilities line pool access and feature access that a remote user may access depends on the CoS password assigned to them See Defining CoS passwords on page 423 Note Callers remotely access the BCM remote features setting by gt pressing and the appropriate page code See the Device Configuration Guide NN40020 300 for a list of feature codes Remote access on loop start trunks Loop start trunks provide remote access to BCM from the public network They must be configured to be auto answer to provide remote system access A loop start trunk must have disconnect supervision if it is to operate in the auto answer mode T1 E amp M trunks always operate in disconnect supervised mode When a caller dials into the system on a line that has auto answer without DISA the system answers with system dial tone and no CoS password is required In this case the remote access package assigned to the line controls system capabilities When a caller dials in on a line that has auto answer with DISA the system answers with stuttered dial tone This is the prompt to enter a CoS password that determines which system capabilities are available to the caller Remote access on T1 DID and PRI trunks Remote system access on T1 DID trunks is similar
560. unk configuration The PRI protocol type can be either User Slave or Network Master The BRI protocol type can be extended with T T Network You can connect two BCMs through a BRI link S T refers to a far end which has an S interface Line in M1 terminology T T refers to a far end which has a T interface Trunk in M1 terminology In both cases User is the user or slave end of the connection Application level differences BRI Euro Protocol gives you the option to set the protocol type as S T user or T T user The default setting is S T user The S T user type provides lines in Pool X mode which already exist If the far end interface is BRI loop choose the S T user type The T T user type provides the lines in BlocX mode which is newly introduced If the far end interface is BRI trunk choose the T T user type Protocol level differences The following are the protocol level differences in the Kapsch enhancement The S T user type has the existing functionality which does not support PROGRESS MESSAGE e The T T user type supports PROGRESS MESSAGE e After the destination telephone starts to ring in the S T user BCM does not send a message to the network e After the tandem occurs in the T T user BCM sends a message to the network e In the S T user type the BRI call is answered prior to the tandem while in the T T user type the message is sent when the call is tandemed and answered only when the destination teleph
561. unt special considerations for IP telephony and private and public networking 5 f Have thresholds been set for desktop and soft client IP sets for voice quality monitoring with Proactive Voice Quality Management Networking Configuration Guide 468 Chapter 61 Data network prerequisites checklist VoIP trunks Answer the questions in Table 102 if you are configuring VoIP trunks Table 102 VoIP trunk provisioning Prerequisites Yes No 6 a Have you confirmed the remote gateway settings and access codes required 6 b Have you determined the preferred codecs required for each type of trunk and destination 6 c Have you set up line parameters determined line pools for H 323 trunks and set up destination codes Have you determined which system telephones will have access to these routes 6 d If you have not already assigned target lines have you defined how you are going to distribute them on your system 6 e Have you decided if you are going to employ the fallback feature If yes ensure that your routing and scheduling are set up Ensure that QoS is activated If either of these conditions is not met your H 323 trunks will not work correctly IP telephone records Answer the questions in Table 103 if you are installing i series telephones Table 103 IP telephone provisioning Prerequisites Yes No T a Are IP connections and IP addresses available for all
562. urces DSP resources are generally the only type of resources that affect performance on the BCM For more information on planning your application resources see Application Resources overview on page 73 Note Do not change these settings unless you want to restrict resources The application resources panel consists of three tables and a panel e Total Resources e Reserved Resources e Application Resource Reservations e Details for application Total Resources The total resources options show the maximum resources available for each type of resource Reserved Resources The Reserved Resources options show the resources currently reserved or in use Application Resource Reservations Use the Application Resource Reservations table allow you to set minimum and maximum values for telephony resources The table contains 10 columns 8 of which are read only For information about determining the appropriate values for each type of application see Setting values for application resources on page 74 Details for application The Details for Application panel changes whenever you select a different row from the Application Resource Reservations table The panel reflects the current minimum and maximum limits in instances where changes do not happen immediately Networking Configuration Guide 78 Chapter 5 Application Resources panel Figure 19 Application resources panel Application Resources Total
563. use of this feature is to make an important announcement when the recipient is on another call EI is implemented on the BCM using Intrusion protection level IPL IPL has four settings from None to High A telephone set has the ability to break in when the other telephone set has a lower IPL The default setting is None and a setting of High prevents intrusion Restrictions by telephone type e ATAZ2 ASM84 supported e I SDN not supported Networking Configuration Guide 334 Chapter 36 Private networking DPNSS network services UK only Programming IPL on a telephone To program IPL 1 Click Configuration Telephony Sets On the panel locate and click the Capabilities and Preferences tab Select the DN of the telephone set being programmed The Details subpanel for that DN appears in the lower portion of the panel Click the Capabilities tab Locate the Intrusion protection level and select the required option from the drop down menu Call offer Call Offer over DPNSS 1 allows a calling party to indicate to the wanted party that there is an incoming call available even though there is no answer button available to present the call on the telephone Restrictions by telephone type model 7000 telephone associated LED or LCD flashes and a tone is heard ATA2 ASM8 Call Offer is supported as a Camp On feature and a tone is heard ISDN not supported Note the following general conditions and re
564. ut on PRI BRI and VoIP trunks Use this for trunks where the connecting switch does not support outgoing line display Default is enabled Business name display Nortel recommends that you use a blank space for the last character of the Business name to act as a separator between the Business name and telephone name A maximum of eight characters is supported Alpha tagging for name display You can configure your system to display a caller name for incoming calls that provide number only CLID such as if the name service is not subscribed to or available in your area Note Lines that provide name and number CLID such as PRI lines use that name for display rather than the alpha tagging feature NN40020 603 Chapter 23 CLID Name display 213 Limitations e Due to system resource limitations only 30 telephones can be assigned to provide alpha tagging CLID per line e If the incoming number only partially matches the CLID match length no name displays e Ifthe number matches more than one speed dial and the matches have different names the telephone displays the name of the first match e ISDN devices do not support the alpha tagging feature Name display You can assign names to identify your company external lines target lines and your colleagues telephones During a call the name if programmed appears on the telephone display instead of on the external line number or internal telephone number of the
565. ute If none of these routes have available lines the call reverts to the Normal mode When the call switches from the preferred routing mode First Route Second Route Third Route to Normal mode the telephone display flashes an expensive route warning Note Overflow routing directs calls using alternate line pools A call can be affected by different line filters when it is handled by overflow routing VoIP trunking uses a similar process for setting up fallback from the VoIP trunk to a PSTN line This following deals with applying the programming in network situations e Dialing plan using public lines on page 254 Destination code numbering in a network on page 249 Networking Configuration Guide 254 Chapter 25 Dialing plan Routing configurations Dialing plan using public lines Figure 77 and Figure 78 provide examples of how you can record dialing plan information in a spreadsheet The example shows dialing plan information for a Toronto system in a network of three offices Toronto Halifax and Vancouver Without routing a BCM user in Toronto must to select a line pool and dial 1 902 585 3027 to reach extension 27 in Halifax 902 By creating a destination code of 30 and creating a route that uses the proper line pool and dial out number the user simply dials 3027 The same feature is available for Vancouver 604 In the column Dial out P stands for pause a host system signaling option Press FEA
566. utside 70 99 calling party name display 212 CallPilot DN length changes 224 271 calls making 399 originating in private network 326 within the system 70 99 camp on MCDN 301 carrier access codes code prefix 280 ID length 280 programming long distance access 242 256 Carrier Identification Code CIC See carrier access codes 234 CbC routing 344 CbC See Call by Call services 344 CDP coordinated dialing plan dialing plan 283 network dialing plan 398 private network ID 283 NN40020 603 553 MCDN 312 CDR call detail recording records push automatic 499 central administrator direct dial 269 channel characteristics ISDN 505 Channel Service Unit See CSU 108 channel disable enable a module port 87 Class of Service See CoS 283 CLID alphatagging 212 match 212 name display 212 outgoing name and number blocking 210 overview 214 CLIR 210 clock source ETSI QSIG networking 51 314 ISDN 544 programming 106 code prefix carrier access codes 280 comfort noise 533 compatibility modem 500 computer IP telephony prerequisites 468 conference DPNSS 1 feature 54 configure ISDN link parameters 507 modem link parameters 511 connect ISDN interface 504 modem 509 connecting to system remote dial in 522 Contact Center DN length change 224 271 control set 131 setting the schedule 399 conventions guide 28 button 28 buttons 28 command line 28 coordinated dialing plan See CDP 283 398 c
567. vate networking also provides access to tandem calling and toll bypass functionality to users calling into the system For example a PSTN user in Toronto could call a PSTN user in Ottawa and have the call routed over the private network connection from the Toronto office to the Ottawa office and then out to the PSTN from the Ottawa office This bypasses any long distance toll charges BCM to BCM to PSTN Calls are routed as private over the private network and then flagged as public to go out to the end node PSTN Meridian to BCM to PSTN Special call codes from the Meridian Local National and Special access codes need to be recognized by the BCM and correctly passed to the local PSTN NN40020 603 Chapter 29 Dialing plan Private network settings 285 Table 56 Private network values Sheet 2 of 2 Local access code code to access local PSTN MCDN connections only This number is prepended to an incoming M1 local dial string and designates the call as a Local call type typically 9 Refer to Using the MCDN access codes to tandem calls on page 257 National access code private access code 1 MCDN connections only This number is prepended to an incoming call marked as a long distance call and designates the call as a National type call private access code 1 Special access code lt code to access local PSTN gt MCDN connections only This number is prepended to an inco
568. veral systems are connected through a Meridian M1 and a terminating BCM system Each site has its own HLC and a range of DNs Figure 104 illustrates this example Calls are dialed and identified to the system as follows e To reach a telephone inside the Private Network at the BCM site the user dials the DN of choice e To reach a telephone inside the Private Network from another site the user dials HLC DN e To reach a telephone outside the Private Network the user dials an Access Code HLC DN Each node has its own destination dest codes which includes the appropriate access and HLC codes to route the call appropriately Table 71 shows examples of the construction of numbers used when dialing within the example network Note that 6 is the Private Access code Table 71 Calling numbers required for DPNSS network example Calling Site LOC HLC Calling Party Called Site Dialing String Called Party Number Number Site A 244 244 1111 Site B 6 668 2222 668 2222 Site B 668 668 2222 Site D 6 848 2222 848 2222 Site D 848 2222 Site D 2229 2229 Site C 496 496 3333 Public DN 9 563 3245 563 3245 NN40020 603 Chapter 36 Private networking DPNSS network services UK only 337 Figure 104 DPNSS networking Private Network m DPNSS Terminating BCM 50 Site C BCM 50 Site A Be DN 3333 LOC 244 L UE DPNSS DPNSS a Meridian M1 LOC 563 BCM 50 Site B BCM 50 Site D DN 2222 LO
569. vice providers e D channel packet service BRI only to support devices such as transaction terminals Transaction terminals are used to swipe credit or debit cards and transmit the information to a financial institution in data packets e Calling number identification appears on both BCM sets and ISDN terminal equipment with the capability to show the information e Multi Line hunt or DN hunting which switches a call to another ISDN line if the line usually used by the Network DN is busy BRI only e Subaddressing of terminal equipment TE on the same BRI loop However terminal equipment which supports sub addressing is not commonly available in North America BRI only Transmission of B channel packet data using nailed up trunks is not supported by BCM Contact your ISDN service provider for more information about these services and features For more information about ordering ISDN service in North America see Ordering ISDN PRI on page 545 and Ordering ISDN BRI on page 546 The terminal equipment TE connected to the BCM system can use some feature codes supported by the ISDN service provider Network name display This feature allows ISDN to deliver the Name information of the users to those who are involved in a call that is on a public or private network Your BCM system displays the name of an incoming call when the name is available from the service provider If the Calling Party Name has the status of privat
570. when BCM receives a Route Optimization request and initiates a new call to follow the optimal route If a telephone is active on a private line call the Route Optimization call being established may go on a public line This will cause a loss of privacy on that line Data calls are rejected by Route Optimization in order to ensure the data transmission is not affected Certain situations result in Route Optimization not taking place For example calls that are using Hold Parking or Camp features do not undergo Route Optimization and if a Route Optimization call undergoes Diversion the Route Optimization is dropped Setting Route Optimization System programming is not required for the feature when BCM is working as a terminating PBX system However BCM must have a private access code programmed that maps to a valid destination code or line pool code on DPNSS lines Further Allow Redirect must be selected Loop avoidance Errors in the configuration of a network may make it possible for a call to be misrouted and arrive at a PBX system through which it has already passed This would continue causing a loop which would eventually use up all of the available channels The Loop Avoidance service permits counting of DPNSS 1 transit PBXs and rejecting a call when the count exceeds a predetermined limit Networking Configuration Guide 60 Chapter 2 System telephony networking overview Private networking with DPNSS Internationa
571. who call in from outside the system to access system features Calls coming in over the Private network that are routing out of the system to remote systems or to the PSTN are also considered to be remote call ins To restrict the access remote callers have or to control outbound private network calls specify the appropriate filter for the line If you want different restrictions to apply at different times of the day or week you can set up the line restriction schedules to that effect The Normal schedule runs when no other schedule is specified or if fallback is used for VoIP trunks The default restrictions are shown in Table 10 Table 10 Default remote restrictions Schedule Restriction filter Schedule Restriction filter Normal 04 Schedule 4 00 Schedule 1 Night 31 Schedule 5 00 Schedule 2 32 Schedule 6 00 Evening Schedule 3 Lunch 33 Note The remote restriction restricts the numbers a user can dial on an incoming auto answer line If a remote user then selects a line to place an external call any filter used with the line still applies Voice message center If you subscribe to a voice message service outside your office you can indicate to the line with which voice message service to connect Voice message centers are defined as part of the system telephony global programming This is located in the Element Manager under Configuration Applications Voice Messaging Con
572. words for remote access Default filters The following provides a list of the default restriction filters for North America and other common profiles e Default filters for the North America profile on page 436 e Default filters for other common profiles on page 437 Default filters for the North America profile Filter 00 permits unrestricted dialing and cannot be changed Filter 01 is pre programmed with 10 restrictions and some associated overrides In Filter 01 Restriction 02 and Override 001 allow long distance toll free calls The dialing string 911 which is the number for emergency assistance in North America is included as both a restriction and an override in Filter 01 This arrangement prevents anyone from blocking calls for emergency assistance on lines or sets using the default filter Table 90 Default restriction filters Filter Restrictions denied Overrides 00 Unrestricted dialing 01 01 0 02 1 001 1800 002 1877 003 1888 03 911 001 911 04 411 05 976 06 1976 07 1AAA976 01 08 1900 09 1AAA900 10 5551212 02 99 No restrictions or exceptions programmed NN40020 603 Chapter 54 Call security Restriction filters 437 Note Default filters are loaded when the system is initialized A cold start restores the default filters Filters 02 03 and 04 although not preset with restrictions and overrides are the default filters in these pro
573. work och 275 Dialing plan Private network settings lees 281 Public networking Setting up basic systems 289 Public networking Tandem calls from private node 293 Private networking MCDN over PRI and VoIP 297 Te setup the MT ina BCM network iore irr Hd er ERE Cena Eta Vea Ha e ird Lee bends 312 To enable MCDN functionality over PRI fallback lines eeseeeeeeeeeeee 312 Private networking Basic parameters Lees 315 Private networking MCDN and ETSI network features 319 xen 1s f Hr Hn 320 or i dn 6e c HT NN E NR NN ER RES 320 WU SUNS Mr 320 To enable MCID and network diversion ccscccceeesseeeeesesneeeeeeseneeeeeessneeeeessenaeeeeenes 321 Private networking PRI and VoIP tandem networks 323 DE ss eh Tt BOMS m TN 328 NN40020 603 List of procedures 21 Private networking DPNSS network services UK only 331 iilo DTE 334 To set Loop avoidance during hardware configuration eeeeeeeeeees 335 Private networking Using destination codes 339 Private networking PRI Call by Call services 343 Configuring voice messaging seeeeeeeeennnee 347 Configuring centralized voice mail Lesser 351 TO conigur the NOSt Syste e
574. working 37 315 R receive threshold 385 398 Received overview 218 received call by call service network 42 343 ETSI QSIG 50 313 line configuration 132 MCDN 308 networking 40 339 received length programming 276 received number lengths auto DNs 232 272 DISA DNs 232 272 redirect to line programming 137 Registration TTL Local Gateway 384 Registration TTL Local gateway 121 regulatory information 2 related publications 29 remote system access 420 remote access CoS passwords 423 443 dial out 497 DPNSS 421 431 E amp M networking 340 from public network 421 430 IP trunks no tone 425 448 NN40020 603 565 ISDN 498 loop start trunks 421 430 modem 498 499 numbering overview 218 package CoS programming 444 PRI 422 432 PRI trunk 431 private auto DN 282 private DISA DN 283 private network 38 316 422 432 programming 444 public auto DN 276 public DISA DN 276 T1 DID trunk 421 430 T1 E and M trunks 421 430 using DISA 420 427 VoIP trunks 422 432 remote access VoIP trunks 371 372 remote capability MWI 106 300 remote dial in 522 remote dial in guidelines 522 remote gateway configuring 385 MCDN networking 311 network example 398 VoIP trunks 385 remote paging 422 431 remote restrictions dialing restrictions 418 remote access CoS 444 VolP trunks 422 432 remote system VoIP trunks 367 381 restriction filters default filters 417 436 lines 416 networ
575. x Handset User Guide XXXXX Digital Mobility Phone 7420 User Guide N0000635 Digital Mobility Phone 7430 7440 User Guide N0028550 T7406 Cordless Telephone User Card P0942259 IP Telephony IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 User Guide N0060623 IP Phone 2001 User Guide N0027313 IP Phone 2002 User Guide N0027300 IP Phone 2004 User Guide N0027284 IP Phone 2007 User Guide N0064498 BCM WLAN 2210 2211 2212 Handset User Guide N0009103 How to get Help This section explains how to get help for Nortel products and services Getting Help from the Nortel Web site The best source of support for Nortel products is the Nortel Support Web site http www nortel com support This site enables customers to e download software and related tools e download technical documents release notes and product bulletins Signup for automatic notification of new software and documentation e search the Support Web site and Nortel Knowledge Base open and manage technical support cases Getting Help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center If you have a Nortel support contract and cannot find the information you require on the Nortel Support Web site you can get help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center In North America call 1 800 4NORTEL 1 800 466 7835 Outside North America go to the Web site below and look up the telephone number that applies in your region Networking Configuration Guide 32
576. x gt Supports target lines in markets which use Overlap receiving signaling on the BRI trunks Overlap receiving must be configured for each BRI loop Overlap length lt 0 15 gt Set the local number length for loops to interfaces that receive overlap rather than enbloc digits This number is the total length of the called party number received This number is used to calculate the number of leading digits that need to be removed by the system Networking Configuration Guide 190 Chapter 19 BRI ISDN BRI loop properties Table 32 Details for Loop Sheet 2 of 2 Note This parameter appears only when Overlap receiving is enabled Example Public received number 4502303 Target line received numbers 303 Local number length 7 Public received number length 3 Thus the first four digits are deleted by the system Send Name check box If the switch allows outgoing name display select the Display check box ETSI QSIG only T loop SPIDS and network DNs These settings are only available for systems running a North American profile SPID numbers are supplied by the ISDN service provider Also refer to ISDN overview on page 535 Figure 60 illustrates the SPIDs tab Figure 60 SPIDs and network DNs T loops North America only Details for Loop 701 Settings SPIDs SPIDs SPID Digits Number of B channels 123 1 Table 33 defines the fields on t
577. x is selected the OLI of an internal telephone is forwarded over the VoIP trunk when a call is transferred to an external number over the private VoIP network If the box is cleared only the CLID of the transferred call is forwarded Send name display When selected the telephone name is sent with outgoing calls to the network Remote capability MWI This setting must coordinate with the functionality of the remote system hosting the remote voice mail Call Signaling Determine how the calls are delivered over the network Direct call signaling information is passed directly between endpoints Note You will need to set up remote gateways Setting up remote gateways on page 385 Gatekeeper Resolved all call signaling occurs directly between H 323 endpoints This means that the gatekeeper resolves the phone numbers into IP addresses but the gatekeeper is not involved in call signaling Networking Configuration Guide 384 Chapter 44 Configuring VoIP trunk gateways Gatekeeper Routed uses a gatekeeper for call setup and control In this method call signaling is directed through the gatekeeper Gatekeeper Routed no RAS Use this setting for a NetCentrex gatekeeper With this setting the system routes all calls through the gatekeeper but does not use any of the gatekeeper Registration and Admission Services RAS Refer to Using CS 1000 as a gatekeeper on page 389 for specific information about con
578. y on the line you can determine if remote access prompts with DISA or allows auto answering This determines the Public Private Auto DN and Public Private DISA DN settings which are set under Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Public Network and Private Network These numbers will have the same first number as you specified in the Start DN and be of the same length Remote callers dial the system public or private access number and then dial either the Private Public Auto DN or Private Public DISA DN as determined by the line setup Variable Example or default settings Private Auto DN 2XX NN40020 603 Chapter 24 Dialing plans 219 Public Auto DN 2XX Private DISA DN 2XX Public DISA DN 2XX Incoming calls The Private Dialing Plan provides the special codes that identify the system to calls coming over private PSTN or VoIP trunks Calls that do not match the private dialing plan information are not accepted by the system Variable Example or default settings Private network ID Number that identifies the system as part of the private network Location code UDP networks Private DN length DPNSS systems only Calls coming in over private networks or PRI BRI termination target lines can be set up for each telephone or group of telephones to which the calls are directed As with other incoming calls these calls can have a public or private call type that matches to a public or private rece

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Model: CQ-VW100U - Panasonic Canada  With FLEXI-GUARD® Installation, Care & Use Manual Manual de  Manual de usuario de PrEBi  LDM41/42 - OEM International AB  Actiheart Guide to Getting Started  仕 様 オ プ シ ョ ン 2003  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file